Garmin | Cirrus Perspective SR22T | Garmin Cirrus Perspective SR22T Cirrus Perspective Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T

Garmin Cirrus Perspective  SR22T Cirrus Perspective  Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
COPYRIGHTS
Copyright© 2017 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
This manual reflects the operation of System Software version 2647.M0 or later for the Cirrus
Perspective+ by Garmin Integrated Avionics System. Where used, references to ‘SR2x’ are inclusive of the
SR20, SR22, and SR22T. Some differences in operation may be observed when comparing the
information in this manual to earlier or later software versions. Always refer to the FAA approved
Airplane Flight Manual for a description of systems, limitations and procedures.
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road Xizhi District,
New Taipei City, Taiwan
Contact Garmin Product Support at www.flygarmin.com.
For warranty information refer to www.flygarmin.com.
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted,
disseminated, downloaded or stored in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express
written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download a single copy of this
manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be
viewed for personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must
contain the complete text of this copyright notice and provided further that any unauthorized
commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin®, G1000® NXi, WATCH®, FliteCharts®, and SafeTaxi® are registered trademarks of
Garmin International, Inc. or its subsidiaries. Garmin ESP™, Garmin SVT™, SurfaceWatch™, and
Connext™ are trademarks of Garmin International, Inc. or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not
be used without the express permission of Garmin.
Perspective+ is a registered trademark of Cirrus Design Corporation; Stormscope® is a registered
trademark of L-3 Communications;. AC-U-KWIK® is a registered trademark of Penton Business Media
Inc. NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc. Wi-Fi® is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi
Alliance. SiriusXM Weather and SiriusXM Satellite Radio are provided by SiriusXM Satellite Radio, Inc.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by Garmin is under license.
AOPA Membership Publications, Inc. and its related organizations (hereinafter collectively “AOPA”)
expressly disclaim all warranties, with respect to the AOPA information included in this data, express or
implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a
particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AOPA does not warrant or make any
representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Under no circumstances including
negligence, shall AOPA be liable for any incidental, special or consequential damages that result from the
use or inability to use the software or related documentation, even if AOPA or an AOPA authorized
representative has been advised of the possibility of such damages. User agrees not to sue AOPA and, to
the maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AOPA from any causes of action,
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
i
COPYRIGHTS
claims or losses related to any actual or alleged inaccuracies in the information. Some jurisdictions do
not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential
damages so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.
AC-U-KWIK and its related organizations (hereafter collectively “AC-U-KWIK Organizations”)
expressly disclaim all warranties with respect to the AC-U-KWIK information included in this data,
express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness
for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AC-U-KWIK Organizations do not
warrant or make any representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Licensee agrees not
to sue AC-U-KWIK Organizations and, to the maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold
harmless AC-U-KWIK Organizations from any cause of action, claims or losses related to any actual or
alleged inaccuracies in the information arising out of Garmin’s use of the information in the datasets.
Some jurisdictions do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for
incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to licensee.
Printed in the U.S.A.
ii
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
WARNING, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Do not use terrain avoidance displays as the sole source of information for
maintaining separation from terrain and obstacles. Garmin obtains terrain and obstacle data
from third party sources and cannot independently verify the accuracy of the information.
WARNING: Always refer to current aeronautical charts and NOTAMs for verification of
displayed aeronautical information. Displayed aeronautical data may not incorporate the
latest NOTAM information.
WARNING: Do not use geometric altitude for compliance with air traffic control altitude
requirements. The primary barometric altimeter must be used for compliance with all air
traffic control altitude regulations, requirements, instructions, and clearances.
WARNING: Do not use basemap information (land and water data) as the sole means of
navigation. Basemap data is intended only to supplement other approved navigation data
sources and should be considered only an aid to enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all
of the traffic within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception,
and/or inaccurate information from aircraft or ground stations, traffic may be present that is
not represented on the display.
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around
areas of hazardous weather. Information contained within data link weather products may
not accurately depict current weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of
the weather information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays
inherent in gathering and processing weather data for data link transmission, the weather
information shown by the data link weather product may be older than the indicated
weather product age.
WARNING: The displayed minimum safe altitude (MSAs) are only advisory in nature and
should not be relied upon as the sole source of obstacle and terrain avoidance information.
Always refer to current aeronautical charts for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.
WARNING: Always obtain qualified instruction prior to operational use of this equipment.
WARNING: Do not use GPS to navigate to any active waypoint identified as a ‘NON WGS84
WPT’ by a system message. ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ waypoints are derived from an unknown
map reference datum that may be incompatible with the map reference datum used by GPS
(known as WGS84) and may be positioned in error as displayed.
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
i
WARNING, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: When using the autopilot to fly an approach with vertical guidance, the
autopilot will not level the aircraft at the MDA/DH even if the MDA/DH is set in the altitude
preselect.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance
maneuvering. The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories
and does not under any circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see
and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Because of variation in the earth’s magnetic field, do not rely on the accuracy of
attitude and heading indications in the following geographic areas: North of 72° North
latitude at all longitudes; South of 70° South latitude at all longitudes; North of 65° North
latitude between longitude 75° W and 120° W. (Northern Canada); North of 70° North
latitude between longitude 70° W and 128° W. (Northern Canada); North of 70° North
latitude between longitude 85° E and 114° E. (Northern Russia); South of 55° South latitude
between longitude 120° E and 165° E. (Region south of Australia and New Zealand).
WARNING: Do not rely on information from a lightning detection system display as the sole
basis for hazardous weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may cause the
system to display inaccurate or incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the
lightning detection system manufacturer for detailed information about the system.
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and
traffic avoidance. Garmin SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may
not provide either the accuracy or reliability upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan
maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
WARNING: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the Garmin SVT
display or may appear as a partial symbol.
WARNING: Do not use the Garmin SVT runway depiction as the sole means for determining
the proximity of the aircraft to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path
angle during landing.
WARNING: Do not operate the weather radar in a transmitting mode when personnel or
objects are within the MPEL boundary.
WARNING: Always position the weather radar gain setting to Calibrated for viewing the
actual intensity of precipitation. Changing the gain in weather mode causes precipitation
intensity to be displayed as a color not representative of the true intensity.
ii
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
WARNING, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Do not use TAWS information for primary terrain or obstacle avoidance. TAWS is
intended only to enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Do not use SurfaceWatch™ information as the primary method of flight
guidance during airborne or ground operations. SurfaceWatch does not have NOTAM or ATIS
information regarding the current active runway, condition, or information about the position
of hold lines.
WARNING: Do not use a QFE altimeter setting with this system. System functions will not
operate properly with a QFE altimeter setting. Use only a QNH altimeter setting for height
above mean sea level, or the standard pressure setting, as applicable.
CAUTION: Do not clean display surfaces with abrasive cloths or cleaners containing
ammonia. They will harm the anti-reflective coating.
CAUTION: Repairs should only be made by an authorized Garmin service center.
Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty and affect the
airworthiness of the aircraft.
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
information. Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service
Stations or Air Traffic Control.
NOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen images of the
system panel and displays, are subject to change and may not reflect the most current system
and aviation databases. Depictions of equipment may differ slightly from the actual
equipment.
NOTE: The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely
responsible for its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS system is subject to changes which
could affect the accuracy and performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the system
utilize GPS as a precision electronic NAVigation AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with all
NAVAIDs, information presented by the system can be misused or misinterpreted and,
therefore, become unsafe.
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
iii
WARNING, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
NOTE: Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars can cause an
intermittent loss of attitude and heading displays while the aircraft is on the ground. Moving
the aircraft more than 100 yards away from the source of the interference should alleviate
the condition.
NOTE: Use of polarized eyewear may cause the flight displays to appear dim or blank.
NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being
provided in accordance with California’s Proposition 65. If you have any questions or would
like additional information, please refer to our web site at www.garmin.com/prop65.
NOTE: Operating the system in the vicinity of metal buildings, metal structures, or
electromagnetic fields can cause sensor differences that may result in nuisance miscompare
annunciations during start up, shut down, or while taxiing. If one or more of the sensed
values are unavailable, the annunciation indicates no comparison is possible.
NOTE: The system responds to a terminal procedure based on data coded within that
procedure in the Navigation Database. Differences in system operation may be observed
among similar types of procedures due to differences in the Navigation Database coding
specific to each procedure.
NOTE: The FAA has asked Garmin to remind pilots who fly with Garmin database-dependent
avionics of the following:
• It is the pilot’s responsibility to remain familiar with all FAA regulatory and advisory
guidance and information related to the use of databases in the National Airspace System.
• Garmin equipment will only recognize and use databases that are obtained from Garmin or
Jeppesen. Databases obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen that have a Type 2 Letter of
Authorization (LOA) from the FAA are assured compliance with all data quality
requirements (DQRs). A copy of the Type 2 LOA is available for each applicable database
and can be viewed at http://fly.garmin.com by selecting ‘Aviation Database Declarations.’
• Use of a current Garmin or Jeppesen database in your Garmin equipment is required for
compliance with established FAA regulatory guidance, but does not constitute
authorization to fly any and all terminal procedures that may be presented by the system. It
is the pilot’s responsibility to operate in accordance with established AFM(S) and regulatory
guidance or limitations as applicable to the pilot, the aircraft, and installed equipment.
NOTE: The pilot/operator must review and be familiar with Garmin’s database exclusion list
as discussed in SAIB CE-14-04 to determine what data may be incomplete. The database
exclusion list can be viewed at www.flygarmin.com by selecting ‘Database Exclusions List.’
iv
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
WARNING, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
NOTE: The pilot/operator must have access to Garmin and Jeppesen database alerts and
consider their impact on the intended aircraft operation. The database alerts can be viewed
at www.flygarmin.com by selecting ‘Aviation Database Alerts.’
NOTE: If the pilot/operator wants or needs to adjust the database, contact Garmin Product
Support.
NOTE: Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database
information. These discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure;
incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles and fixes; or any other displayed item used for
navigation or communication in the air or on the ground. Go to FlyGarmin.com and select
‘Aviation Data Error Report’.
NOTE: The system supports approval of AC 120-76C Hardware Class 3, Software Type B
Electronic Flight Bag (EFB) electronic aeronautical chart applications. Possible additional
requirements may make a secondary source (traditional paper or additional electronic display)
necessary onboard the aircraft. If the secondary source is a Portable Electronic Device (PED),
its use must be consistent with guidance in AC 120-76C.
NOTE: Terrain and obstacle alerting is not available north of 89º North latitude and south of
89º South latitude. This is due to limitations present within the Terrain database and the
system’s ability to process the data representing the affected areas.
NOTE: When using Stormscope, there are several atmospheric phenomena in addition to
nearby thunderstorms that can cause isolated discharge points in the strike display mode.
However, clusters of two or more discharge points in the strike display mode do indicate
thunderstorm activity if these points reappear after the screen has been cleared.
NOTE: Operate G1000NXi system power through at least one cycle in a period of four days
of continuous operation to avoid an autonomous system reboot.
NOTE: The purpose of this Cockpit Reference Guide is to provide the pilot a resource with
which to find operating instructions on the major features of the system more easily. It is not
intended to be a comprehensive operating guide. Complete operating procedures for the
system are found in the Pilot’s Guide for this aircraft.
NOTE: The navigation databases used in Garmin navigation systems contain Special
Procedures. Prior to flying these procedures, pilots must have specific FAA authorization,
training, and possession of the corresponding current, and legitimately-sourced chart
(approach plate, etc.). Inclusion of the Special Procedure in the navigation database DOES
NOT imply specific FAA authorization to fly the procedure.
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
v
WARNING, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
BLANK PAGE
vi
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
BY USING THE DEVICE, COMPONENT OR SYSTEM MANUFACTURED OR SOLD BY GARMIN
(“THE GARMIN PRODUCT”), YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF
THE FOLLOWING SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT. PLEASE READ THIS AGREEMENT
CAREFULLY. Garmin Ltd. and its subsidiaries (“Garmin”) grants you a limited license to use the
software embedded in the Garmin Product (the “Software”) in binary executable form in the normal
operation of the Garmin Product. Title, ownership rights, and intellectual property rights in and to the
Software remain with Garmin and/or its third-party providers. You acknowledge that the Software is
the property of Garmin and/or its third-party providers and is protected under the United States of
America copyright laws and international copyright treaties. You further acknowledge that the
structure, organization, and code of the Software are valuable trade secrets of Garmin and/or its thirdparty providers and that the Software in source code form remains a valuable trade secret of Garmin
and/or its third-party providers. You agree not to reproduce, decompile, disassemble, modify, reverse
assemble, reverse engineer, or reduce to human readable form the Software or any part thereof or
create any derivative works based on the Software. You agree not to export or re-export the Software to
any country in violation of the export control laws of the United States of America.
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
i
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
BLANK PAGE
ii
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Record of Revisions
Part Number
Revision
Date
Page
Range
190–02183-01
A
12/12/17
All
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Description
Production Release
Added Bluetooth
Added WireAware
Added other GDU 20.70 parameters
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
i
RECORD OF REVISIONS
BLANK PAGE
ii
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Wind Data................................................
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1 System Description............................
Line Replaceable Units (LRU).....................
1.2 System Controls.................................
PFD/MFD Controls ...................................
Display Controller.....................................
Secure Digital Cards..................................
1
1
4
4
5
8
1.3 System Operation.............................. 10
System Power-up......................................
Normal Operation.....................................
Reversionary Mode...................................
System Annunciations...............................
System Status...........................................
ADAHRS Operation...................................
GPS Receiver Operation............................
10
11
11
12
14
15
17
1.4 Accessing System Functionality........ 24
Softkey Function.......................................
Menus......................................................
MFD Page Groups.....................................
Split Screen Functionality..........................
System Settings........................................
System Utilities.........................................
24
33
33
37
39
49
1.5 Display Backlighting.......................... 54
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 Overview............................................ 57
2.2 Flight Instruments.............................. 60
86
2.4 PFD Annunciations and Alerting
Functions............................................ 87
Altitude Alerting.......................................
Low Altitude Annunciation.......................
Marker Beacon Annunciations..................
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision
Height Alerting.........................................
87
87
88
88
2.5 Garmin SVT......................................... 90
Garmin SVT (Synthetic Vision Technology).
SVT Operation..........................................
SVT Features.............................................
90
91
93
2.6 Abnormal Operations........................104
Abnormal GPS Conditions........................
Comparator Annunciations.......................
Reversionary Sensor Annunciations...........
SVT Troubleshooting.................................
SVT in Reversionary Mode.........................
Unusual Attitudes.....................................
SVT Unusual Attitudes..............................
104
105
106
106
107
107
108
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.1 Engine Indication System (EIS)
Display................................................110
3.2 Engine Page........................................114
Fuel Calculations....................................... 118
TKS Flight into Known Icing (FIKI) Anti-Ice
System...................................................... 119
60
61
63
66
66
69
70
71
75
76
78
84
3.3 Leaning Assist Mode..........................124
3.4 Reversionary Mode............................125
2.3 Supplemental Flight Data.................. 85
4.3 NAV Operation...................................144
Attitude Indicator.....................................
Airspeed Indicator.....................................
Altimeter..................................................
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI).....................
Vertical Deviation......................................
Vertical Navigation (VNV) Indications.........
Angle of Attack (AOA) Indicator...............
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)............
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)...............
Turn Rate Indicator ..................................
GPS CDI Scaling........................................
DME Information Window........................
Generic Timer...........................................
Temperature Displays................................
190–02183–01 Rev. A
85
85
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.1 Overview............................................129
Control Unit............................................. 135
4.2 COM Operation..................................137
COM Tuning Boxes...................................
COM Transceiver Manual Tuning...............
Auto-Tuning the COM Frequency..............
Auto-tuning from the MFD.......................
Frequency Spacing....................................
137
138
138
139
142
NAV Tuning Boxes..................................... 144
NAV Radio Selection and Activation.......... 145
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
NAV Receiver Manual Tuning....................
Auto-Tuning a NAV Frequency from the
MFD.........................................................
Auto-Tuning NAV Frequencies on
Approach Activation.................................
Marker Beacon Receiver............................
DME Tuning..............................................
145
146
148
149
150
4.4 Mode S Transponder..........................152
Transponder Controls................................
Transponder Mode Selection.....................
Entering a Transponder Code....................
Ident Function..........................................
152
153
155
156
4.5 Additional Audio Panel Operations..158
Power-Up.................................................
Mono/Stereo Headsets..............................
Speaker....................................................
Clearance Recorder and Player..................
Intercom...................................................
Split-COM Operation................................
Entertainment Inputs................................
3D Audio..................................................
Bluetooth® (GMA 350c Only)...................
158
158
158
158
159
162
162
163
165
4.6 Audio Panel Preflight Procedure.......167
4.7 Abnormal Operation..........................168
Stuck Microphone.................................... 168
COM Tuning Failure.................................. 168
Audio Panel Fail-Safe Operation................ 168
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Intersections.............................................
NDB..........................................................
VOR..........................................................
VRP..........................................................
User Waypoints.........................................
203
205
207
210
211
5.4 Airspaces.............................................218
5.5 Direct-To Navigation..........................223
5.6 Flight Planning...................................229
Flight Plan Creation..................................
Flight Plan Progress...................................
Flight Plan Import/Export...........................
Adding Airways to a Flight Plan................
Adding Procedures to a Stored Flight Plan.
Active Flight Plan......................................
Along Track Offsets...................................
Parallel Track.............................................
Flight Plan Views.......................................
Closest Point of FPL..................................
User-Defined Holding Patterns..................
230
232
235
246
248
258
261
262
265
268
268
5.7 Vertical Navigation............................274
Altitude Constraints.................................. 276
Vertical Situation Display (VSD)................. 280
5.8 Procedures..........................................285
Departures................................................ 287
Arrivals .................................................... 289
Approaches.............................................. 291
5.9 Weight Planning.................................304
Weight Warning Conditions...................... 306
5.1 Introduction........................................169
5.10 Trip Planning.......................................308
Navigation Status Box and Data Bar.......... 171
Trip Planning............................................. 308
5.2 Using Map Displays............................173
5.11 Abnormal Operation..........................313
Map Orientation.......................................
Map Range...............................................
Map Panning............................................
Measuring Bearing and Distance...............
Topography..............................................
Map Symbols............................................
Airways....................................................
Additional Navigation Map Items..............
Destination Airport Information................
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
173
176
178
181
182
184
189
191
194
5.3 Waypoints...........................................195
Airports.................................................... 196
iv
6.1 Overview............................................315
6.2 Data Link Weather.............................316
Activating Data Link Weather Services.......
Weather Product Age...............................
Displaying Data Link Weather Products.....
Weather Data Link (XM) Page Softkeys ....
CONNEXT Data Requests..........................
Weather Product Overview.......................
Reflectivity................................................
Precipitation Limitations............................
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
317
321
324
326
336
340
349
349
190–02183–01 Rev. A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FIS-B Weather Status................................ 373
Abnormal Operations for Garmin Connext
Weather................................................... 374
6.3 Stormscope.........................................377
Using The Stormscope Page...................... 377
Additional Stormscope Displays................ 379
Stormscope Abnormal Operations............ 380
6.4 Terrain Displays..................................381
Relative Terrain Symbology........................
Terrain Page..............................................
Additional Terrain Displays........................
Vertical Situation Display (VSD) Terrain......
Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B Alerting Displays.
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance...........
Inhibiting FLTA Alerting.............................
Additional TAWS-B Alerting......................
System Status...........................................
382
385
387
388
390
394
394
395
397
6.5 TAS Traffic...........................................399
Theory of Operation.................................
TAS Surveillance Volume and Symbology..
TA Alerting Conditions..............................
Traffic Alerts.............................................
Traffic Map Page.......................................
System Test...............................................
Operation.................................................
System Status...........................................
399
399
401
402
403
404
405
409
6.6 ADS-B Traffic.......................................411
ADS-B System Overview............................
ADS-B with TAS........................................
Conflict Situational Awareness and
Alerting....................................................
Airborne and Surface Applications............
Traffic Description.....................................
Operation.................................................
ADS-B System Status................................
411
413
413
415
416
417
422
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL
SYSTEM
7.1 AFCS Overview...................................427
AFCS CONTROLS...................................... 427
Additional AFCS Controls......................... 428
7.2 Flight Director Operation..................429
Flight Director Operation.......................... 429
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AFCS Status Box....................................... 429
Flight Director Modes............................... 430
Command Bars......................................... 430
7.3 AFCS Modes........................................431
Vertical Modes..........................................
Pitch Hold Mode (PIT)...............................
Selected Altitude Capture Mode (ALTS).....
Altitude Hold Mode..................................
Vertical Speed Mode.................................
Flight Level Change Mode........................
LATERAL MODES......................................
Roll Hold Mode (ROL)...............................
Heading Select Mode (HDG).....................
Navigation Modes (FMS, VOR, LOC)..........
Combination Modes (VNV, APR, NAV, BC,
GA)..........................................................
Vertical Navigation Modes (VPTH, ALTV) ...
Automatic Reversion to Pitch Hold Mode .
Non-Path Descents...................................
VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode (ALTV)
Approach Modes (GPS, VAPP, LOC)...........
Glidepath Mode (GP)................................
Glideslope Mode (GS)...............................
Backcourse Mode (BC)..............................
Takeoff (TO) and Go Around (GA) Modes..
Level Mode (LVL).......................................
431
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
437
438
439
440
443
443
443
444
445
446
447
448
448
7.4 Autopilot and Yaw Damper
Operation...........................................449
FLIGHT CONTROL.....................................
Pitch Axis and Trim....................................
Roll Axis....................................................
Yaw Axis...................................................
ENGAGEMENT..........................................
DISENGAGEMENT.....................................
449
449
450
450
450
450
7.5 AFCS Annunciations and Alerts........452
Underspeed Protection.............................
Altitude-Critical Modes (ALT, GS, GP, TO,
GA, FLC)...................................................
Non-Altitude Critical Modes (VS, VNAV) ...
Overspeed Protection................................
Level Mode (LVL).......................................
452
452
453
453
454
7.6 Abnormal Operation..........................455
ABNORMAL OPERATION........................... 455
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
v
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Reversionary Mode................................... 455
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.1 Overview............................................457
Overview.................................................. 457
8.2 SafeTaxi...............................................459
8.3 Charts..................................................461
CHARTS....................................................
FliteCharts................................................
ChartView................................................
Airport Directory.......................................
IFR/VFR CHARTS.......................................
461
462
463
472
472
8.4 Database Cycle Number and
Revisions.............................................476
8.5 WiFi Connections................................478
Predefined Text Messages......................... 509
Text Message Boxes.................................. 511
Managing Text Messages.......................... 513
8.11 Electronic Stability and Protection
(ESP)....................................................516
Electronic Stability & Protection (ESP™).....
Roll Engagement......................................
Pitch Engagement.....................................
Low Speed Protection...............................
High Airspeed Protection..........................
516
517
518
519
519
8.12 Hypoxia Recognition and Automatic
Descent Mode....................................520
WIFI CONNECTIONS................................. 478
Hypoxia Recognition with Automatic
Descent Mode ......................................... 520
Determining Pilot Alertness....................... 520
Automatic Descent Mode......................... 521
8.6 SiriusXM Radio Entertainment..........481
8.13 Electronic Checklists...........................523
Using SiriusXM Radio................................
Active Channel and Channel List...............
Category..................................................
Presets......................................................
Volume.....................................................
482
482
483
483
484
ELECTRONIC CHECKLISTS......................... 523
8.14 Auxiliary Video...................................525
8.7 Flight Data Logging...........................485
Enhanced Vision System (EVS) & Auxiliary
Video........................................................ 525
EVS Image Quality and Interpretation ....... 525
ZOOM/RANGE.......................................... 526
FLIGHT DATA LOGGING............................ 485
8.15 Position Reporting.............................528
8.8 Connext Setup....................................488
8.9 Surface Watch....................................490
8.16 Abnormal Operation..........................530
SurfaceWatch™........................................
Information Box........................................
Alerts........................................................
Takeoff Alerts...........................................
Landing Alerts..........................................
SurfaceWatch Setup.................................
490
490
491
492
493
494
8.10 Satellite Telephone and SMS
Messaging..........................................498
Telephone Communication.......................
Contacts...................................................
Incoming Calls..........................................
Outgoing Calls..........................................
Placing The Cockpit Phone on Hold..........
TEXT MESSAGING (SMS)...........................
Viewing a Text Message When Received...
Reply to a Text Message............................
Sending a Text Message............................
vi
498
499
501
501
504
504
505
507
507
POSITION REPORTING............................... 528
If Failure Still Exists.................................... 530
APPENDICES
Annunciations and Alerts........................ 533
CAS Message Prioritization.......................
Voice Alerts .............................................
System Message Annunciations................
System Messages......................................
534
541
542
543
Database Management............................ 565
Loading Updated Databases..................... 565
Magnetic Field Variation Database Update 573
Aviation Terms and Acronyms................. 575
Frequently Asked Questions....................595
Map Symbols............................................ 599
INDEX
Index......................................................... I-1
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System Overview
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The system consists of the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
Engine Indication System
LINE REPLACEABLE UNITS (LRU)
Flight Instruments
The Cirrus Perspective+ Integrated Avionics by Garmin presents flight instrumentation, position,
navigation, communication, and identification information to the pilot through large-format displays.
The Garmin Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) provides the flight director (FD), autopilot (AP),
yaw damper (YD - optional), and manual electric trim (MET) functions. Refer to the AFCS section for
more information.
GDU 1250A (2) or GDU 1050A (2) (Optional) – The system features two 12 (optional 10 inch),
high resolution LED backlit display units. The left display is configured as a Primary Flight Display
(PFD). The right display is configured as an Multi Function Display (MFD). The displays
communicate with each other through a High-speed Data Bus (HSDB) Ethernet connection. Each
display is also paired with an Ethernet connection to the Garmin Integrated Avionics unit (GIA).
Audio Panel and CNS
•
GIA 63W / GIA 64W (2) – The Integrated Avionics Units (IAU) function as the main
communication hub, linking all LRUs with the PFD. Each GIA contains a GPS Satellite-Based
Augmentation System (SBAS) receiver, VHF COM/NAV/GS receivers, a flight director and system
integration microprocessors. Each GIA is paired with the on-side display via an HSDB connection.
Flight Management
•
GTP 59 (1) (2 Optional) – Provides Outside Air Temperature (OAT) data to the on-side GSU.
•
GSU 75 (1) (2 Optional) – Processes data from the pitot/static system as well as the OAT probe to
provide pressure altitude, airspeed, vertical speed and OAT information to the Air Data Attitude
Heading Reference System (ADAHRS). This unit also provides aircraft attitude and heading
information via ARINC 429 to the PFD, MFD, and GIA. The GSU contains advanced sensors
(including accelerometers and rate sensors) and interfaces with the GMU to obtain magnetic field
information, and with the GIA to obtain GPS information. ADAHRS modes of operation are
discussed later in this document.
•
GEA 71 / GEA 71B (1) – Receives and processes signals from the engine and airframe sensors. This
unit communicates with both GIAs using an RS-485 digital interface.
•
GMU 44 (1) (2 Optional) – The Magnetometer measures local magnetic field and sends the data to
the GSU for processing to determine aircraft magnetic heading. This unit receives power directly
from the GSU and communicates with the it, using an RS-485 digital interface.
•
GMA 350 / 350c (1) – Integrates NAV/COM audio, intercom, telephone, and marker beacon
controls. The GMA 350c features an all-digital audio panel with Bluetooth® capability, and
communicates with both GIAs, using an RS-232 digital interface.
•
GCU 479 (1) – Provides the Flight Management System (FMS), navigation radio (NAV),
communication radio (COM), transponder (XPDR), and course (CRS) controls for the system
through an RS-232 digital interface.
•
GMC 707 (1) – Provides the controls for the Garmin AFCS through an RS-232 digital interface
allowing communication with the PFD and MFD.
Appendices
Index
1
Additional Features
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Automatic Flight Control
System
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
•
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
•
GTX 335R / 345R (1) – Solid-state transponders that provide Modes A, C, S and ADS-B capability.
The GTX 345R also provides ADS-B In/Out. The transponder can be controlled from the PFD. The
transponder communicates with the both GIAs through an RS-232 digital interface.
•
GSA 80 (1) (Optional), GSA 81 (2) (Optional), and GSM 86 (3) (Optional) – The GSA 80 servo is
used for the automatic control of yaw, while the GSA 81 servos are used for the automatic control of
pitch and roll. These units interface with each GIA. The GSM 86 servo gearbox is responsible for
transferring the output torque of the GSA 80/81 servo actuator to the mechanical flight-control
surface linkage.
•
GTA 82 (1) - The Pitch Trim Adapter takes input from the trim switches, GIA and GSA to control
the DC motor to drive the aircraft trim system.
•
GSR 56 (1) (Optional) – The Iridium Transceiver provides telephone voice communication by
means of pilot and copilot headsets. The unit can also send and receive data over the Iridium
satellite network. The GSR 56 is connected to the GIA with an RS-232 digital interface, with analog
connections to the audio panel.
•
Flight Stream 510 (1) (Optional) – Provides wireless Bluetooth connectivity between a compatible
tablet/mobile device and the avionics system. It is inserted into an MFD Secure Digital (SD) card slot.
•
GDL 69A SXM (1) (Optional) – The Data Link Satellite Radio Receiver provides weather
information to the MFD (and, indirectly, to the inset map of the PFD) as well as digital audio
entertainment. The unit communicates with the MFD via an HSDB connection. A subscription to the
SiriusXM Satellite Radio and/or SiriusXM Weather service is required to enable the GDL 69A SXM
capabilities.
•
GTS 800 (1) (Optional) – The GTS 800 provides real-time traffic information to the MFD (and,
indirectly, to the inset map of the PFD). The GTS 800 communicates with the MFD with an HSDB
connection. The GTS 800 also has an analog audio connection to the Audio Panel.
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Figure 1-1 shows interactions between the LRUs and optional equipment. The system is also capable
of interfacing with the following optional, non-Garmin equipment:
•
KN 63 DME
•
KR 87 ADF
•
CO Guardian Carbon monoxide detector
•
WX-500 Lightning Detection
Index
Appendices
NOTE: For information on non-Garmin equipment, consult the applicable optional interface
user’s guide. This document assumes that the reader is already familiar with the operation of
this additional equipment.
2
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System Overview
GMC 707
(AFCS
Controller)
GDL 69A SXM
(XM Weather/
Audio Datalink)
GSR 56
(Iridium
Transceiver)
GCU 479
(Display
Controller)
#2
GDU 1250A
or
GDU 1050A
(MFD)
Engine Indication System
GTS 800
(TAS)
Flight Instruments
#1
GDU 1250A
or
GDU 1050A
(PFD)
FS 510
Enhanced
Vision System
(SD Card
Bluetooth
Link)
GPS/SBAS
#2 GMU 44
(Magnetometer)
#1 GSU 75
(ADAHRS)
#2 GSU 75
(ADAHRS)
GTX 345R
Or
#2 GIA
64W/ 63W
(Integrated
Avionics
Unit)
VHF COM
GTX 335R
(Transponder)
GPS/SBAS
VOR/LOC
Flight
Director
#1 GSA 81 (Pitch)
Flight
Director
AFCS Mode
Logic
#2 GSA 81 (Roll)
AFCS Mode
Logic
Servo Logic
#3 GSA 80 (Yaw)
Servo Logic
G/S
Automatic Flight Control
System
GEA 71/ 71B
(Engine & Airframe
VOR/LOC
Hazard Avoidance
VHF COM
#1 GMU 44
(Magnetometer)
Flight Management
#1 GIA
64W/ 63W
(Integrated
Avionics
Unit)
Audio Panel and CNS
GMA 350/350c
(Audio Panel)
G/S
Additional Features
#4 GTA 82 (PTrim)
RDM
(Data Logger)
KN-63
(DME)
KR-87
(ADF)
Appendices
Standby Flight
Instruments
CO Guardian
Stormscope
Non-Garmin Equipment
Optional
Garmin Equipment
Optional
Non-Garmin Equipment
Index
Garmin Equipment
Figure 1-1 System (LRU Configuration)
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
3
1.2 SYSTEM CONTROLS
NOTE: The Audio Panel and AFCS controls are described in the Audio & CNS and AFCS
sections respectively.
The system controls are located on the PFD and MFD bezels and audio panel. The controls for the
PFD and MFD are discussed within the following pages of this section.
PFD/MFD CONTROLS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
PFD
2
Audio Panel and CNS
1
Flight Management
3
Hazard Avoidance
4
13
MFD
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
15
16
5
14
12
6
11
7
10
8
Appendices
9
Figure 1-2 PFD & MFD Controls
13
Index
Figure 1-2 PFD & MFD Controls
4
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System Overview
COM VOL/SQ Knob Controls COM audio volume level. Volume level is shown in the COM
frequency field as a percentage. Press to turn the COM automatic squelch On/Off in COM
mode.
3
Dual COM Knob Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for
MHz; small knob for kHz). Press to switch the cyan tuning arrow between COM1 and COM2.
4
BARO Knob Sets the altimeter barometric pressure. Press to enter standard pressure (29.92).
5
Joystick Changes the map range when rotated. Activates the map pointer when pressed.
Moves the Quick Select Box or cursor on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD when
joystick is moved left, right, up, or down.
6
MENU Key Displays a context-sensitive list of options. This list allows the user to access
additional features or make setting changes that relate to particular pages.
7
PROC Key Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs) and
approach procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan. If a flight plan is used, available procedures for
the departure and/or arrival airport are automatically suggested. These procedures can then
be loaded into the active flight plan. If a flight plan is not used, both the desired airport and
the desired procedure may be selected.
8
ENT Key Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
9
Dual FMS Knob Flight Management System Knob. Press the FMS Knob to turn the selection
cursor ON and OFF. When the cursor is ON, data may be entered in the applicable window by
turning the small and large knobs. The large knob moves the cursor on the page, while the
small knob selects individual characters for the highlighted cursor location.
10
CLR Key Erases information, cancels entries, or removes page menus.
11
FPL Key Displays the active Flight Plan Page for creating and editing the active flight plan.
12
Direct-to Key Allows the user to enter a destination waypoint and establish a direct course
to the selected destination (the destination is either specified by the identifier, chosen from
the active route, or taken from the map pointer position).
13
Bezel Keys Used to select the appropriate softkey to access additional functionality.
14
Dual NAV Knob Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz;
small knob for kHz). Press to switch the cyan tuning arrow between NAV1 and NAV2.
15
NAV VOL/ID Knob Controls NAV audio volume level. Press to toggle the Morse code
identifier audio ON and OFF. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a
percentage.
16
NAV Frequency Transfer Key Toggles the standby and active NAV frequencies.
Audio Panel and CNS
2
Engine Indication System
COM Frequency Transfer Key oggles the standby and active COM frequencies. Press and
hold this key for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5 MHz) automatically
into the active frequency field.
Flight Instruments
1
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
DISPLAY CONTROLLER
The additional controls for the PFD and MFD are located on the Display Controller (GCU 479). The
following list provides an overview of the controls located on the Display Controller:
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
5
System Overview
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
23
13
Engine Indication System
14
15
22
16
21
Audio Panel and CNS
17
18
20
Flight Management
19
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Figure 1-3 Display Controller (GCU 479)
6
1
CLR Key Erases information, cancels entries, or removes page menus.
2
Direct-to Key Activates the direct-to function and allows the user to enter a destination
waypoint and establish a direct course to the selected destination (specified by identifier,
chosen from the active route).
3
FPL Key Displays the active Flight Plan Page for creating and editing the active flight plan, or
for accessing stored flight plans.
4
Menu Key Displays a context-sensitive list of options for accessing additional features or
making setting changes.
5
PROC Key Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs), and
approach procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan or selected airport.
6
ENT Key Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
7
Dual FMS Knob Flight Management System Knob for the MFD. Press the FMS Knob to turn
the selection cursor ON and OFF. When the cursor is ON, data may be entered in the
applicable window by turning the small and large knobs. The large knob moves the cursor on
the page, while the small knob selects individual characters for the highlighted cursor
location.
8
COM Key Selects/deselects COM tuning mode for the COM/NAV/CRS/XPDR Knob. When
pressed, a blue annunciator above the key illuminates indicating COM tuning mode is active.
9
NAV Key Selects/deselects NAV tuning mode for the COM/NAV/CRS/XPDR Knob. When
pressed, a blue annunciator above the key illuminates indicating NAV tuning mode is active.
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
11
XPDR Key Selects/deselects XPDR mode for the COM/NAV/CRS/XPDR Knob. When
pressed, a blue annunciator above the key illuminates indicating XPDR mode is active.
12
COM/NAV/CRS/XPDR Knob Acts as follows:
•
NAV Tuning Mode: Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz;
small knob for kHz). Press to switch the cyan tuning arrow between NAV1 and NAV2.
•
CRS Mode: Sets the selected course on the HSI when the VOR1, VOR2, or OBS/SUSP mode is
selected. Pressing this knob centers the CDI on the currently selected VOR. The selected
course provides course reference to the flight director when operating in Navigation and
Approach modes.
•
XPDR Mode: Selects the transponder code.
14
IDENT Key Activates transponder IDENT function. Annunciator light above the key is lit while
Ident is active.
15
VOL Knob Controls COM/NAV audio volume level. Volume level is shown in the COM/NAV
frequency field as a percentage. Press to turn the COM automatic squelch On/Off in COM
mode, or NAV ID On/Off in NAV mode.
16
Plus-Minus (±) Key Toggles entry between the + and - characters.
17
BKSP Key Moves the cursor back one character space.
18
CLR Key Erases information, cancels entries, or removes page menus.
19
ENT Key Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
20
Alphabetic Keys Allow the user to enter data quickly, without having to select individual
characters with the FMS Knob. When the Quick Select Box is shown on the Active Flight Plan
Page on the MFD, alphanumeric keys can be used to enter data into the Quick Select Box
area.
Hazard Avoidance
Frequency Transfer Key (EMERG) Transfers between active and standby COM or NAV
tuning frequencies. Selects/deselects NAV tuning mode. Press and hold 2 seconds to tune the
emergency frequency (121.5 MHz) automatically into the active frequency field.
Flight Management
13
Audio Panel and CNS
COM Tuning Mode: Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for
MHz; small knob for kHz). Press to switch the cyan tuning arrow between COM1 and
COM2.
Engine Indication System
•
Flight Instruments
CRS Key Selects/deselects CRS mode for the COM/NAV/CRS/XPDR Knob. When pressed, a
blue annunciator above the key illuminates indicating CRS mode is active.
System Overview
10
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
7
System Overview
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
21
Numeric Keys
Blue Mode: Allow the user to enter numeric data quickly in COM, NAV, and XPDR fields. Blue
mode is enabled for the following conditions:
Flight Instruments
•
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
White Mode: Allow the user to enter numeric data quickly in FMS fields, without having to
select individual numbers with the FMS Knob. White mode is enabled for the following
conditions:
•
FMS cursor is active on any MFD page.
•
Map pointer is active on any MFD map.
•
Flight Plan page, Weight and Balance page, Fuel Initialization page, or Checklist page are
displayed.
22
Home Key Displays the Navigation Map Page.
23
Joystick Changes the map range when rotated. Activates the map pointer when pressed.
Moves the Quick Select Box or cursor on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD when
joystick is moved left, right, up, or down.
Flight Management
SECURE DIGITAL CARDS
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for instructions on updating the aviation databases.
NOTE: Ensure that the system is powered off before inserting the SD card.
The GDU data card slots use Secure Digital (SD) cards and are located on the top right portion of the
display bezels. Each display bezel is equipped with two SD card slots. SD cards are used system software
updates. Also, flight plans may be imported or exported from an SD card in the MFD.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
COM, NAV, or XPDR tuning mode is selected, and no white mode conditions are active.
PFD
Additional Features
MFD
Appendices
SD Card Slots
Index
Figure 1-4 PFD/MFD Display Bezel SD Card Slots
8
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System Overview
Inserting and Removing an SD card:
Flight Instruments
Insert the SD card in the SD card slot, pushing the card in until the spring latch
engages. The front of the card should remain flush with the face of the display bezel.
To remove, gently press on the SD card to release the spring latch and eject the card.
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
9
1.3 SYSTEM OPERATION
This section discusses powering up the system, normal and reversionary display operation, system
status, ADAHRS modes of operation, and GPS receiver operation.
SYSTEM POWER-UP
NOTE: See the Appendices
annunciations and alerts.
for
additional
information
regarding
system-specific
NOTE: See the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for specific procedures concerning avionics
power application and emergency power supply operation.
The system is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and receives power directly from electrical
busses. The PFD, MFD, and supporting sub-systems include both power-on and continuous built-in
test features that exercise the processor, RAM, ROM, and external inputs and outputs to provide safe
operation.
When powering up the system, test annunciations are displayed and key annunciator lights also
become momentarily illuminated on the audio panel and the display bezels. On the PFD, the ADAHRS
begins to initialize and an alignment message is displayed. All system annunciations should disappear
typically within one minute of power-up.
When the MFD powers up, the MFD Power-up Screen displays the following information:
•
System version and Airframe description
•
Basemap Land database version
•
Safe Taxi database name and effective dates
•
Terrain database name and version
•
Obstacle database name and effective dates
•
Navigation database name and effective dates
•
Airport Directory name and effective dates
•
FliteCharts/ChartView database information
•
IFR/VFR charts database information
•
Crew Profile
•
Copyright
•
Checklist File
Current database information includes the valid operating dates, cycle number and database type.
When this information has been reviewed for currency (to ensure that no databases have expired), the
pilot is prompted to continue.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
10
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System Overview
NORMAL OPERATION
PFD
MFD
Engine Indication System
In normal mode, the right portion of the MFD displays a full-color moving map with navigation
information, while the left portion of the MFD is dedicated to the Engine Indication System (EIS).
Flight Instruments
In normal mode, the PFD presents graphical flight instrumentation (attitude, heading, airspeed,
altitude and vertical speed), thereby replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster.
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Figure 1-5 Normal Operation
NOTE: The system alerts the pilot when backup paths are utilized by the LRUs. Refer to the
Appendices for further information regarding system-specific alerts.
11
Index
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Appendices
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Additional Features
Reversionary mode is a mode of operation in which all important flight information is presented
identically on at least one of the remaining displays. In Reversionary Mode, all essential flight
information from the PFD is combined with the EIS and presented on the operating display. As when the
PFD is operating normally, windows for flight planning, nearest airports, and procedures are available.
The Inset Map is moved to the right side of the display.
Should the connection between a PFD and the GIA functions become inoperative, the GIA can no
longer communicate with the PFD (refer to Figure 1-1). As a result, the NAV and COM functions
provided to the failed PFD or MFD by the GIA are flagged as invalid (amber “X”) on the remaining PFD.
The system reverts to backup paths for the ADAHRS, Engine/Airframe Unit, and Transponder, as
required. The change to backup paths is completely automated for all LRUs and no pilot action is
required.
Reversionary Mode may also be manually activated by pressing the red DISPLAY BACKUP Button.
Pressing this button again deactivates Reversionary Mode.
Automatic Flight Control
System
REVERSIONARY MODE
System Overview
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
NAV1 and COM1 (provided by the failed
PFD) Flagged Invalid
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
DISPLAY BACKUP Button
Manually Activates/Deactivates
Reversionary Mode on Both Displays
Figure 1-6 Reversionary Mode (Failed PFD)
NOTE: Upon power-up, certain windows remain invalid as system equipment begins to
initialize. All windows should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any window
continues to remain flagged, the system should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair
facility.
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red or amber “X” is typically displayed on windows
associated with the failed data. Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for additional
information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
Index
Appendices
NOTE: Refer to the POH for additional information regarding pilot responses to these
annunciations.
12
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System Overview
System Annunciation
Comment
ADAHRS is aligning.
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Display system is not receiving attitude information from the
ADAHRS.
ADAHRS calibration incomplete or configuration module failure.
Flight Management
Display system is not receiving airspeed input from the ADAHRS.
Audio Panel and CNS
GPS information is either not present or is invalid for navigation
use. Note that ADAHRS utilizes GPS inputs during normal
operation. ADAHRS operation may be degraded if GPS signals are
not present (see POH).
Hazard Avoidance
Display system is not receiving vertical speed input from the
ADAHRS.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Display system is not receiving valid heading input from the
ADAHRS or magnetometer.
Display system is not receiving valid OAT information from the
ADAHRS.
Appendices
Display system is not receiving valid ISA information from the
ADAHRS.
Additional Features
Display system is not receiving altitude input from the ADAHRS or
magnetometer.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
13
System Annunciation
Other Various Amber/Red X
Indications
Table 1-1 System Annunciations
Viewing LRU Information:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page.
2) To place the cursor in the ‘LRU Info’ Box,
Press the LRU Softkey.
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
A red or amber ‘X’ through any other display field (such as engine
instrumentation fields) indicates that the field is not receiving
valid data.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) With ‘Select LRU’ Window highlighted, press the ENT Key.
3) Use the FMS Knob to scroll through the box to view LRU status information.
SYSTEM STATUS
The System Status Page displays the status and software version numbers for all detected system
LRUs. Pertinent information on all system databases is also displayed. Active LRUs are indicated by
green check marks and failed LRUs are indicated by red “X”s. Failed LRUs should be noted and a
service center or Garmin dealer informed.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Comment
Display system is not receiving valid transponder information.
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
14
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System Overview
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Figure 1-7 Example System Status Page
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
The LRU and ARFRM Softkeys on the System Status Page select the applicable list (‘LRU
Information’ or ‘Airframe’ Window) through which the FMS Knob can be used to scroll information
within the selected window.
Pressing the MFD1 DB Softkey (label annunciator turns green indicting the softkey is selected)
places the cursor in the database window. Use the FMS Knob to scroll through database information
for the MFD. Pressing the softkey again will change the softkey label to PFD1 DB. PFD database
information is now displayed in the database window. Pressing the softkey a third time will change the
softkey label back to MFD1 DB. MFD database information is displayed again in the database window.
The STBY DB Softkey, when available on the System Status Page, makes the standby navigation
database become the active navigation database on the next power cycle. Refer to the Database
Management section in the Appendices for more information.
The ANN Test Softkey, when selected, causes an annunciation test tone to be played.
ADAHRS OPERATION
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
15
Index
In addition to using internal sensors, the ADAHRS uses GPS information, magnetic field data and air
data to assist in attitude/heading calculations. In normal mode, the ADAHRS relies upon GPS and
magnetic field measurements. If either of these external measurements is unavailable or invalid, the
ADAHRS uses air data information for attitude determination. Eight ADAHRS modes of operation are
available and depend upon the combination of available sensor inputs as shown in the following table.
Loss of air data, GPS, or magnetometer sensor inputs is communicated to the pilot by system
messages.
Flight Instruments
System Overview
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for specific ADAHRS system message information.
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
NOTE: Aggressive maneuvering while the ADAHRS is not operating normally can degrade
ADAHRS accuracy.
ADAHRS
Mode
GPS Data
Available
Magnetometer
Data Available
Air Data
Available
ADAHRS
Normal
Yes
Yes
Yes
ADAHRS no-Air
Data
Yes
Yes
No
ADAHRS noGPS
No
Yes
Yes
ADAHRS noGPS/no-Mag
No
No
Yes
ADAHRS noMag Data
Yes
No
Yes
ADAHRS noMag/no-Air
Data
Yes
No
No
ADAHRS coaston-gyros until
invalid
No
Yes
No
ADAHRS noMag/coast-ongyros until
invalid
No
Condition
Attitude
Indicator
Valid Pitch/Roll/
Heading.
Valid Pitch/Roll.
Heading will
coast-on-gyros
until it becomes
invalid.
Valid Pitch/Roll.
Invalid Heading.
Invalid Pitch/Roll/
Heading.
No
No
Index
Appendices
Table 1-2 ADAHRS Operation
16
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System Overview
GPS INPUT FAILURE
NOTE: In-flight initialization of ADAHRS, when operating without any valid source of GPS
data and at true air speed values greater than approximately 200 knots, is not guaranteed.
Under these rare conditions, it is possible for in-flight ADAHRS initialization to take an
indefinite amount of time which would result in an extended period of time where valid
ADAHRS outputs are unavailable.
Flight Instruments
The system provides two sources of GPS information. If a single GPS receiver fails, or if the
information provided from one of the GPS receivers is unreliable, the ADAHRS seamlessly transitions
to using the other GPS receiver. An alert message informs the pilot of the use of the backup GPS
path. If both GPS inputs fail, the ADAHRS continues to operate in reversionary No-GPS mode so
long as the air data and magnetometer inputs are available and valid.
Engine Indication System
A failure of the air data input has no effect on ADAHRS output while operating in normal mode. A
failure of the air data input while the ADAHRS is operating in reversionary No-GPS mode results in
invalid attitude and heading information on the PFD (as indicated by red “X” flags).
If the magnetometer input fails, the ADAHRS transitions to one of the reversionary NoMagnetometer modes and continues to output valid attitude information. However, if the aircraft is
airborne, the heading output on the PFD does become invalid (as indicated by a red “X”).
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Each GIA Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) contains a GPS receiver. Information collected by the
specified receiver (GPS1 for the #1 IAU or GPS2 for the #2 IAU) may be viewed on the ‘Aux - GPS
Status’ Page.
GPS1 provides information to the MFD and GPS2 provides data to the PFD. Internal system
checking is performed to ensure both GPS receivers are providing accurate data to the GDUs. In some
circumstances, both GPS receivers may be providing accurate data, but one receiver may be providing
a better GPS solution than the other receiver. In this case the GPS receiver producing the better
solution will be automatically coupled to both GDUs. “BOTH ON GPS 1” or “BOTH ON GPS 2” will
then be displayed in the Reversionary Sensor Window (see Appendix A) indicating which GPS receiver
is being used. Both GPS receivers are still functioning properly, but one receiver is performing better
than the other at that particular time.
These GPS sensor annunciations are most often seen after system power-up when one GPS receiver
has acquired satellites before the other, or one of the GPS receivers has not yet acquired a SBAS signal.
While the aircraft is on the ground, the SBAS signal may be blocked by obstructions causing one GPS
receiver to have difficulty acquiring a good signal. Also, while airborne, turning the aircraft may result
in one of the GPS receivers temporarily losing the SBAS signal.
If the sensor annunciation persists, check for a system failure message in the ‘Messages’ Window on
the PFD. If no failure message exists, check the GPS Status Page and compare the information for
GPS1 and GPS2. Discrepancies may indicate a problem.
Hazard Avoidance
GPS RECEIVER OPERATION
Flight Management
MAGNETOMETER FAILURE
Audio Panel and CNS
AIR DATA INPUT FAILURE
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
17
System Overview
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Viewing GPS receiver status information:
1) Use the large FMS Knob to select the Auxiliary Page Group (see Section 1.4 for
information on navigating MFD page groups).
Flight Instruments
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
Selecting the GPS receiver for which data may be reviewed:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
Engine Indication System
2) To change the selected GPS receiver:
Press the desired GPS Softkey.
Or:
Audio Panel and CNS
a) Press the MENU Key
b) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the receiver which is not selected and press the ENT
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Key.
18
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Satellite Signal
Information
System Overview
Satellite Constellation
Diagram
GPS Receiver
Status
Flight Instruments
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Satellite
Signal
Strength
Bars
Engine Indication System
RAIM
Availability
Prediction
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Figure 1-8 GPS Status Page
SATELLITE CONSTELLATION DIAGRAM
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
19
Index
This box provides information regarding signal status. The accuracy of the aircraft’s GPS fix is
calculated using Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU), Dilution of Precision (DOP), and horizontal
and vertical figures of merit (HFOM and VFOM). EPU is the radius of a circle centered on an
Appendices
SATELLITE STATUS
Additional Features
The GPS Status Page displays satellites currently in view at their respective positions on a sky view
diagram. The sky view is always in a north-up orientation, with the outer circle representing the
horizon, the inner circle representing 45° above the horizon, and the center point showing the
position directly overhead.
Each satellite is represented by an oval containing the Pseudo-random noise (PRN) number (i.e.,
satellite identification number). Satellites whose signals are currently being used are represented by
solid ovals.
System Overview
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
estimated horizontal position in which actual position has 95% probability of laying. EPU is a
statistical error indication and not an actual error measurement.
DOP measures satellite geometry quality (i.e., number of satellites received and where they are
relative to each other) on a range from 0.0 to 9.9, with lower numbers denoting better accuracy.
HFOM and VFOM, measures of horizontal and vertical position uncertainty, are the current 95%
confidence horizontal and vertical accuracy values reported by the GPS receiver.
The current calculated GPS position, time, altitude, ground speed, and track for the aircraft are
displayed below the satellite signal accuracy measurements.
GPS STATUS
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
The GPS solution type (ACQUIRING, 2D NAV, 2D DIFF NAV, 3D NAV, 3D DIFF NAV) for the
active GPS receiver (GPS1 or GPS2) is shown in the upper right of the GPS Status Page. When the
receiver is in the process of acquiring enough satellite signals for navigation, the receiver uses
satellite orbital data (collected continuously from the satellites) and last known position to determine
the satellites that should be in view. “Acquiring” is indicated as the solution until a sufficient number
of satellites have been acquired for computing a solution.
When the receiver is in the process of acquiring a 3D differential GPS solution, 3D NAV is
indicated as the solution until the 3D differential fix has finished acquisition. SBAS (Satellite-Based
Augmentation System) indicates “Inactive”. When acquisition is complete, the solution status
indicates 3D DIFF NAV and SBAS indicates “Active”.
RAIM PREDICTION
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
In most cases performing a RAIM prediction is not necessary. However, in some cases, the selected
approach may be outside the SBAS coverage area, and it may be necessary to perform a RAIM
prediction for the intended approach.
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) is a GPS receiver function that performs a
consistency check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows
the receiver to calculate a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nautical miles for
oceanic and enroute, 1.0 nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During
oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of flight, RAIM is available nearly 100% of the time.
The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a specified date and
time. RAIM computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival date and
time.
Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not
available. The system automatically monitors RAIM and warns with an alert message when it is not
available. If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does
not become active, as indicated by the messages, “Approach is not active” and “RAIM not available
from FAF to MAP”. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the missed approach procedure
must be flown.
Index
NOTE: The system RAIM prediction capability does not meet all RAIM prediction
requirements. Reference the RAIM/Fault Detection and Exclusion (FDE) Prediction Tool at
flygarmin.com as required.
20
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System Overview
Predicting RAIM availability at a selected waypoint:
1) Select the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
2) If necessary, press the RAIM Softkey.
Flight Instruments
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘Waypoint’ Field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window.
5) Enter the desired waypoint:
Or:
Audio Panel and CNS
a) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display the waypoint selection
Engine Indication System
Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired waypoint by identifier, facility, or city name and
press the ENT Key.
submenu.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan, Nearest, Recent, or
User Waypoints, if required.
Flight Management
c) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint. The system
automatically fills in the ‘Ident, Facility, City’ Field with the information for the
selected waypoint.
d) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
Hazard Avoidance
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
8) With the cursor highlighting ‘Compute RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM
availability is computed, one of the following is displayed:
•
‘Computing Availability’—RAIM calculation in progress
•
‘RAIM Available’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and
date
•
‘RAIM Not Available’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint,
time, and date
Additional Features
‘Compute RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date
combination
Automatic Flight Control
System
•
Predicting RAIM availability at present position:
Appendices
1) Select the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
2) If necessary, press the RAIM Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘Waypoint’ Field is highlighted.
4) Press the MENU Key.
Index
5) With ‘Set WPT to Present Position’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
21
System Overview
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
Flight Instruments
8) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
9) With the cursor highlighting ‘Compute RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
availability is computed, one of the following is displayed:
•
‘Compute RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date
combination
•
‘Computing Availability’—RAIM calculation in progress
•
‘RAIM Available’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and
date
•
‘RAIM Not Available’ is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and
date
SBAS SELECTION
Flight Management
In certain situations, such as when the aircraft is outside or on the fringe of the SBAS coverage
area, it may be desirable to disable EGNOS, WAAS or MSAS (although it is not recommended).
When disabled, the ‘SBAS’ Field in the ‘GPS Status’ Box indicates Disabled. There may be a small
delay for the ‘GPS Status’ Box to be updated upon WAAS and MSAS enabling/disabling.
Disabling SBAS:
Hazard Avoidance
1) Select the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page.
2) If necessary, press the SBAS Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘EGNOS’, ‘MSAS’ or
Automatic Flight Control
System
‘WAAS’.
4) Press the ENT Key to uncheck the box.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
GPS SATELLITE SIGNAL STRENGTHS
•
No bar—Receiver is looking for the indicated satellite
•
Hollow bar—Receiver has found the satellite and is collecting data
•
Cyan bar—Receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite signal can be used
•
Green bar—Satellite is being used for the GPS solution
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
The GPS Status Page can be helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels due to poor
satellite coverage or installation problems. As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal strength
bar is displayed for each satellite in view, with the appropriate satellite PRN number (01-32 or
120-138 for WAAS) below each bar. The progress of satellite acquisition is shown in three stages, as
indicated by signal bar appearance:
22
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Checkered bar—Receiver has excluded the satellite (Fault Detection and Exclusion)
•
“D” indication—Denotes the satellite is being used as part of the differential computations
System Overview
•
Flight Instruments
Each satellite has a 30-second data transmission that must be collected (signal strength bar is
hollow) before the satellite may be used for navigation (signal strength bar becomes solid).
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
23
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.4 ACCESSING SYSTEM FUNCTIONALITY
SOFTKEY FUNCTION
Selection softkeys are located along the bottom of the displays. The softkeys shown depend on the
softkey level previously selected. The bezel keys below the softkey labels can be used to select the
appropriate softkey. There are three types of softkeys. One selects a simple on/off state, indicated by an
annunciator on the softkey label displayed as green (on) or gray (off). The next type of softkey selects
among several options, indicated by the softkey label changing (with the exception of the Map Range
keys) to reflect the name of the chosen option. The last type of softkey, when pressed displays another
set of softkeys available for the selected function. Also, these softkeys revert to the previous level after
45 seconds of inactivity. When a softkey function is disabled, the softkey label is subdued (dimmed).
Softkey On Softkey Subdued
Softkey Names
(displayed)
Bezel-Mounted
Softkeys (press)
Flight Management
Figure 1-9 Softkeys (First-Level PFD Configuration)
PFD SOFTKEYS
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
The PFD softkeys provide control over the PFD display and some flight management functions,
including GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic, and weather (optional). Each softkey sublevel has a Back
Softkey which can be pressed to return to the previous level. If new messages remain after
acknowledgement, the Alerts Softkey will show “Message” in black text with a white background.
The Alerts Softkey is visible in all softkey levels. For the top level softkeys and the transponder
(XPDR) levels, the Ident Softkey remains visible.
The following table describes PFD Softkey functions. Softkeys which display another set of
softkeys are indicated in the table by showing the given set as an increased level. For example, the
Map/HSI Softkey is shown in the Level 1 column. When pressed, the Map/HSI Softkey will display
another set of softkeys and these softkeys are explained in the Level 2 column. If a softkey on Level 2
provides yet another set of softkey functions, those new available softkeys are then explained in the
Level 3 column, etc.
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Map/HSI
Description
Displays the PFD Map display
settings softkeys.
Layout
Appendices
Level 4
Displays the PFD Map selection
softkeys.
Map Off
Inset Map
Displays the Inset Map.
Displays the HSI Map.
Index
HSI Map
Removes the PFD map from
display (Inset or Traffic).
24
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 2
Level 3
Inset Trfc
Detail
Description
Replaces the Inset Map with a
dedicated traffic display.
Replaces the HSI Map with a
dedicated traffic display.
Flight Instruments
HSI Trfc
Level 4
System Overview
Level 1
Selects desired amount of map
detail:
•
Detail 1: Removes everything
except for the active flight plan.
•
Detail 2: Declutters land and
SUA data.
Detail 3: Declutters land data.
Displays traffic information on
PFD Map.
•
Traffic
Topo: Displays topographical
data (e.g., coastlines, terrain,
rivers, lakes) and elevation
scale on PFD Map.
•
REL: Displays relative terrain
information on the PFD Map.
WX LGND
Lightning
Appendices
METAR
Additional Features
PRECIP
or
NEXRAD
Automatic Flight Control
System
Off: Removes terrain
Displays/removes the name of
the selected data link weather
provider (SiriusXM) and the
weather product icon and age
box (for enabled weather
products).
Displays Connext weather and
coverage on PFD Map.
Displays XM NEXRAD weather
and coverage on PFD Map
(subscription optional).
Displays METAR information on
PFD Map (subscription optional).
Adds/removes the display of
SiriusXM lightning information
on PFD Map (optional).
•
Hazard Avoidance
•
Flight Management
TER
Audio Panel and CNS
All (No Declutter): All map
features visible.
Engine Indication System
•
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
25
System Overview
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 2
Level 3
Datalink
Selects the data link weather
source for the PFD Map.
STRMSCP
Adds or removes the display of
Stormscope information on the
PFD Map. The softkey
annunciator is green when the
function is on. When the
function is off, the annunciator
is gray.
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
TFC Map
Replaces the PFD Map with a
dedicated traffic display. The
default display is the Inset Map.
PFD Opt
Displays second-level softkeys
for additional PFD options.
Displays additional SVT overlay
softkeys. (optional)
Hazard Avoidance
Pathways
Terrain
Automatic Flight Control
System
Description
Disables lightning function on
PFD Map. The softkey
annunciator is green when the
lightning function is off.
SVT
Additional Features
Level 4
LTNG Off
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
Level 1
Displays Pathway Boxes on the
Synthetic Vision Display.
Enables synthetic terrain
depiction.
HDG LBL
Displays compass heading along
the Zero-Pitch line.
APT Sign
Displays position markers for
airports within approximately 15
nm of the current aircraft
position. Airport identifiers are
displayed when the airport is
within approximately 9 nm.
Displays power lines on the
Synthetic Vision Display.
Index
Appendices
Wire
26
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
AOA
Description
Selects the display mode of the
AOA Indicator (optional).
•
Auto:
Enables
automatic
display of the AOA Indicator
on the PFD when the angle of
attack is ≥ 0.2, or when flaps
are extended.
Wind
Off
Option 1
Option 3
Bearing 1
ADC 1
ADC 2
AHRS
AHRS 2
Appendices
AHRS 1
Additional Features
ADC
Automatic Flight Control
System
Sensors
Hazard Avoidance
DME
Flight Management
Option 2
Audio Panel and CNS
On: Enables the display of the
AOA Indicator on the PFD.
Displays the wind option
softkeys.
Wind information not displayed.
Wind direction arrow and speed.
Headwind/Tailwind and
crosswind components and wind
direction arrow.
Wind direction arrow with
direction and speed.
Displays DME Information
(optional).
Cycles the Bearing 1 Information
Window through NAV1, NAV2,
GPS/waypoint identifier and
GPS-derived distance
information, ADF/frequency, and
Off.
Displays the sensor selection
softkeys.
Displays ADC selection softkeys.
Selects the #1 ADC.
Selects the #2 ADC.
Displays the AHRS selection
softkeys.
Selects the #1 AHRS.
Selects the #2 AHRS.
•
Engine Indication System
Off: Disables the display of the
AOA Indicator on the PFD.
Flight Instruments
•
System Overview
Level 1
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
27
System Overview
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 2
Level 3
ALT Units
Displays softkeys to select
altitude unit parameters.
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
When enabled, displays overlays
altimeter with meters.
IN
Press to display the BARO setting
as inches of mercury.
HPA
Press to display the BARO setting
as hectopascals.
Sets barometric pressure to
29.92 in Hg (1013 hPa if metric
units are selected) and returns to
top-level softkeys.
Selects OBS mode on the CDI
when navigating by GPS (only
available with active leg). When
OBS is on, the softkey
annunciator is green.
CDI
Cycles through GPS, NAV1, and
NAV2 navigation modes on the
CDI.
ADF/DME
Displays the ADF/DME Tuning
Window, allowing selection and
tuning of the ADF and DME
(optional).
Displays the transponder
selection softkeys.
Standby
Selects transponder Standby
Mode (transponder does not
reply to any interrogations).
On
Activates transponder
(transponder replies to
identification interrogations).
Alt
Altitude Reporting Mode
(transponder replies to
identification and altitude
interrogations).
Appendices
Additional Features
Meters
OBS
XPDR
Index
Description
Cycles the Bearing 2 Information
Window through NAV1, NAV2,
GPS/waypoint identifier and
GPS-derived distance
information, ADF/frequency, and
Off.
STD Baro
28
Level 4
Bearing 2
Flight Instruments
Level 1
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
VFR
System Overview
Level 1
Description
Automatically enters the VFR
code (1200 in the U.S.A. only).
Code
0–7
Flight Instruments
Displays transponder code
selection softkeys 0-7.
Use numbers to enter code.
BKSP
Removes numbers entered, one
at a time.
Ident
Ident
Flight Management
Activates the Special Position
Identification (SPI) pulse for 18
seconds, identifying the
transponder return on the ATC
screen.
Nearest
Displays ‘Nearest Airports’
Window.
Alerts
Appendices
Table 1-3 PFD Softkeys
MFD SOFTKEYS
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
29
Index
The MFD softkeys provide control over flight management functions, including GPS, NAV, terrain,
traffic, and weather (optional). There are many softkey functions available on the MFD depending on
the page group and screen selected.
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Additional Features
Displays the Alerts Window
when pressed. System generated
messages cause the Alerts
Softkey label to change to a
flashing ‘Message’ label.
Pressing the Message Softkey
opens the Alerts Window,
acknowledges the message, and
the softkey reverts to the ‘Alerts’
label.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Displays Timer ‘References’
Window.
Hazard Avoidance
Activates the Special Position
Identification (SPI) pulse for 18
seconds, identifying the
transponder return on the ATC
screen.
Tmr/Ref
Audio Panel and CNS
Activates the Special Position
Identification (SPI) pulse for 18
seconds, identifying the
transponder return on the ATC
screen.
Engine Indication System
Ident
System Overview
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
The following table provides an example of the MFD Softkey functions accessed from the
Navigation Map screen. Further information concerning softkeys providing more navigation and
flight planning functions may be found in the Flight Management Section. Terrain, traffic, and
weather softkey descriptions may be found in the Hazard Avoidance section. Further description of
optional equipment and corresponding softkey functions may be found in the Additional Features
Section.
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Engine Indication System
Engine
Displays EIS - Engine Page and secondlevel engine softkeys; select again to exit
page (see the EIS Section for more
information).
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Anti-Ice
Displays Anti-Ice Softkeys.
Left
Selects manual mode and opens the left
tank valve and closes the right tank
valve.
Auto
Selects Auto Tank Mode.
Right
Selects manual mode and opens the
right tank valve and closes the left tank
valve.
DCLTR
Declutters the Engine Temperatures Box
removing bars and temperatures
readouts.
Assist
Identifies temperature peaks.
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Fuel-W&B
Displays Initial Usable Fuel Page and
softkeys.
Full
Resets initial usable fuel to full.
Tabs
Resets initial usable fuel to tabs.
Undo
Rejects the last entry and resets to the
previous entry.
W&B
Saves the usable fuel amount shown on
the Initial Usable Fuel Page and displays
the Weight and Balance Page.
Map Opt
Displays second level Map Options
softkeys
Appendices
Traffic
Displays traffic information on
Navigation Map Page.
Inset
Displays inset window second level
softkeys.
Index
Off
FPL PROG
30
Description
Removes VSD/Flight Plan Progress Inset
from Navigation Map Page.
Displays Flight Plan Progress window.
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 2
Level 3
VSD
Displays VSD inset on Navigation Map
Page. The softkey annunciator is green
when the VSD is displayed.
Auto: Automatically displays either
VSD profile information for active
flight plan information or along
current track with no active flight plan.
•
FPL: Displays VSD profile information
for active flight plan.
TER
Off: No terrain information shown on
MFD Map.
•
Topo: Displays topographical data
(e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes)
and elevation scale on MFD Map.
REL:
Displays
relative
terrain
information on the MFD Map.
Displays airways on the map; cycles
through the following:
Hazard Avoidance
•
Flight Management
TRK: Displays VSD profile information
along current track.
Displays terrain on the map; cycles
through the following:
•
Audio Panel and CNS
•
Engine Indication System
Displays VSD profile information of
terrain/obstacles along the current track,
vertical track vector, and selected
altitude depending on the mode
selected..
Flight Instruments
VSD [Mode]
Description
System Overview
Level 1
•
Off: No airways are displayed.
•
On: All airways are displayed.
•
LO: Only low altitude airways are
displayed.
HI: Only high altitude airways are
displayed.
Displays Stormscope information on
Navigation Map Page (optional).
Displays XM NEXRAD weather and
coverage on Navigation Map Page
(optional).
Additional Features
•
Automatic Flight Control
System
AWY
•
NEXRAD
Appendices
STRMSCP
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
31
System Overview
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 1
Level 2
Flight Instruments
XM LTNG
Engine Indication System
Description
Displays XM lightning information on
Navigation Map Page (optional).
METAR
Displays METAR information on PFD
Map (subscription optional).
Legend
Displays legends for the displayed XM
Weather products (optional).
Detail
Audio Panel and CNS
Level 3
Selects desired amount of map detail;
cycles through the following levels:
•
Detail All: All map features visible.
•
Detail-3: Declutters land data.
•
Detail-2: Declutters land and SUA data.
Detail-1: Removes everything except
for the active flight plan.
When available, displays optional airport
and terminal procedure charts
(optional).
Displays chart display settings softkeys
(if available).
Show Map displays the applicable
‘WPT — Airport Information’ Page upon
the map for the chart currently selected.
Chart displays the chart for the ‘WPT —
Airport Information’ Page that is
currently selected and returns to the
Charts Level 2 Softkeys.
Pressing the Info 1 or Info 2 Softkey
returns to the airport diagram when the
view is on a different chart.
Displays departure procedure chart.
Displays standard terminal arrival
procedure chart.
Displays approach procedure chart.
Displays weather information.
Displays NOTAM information for
selected airport, when available.
When available, displays optional
checklists.
•
Flight Management
Charts
CHRT Opt
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Show Map
or
Chart
Info
DP
Additional Features
STAR
APR
WX
Appendices
NOTAM
Checklist
Index
Table 1-4 MFD Navigation Map Page Softkeys
32
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
The system has a MENU Key that, when pressed, displays a context-sensitive list of options. This
options list allows the user to access additional features or make settings changes which specifically
relate to the currently displayed window/page. There is no all-encompassing menu. Some menus
provide access to additional submenus that are used to view, edit, select, and review options. Menus
display ‘No Options’ when there are no options for the window/page selected. The main controls used
in association with all window/page group operations are described in Section 1.2. Softkey selection
does not display menus or submenus.
System Overview
MENUS
Engine Indication System
No Options with
NRST Window
Displayed on PFD
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Options with
FPL Window
Displayed on MFD
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Figure 1-10 Page Menu Examples
Navigating the Page Menu Window:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu’ Window.
Additional Features
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through a list of available options (a scroll bar appears to
the right of the window when the option list is longer than the window).
3) Press the ENT Key to select the desired option.
4) The CLR Key may be pressed to remove the menu and cancel the operation. Pressing
Appendices
the FMS Knob also removes the displayed menu.
MFD PAGE GROUPS
NOTE: Refer to other supporting sections in this Pilot’s Guide for details on specific pages.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
33
Information on the MFD is presented on pages grouped according to function. The Display Title is
comprised of the page group and active page title and is displayed in the upper center of the screen
below the Navigation Data Bar. In the bottom right corner of the screen, a page group window is
displayed by turning either FMS Knob. The page group tabs are displayed along the bottom of the
window. The page titles are displayed in a list above the page group tabs.
Page Group
MFD
Active Page Title
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Page Groups
Figure 1-11 Page Title and Page Groups
The main page groups are navigated using the FMS Knob; specific pages within each group can vary
depending on the configuration of optional equipment.
Selecting a page using the FMS Knob:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to display the list of page groups; continue turning the large
FMS Knob until the desired page group is selected.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired page within a specific page group.
There are several pages which may be selected by pressing the appropriate softkey at the bottom of
the page (or from the page menu). In this case, the page title will change when a different page softkey
is pressed, but the page will remain the same, i.e. the Radio and Info Softkeys show different page
titles (“Aux - XM Radio” and “Aux - XM Information” respective) within the same page, “XM Radio”.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Pages in
Current
Group
34
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System Overview
Page Group
Pages within Page Group
Map (Map Page Group)
•
IFR/VFR Charts (optional)
•
Traffic Map
•
Stormscope (optional)
•
Weather Data Link (optional)
•
Terrain Proximity / Terrain-SVT or TAWS—B (optional)
•
Airport Information
•
Airport Directory Information (Info 2 Softkey)
•
Departure Information (DP Softkey)
•
Arrival Information (STAR Softkey)
•
Approach Information (APR Softkey)
•
Weather Information (optional) (WX Softkey)
•
NOTAM Information (NOTAM Softkey)
•
NDB Information
•
VOR Information
•
VRP Information
•
User WPT Information
Automatic Flight Control
System
Intersection Information
Hazard Avoidance
•
Flight Management
Airport Information (Info 1 Softkey)
Audio Panel and CNS
•
Engine Indication System
Navigation Map
Flight Instruments
WPT (Waypoint Page Group)
•
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
35
System Overview
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Page Group
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
Aux (Auxiliary Page Group)
Pages within Page Group
•
Weight and Balance
•
Trip Planning
•
Utility
•
GPS Status
•
System Setup 1/2
•
XM Radio (optional)
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
•
FPL (Flight Plan Page Group)
•
XM Radio (Radio Softkey)
•
XM Information (Info Softkey)
Satellite Phone Pages (optional)
•
Telephone (Phone Softkey)
•
Text Messaging (SMS Softkey)
•
Connext Page (optional)
•
System Status
•
Video (optional)
•
ADS-B Status
•
Connext Setup
•
Databases
•
Active Flight Plan
Automatic Flight Control
System
•
•
Flight Plan Catalog
•
Stored Flight Plan (New Softkey)
•
SurfaceWatch Setup (optional)
•
Checklist
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
CHKLST (Checklist Page Group)
Wide View, Narrow View (View Softkey)
36
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System Overview
Page Group
Pages within Page Group
NRST (Nearest Page Group)
Nearest Intersection
•
Nearest NDB
•
Nearest VOR
•
Nearest VRP
•
Nearest User WPTS
•
Nearest Frequencies
•
Nearest Airspaces
•
Engine
•
Audio Panel and CNS
•
Engine Indication System
Nearest Airports
Flight Instruments
EIS (Engine Instruments Page Group)
•
Initial Usable Fuel (Fuel Softkey)
Table 1-5 Page Group and Pages
The Procedure Pages may be accessed at any time on the MFD by pressing the PROC Key. A menu
is initialized, and when a departure, approach, or arrival is selected, the appropriate Procedure
Loading Page is opened. Turning the FMS Knob does not scroll through the Procedure pages.
Approach Loading
•
Arrival Loading
•
Departure Loading
Hazard Avoidance
•
Flight Management
PROCEDURE PAGES (PROC)
SPLIT SCREEN FUNCTIONALITY
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Chart pages may be viewed in split screen mode with the Navigation Map Page and the Active Flight
Plan Page. When the system is powered-up on the ground, following acknowledgement of the MFD
Power-up Screen, the Navigation Map Page and Active Flight Plan Page will be displayed in normal
page view. To activate the split screen functionality, press the Charts Softkey. Two display panes are
displayed on the MFD. If split screen is activated from the Navigation Map Page, the page title will
show ‘Map - Chart + Navigation Map’. If split screen is activated from the Active Flight Plan Page, the
page title will change to show ‘FPL - Chart + Active Flight Plan’.
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
37
System Overview
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
MFD in Split Screen Mode
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
Page Title shows
Map - Chart + Navigation Map
Audio Panel and CNS
Dark purple Pane Selector
shows Charts
is the active display pane
Softkeys for the
active display pane
Flight Management
Figure 1-12 Split Screen Mode
CONTROLLING DISPLAY PANES
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
In split screen mode, the active display pane is outlined by a dark purple box called the pane
selector. Softkeys and menu options will automatically change depending on which display pane is
active. Display panes may be displayed vertically in Narrow View, or horizontally in Wide View. In
Narrow View, move the Joystick left or right to move the pane selector. In Wide View, move the
Joystick up and down to move the pane selector. To change between Wide View and Narrow View,
push and hold the Joystick.
For information on viewing Charts and the Active Flight Plan Page with the Flight Plan map, see
the Flight Management Section.
For more information on Charts and how to enable Charts Full Screen, see the Additional Features
section.
38
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System Overview
MFD in Split Screen Mode
Flight Instruments
Pane Selector Box
Dark purple Pane
Selector shows Charts is
the active display pane
Engine Indication System
- Move Joystick in direction of
dark purple arrows to move
display pane
- Push and hold
Joystick to change
Narrow/Wide view
Audio Panel and CNS
Softkeys for the
active display pane
Figure 1-13 Split Screen in Wide View
Flight Management
Enabling/disabling split screen mode:
1) From the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page or the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page press the
Charts Softkey, or press the MENU Key and select ‘Chart Mode On’.
2) To disable the split screen mode, press the Charts Softkey again or press the MENU
Hazard Avoidance
Key and select ‘Chart Mode Off’. The display returns to the base page, either the
Navigation Map Page or the Active Flight Plan Page.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Automatic Flight Control
System
System settings and crew profiles are managed from the System Setup Pages. Fields shown in cyan
text may be edited. Managing crew profiles and editing the system system settings are discussed in this
section.
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
39
System Overview
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Fields shown in Cyan may
be edited
Flight Instruments
Configure System
Time
Configure settings
- GPS CDI
- Channel Spacing
- Flight Director Format
- Nearest Airport
Change Display
Unit Settings
Engine Indication System
Configure Alert Settings
BARO Alerts Airspace Alerts Arrival Alerts -
Audio Panel and CNS
Restore System Defaults
Crew Profile
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
- Choose active profile
- Create new profile
- Edit, rename, and delete
existing profile (other than
default profile)
- Import / Export profile to
SD Card
Select System Setup Page
Automatic Flight Control
System
- Setup 1
- Setup 2
Figure 1-14 System Setup 1/2 Pages
If desired, the default system settings may be restored at any time.
Restoring system setup defaults:
Additional Features
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup (1 or 2)’ Page.
2) Press the Defaults Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Restore Page Defaults’,
and press the ENT Key. The message ‘Restore Setup (1 or 2) Page Defaults?’ is
displayed.
Appendices
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
CREW PROFILES
Index
System settings may be saved under a crew profile. When the system is powered on, the last
selected crew profile is shown on the MFD Power-up Screen. The system can store up to 25 profiles;
the currently active profile, the amount of memory used, and the amount of memory available are
shown at the top of the System Setup Page in the box labeled “Crew Profile”. From here, crew
40
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System Overview
profiles may be created, selected, renamed, or deleted. Crew profiles may also be exported from the
system to an SD card, or imported from an SD card into the system.
CREW PROFILE IMPORT/EXPORT MESSAGES
Flight Instruments
In some circumstances, some messages may appear in conjunction with others:
Description
‘No crew profile files found.’
Displayed if the SD card does not have one or
more valid pilot profile filenames.
‘Overwrite existing profile?’
Displayed if the profile name matches the name
of existing profile.
‘Profile name invalid. Enter a different profile
name.’
Displayed if the profile name is invalid.
‘All available crew profiles in use. Delete a
profile before importing another.’
Displayed if the maximum number for pilot
profiles has been reached.
‘Crew profile import failed.’
Displayed if the importing operation fails for any
other reason.
‘Crew profile import succeeded.’
Displayed if the importing operation succeeds.
‘Overwrite existing file?’
Displayed if the filename matches the name of an
existing file on the SD card.
‘Crew profile export failed.’
Displayed if the export operation fails.
‘Crew profile export succeeded.’
Displayed if the export operation succeeds.
Engine Indication System
Message
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Table 1-6 Crew Profile Import/Export Messages
Creating a profile:
Automatic Flight Control
System
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup (1 or 2)’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Create’ in the ‘Crew Profile’ Box.
4) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Create Profile’ Window is displayed.
Key. Crew profile names cannot begin with a blank as the first letter.
6) In the next field, use the small FMS Knob to select the desired settings upon which to
7) Press the ENT Key.
Appendices
base the new profile. Profiles can be created based on Garmin factory defaults, default
profile settings (initially based on Garmin factory defaults unless edited by the pilot), or
other previously created profile settings.
Additional Features
5) Use the FMS Knob to enter a profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT
8) With ‘Create’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to create the profile.
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Index
Or:
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
41
System Overview
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Use the large FMS Knob to select ‘Create & Activate’ and press the ENT Key to activate
the new profile.
9) To cancel the process, select ‘Cancel’ with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key.
Flight Instruments
Selecting an active profile:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup (1 or 2)’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
Engine Indication System
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Active’ profile Field in the ‘Crew Profile’ Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the crew profile list and highlight the desired
profile.
5) Press the ENT Key. The system loads and displays the system settings for the selected
Audio Panel and CNS
profile.
Renaming a Profile:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup (1 or 2)’ Page.
Flight Management
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Rename’ in the ‘Crew Profile’ Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
Hazard Avoidance
5) In the ‘Rename Profile’ Window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to rename.
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter a new profile name up to 16 characters long and press the
ENT Key.
Automatic Flight Control
System
8) With ‘Rename’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
9) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT
Key.
Additional Features
Deleting a profile:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup (1 or 2)’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Delete’ in the ‘Crew Profile’ Box.
Appendices
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) In the ‘Delete Profile’ Window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to delete.
Index
6) Press the ENT Key.
42
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System Overview
7) With ‘Delete’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
8) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT
Key.
Flight Instruments
Importing a profile from an SD card:
1) Insert an SD card containing the crew profile(s) into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup (1 or 2)’ Page.
Engine Indication System
3) Press the Import Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
4) The system displays the ‘Crew Profile Importing’ Window with ‘Import’ highlighted.
Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Profile Name’ Field, then scroll to the desired
profile name with the large and small FMS Knobs, then press the ENT Key. Then press
the ENT Key with ‘Import’ highlighted.
6) If successful, the system displays ‘Crew profile import succeeded’ in the Window below.
With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT or CLR Keys or press the FMS Knob to return to
the ‘Aux - System Setup (1 or 2)’ Page. The imported profile becomes the active profile.
Hazard Avoidance
displays an ‘Overwrite existing profile? OK or CANCEL’ prompt. Press the ENT Key to
replace profile on the system with the profile imported from the SD card, or turn the
FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key to return to the ‘Crew Profile
Importing’ Window.
Flight Management
5) If the imported profile name is the same as an existing profile on the system, the system
Audio Panel and CNS
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Import Crew Profile’ and press the ENT Key.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Crew Profile Importing and Import
Results Window
Crew Profiles Available for Import
from SD Card
Import Successful
Appendices
Figure 1-15 Crew Profile Import on the (Aux - System Setup Page)
Exporting a profile to an SD card:
1) Insert the SD card for storing the Crew Profile into the top card slot on the MFD.
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Index
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup (1 or 2)’ Page.
43
System Overview
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
3) Press the Export Softkey. The system displays the ‘Crew Profile Exporting’ Window.
Or:
Flight Instruments
4) To export the crew profile using the current selected profile, press the ENT Key with
Engine Indication System
a) Press the MENU Key.
5) If the selected profile to be exported is the same as an existing profile file name on the
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Export Crew Profile’ and press the ENT Key.
‘Export’ highlighted. To change the selected profile, turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight the ‘Profile Name’ Field, then scroll to the desired profile name with the large
and small FMS Knobs, then press the ENT Key. Then press the ENT Key with ‘Export’
highlighted.
Audio Panel and CNS
SD card, the system displays an ‘Overwrite existing profile? OK or CANCEL’ prompt.
Press the ENT Key to replace the profile on the SD card with the profile to be exported,
or turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key to return to the
‘Crew Profile Exporting’ Window without exporting the profile.
6) If successful, the window displays ‘Crew profile export succeeded.’ With ‘OK’
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
highlighted, press the ENT or CLR Keys, or press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Aux System Setup (1 or 2)’ Page.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Crew Profile Exporting Window, Enter
a Name to Use for Exported Profile
Export Successful
Figure 1-16 Crew Profile Export on the (Aux - System Setup Page)
Additional Features
DATE/TIME
Index
Appendices
The system obtains the current Universal Time Coordinated (UTC) date and time directly from the
GPS satellite signals (shown on the ‘Aux - GPS Status’ Page). System time (displayed in the lower
right corner of the PFD) can be displayed in three formats: local 12-hr, local 24-hr, or UTC. Local
time is set by adding/subtracting an offset (hours:minutes) to/from UTC.
44
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System Overview
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Figure 1-17 System Time (UTC Format)
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Figure 1-18 Date/Time Settings (System Setup 1 Page)
Configuring the system time:
Appendices
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Time Format’ Field.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
45
System Overview
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired format and press the ENT Key to confirm
selection. If local time format is selected, the ‘Time Offset’ Field is highlighted.
5) If necessary, use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time offset (±HH:MM) and press
Flight Instruments
the ENT Key to confirm selection.
GPS POSITION
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
The References Window on the PFD shows the current GPS position at the bottom of the window
using the selected display format (HHDDºMM.MM’ or HDDDºMM’SS.S”).
Figure 1-19 GPS Position (References Window)
Viewing the GPS Position in the References Window:
Hazard Avoidance
1) Press the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob until the ‘Position’ Field appears.
3) To remove the ‘References’ Window, press the Tmr/Ref Softkey or press the CLR Key.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Changing the GPS Position display format:
1) On the MFD, turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
Additional Features
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Position’ Field in the ‘Display Units’ Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired selection (HHDDºMM.MM’ or
HDDDºMM’SS.S”) and press the ENT Key.
DISPLAY UNITS
Index
Appendices
Units in which various quantities are displayed on the system screens are listed on the System
Setup Page. The Navigation Angle reference, the Temperature units, and the Position units can be set
from here.
46
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Affected Quantities
Navigation Angle
Magnetic (North)* Heading
True (North)
Course
Bearing
Track
Desired Track
Wind Direction (Trip Planning Page)
Celsius*
Fahrenheit
All temperatures on PFD
Total Air Temperature (Trip Planning Page)
†††
Fuel and Fuel
Flow**
Gallons
Liters
Fuel Parameters (Trip Planning Page)
†††
Weight**
Pounds
Kilograms
N/A
Position**
HDDD°MM.MM’
HDDD°MM’SS.S”
All positions
Additional Features
* Default setting
** Contact a Garmin-authorized service center to change this setting
† Excludes: airspeed indicator, altitude, true airspeed (PFD), wind speed vector, map range (Traffic
Map Page, Terrain Proximity/HTAWS Page), CDI scaling (System Setup), and fuel range calculation
(EIS)
†† Excludes: altimeter, Vertical Speed Indicator, and VNV altitudes (Active Flight Plan)
††† Excludes: Engine Indication System (EIS)
Automatic Flight Control
System
Temperature
Hazard Avoidance
All altitudes on MFD
All elevations on MFD
††
Flight Management
Altitude and Vertical Feet*
Speed
Meters
Audio Panel and CNS
Crosstrack error (HSI)
Bearing distances (information windows)
DME distance (information window)
Flight plan distances
Map ranges (some)
DIS, GS, TAS, XTK Fields (Navigation Data Bar)
Most distances on MFD
Altitude buffer distance (System Setup)
Arrival Alert trigger distance (System Setup)
All speeds on MFD
†
Engine Indication System
Distance and Speed Metric
Nautical*
Flight Instruments
Settings
System Overview
Category
Appendices
Table 1-7 Display Unit Settings (System Setup Page)
Changing a display unit setting:
1) While on the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate
the flashing cursor.
Index
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the ‘Display Units’ Box.
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
47
System Overview
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired units.
4) Press the ENT Key. Press the CLR Key to cancel the action without changing the units.
Flight Instruments
BARO TRANSITION ALERT
See the Flight Instruments section for a discussion on setting the Baro Transition Alert.
AIRSPACE ALERTS
Engine Indication System
See the Flight Management section for a discussion on Airspace Alerts settings.
SURFACEWATCH
See the Additional Features section for more information on setting the SurfaceWatch Alerts.
FLIGHT DIRECTOR
Audio Panel and CNS
See the Flight Instruments section for a discussion setting the Flight Director format.
MFD DATA BAR FIELDS
See the Flight Management section for a discussion on the MFD Data Bar Fields settings.
Flight Management
GPS CDI
See the Flight Instruments section for a discussion on setting the GPS CDI format.
COM CONFIGURATION
Hazard Avoidance
See the Audio Panel & CNS section for a discussion on the COM Configuration for channel
spacing.
NEAREST AIRPORT
See the Flight Management section for a discussion on the Nearest Airport settings.
Automatic Flight Control
System
STABILITY AND PROTECTION
See the Additional Features Section for information on enabling and disabling the Stability and
Protection feature.
PAGE NAVIGATION
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
The large FMS Knob displays the Page Group Tabs and navigates through the tabs. The small FMS
Knob navigates through the pages listed within a specific group. The number of clicks it takes to
display the Page Group Tabs and change to the next tab can be controlled from the ‘Page Navigation’
Box on the ‘Aux - System Setup 2’ Page.
Off – Displays the Page Group Window with one click of either FMS Knob.
On – Displays the Page Group Window and navigates to the next page group with one click of
either FMS Knob.
The pilot can select, from the ‘Aux - System Setup 2’ Page, the amount of time the Page Group
Window is displayed (in the lower right corner of the MFD). The timeout can range from two to ten
seconds.
48
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System Overview
Selecting page navigation settings:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 2’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
Flight Instruments
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Change On 1st Click’ Field in the ‘Page
Navigation’ Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Off’ or ‘On’.
Engine Indication System
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Timeout Seconds’ Field in the ‘Page
Navigation’ Box.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired number of seconds
7) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to remove the flashing cursor.
The ‘Audio’ Box on the System Setup 2 Page allows the audio alert voice setting (male or female).
Changing the audio alert voice:
Flight Management
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the Aux - System Setup 2 Page.
Audio Panel and CNS
AUDIO ALERTS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Voice Field in the Audio Box.
Hazard Avoidance
4) Use the FMS Knob to select the desired voice setting and press the ENT Key.
CHARTS
See the Additional Features Section for information on setting up auto taxi chart.
For flight planning purposes, timers, trip statistics, and a scheduler feature are provided on the ‘Aux
- Utility’ Page. The timers available include a stopwatch-like generic timer, a total time in flight timer,
and a record of the time of departure. Trip statistics—odometer, trip odometer, and average trip and
maximum groundspeeds—are displayed from the time of the last reset.
Automatic Flight Control
System
SYSTEM UTILITIES
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
49
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Figure 1-20 Utility Page
TIMERS
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
The system timers available on the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page include:
•
Stopwatch-like generic timers
•
Total-time-in-flight timer
•
Time since departure
Appendices
Additional Features
The generic timer can be set to count up or down from a specified time (HH:MM:SS). When the
countdown on the timer reaches zero the digits begin to count up from zero. If the timer is reset
before reaching zero on a countdown, the digits are reset to the initial value. If the timer is counting
up when reset, the digits return to zero.
The flight timer can be set to count up from zero starting at system power-up or from the time that
the aircraft lifts off; the timer can also be reset to zero at any time.
The system records the time at which departure occurs, depending on whether the pilot prefers the
time to be recorded from system power-up or from aircraft lift off. The displayed departure time can
also be reset to display the current time at the point of reset. The format in which the time is
displayed is controlled from the System Setup 1 Page.
Setting the generic timer:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
Index
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
50
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
ENT Key.
System Overview
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction (Up/Dn) and press the
4) If a desired starting time is desired:
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Start?’ and press the ENT Key to start the timer.
6) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Stop?’ highlighted. The field changes to
‘Reset?’.
7) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Reset?’ highlighted. The field changes back
Audio Panel and CNS
to ‘Start?’ and the digits are reset.
Engine Indication System
The field changes to ‘Stop?’.
Flight Instruments
a) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the HH:MM:SS ‘Generic’ Field.
Setting the flight timer starting criterion:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (Pwr-On or In-Air) and press the
ENT Key.
Hazard Avoidance
Resetting the flight timer:
Flight Management
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Flight’ timer Field.
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
Automatic Flight Control
System
3) With ‘Reset Flight Timer’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
Setting the departure timer starting criterion:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (Pwr-On or In-Air) and press the
ENT Key.
Additional Features
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Departure Time’ Field.
Resetting the departure time:
Appendices
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Reset Departure Time’ and press the ENT Key.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
51
System Overview
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
TRIP STATISTICS
Flight Instruments
The odometer and trip odometer record the total mileage traveled from the last reset; these
odometers can be reset independently. Resetting the trip odometer also resets the average trip
groundspeed. Maximum groundspeed for the period of time since the last reset is also displayed.
Resetting trip statistics readouts:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
2) Press the MENU Key. The following reset options for trip statistics are displayed:
•
Reset Trip ODOM/AVG GS—Resets trip average ground speed readout and odometer
•
Reset Odometer—Resets odometer readout only
•
Reset Maximum Speed—Resets maximum speed readout only
•
Reset All—Resets flight timer, departure timer, odometers, and groundspeed readouts
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the desired reset option and press the ENT Key. The
selected parameters are reset to zero and begin to display data from the point of reset.
SCHEDULER
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
The system’s Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., “Switch
fuel tanks”, “Overhaul”, etc.) in the ‘Messages’ Window on the PFD. Messages can be set to display
based on a specific date and time (event), once the message timer reaches zero (one-time; default
setting), or recurrently whenever the message timer reaches zero (periodic). Message timers set to
periodic alerting automatically reset to the original timer value once the message is displayed. When
power is cycled, messages are retained until deleted, and message timer countdown is restarted.
Scheduler messages appear in the ‘Alerts’ Window on the PFD and cause the Alerts Softkey label to
change to a flashing Message label. Pressing the Message Softkey opens the ‘Alerts’ Window and
acknowledges the scheduler message. The softkey reverts to the Alerts label. Pressing the Alerts
Softkey again removes the ‘Alerts’ Window from the display and the scheduler message is deleted
from the message queue.
Index
Figure 1-21 PFD Alerts Window
52
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System Overview
Entering a scheduler message:
1) Select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
Flight Instruments
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty field within the ‘Scheduler’ Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter text within the ‘Message’ Field to be displayed in the
‘Messages’ Window and press the ENT Key.
Engine Indication System
5) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the ‘Type’
Field.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select set the message alert type:
Event—Message issued at the specified date/time
•
One-time—Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)
•
Periodic—Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero
Audio Panel and CNS
•
7) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next
field.
Flight Management
8) For periodic and one-time message, use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value
(HHH:MM:SS) from which to countdown and press the ENT Key.
9) For event-based messages:
Key.
b) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next
field.
Automatic Flight Control
System
c) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.
Hazard Avoidance
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date (DD-MMM-YYY) and press the ENT
10) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the
next message.
Deleting a scheduler message:
Additional Features
1) Select the ‘Aux - Utility’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Message’ Field of the scheduler message to
be deleted.
Appendices
4) Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the
message is restored.
5) Press the ENT Key to confirm message deletion.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
53
1.5 DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING
The PFD and MFD display backlighting and the PFD and MFD bezel can be adjusted manually in one
of two ways:
•
Using the individual dimmer bus control for the desired display (this also adjusts the Display
Controller, Autopilot controller (optional) and the Audio Panel Keys), or
•
The PFD Setup Menu and procedures below. In normal operating mode, backlighting can only be
adjusted from a PFD. In reversionary mode, adjustments can be made from remaining displays.
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Figure 1-22 PFD Setup Menu
Hazard Avoidance
Adjusting display backlighting:
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the ‘PFD Setup Menu’. ‘Auto’ is now highlighted
next to ‘PFD Display’.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Manual’ and press the ENT Key. The intensity value
Automatic Flight Control
System
is now highlighted.
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting then press the ENT Key.
4) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
Additional Features
Adjusting key backlighting:
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the ‘PFD Setup Menu’. ‘Auto’ is now highlighted
next to ‘PFD Display’.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘PFD Display’, or ‘MFD Display’ as desired.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘PFD Key’,
Appendices
or ‘MFD Key’.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Auto’.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Manual’ and press the ENT Key. The intensity value
Index
is now highlighted.
54
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
System Overview
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting and press the ENT Key.
7) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
55
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
BLANK PAGE
56
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
System Overview
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 OVERVIEW
Airspeed Indicator, showing
Indicated airspeed
•
True Airspeed
•
Airspeed awareness ranges
•
Vspeed Reference Bugs
•
Attitude Indicator with slip/skid indication
•
Altimeter, showing
Trend vector
•
Barometric setting
•
Selected altitude
•
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
•
Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications
•
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
•
Horizontal Situation Indicator, showing
Turn Rate Indicator
•
Bearing pointers and information windows
•
Navigation Source
•
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
•
DME Information Window (optional)
•
HSI Map
•
Angle of Attack Indicator (optional)
Appendices
Index
•
•
Additional Features
Vertical Deviation, Glideslope, and Glidepath Indicators
Automatic Flight Control
System
•
Hazard Avoidance
•
Flight Management
•
ADF/DME Tuning Window (Optional)
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Audio Panel and CNS
•
Engine Indication System
The system increases pilot situational awareness by providing an easy-to-scan Primary Flight Display
(PFD), featuring a large horizon, airspeed, attitude, altitude, vertical speed, and course deviation
information. In addition to the flight instruments, navigation, communication, terrain, traffic, and
weather information are also presented on the PFD and explained in other sections of this Pilot’s Guide.
The following flight instruments and supplemental flight data are displayed on the PFD:
Flight Instruments
NOTE: The Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) provides additional readouts and bugs on
selected flight instruments. Refer to the AFCS Section for details on these bugs and readouts,
as they appear on the display during certain AFCS modes.
57
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
•
•
Timer/References Window, Showing
•
Generic timer
•
Vspeed values
•
Barometric Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) or Decision Height (DH)
Wind data
Engine Indication System
The PFD also displays various alerts and annunciations discussed throughout this pilot’s guide.
17
16
Audio Panel and CNS
15
14
1
2
13
12
Flight Management
3
11
4
10
5
Hazard Avoidance
6
9
7
Automatic Flight Control
System
8
1
Airspeed Indicator
10
Turn Rate Indicator
2
True Airspeed
11
Barometric Altimeter Setting
3
Ground Speed
12
Vertical Speed Indicator
4
Current Heading
13
Selected Altitude Bug
5
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
14
Altimeter
6
Course Deviation Indicator
15
Selected Altitude
7
Outside Air Temperature
16
Slip/Skid Indicator
8
Softkeys
17
Attitude Indicator
9
Selected Heading Bug
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Figure 2-1 Primary Flight Display (PFD) with Basic Information
58
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
System Overview
14
Flight Instruments
13
12
11
Engine Indication System
10
1
2
3
4
9
Audio Panel and CNS
5
7
Flight Management
68
8
Figure 2-2 PFD with Additional Information
8
Barometric Minimums/Decision Height
2
Selected Heading
9
Selected Course
3
Wind Information
10
Current Vertical Speed
4
Angle of Attack (AOA) Indicator
(optional)
11
Required Vertical Speed
5
DME Information Window
12
Vertical Deviation Indicator
6
Bearing 1 Information
13
VNV Target Altitude
7
Bearing 2 Information
14
Marker Beacon Annunciation
Automatic Flight Control
System
Course Deviation Indicator and To/From
Indicator
Hazard Avoidance
1
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
59
2.2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
ATTITUDE INDICATOR
Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a white horizon
line. The Attitude Indicator displays the pitch, roll, and slip/skid information.
9
6
3
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
7
2
4
5
Figure 2-3 Attitude Indicator
1
Roll Pointer
6
Pitch Scale
2
Roll Scale
7
Slip/Skid Information
3
Horizon Line
8
Sky Representation
4
Aircraft Symbol
9
Roll Scale Zero
5
Land Representation
The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Above and below the horizon line, major pitch marks and
numeric labels are shown for every 10˚, up to 80˚. Minor pitch marks are shown for intervening 5˚
increments, up to 25˚ below and 45˚ above the horizon line. Between 20˚ below to 20˚ above the
horizon line, minor pitch marks occur every 2.5˚. When the optional Synthetic Vision System is
activated, the pitch scale is reduced to 10˚ up and 7.5˚ down; refer to the Garmin SVT discussion for
details.
The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the roll scale. Major tick marks at 30˚ and 60˚ and
minor tick marks at 10˚, 20˚, and 45˚ are shown to the left and right of the zero. Angle of bank is
indicated by the position of the pointer on the roll scale. When the optional Electronic Stability and
Protection System (Garmin ESP™) system is installed and enabled, additional indications also appear
on the roll scale; refer to the Additional Features Section for more information about Garmin ESP.
The Slip/Skid Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer. The indicator bar moves with the roll
pointer and moves laterally away from the pointer to indicate uncoordinated flight. Slip (inside the
turn) or skid (outside the turn) is indicated by the location of the bar relative to the pointer. One bar
of displacement is equal to one half ball of displacement on a traditional Slip/Skid Indicator.
Index
Appendices
8
1
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
60
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
System Overview
Flight Instruments
AIRSPEED INDICATOR
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for speed criteria and Vspeed values.
True
Airspeed
Ground
Speed
Vspeed
References
Speed
Ranges
Automatic Flight Control
System
Indicated
Airspeed
Hazard Avoidance
Airspeed
Trend
Vector
Red and White
Barber Pole at VNE
Low Speed Range
Flight Management
Operating Ranges
Audio Panel and CNS
The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a moving tape rolling number gauge. The true airspeed
is displayed in knots below the Airspeed Indicator. The numeric labels and major tick marks on the
moving tape are shown at intervals of 10 knots. The minor tick marks on the moving tape are shown
at intervals of five knots. Speed indication starts at 20 knots, with 60 knots of airspeed viewable at any
time. The indicated airspeed is displayed inside the black pointer. The pointer remains black until
reaching the never-exceed speed (VNE), at which point it becomes red. The optional Approach Speed
Cue, available on models with an Angle of Attack (AOA) computer, appears as a hollow green circle on
the airspeed tape and represents VREF for the aircraft configuration.
Engine Indication System
Figure 2-4 Slip/Skid Indicator
Approach Cue
(Optional)
Additional Features
Figure 2-5 Airspeed Indicator Ranges
Appendices
Color coded stripes appear on the Airspeed Indicator to show the operating ranges. The low speed
range stripe is red. Normal operating range is green, caution range is amber, and the never exceed
speed (VNE) begins with a red and white barber pole. The flap operating range is indicated by a white
stripe.
A red low speed awareness band extends up to the low speed awareness velocity, VLSA
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
61
The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical magenta line that appears to the right of the color-coded
speed range strip when airspeed is either accelerating or decelerating. One end of the magenta line is
anchored to the tip of the airspeed pointer while the other end moves continuously up or down
corresponding to the rate of acceleration or deceleration. For any constant rate of acceleration or
deceleration, the moving end of the line shows approximately what the indicated airspeed value will
be in six seconds. If the trend vector crosses VNE, the indicated airspeed number changes to amber.
The trend vector is absent if the speed remains constant or if any data needed to calculate airspeed is
not available due to a system failure.
Vspeeds (Glide,VR, VX,VY) bugs can be turned on/off from the Timer/References Window. VR is
categorized as a takeoff Vspeed. When active (on), the Vspeeds are displayed at their respective
locations to the right of the airspeed scale. When the indicated airspeed is below 20 knots, enabled
Vspeeds Reference Bugs and their numeric values appear in a list at the bottom of the airspeed tape,
ordered from highest to lowest.
For the SR20 and SR22 only, the pilot can also modify the value of the VY bug, within an allowable
range. If the pilot changes value of this bug, an asterisk appears to the right of the speed in the
References Window to indicate the pilot has changed the bug from its default value.
On the next avionics power cycle, all vspeed reference bugs are in their default states.
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Figure 2-6 Timer/References Window and Menu
Automatic Flight Control
System
The pilot can enable/disable Vspeed bugs all at once or by category (takeoff).
Enabling/disabling or modifying Individual Vspeed Reference Bugs:
1) Press the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired value to change. For the SR20 or
Additional Features
SR22 only, this also includes the speed value for VY.
3) Turn the small FMS Knobs to change the value for the selected item (‘On’, ‘Off’, or set
the desired vspeed value, if applicable).
4) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
Appendices
Enabling/disabling Vspeed Reference Bugs as a group or restoring defaults:
1) Press the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
2) Press the MENU Key.
Index
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll as needed to highlight the desired selection.
62
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
System Overview
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) To remove the References Window, press the CLR Key or the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
ALTIMETER
Selected
Altitude
Bug
Indicated
Altitude
(Meters)
Flight Management
Indicated
Altitude
Selected
Altitude
(Meters)
Hazard Avoidance
Barometric
Setting Box
(Hectopascals)
Barometric
Setting
Audio Panel and CNS
Altitude
Trend
Vector
Selected
Altitude
Engine Indication System
Selected
Altitude
Bug
Flight Instruments
The Altimeter displays barometric altitude values on a moving tape rolling number gauge. The pilot
can choose display units format for the Altimeter as feet or meters.
If the altitude is displayed in feet, the Altimeter shows 600 feet of barometric altitude at a time, with
numeric labels and major tick marks displayed at intervals of 100 feet. Minor tick marks are at
intervals of 20 feet.
If the altitude is displayed in meters, the Altimeter shows 180 meters of barometric altitude at a time,
with numeric labels and major tick market displayed at intervals of 50 meters. Minor tick marks are at
intervals of 10 meters.
The Indicated Altitude is displayed in the black pointer.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Figure 2-7 Altimeter Settings, In Hg and Metric
Selecting the Altimeter and Vertical Speed Indicator units:
1) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux — System Setup 1’ Page on the MFD.
Additional Features
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ALT, VS datafield in the ‘Display Units’
Window.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight either ‘Feet(FT,FPM)’ or ‘Meters(MT,MPS)’ and
Appendices
press the ENT Key. This setting affects altitude displays system-wide, in addition to
those shown on the PFD.
Setting the Selected Altitude:
1) Turn the ALT SEL Knob to set the Selected Altitude in 100-ft increments. When meters
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Index
are displayed, the Selected Altitude is adjusted in 50 meter increments. If a Minimum
63
System Overview
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Descent Altitude/Decision Height (MDA/DH) has been set, this altitude is also available
for the Selected Altitude as the ALT SEL Knob is turned.
altitude to the nearest 10 ft.
The pilot can choose to display overlays for the indicated altitude and Selected Altitude using
alternate display units. For example, if the Altimeter is displaying feet, the system can show a metric
overlay for the indicated and selected altitudes without changing the scale or display units of the
Altimeter.
Enabling altitude units overlays:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey to display the second-level softkeys..
2) Press the ALT Units Softkey.
3) Press the Meters or Feet Softkeyto enable/disable the altitude overlays.
4) Press the Back Softkey twice to return to the top-level softkeys.
A magenta Altitude Trend Vector extends up or down the left of the altitude tape, the end resting at the
approximate altitude to be reached in six seconds at the current vertical speed. The trend vector is not
shown if altitude remains constant or if data needed for calculation is not available due to a system
failure.
The barometric pressure setting is displayed below the Altimeter in inches of mercury (in Hg) or
hectopascals (hPa) when metric units are selected. Adjusting the altimeter barometric pressure setting
creates discontinuities in VNV vertical navigation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it
may take several minutes for the aircraft to re-establish on the descent path. If the change is made while
nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target Altitude, the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in
time to meet the vertical constraint.
NOTE: Adjusting the altimeter barometric setting creates discontinuities in VNAV vertical
deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for
the aircraft to re-establish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a
waypoint with a VNAV Target Altitude, the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path
in time to meet the vertical constraint.
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
2) If desired, press the ALT SEL Knob to synchronize the selected altitude to the displayed
WARNING: Do not use a QFE altimeter setting with this system. System functions will not
operate properly with a QFE altimeter setting. Use only a QHN altimeter setting for the height
above mean sea level, or the standard pressure setting, as applicable.
Appendices
Selecting the altimeter barometric pressure setting:
Turn the BARO Knob to select the desired setting.
Selecting standard barometric pressure:
Index
Press the BARO Knob to select standard pressure; STD BARO is displayed in the
Barometric Setting box.
64
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
System Overview
Or:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the STD Baro Softkey; STD BARO is displayed in the Barometric Setting box.
Flight Instruments
Changing altimeter barometric pressure setting units:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the ALT Units Softkey.
Hg).
Or:
4) Press the Back Softkey twice to return to the top-level softkeys.
Hazard Avoidance
Setting the Baro Transition Alerts:
Flight Management
The Baro Transition Alerts flash the barometric pressure setting to remind the pilot to change the
barometric pressure setting to or from standard. Two alerts are available. The altitude Baro Transition
Alert occurs when climbing through the transition altitude beginning at 200 feet below this altitude. The
flight level Baro Transition Alert occurs when descending through the transition flight level beginning at
200 feet above this flight level. The barometric pressure setting stops flashing after the pilot changes the
barometric pressure setting. The pilot can enable/disable either Baro Transition Alert, and choose the
altitude or flight level used to trigger the alerts.
Audio Panel and CNS
Press the HPA Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in hectopascals (hPa).
Engine Indication System
3) Press the IN Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in inches of mercury (in
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
to highlight the ‘On’ or ‘Off’ field for the BARO Transition Alert Altitude in the ‘BARO
Transition Alert’ Box.
4) If desired, turn the small FMS Knob to set the BARO Transition Alert Altitude ‘On’ or
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Altitude’ field.
6) Use the FMS Knobs to change the altitude and press the ENT Key to accept or press the
CLR Key to return to the previous altitude selection.
Alert Level.
8) If desired, turn the small FMS Knob to set the BARO Transition Alert Flight Level ‘On’ or
Appendices
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘On’ or ‘Off’ field for the BARO Transition
Additional Features
‘Off’.
Automatic Flight Control
System
3) To enable/disable the Baro Transition Alert based on altitude, turn the large FMS Knob
‘Off’.
9) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Flight Level’ field.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
65
System Overview
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
10) Use the FMS Knobs to change the Flight Level for the alert and press the ENT Key to
accept or press the CLR Key to return to the previous altitude selection.
VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR (VSI)
The Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) displays the aircraft vertical speed using a non-moving tape. The
current vertical speed is displayed in the pointer along the tape. The pilot can choose the display units
format for the VSI and altimeter as feet or meters.
If the VSI is displayed in feet, numeric labels with major tick marks appear at 1000 and 2000 feet per
minute (fpm). Minor tick marks appear for every 500 fpm. If the current vertical speed is at least 100
fpm, digits appear in the pointer. If the rate of ascent/descent exceeds 2000 fpm, the pointer appears at
the corresponding edge of the tape while displaying the current vertical speed numerically.
If the VSI is displayed in meters, numeric labels with major tick marks appear at 5 and 10 meters per
second. Minor tick marks appear for every 2.5 meters per second. If the current vertical speed it least
0.5 meters per second, digits appear in the pointer. If the rate of ascent or descent exceeds 10 meters per
second, the pointer appears at the corresponding edge of the tape while displaying the current vertical
speed numerically.
A magenta chevron bug is displayed as the Required Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI) for reaching a
VNV Target Altitude once the “TOD [Top of Descent] within 1 minute” alert has been generated. See the
Flight Management Section for details on VNV features, and refer to the Supplemental Flight Data
discussion later in this section for more information about VNV indications on the PFDs.
VERTICAL DEVIATION
When Vertical Navigation (VNV) is being used, the Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) appears to the
left of the altimeter and is displayed with a magenta ‘V’ at the top of the scale and a magenta chevron
indicating the baro-VNAV vertical deviation. The VDI appears in conjunction with the “TOD within 1
minute” alert. The VDI is removed from the display if vertical deviation becomes invalid. See the Flight
Management Section for details on VNV features, and refer to the Supplemental Flight Data discussion
later in this section for more information about VNV indications on the PFD.
The Glideslope Indicator appears to the left of the Altimeter whenever an ILS frequency is tuned in
the active NAV field and the aircraft heading and selected course are within 107°. A green diamond
acts as the Glideslope Indicator, like a glideslope needle on a conventional indicator. The Glideslope
Preview, a hollow gray diamond, is displayed when the navigation source is set to GPS, in addition to a
localizer frequency being tuned on the navigation receiver and receiving glideslope information. When
the system auto-switches the active navigation source to the localizer frequency the Glideslope
Indicator is displayed as a solid green diamond. If a localizer frequency is tuned and there is no
glideslope, “NO GS” is displayed in place of the diamond.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
11) Push the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
66
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
System Overview
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
VNV Target
Altitude
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Required
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Vertical
Speed
Pointer
Audio Panel and CNS
Figure 2-8 Vertical Speed and Deviation Indicators (VSI and VDI)
Flight Management
Glideslope Preview when
GPS is NAV source
Hazard Avoidance
Glideslope
Indicator
Automatic Flight Control
System
NOTE: The Glidepath Indicator appears on the display as soon as the Final Approach Fix (FAF)
becomes the active waypoint. Depending on procedure design, pilot action, and/or ATC
clearance, the aircraft may be centered on or above the glidepath when the Glidepath
Indicator appears.
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
67
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Appendices
The glidepath is analogous to the glideslope for RNAV approach service levels supporting SBAS
vertical guidance (LNAV+V, LNAV/VNAV, LP, LPV, LP+V). When one of these RNAV approaches is
loaded into the flight plan, GPS is the selected navigation source, and SBAS is used for vertical
approach guidance, the Glidepath Indicator appears as a magenta diamond. Full-scale deflection (two
dots), is angular with upper and lower limits. The upper limit is +/-492 feet (150 meters) and lower
limits depend on approach service level.
Additional Features
Figure 2-9 Glideslope Indicator and Glideslope Preview Indicator
•
LNAV/VNAV, LNAV+V, and LP+V, is +/- 148 feet (45 meters).
•
LPV is +/- 49 feet (15 meters).
If the approach type downgrades past the final approach fix (FAF), “NO GP” is displayed in place of
the diamond.
While executing an SBAS approach with an LNAV/VNAV approach service level, and between the
FAF and MAP, the Vertical Deviation Limit Indicators appear as vertical white lines indicating the area
where deviation exceeds allowable limits for the glidepath. The Vertical Deviation Limit Indicator
provides a scaled representation of +/- 75 feet of the calculated glidepath. The “window” between the
lines represents the area of acceptable deviation. The length of the lines change while progressing
through the final approach. When the Glidepath Indicator enters an excessive deviation area, the
Glidepath and Vertical Deviation Limit Indicators become amber.
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Flight Management
Glidepath
Preview
Hazard Avoidance
Glidepath
Indicator
Automatic Flight Control
System
Figure 2-10 Glidepath Preview Indicator and Glidepath Indicator
Vertical
Deviation
Limit
Indicator
(excessive
deviation)
Appendices
Additional Features
Vertical
Deviation
Limit
Indicator
Index
Figure 2-11 Glidepath Indicator (Baro-VNAV) and Vertical Deviation Limit Indicators
While executing an LNAV/VNAV approach and SBAS is unavailable, baro-VNAV (barometric vertical
navigation) is used for vertical guidance. This occurs due to any of the following conditions:
68
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SBAS fails or becomes unavailable prior to the FAF
•
The aircraft is outside of SBAS coverage
•
SBAS is manually disabled on the ‘Aux — GPS Status’ Page
System Overview
•
Top of Descent Message
Additional Features
Terminal
Phase of
Flight
Automatic Flight Control
System
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
Hazard Avoidance
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Required
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Flight Management
VNV Target
Altitude
Audio Panel and CNS
When a VNV flight plan has been activated, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, RVSI, VDI) appear
on the PFD in conjunction with the “TOD within 1 minute” message and “Vertical track” voice alert. See
the Flight Management and AFCS sections for details on VNV features. VNV indications are removed
from the PFD according to the criteria listed in the table.
Engine Indication System
VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNV) INDICATIONS
Flight Instruments
Baro-VNAV is also the source of vertical approach guidance if the LNAV/VNAV procedure does not
support SBAS vertical guidance.
While baro-VNAV is being utilized, the Glidepath Indicator appears as a magenta pentagon. If the
approach type downgrades past the final approach fix (FAF), “NO GP” is displayed in place of the
pentagon.
Figure 2-12 Vertical Navigation Indications (PFD)
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
69
System Overview
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
VNV Indication Removed
Required
Vertical
Speed
(RSVI)
Vertical
Deviation
(VDI)
VNV Target
Altitude
Aircraft > 1 min before the next TOD due to flight
plan change
X
X
X
VNV cancelled (CNCL VNV Softkey selected on
MFD)
X
X
X
Distance to active waypoint cannot be computed
due to unsupported flight plan leg type (see Flight
Management Section)
X
X
X
Aircraft > 250 feet below active VNV Target
Altitude
X
X
X
Current crosstrack or track angle error has
exceeded limit
X
X
X
Active altitude-constrained waypoint can not be
reached within maximum allowed flight path
angle and vertical speed
X
X
Table 2-1 VNV Indication Removal Criteria
ANGLE OF ATTACK (AOA) INDICATOR
The optional Angle of Attack (AOA) Indicator appears on the PFD below the airspeed indicator and
is shown when the Inset Map is not displayed. The AOA Indicator displays the normalized angle of
attack. White, amber, and red arcs indicate AOA ranges. A normalized AOA value of 1.0 corresponds
to a stall, and will cause Low Speed ESP to activate if this condition is reached. The system
dynamically calculates the red and amber arc ranges based on parameters such as bank angle, and
flaps position. The red arc begins at the Stall Warning threshold and ends at 1.0 (Stall threshold). The
amber arc represents maneuvering margin to a 35 degree bank angle. At bank angles of 35 degrees or
greater, the amber band has zero thickness. The pointer color matches the color of the arc associated
with the current AOA value.
The pilot can enable/disable the display of the AOA Indicator on the PFD, or select the auto mode.
In auto mode, the AOA Indicator appears when the AOA is 0.2 or greater, or the flaps are partially or
fully extended. Otherwise, the AOA Indicator is removed. Refer to Additional Features section for
details regarding the optional Garmin ESP™.
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
Criteria
Index
NOTE: The display of the Angle Of Attack indicator is mutually exclusive with the Inset Map.
Only one can be displayed at a time.
70
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
System Overview
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Figure 2-13 Angle of Attack (AOA) Indicator
Selecting the Angle of Attack (AOA) display mode:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
3) Press the On, Off, or Auto Softkey. Pressing the Auto Softkey shows the AOA
Indicator when the normalized AOA is 0.2 or greater, or when the flaps are partially or
fully extended.
HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (HSI)
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card in a heading-up
orientation. Letters indicate the cardinal points with numeric labels every 30˚. Major tick marks are at
10˚ intervals and minor tick marks are at 5˚ intervals. A digital reading of the current heading appears
on top of the HSI. The HSI also presents turn rate, course deviation, bearing, and selected navigation
source information. The HSI is available in two formats: a 360˚ compass rose and a 210˚ HSI Map. The
HSI Map is mutually exclusive with the Inset Maps.
The HSI with the HSI map disabled presents a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) with a Course
Pointer, To/From Indicator, and a sliding deviation bar and scale. The Course Pointer is a single line
arrow (GPS, VOR1, and LOC) or a double line arrow (VOR2 and LOC2) which points in the direction
of the set course. The To/From Indicator rotates with the Course Pointer and appears when the system
is receiving the active NAVAID.
Flight Management
4) Press the Back Softkey to return to the top-level PFD softkeys.
Audio Panel and CNS
2) Press the AOA Softkey.
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
71
System Overview
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Flight Instruments
14
13
12
11
1
Engine Indication System
2
3
10
4
9
5
Audio Panel and CNS
6
8
7
1
Turn Rate/Heading Trend Vector
8
Lateral Deviation Scale
2
Current Track Indicator
9
Aircraft Symbol
3
Course Deviation Indicator
10
Flight Phase
4
Navigation Source
11
Heading Bug
5
Course Pointer
12
Lubber Line
6
To/From Indicator
13
Current Heading
7
Rotating Compass Card
14
Turn Rate Indicator
The HSI Map is a 210 ˚ expanded compass rose which also includes a navigation map with overlay
capabilities such as topographical, weather, traffic, and land information. The HSI Map contains a
Course Pointer, a combined To/From Indicator with a sliding deviation indicator, and a lateral
deviation scale. Upon passing a station, the To/From Indicator points to the tail of the aircraft.
Depending on the navigation source, the CDI on the HSI Map can appear either as an arrowhead
(GPS, VOR, OBS) as a diamond (LOC). Refer to the Flight Management Section for information about
using HSI Map overlays.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Figure 2-14 Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
72
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
System Overview
Lateral Deviation Scale
Flight Phase
Annunciation
Navigation Source
Flight Instruments
Course Deviation
Indicator and To/
From Indicator
Course Pointer
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Figure 2-15 HSI Map
The following information appears above the Current Heading when the HSI Map is enabled:
OBS Mode/Suspend Mode Status
Deviation scale
Dead Reckoning (DR) Mode Annunciation
Navigation Source
Crosstrack Error (XTK)
Flight Phase
Back Course Annunciation (BC)
Additional Features
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Enabling/disabling the HSI Map on the PFD:
Hazard Avoidance
For the HSI Map, when a localizer is the active navigation source and the difference between the
selected course and current heading is greater than 107°, a ‘BC’ annunciation appears instead of the
Flight Phase above the selected course readout to indicate backcourse sensing is active. This
annunciation does not apply to the HSI when the HSI Map is disabled. In either case, when the system
detects LOC BC guidance is active, the localizer guidance behaves as if a front course were selected.
The Selected Course is shown to the upper right of the HSI for three seconds after being adjusted or
the pilot selects a different navigation source with the CDI Softkey.
Flight Management
A sliding deviation indicator (the To/From and deviation
indicators are combined)
2) Press the Layout Softkey.
3) Press the HSI Map Softkey to enable the HSI Map.
Or:
Appendices
Press the Map Off Softkey to disable the HSI Map.
4) Press the Back Softkey twice to return to the top-level softkeys.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
73
System Overview
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Adjusting the selected heading:
1) Turn the HDG Knob to set the selected heading.
Flight Instruments
2) Press the HDG Knob to synchronize the bug to the current heading.
Adjusting the Selected Course:
1) Turn the COM/NAV CRS/XPDR Knob to set the Selected Course.
2) Press the COM/NAV CRS/XPDR Knob to re-center the CDI and return the course
Engine Indication System
pointer to the bearing of the active waypoint or navigation station (see OBS Mode for
adjusting a GPS course).
Current
Heading
Selected
Heading
Selected
Course
Heading Bug
Figure 2-16 Heading and Course Indications (Magnetic)
The Current Track Indicator, a magenta diamond connected to a dashed gray line on the HSI,
represents the current over the ground the aircraft is flying.
Navigation angles (track, heading, course, bearing) are corrected to the computed magnetic
variation (Mag Var) or referenced to true north (T), set on the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page. When an
approach referenced to true north has been loaded into the flight plan, the system generates a message
to change the navigation angle setting to True at the appropriate time.
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Current Track
Indicator
Figure 2-17 Heading and Course Indications (True)
Appendices
Changing the navigation angle true/magnetic setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘AUX - System Setup 1‘ Page on the MFD.
Index
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
74
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
System Overview
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Nav Angle’ in the ‘Display Units’ box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
True - References angles to true north (T)
•
Magnetic - Angles corrected to the computed magnetic variation (Mag Var)
Flight Instruments
•
COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR (CDI)
360˚ HSI
Flight Management
Navigation
Source
Flight
Phase
Hazard Avoidance
Crosstrack
Error
CDI
Audio Panel and CNS
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or right from the course pointer along a lateral
deviation scale to display aircraft position relative to the course. If the course deviation data is not
valid, the CDI is not displayed.
Engine Indication System
NOTE: During a heading change of greater than 105˚ with respect to the course, the CDI on
the Arc HSI switches to the opposite side of the deviation scale and displays reverse sensing.
Scale
Additional Features
Appendices
The CDI can display two sources of navigation, GPS or VOR/LOC. Color indicates the current
navigation source, magenta for GPS and green for VOR and LOC. The full scale limits for the CDI are
defined by a GPS-derived distance when coupled to GPS. When navigating using a VOR or localizer
(LOC), the CDI uses the same angular limits as a mechanical CDI. If the CDI exceeds the maximum
deviation on the scale (two dots) while navigating with GPS, the crosstrack error (XTK) is displayed
below the white aircraft symbol.
When navigating with GPS and an ILS or localizer approach is activated, a preview of the approach
course is indicated by the dashed gray pointer and CDI on the HSI as shown on the left of Figure
2-21. As the aircraft approaches the final approach course, the two course pointers converge. When
the system auto-switches to the localizer NAV source, the pointer and CDI will change to green.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Figure 2-18 Course Deviation Indicator
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
75
Preview Course
Preview CDI
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Audio Panel and CNS
Localizer Approach
Course Preview
Figure 2-19 Navigation Sources
NAV1 Selected for Tuning
Flight Management
NAV2 Selected for Tuning
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
LOC1
Selected
GPS
Selected
VOR2
Selected
Pressing the CDI
Softkey Cycles through
Navigation Sources
Figure 2-20 Selecting a Navigation Source
Additional Features
Changing navigation sources:
1) Press the CDI Softkey to change from GPS to VOR1 or LOC1. This places the cyan
tuning box over the NAV1 standby frequency in the upper left corner of the PFD.
2) Press the CDI Softkey again to change from VOR1 or LOC1 to VOR2 or LOC2. This
Index
Appendices
places the cyan tuning box over the NAV2 standby frequency.
3) Press the CDI Softkey a third time to return to GPS.
TURN RATE INDICATOR
The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass card. Tick marks to the left
and right of the lubber line denote half-standard and standard turn rates. A magenta Turn Rate Trend
Vector shows the current turn rate. The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in 6
76
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Flight Instruments
Half
Standard
Turn Rate
Arrow shown
for turn rate
greater than 4
degrees/second
System Overview
seconds, based on the present turn rate. A standard-rate turn is shown on the indicator by the trend
vector stopping at the standard turn rate tick mark, corresponding to a predicted heading of 18˚ from
the current heading. At rates greater than 4 deg/sec, an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta
trend vector and the prediction is no longer valid.
Engine Indication System
Standard
Turn Rate
Figure 2-21 Turn Rate Indicator
A localizer or ILS approach has been loaded into the active flight plan
•
The final approach fix (FAF) is the active waypoint, the FAF is less than 15 nm away, and the aircraft
is moving toward the FAF
•
A valid localizer frequency has been tuned
•
The GPS CDI deviation is less than 1.2 times full-scale deflection
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
GPS steering guidance is still provided after the CDI automatically switches to LOC until LOC
capture, up to the Final Approach Fix (FAF) for an ILS approach, or until GPS information becomes
invalid. Activating a Vector-to-Final (VTF) also causes the CDI to switch to LOC navigation source.
GPS steering guidance is not provided after this switch.
On some ILS approaches where the glideslope intercept point is at or in close proximity to the fix
prior to the FAF, it is possible to be above the glideslope when the navigation source automatically
switches from GPS to LOC. The probability of this occurring varies based on air temperature.
Flight Management
•
Audio Panel and CNS
The system automatically switches from GPS to LOC navigation source and changes the CDI scaling
accordingly when all of the following occur:
Additional Features
Fix Prior to the FAF
Appendices
Glideslope Intercept Point
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Index
Figure 2-22 ILS Approach with Glideslope Intercept Point at Fix Prior to the FAF
77
GPS CDI SCALING
Terminal
(Oceanic if >200 nm
from nearest airport)
Terminal
Approach
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
1.0 nm
Refer to accompanying
approach CDI scaling figures
Enroute
Departure
Missed
Approach
Figure 2-23 Automatic CDI Scaling
•
Once a departure procedure is activated, the CDI is scaled for departure (0.3 nm).
•
The system switches from departure to terminal CDI scaling (1.0 nm) under the following
conditions:
The next leg in the procedure is not aligned with the departure runway
The next leg in the departure procedure is not CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF
(see Glossary for leg type definitions)
After any leg in the departure procedure that is not CA or FA
•
At 30 nm from the departure airport the enroute phase of flight is automatically entered and CDI
scaling changes to 2.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
When navigating with an active departure procedure, the flight phase and CDI scale does not change
until the aircraft arrives at the last departure waypoint (if more than 30 nm from the departure
airport) or the leg after the last departure waypoint has been activated or a direct-to waypoint is
activated.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
0.3 nm
CDI Full-scale Deflection
When GPS is the selected navigation source, the flight plan legs are sequenced automatically and
annunciations appear on the HSI for the flight phase. Flight phase annunciations are normally shown
in magenta, but when cautionary conditions exist the color changes to amber. If the current leg in the
flight plan is a heading leg, ‘HDG LEG’ is annunciated in magenta beneath the aircraft symbol.
The current GPS CDI scale setting is displayed as ‘System CDI’ on the AUX - System Setup Page and
the full-scale deflection setting may also be changed (2.0 nm, 1.0 nm, 0.3 nm, or Auto) from this page.
If the selected scaling is smaller than the automatic setting for enroute and terminal phases, the CDI is
scaled accordingly and the selected setting is be displayed rather than the flight phase annunciation.
When set to Auto (default), the GPS CDI scale automatically adjusts to the desired limits based upon
the current phase of flight.
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
78
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FAF
Figure 2-24 Typical LNAV and LNAV+V, and
Visual Approach CDI Scaling
Landing
Threshold
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
Figure 2-25 Typical LNAV/VNAV, LPV, LP+V,
and LP Approach CDI Scaling
•
The system automatically switches back to terminal scaling under the following conditions:
The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not aligned with the final approach path
The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or
TF
After any leg in the missed approach procedure that is not CA or FA
Appendices
When a missed approach is activated, the CDI scale changes to 0.3 nm.
Additional Features
•
Automatic Flight Control
System
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2 nm
FAF
Hazard Avoidance
2 nm
angle based
on database
information
course width
350 ft
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
angle set
by system
Flight Management
CDI scale is set to the smaller of 0.3 nm
or an angle set by the system
CDI Full-scale Deflection
During approach, the CDI scale ramps down even further (see Figures Below). This transition
normally occurs within 2.0 nm of the final approach fix (FAF). The CDI switches to approach scaling
automatically once the approach procedure is activated or if Vector-to-Final (VTF) is selected.
If the active waypoint is the FAF, the ground track and the bearing to the FAF must be within 45° of
the final approach segment course.
If the active waypoint is part of the missed approach procedure, the active leg and preceding missed
approach legs must be aligned with the final approach segment course and the aircraft must not have
passed the turn initiation point.
CDI Full-scale Deflection
•
Audio Panel and CNS
Within 31 nm of the destination airport (terminal area), the CDI scale gradually ramps down from
2.0 nm to 1.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
Upon reaching the first waypoint of an arrival route that is more than 31 nm from the destination
airport, the flight phase changes to terminal and the CDI scale begins to transition down from 2.0
nm to 1.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm.
Engine Indication System
•
Flight Instruments
If after completing the departure procedure the nearest airport is more than 200 nm away from the
aircraft and the approach procedure has not yet commenced, the CDI is scaled for oceanic flight (4.0
nm).
System Overview
•
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
79
Flight Phase
Annunciation*
Automatic CDI Full-scale
Deflection
Departure
DPRT
0.3 nm
Terminal
TERM
1.0 nm
Enroute
ENR
2.0 nm
Oceanic
OCN
4.0 nm
Approach (Nonprecision)
LNAV
1.0 nm decreasing to 350 feet
depending on variables
Approach (Nonprecision with Advisory
Vertical Guidance)
LNAV+V
Approach (Nonprecision with Advisory
Vertical Guidance)
VISUAL
Approach (LNAV/
VNAV)
LNAV
Approach (LPV)
LPV
Approach (Nonprecision with Advisory
Vertical Guidance)
LP+V
Approach (LP)
Missed Approach
1.0 nm decreasing to a specified
course width, then 0.3 nm,
depending on variables
LP
MAPR
0.3 nm
Table 2-2 Automatic GPS CDI Scaling
Changing the selected GPS CDI setting:
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
1) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘AUX - System Setup 1’ Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
Additional Features
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Format Allowed’ in the ‘GPS CDI’ box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENTKey.
5) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob or press the CLR Key.
Appendices
OBS MODE
NOTE: VNV is inhibited while automatic waypoint sequencing has been suspended.
Index
Enabling Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode suspends the automatic sequencing of waypoints in a
GPS flight plan (GPS must be the selected navigation source), but retains the current “active-to”
waypoint as the navigation reference even after passing the waypoint. ‘OBS’ is annunciated to the
lower right of the aircraft symbol when OBS Mode is selected.
80
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Engine Indication System
Extended
Course
Line
OBS Mode
Enabled
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Again
Disables OBS Mode
Automatic Flight Control
System
As the aircraft crosses the missed approach point (MAP), automatic approach waypoint sequencing
is suspended. SUSP appears on the HSI at the lower right of the aircraft symbol. The OBS Softkey
label changes to indicate the suspension is active as shown in the figure. Pressing the SUSP Softkey,
deactivates the suspension and resumes automatic sequencing of approach waypoints.
Hazard Avoidance
NOTE: When OBS mode is active to a VOR waypoint, the course pointer and current track
indicator are relative to the published magnetic variation of the VOR which can be outdated
with respect to the current magnetic variation. Consequently, in OBS mode a slight offset
may exist between indicated heading and selected course and track indicator even when
there is no crosswind.
Flight Management
Figure 2-26 Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode
Audio Panel and CNS
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Enables
OBS Mode
Flight Instruments
GPS
Selected
System Overview
While OBS Mode is enabled, a course line is drawn through the “active-to” waypoint on the
moving map. If desired, the course to/from the waypoint can now be adjusted. When OBS Mode is
disabled, the GPS flight plan returns to normal operation with automatic sequencing of waypoints,
following the course set in OBS Mode. The flight path on the moving map retains the modified
course line.
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
81
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Audio Panel and CNS
SUSP
Softkey
SUSP
Annunciation
Figure 2-27 Suspending Automatic Waypoint Sequencing
Flight Management
Enabling/disabling OBS Mode while navigating a GPS flight plan:
1) Press the OBS Softkey to select OBS Mode.
2) Turn the COM/NAV CRS/XPDR Knob to select the desired course to/from the
Hazard Avoidance
waypoint. Press the COM/NAV CRS/XPDR Knob to synchronize the Selected Course
with the bearing to the next waypoint.
3) Press the OBS Softkey again to return to automatic waypoint sequencing.
BEARING POINTERS AND INFORMATION WINDOWS
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Two bearing pointers (the second of which is an optional feature) and associated information can
be displayed on the HSI for the NAV, GPS and ADF sources. The bearing pointers are cyan and are
single-line (BRG1) or double-line (BRG2). A pointer symbol is shown in the information window to
indicate the navigation source. The bearing pointers never override the CDI and are visually
separated from the CDI by a white ring. Bearing pointers may be selected but not necessarily visible
due to data unavailability.
82
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
System Overview
Tuning Mode
Bearing 1
Pointer
Bearing 2
Pointer
Flight Instruments
Frequency
Distance
DME Information Window
Station
Identifier
Engine Indication System
Distance to
Bearing Source
Bearing
Source
When a bearing pointer is displayed, the associated information window is also displayed. The
Bearing Information Windows are displayed at the lower sides of the HSI and give the following
information:
Hazard Avoidance
Bearing source (NAV,GPS, ADF)
GPS-derived great circle distance to bearing
source
Station/waypoint identifier (NAV, FMS)
•
GPS is the bearing source and an active waypoint is not selected.
Appendices
The NAV radio is not receiving the tuned VOR station
Additional Features
If the NAV radio is the bearing source and is tuned to an ILS frequency (refer to the Audio Panel
and CNS Section for information on tuning the radios), the bearing pointer is removed from the HSI
and the frequency is replaced with “ILS”. When NAV1 or NAV2 is the selected bearing source, the
frequency is replaced by the station identifier when the station is within range. If GPS is the bearing
source, the active waypoint identifier is displayed in lieu of a frequency.
The bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and “NO DATA” is displayed in the information
window under these conditions:
Automatic Flight Control
System
Pointer icon (BRG1 = single line, BRG2 = double Frequency (NAV)
line)
•
Flight Management
Figure 2-28 HSI with Bearing and DME Information
Audio Panel and CNS
Station
Pointer
Identifier
Icon
Bearing 2 Information Window
Bearing
Pointer
Source
Icon
Bearing 1 Information Window
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
83
System Overview
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Selecting bearing display and changing sources:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press either Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey to display the desired bearing pointer and
Flight Instruments
information window with a NAV source.
3) Press either Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey again to change the bearing source to
GPS.
to ADF (note: ADF radio installation is optional).
5) To remove the bearing pointer and information window, press either Bearing 1 or
Bearing 2 Softkey again.
DME INFORMATION WINDOW
The DME Information Window is displayed above the BRG1 Information Window on the 360˚ HSI
and in a box above and along side the Arc HSI. It shows the DME label, tuning mode (NAV1, NAV2, or
HOLD), frequency, and distance. When a signal is invalid, the distance is replaced by –.– – NM Refer to
the Audio Panel and CNS Section for information on tuning the DME.
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
4) Press either Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey a third time to change the bearing source
NOTE: DME installation is optional.
Displaying the DME Information Window:
Hazard Avoidance
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the DME Softkey to display the DME Information Window above the BRG1
Information Window.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
3) To remove the DME Information Window, press the DME Softkey again.
84
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
In addition to the flight instruments, the PFD also displays various supplemental information,
including temperatures, wind data, and Generic Timer.
The generic timer can be accessed via softkeys on the PFD and allows for quick access for timing
functions (either counting up or down) for the pilot.
Flight Instruments
GENERIC TIMER
System Overview
2.3 SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
Engine Indication System
Setting the Generic Timer:
1) Press the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the timer field (HH:MM:SS).
Audio Panel and CNS
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time.
4) Press the ENT Key. The Up/Dn field is now highlighted.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the UP/DOWN Window.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Up’ or ‘Dn’.
Flight Management
7) Press the ENT Key. ‘Start?’ is now highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to ‘Stop?’. If the timer is
counting DOWN, it will start counting UP after reaching zero.
‘Reset?’.
10) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Reset?’ highlighted. The field changes back
Hazard Avoidance
9) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘Stop?’ highlighted. The field changes to
to ‘Start?’ and the digits are reset.
TEMPERATURE DISPLAYS
Additional Features
The Outside Air Temperature (OAT) appears in degrees Celsius (°C) and Fahrenheit (°F) in the
lower-left corner of the PFD in normal operating mode. The system removes OAT displays in
Reversionary Mode.
Automatic Flight Control
System
11) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
Appendices
Figure 2-29 Outside Air Temperature (OAT) on the PFD
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
85
WIND DATA
Wind direction and speed (relative to the aircraft) in knots can be displayed in a window to the
upper left of the HSI. When the window is selected for display, but wind information is invalid or
unavailable, the window shows “NO WIND DATA”. Wind data can be displayed in two different ways:
Option 1
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Audio Panel and CNS
Option 2
Flight Management
No Data
Hazard Avoidance
Figure 2-30 Wind Data on the PFD
Displaying Wind Data on the PFD:
Automatic Flight Control
System
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the Wind Softkey to display wind data.
Additional Features
3) Press one of the Option Softkeys to change how wind data is displayed.
•
Option 1: Wind direction arrow with numeric True direction and speed
•
Option 2: Headwind/tailwind and crosswind arrows with numeric speed components
4) To remove the wind information, press the Off Softkey.
Index
Appendices
5) Press the Back Softkey twice to return to the top-level PFD softkeys.
86
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
The following annunciations and alerting functions are displayed on the PFD. Refer to Appendix A for
more information on alerts and annunciations.
Upon passing through 1000 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude Box changes to black
text on a cyan background, and flashes for five seconds.
•
When the aircraft passes within 200 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude changes to
cyan text on a black background, flashes for five seconds, and the system issues a single aural chime.
•
After reaching the Selected Altitude, if the aircraft flies outside the deviation band (±200 feet of the
Selected Altitude), the Selected Altitude Box changes to amber text on a black background, flashes
for five seconds, and system issues an “altitude” voice alert.
Within 200 ft
Flight Management
Within 1000 ft
Audio Panel and CNS
•
Engine Indication System
The Altitude Alerting function provides visual and audio alerts when approaching the Selected
Altitude. Whenever the Selected Altitude is changed, Altitude Alerting is reset. Altitude Alerting is
based on the altitude information shown on the PFD. Altitude Alerting is independent of the AFCS.
The following occur when approaching the Selected Altitude:
Flight Instruments
ALTITUDE ALERTING
System Overview
2.4 PFD ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTING FUNCTIONS
Deviation of ±200 ft
Hazard Avoidance
Figure 2-31 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations
LOW ALTITUDE ANNUNCIATION
Additional Features
When the Final Approach Fix (FAF) is the active waypoint in a GPS SBAS approach using vertical
guidance, a Low Altitude Annunciation may appear if the current aircraft altitude is at least 164 feet
below the prescribed altitude at the FAF. A black-on-amber ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation appears to the
top left of the Altimeter, flashing for several seconds then remaining displayed until the condition is
resolved.
Automatic Flight Control
System
NOTE: The Low Altitude Annunciation is available only when SBAS is available. If optional
Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B Systems are installed, the Low Altitude annunciation is not shown
unless Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B is inhibited, unavailable, or has failed.
Appendices
Figure 2-32 Low Altitude Annunciation on PFD
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
87
MARKER BEACON ANNUNCIATIONS
Marker Beacon Annunciations are displayed on the PFD to the left of the Selected Altitude. Outer
marker reception is indicated in blue, middle in amber, and inner in white. Refer to the Audio Panel
and CNS Section for more information on Marker Beacon Annunciations.
Outer Marker
Middle Marker
Inner Marker
Altimeter
Figure 2-33 Marker Beacon Annunciations
MINIMUM DESCENT ALTITUDE/DECISION HEIGHT ALERTING
For altitude awareness, a Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) or Decision Height (DH), based on
either barometric altitude or temperature compensated barometric altitude can be set. When active,
the altitude setting is displayed to the lower left of the altimeter, with a bug at the corresponding
altitude along the altimeter (once the altitude is within the visible range of the tape). The following
visual annunciations alert the pilot when approaching the MDA or DH:
•
When the aircraft altitude descends to within 2500 feet of the MDA/DH setting, the BARO MIN, RA
MIN, or COMP MIN box appears with the altitude in cyan (or magenta for COMP MIN) text. The
bug appears on the altitude tape in cyan (or magenta for COMP MIN) once in range.
•
When the aircraft passes through 100 feet of the MDA/DH, the bug and text turn white.
•
Once the aircraft reaches MDA/DH, the bug and text become amber and the voice alert, “Minimums.
Minimums”, is heard.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
88
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Within 100 feet
System Overview
Within 2500 feet
Altitude Reached
Flight Instruments
MDA/DH
Bug
Engine Indication System
MDA/DH
Setting
Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft reaches 150 feet above
the setting for the alert. If the aircraft proceeds to climb after having reached the MDA/DH, once it
reaches 50 feet above the MDA/DH, alerting is disabled. The MDA/DH value is reset if the current
approach is deleted, another approach is loaded, or on the next avionics power cycle.
Audio Panel and CNS
Figure 2-34 Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting Visual Annunciations
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Figure 2-35 BARO and TEMP COMP MDA/DH
Setting the Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height and bug:
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Minimums field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP.’ ‘Off’ is selected by default.
Press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the next field.
Additional Features
4) Use the small FMS Knob to enter the desired altitude (from zero to 16,000 feet).
Automatic Flight Control
System
1) Press the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
5) If TEMP COMP was selected, press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight the next field and then enter the temperature (-59˚C to 59˚C)
6) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the Tmr/Ref Softkey.
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
89
2.5 GARMIN SVT
GARMIN SVT (SYNTHETIC VISION TECHNOLOGY)
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and
traffic avoidance. SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not
provide either the accuracy or reliability upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan
maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
NOTE: Do not use the flight path marker as a flight director.
NOTE: Terrain alerting is not available north of 89º North latitude and south of 89º South
latitude. This is due to limitations present within the Terrain database and the system’s ability
to process the data representing the affected areas.
Garmin SVT™ (Synthetic Vision Technology) is an optional visual enhancement to the system. SVT
depicts a forward-looking attitude display of the topography immediately in front of the aircraft. The
field of view is 29 degrees to the left and 35.5 degrees to the right. In Reversionary Mode, the field of
view is 21.5 degrees to the left and 35.5 degrees to the right. SVT information is shown on the Primary
Flight Display (PFD), or on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. The depicted
imagery is derived from the aircraft attitude, heading, GPS three-dimensional position, and a 4.9 arcsecond database of terrain, obstacles, and other relevant features. The terrain data resolution is 4.9 arcseconds, meaning that the terrain elevation contours are stored in squares measuring 4.9 arc-seconds
on each side, is required for the operation of SVT. Loss of any of the required data, including
temporary loss of the GPS signal, will cause SVT to be disabled (although the softkeys will still appear
functional) until the required data is restored.
The SVT terrain display shows land contours (colors are consistent with those of the topographical
map display), large water features, towers, wind turbines, and other obstacles over 200’ AGL that are
included in the obstacle database. Cultural features on the ground such as roads, highways, railroad
tracks, cities, and state boundaries are not displayed even if those features are found on the MFD map.
The terrain display also includes a north–south east–west grid with lines oriented with true north and
spaced at one arc-minute intervals to assist in orientation relative to the terrain.
Terrain-SVT, which is included with the Garmin-SVT option, or the optional Terrain Awareness and
Warning System (TAWS) provide visual and auditory alerts to indicate the presence of terrain and
obstacle threats relevant to the projected flight path. Terrain alerts are displayed in red and yellow
shading on the PFD.
Garmin-SVT can be displayed on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. If SVT is
enabled when switching to Reversionary Mode, it will take up to 30 seconds to be displayed. The
standard, non-SVT PFD display will be shown in the interim.
The terrain display is intended for situational awareness only. It may not provide the accuracy or
fidelity on which to base decisions and plan maneuvers to avoid terrain or obstacles. Navigation must
not be predicated solely upon the use of the Garmin-SVT or TAWS-B terrain or obstacle data displays.
The following SVT enhancements appear on the PFD:
90
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Horizon Heading Marks
Obstacle Alerting including wire obstacles
Airport Signs
Pathways
Runway Display
Traffic symbols
Flight Instruments
Terrain Alerting
System Overview
Flight Path Marker
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Figure 2-36 Synthetic Vision Imagery
•
Terrain Softkey enables synthetic terrain depiction.
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Index
Pathways Softkey enables display of rectangular boxes that represent course guidance.
Appendices
•
Additional Features
SVT is activated from the PFD using the softkeys located along the bottom edge of the display.
Pressing the softkeys turns the related function on or off. When SVT is enabled, the pitch attitude scale
is reduced from 20 degrees up and down to 10 degrees up to 7.5 degrees down.
SVT functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. The PFD Opt Softkey leads into the PFD
function Softkeys, including synthetic vision. Pressing the SVT Softkey displays the SVT feature
softkeys. The softkeys are labeled Pathways, Terrain, HDG LBL, APT Sign, and Wire. The Back
Softkey returns to the previous level of softkeys. Synthetic Terrain must be active before any other SVT
feature may be activated.
Pathways, HDG LBL, APT Sign, and Wire Softkeys are only available when the Terrain Softkey is
activated (gray with black characters). After activating the Terrain Softkey, the Pathways, HDG LBL,
APT Sign, and Wire softkeys may be activated in any combination to display desired features. When
system power is cycled, the last selected state (on or off) of the Pathways, Terrain, HDG LBL, APT
Sign, and Wire softkeys is remembered by the system.
Automatic Flight Control
System
SVT OPERATION
91
•
HDG LBL Softkey enables horizon heading marks and digits.
•
APT Sign Softkey enables airport signposts.
•
Wire Softkey enables wire obstacle (power line) display.
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Activating and deactivating SVT:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
Engine Indication System
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
3) Press the Terrain Softkey. The SVT display will cycle on or off with the Terrain Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Pathways:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
Audio Panel and CNS
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
3) Press the Pathways Softkey. The Pathway feature will cycle on or off with the
Pathways Softkey.
Flight Management
Activating and deactivating Horizon Headings:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
3) Press the HDG LBL Softkey. The horizon heading display will cycle on or off with the
Hazard Avoidance
HDG LBL Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Airport Signs:
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
Automatic Flight Control
System
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
3) Press the APT Sign Softkey. Display of airport signs will cycle on or off with the APT
Sign Softkey.
Enabling/disabling Wire Obstacles on SVT:
Additional Features
1) Press the PFD Opt Softkey.
2) Press the SVT Softkey.
Index
Appendices
3) Press the Wire Softkey.
92
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
System Overview
SVT FEATURES
Flight Instruments
Synthetic
Terrain
Audio Panel and CNS
Airport
Runway
Zero
Pitch Line
(ZPL) with
Compass
Heading
Marks
Engine Indication System
Flight
Path
Marker
Airplane
Symbol
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
SVT
Softkeys
Figure 2-37 SVT on the Primary Flight Display
AIRPORT SIGNS
Additional Features
Airport Signs provide a visual representation of airport location and identification on the synthetic
terrain display. When activated, the signs appear on the display when the aircraft is approximately
15 nm from an airport and disappear at approximately 4.5 nm. Airport signs are shown without the
identifier until the aircraft is approximately eight nautical miles from the airport. Airport signs are
not shown behind the airspeed or altitude display. Airport signs are activated and deactivated by
pressing the APTSIGNS Softkey.
Automatic Flight Control
System
NOTE: Pathways and terrain features are not a substitute for standard course and altitude
deviation information provided by the altimeter, CDI, and VDI.
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
93
System Overview
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Airport
Sign with
Identifier
(Between
4.5 nm and
8 nm)
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
Airport
Sign
without
Identifier
(Between
8 nm and
15 nm)
Figure 2-38 Airport Signs
FLIGHT PATH MARKER
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
The Flight Path Marker (FPM), also known as a Velocity Vector, is displayed on the PFD at
groundspeeds above 30 knots. The FPM depicts the approximate projected path of the aircraft
accounting for wind speed and direction relative to the three-dimensional terrain display.
The FPM is always available when the Synthetic Terrain feature is in operation. The FPM
represents the direction of the flight path as it relates to the terrain and obstacles on the display,
while the airplane symbol represents the aircraft heading.
The FPM works in conjunction with the Pathways feature to assist the pilot in maintaining desired
altitudes and direction when navigating a flight plan. When on course and altitude the FPM is
aligned inside the pathway boxes as shown.
The FPM may also be used to identify a possible conflict with the aircraft flight path and distant
terrain or obstacles. Displayed terrain or obstacles in the aircraft’s flight path extending above the
FPM could indicate a potential conflict, even before an alert is issued by TAWS. However, decisions
regarding terrain and/or obstacle avoidance should not be made using only the FPM.
94
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
System Overview
Flight Instruments
Flight Path
Marker
(FPM)
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Wind
Vector
Flight Management
Figure 2-39 Flight Path Marker
PATHWAYS
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
95
Index
The color of the rectangular boxes may be magenta, green, or white depending on the route of
flight and navigation source selected. The active GPS or GPS overlay flight plan leg is represented by
Appendices
NOTE: Pathways and terrain features are not a substitute for standard course and altitude
deviation information provided by the altimeter, CDI, and VDI.
Additional Features
Pathways provide a three-dimensional perspective view of the selected route of flight shown as
colored rectangular boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the active flight plan.
The box size represents 700 feet wide by 200 feet tall during enroute, oceanic, and terminal flight
phases. During an approach, the box width is 700 feet or one half full scale deviation on the HSI,
whichever is less. The height is 200 feet or one half full scale deviation on the VDI, whichever is less.
The altitude at which the pathway boxes are displayed is determined by the higher of either the
selected altitude or the VNV altitude programmed for the active leg in the flight plan.
Automatic Flight Control
System
The Horizon Heading is synchronized with the HSI and shows approximately 60 degrees of
compass heading in 30 degree increments on the Zero Pitch Line. Horizon Heading tick marks and
digits appearing on the zero pitch line are not visible behind either the airspeed or altitude display.
Horizon Heading is used for general heading awareness, and is activated and deactivated by pressing
the HDG LBL Softkey.
Hazard Avoidance
HORIZON HEADING
System Overview
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Flight Instruments
magenta boxes that correspond to the Magenta CDI. A localizer course is represented by green boxes
that correspond to a green CDI. An inactive leg of an active flight plan is represented by
white[[ boxes corresponding to a white line drawn on the PFD maps or MFD map indicating an
inactive leg.
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Selected
Altitude
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Programmed
Altitudes
Figure 2-40 Programmed and Selected Altitude
Additional Features
Pathways provide supplemental glidepath/glideslope information on an active ILS, LPV, LNAV/
VNAV, and some LNAV approaches. Pathways are intended as an aid to situational awareness and
should not be used independent of the CDI, VDI, glide path indicator, and glide slope indicator.
They are removed from the display when the selected navigation information is not available.
Pathways are not displayed beyond the active leg when leg sequencing is suspended and are not
displayed on any portion of the flight plan leg that would lead to intercepting a leg in the wrong
direction.
DEPARTURE AND ENROUTE
Index
Appendices
Prior to intercepting an active flight plan leg, pathways are displayed as a series of boxes with
pointers at each corner that point in the direction of the active waypoint. Pathways are not
displayed for the first leg of the flight plan if that segment is a Heading-to-Altitude leg. The first
segment displaying pathways is the first active GPS leg or active leg with a GPS overlay. If this leg
of the flight plan route is outside the SVT field of view, pathways will not be visible until the
96
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
During an approach, Pathways be can shown for the programmed descent, level transition flight,
and at the Selected Altitude within the approach segments. When an approach providing vertical
guidance is activated, the corresponding approach glideslope or glidepath will be displayed using a
color corresponding to the selected navigation source and conditions.
White Pathways represent the next segment of the approach that is not yet active. Magenta
Pathways represent the active segment with GPS as the navigation source. Green Pathways indicate
the ILS/LOC navigation source. During the arrival/approach phases of flight, gray pathways
indicate the anticipated preview glidepath/glideslope. The gray Approach Preview Pathways will be
displayed beginning at the start of the segment leading to the FAF waypoint. With active approach
vertical guidance, the selected altitude will be displayed as a level gray Pathway if the Selected
Altitude is lower than the glidepath/glideslope. The gray Selected Altitude Preview Pathways are
displayed until they converge with the green glideslope or magenta glidepath pathways. If
approach vertical guidance is not yet active, pathways at the Selected Altitude will be displayed in
magenta throughout the arrival/approach.
During an ILS approach, the initial approach segment is displayed in magenta at the segment
altitudes if GPS is the selected as the navigation source on the CDI. When switching to localizer
inbound with the LOC selected as the navigation source on the CDI, pathways are displayed in
green along the localizer and glideslope. VOR, LOC, BC, and ADF approach segments that are
approved to be flown using GPS are displayed in magenta boxes. Segments that are flown using
other than GPS or ILS, such as heading legs or VOR final approach courses are not displayed.
Flight Instruments
DESCENT AND APPROACH
System Overview
aircraft has turned toward this leg. While approaching the center of the active leg and prescribed
altitude, the number of pathway boxes decreases to a minimum of four.
Climb profiles cannot be displayed due to the variables associated with aircraft performance.
Flight plan legs requiring a climb are indicated by pathways displayed at a level above the aircraft
at the altitude selected or programmed.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
97
System Overview
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Selected Altitude
set for Enroute
Flight Instruments
Selected Altitude
set for Departure
Climbs NOT
displayed
by pathway
Non-programmed descents NOT displayed by pathway
Engine Indication System
TOD
Selected Altitude
for Step Down
Audio Panel and CNS
Programmed descent
displayed by pathway
Flight Management
Selected Altitude or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
Figure 2-41 SVT Pathways, Enroute and Descent
Hazard Avoidance
MISSED APPROACH
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Upon activating the missed approach, pathways lead to the Missed Approach Holding Point
(MAHP) and are displayed as a level path at the published altitude for the MAHP, or the selected
altitude, whichever is the highest. If the initial missed approach leg is a Course-to-Altitude (CA)
leg, the pathways boxes will be displayed level at the altitude published for the MAHP. If the initial
missed approach leg is defined by a course using other than GPS, pathways are not displayed for
that segment. In this case, the pathways displayed for the next leg may be outside the field of view
and will be visible when the aircraft has turned in the direction of that leg.
Pathways are displayed along each segment including the path required to track course reversals
that are part of a procedure, such as holding patterns. Pathways boxes will not indicate a turn to a
MAHP unless a defined geographical waypoint exists between the MAP and MAHP.
98
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
System Overview
FAF
Flight Instruments
Descent displayed
by pathway
by pathway
Turn Segment
NOT displayed
by pathway
Audio Panel and CNS
MAP Climbs NOT displayed
Engine Indication System
Selected Altitude
or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
Flight Management
MAHP
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Figure 2-42 SVT Pathways, Approach, Missed Approach, and Holding
RUNWAYS
Appendices
WARNING: Do not use the Garmin SVT runway depiction as the sole means for determining
the proximity of the aircraft to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path
angle during landing.
NOTE: Not all airports have runways with endpoint data in the database, therefore, these
runways are not displayed.
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
99
Index
Runway data provides improved awareness of runway location with respect to the surrounding
terrain. All runway thresholds are depicted at their respective elevations as defined in the database.
In some situations, where threshold elevations differ significantly, crossing runways may appear to be
layered. As runways are displayed, those within 45 degrees of the aircraft heading are displayed in
white. Other runways will be gray in color. When an approach for a specific runway is active, that
runway will appear brighter and be outlined with a white box, regardless of the runway orientation
as related to aircraft heading. As the aircraft gets closer to the runway, more detail such as runway
numbers and centerlines will be displayed.
TRAFFIC
WARNING: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the SVT display or
may appear as a partial symbol.
Traffic symbols are displayed in their approximate locations as determined by the related traffic
systems. Traffic symbols are displayed in three dimensions, appearing larger as they are getting
closer, and smaller when they are further away. Traffic within 250 feet laterally of the aircraft will not
be displayed on the SVT display. Traffic symbols and coloring are consistent with that used for traffic
displayed in the Inset map or MFD traffic page. If the traffic altitude is unknown, the traffic will not
be displayed on the SVT display. For more details refer to the traffic system discussion in the Hazard
Avoidance section.
TERRAIN ALERTING
Terrain alerting on the synthetic terrain display is triggered by Forward-looking Terrain Avoidance
(FLTA) alerts, and corresponds to the yellow terrain shading for a caution alert and the red shading
for a warning alert on the navigation maps and ‘Map - Terrain-SVT’ or ‘Map - TAWS-B’ Pages. For
more detailed information regarding Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B, refer to the Hazard Avoidance
Section.
In some instances, a terrain or obstacle alert may be issued with no conflict shading displayed on
the synthetic terrain. In these cases, the conflict is outside the SVT field of view to the left or right of
the aircraft.
Obstacles are represented on the synthetic terrain display by standard two-dimensional tower or
wind turbine symbols found on map displays. Obstacle symbols appear in the perspective view with
relative height above terrain and distance from the aircraft. Unlike the map displays, which color
obstacles relative to the aircraft’s altitude, obstacles on the synthetic terrain display do not change
colors to warm of potential conflict with the aircraft’s flight path until the obstacle is associated with
an actual FLTA alert. Obstacles greater than 1000 feet below the aircraft altitude are not shown.
Obstacles are shown behind the airspeed and altitude displays.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
100
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
System Overview
Terrain
Annunciation
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Potential
Impact
Area
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Figure 2-43 Terrain Alert
WIREAWARE POWER LINE OBSTACLES
Appendices
The Zero Pitch Line is drawn completely across the display and represents the horizon when the
terrain horizon is difficult to distinguish from other terrain being displayed. It may not align with the
terrain horizon, particularly when the terrain is mountainous or when the aircraft is flown at high
altitudes.
Additional Features
ZERO PITCH LINE
Automatic Flight Control
System
To enhance safety, SVT incorporates Garmin’s WireAware™ wire obstacle technology. WireAware
database information mainly includes Hazardous Obstacle Transmission (HOT) power lines which
are typically high voltage transmission lines depicted on the VFR Sectional charts, and are
considered of special interest to pilots. These include power lines which may span rivers, valleys,
canyons, or be in close proximity to airports/heliports. For wire obstacles present in the obstacle
database, the system shows these on the maps as well as the Synthetic Vision display; see Hazard
Avoidance section for more information about WireAware alerting.
Hazard Avoidance
NOTE: The WireAware obstacle database does not contain all known power lines. And as
such, obstacle avoidance is the sole responsibility of the flight crew.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
101
System Overview
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Flight Instruments
Terrain-SVT
Annunciation
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Potential
Impact
Obstacle
FIELD OF VIEW
The PFD field of view can be represented on the MFD ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page. Two dashed
lines forming a V-shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map, represent the forward viewing
area shown on the PFD.
The following figure compares the PFD forward looking depiction with the MFD plan view and
Field of View turned on.
Lines
Depict PFD
Field of
View
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Figure 2-44 Obsctacle
SVT View on the PFD
Field of View on the MFD
Index
Figure 2-45 PFD and MFD SVT Field of View Comparison
102
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
1) While viewing the ‘Map — Navigation Map’ Page, press the MENU Key to display the
System Overview
Enabling/disabling SVT Field of View on the Navigation Map Page:
page menu.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the ‘Map’ Group options to ‘Field of View’.
Engine Indication System
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
Flight Instruments
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Map Settings’ and press the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ page.
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
103
2.6 ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
ABNORMAL GPS CONDITIONS
The annunciations listed in the table below can appear on the HSI when abnormal GPS conditions
occur. Refer to the Flight Management Section for more information on Dead Reckoning Mode.
Annunciatio
n
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Audio Panel and CNS
GPS LOI
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
GPS
INTEG OK
Location
Description
Right of HSI
Loss of Integrity
Monitoring–GPS integrity
is insufficient for the
current phase of flight
Right of HSI
Integrity OK–GPS integrity
has been restored to
within normal limits
(annunciation displayed
for 5 seconds)
Lower left of
aircraft symbol if
HSI Map is
disabled, or on
aircraft icon if
HSI Map
enabled
Dead Reckoning–System is
using projected position
rather than GPS position
to compute navigation
data and sequence active
flight plan waypoints
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Table 2-3 Abnormal GPS Conditions Annunciated on HSI
In Dead Reckoning Mode, the CDI is removed (when GPS is the selected navigation source), and the
following items on the PFD are then shown in amber:
•
Current Track Bug
•
Wind Data
Index
Appendices
Figure 2-46 Example HSI Annunciations
104
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Distances in the Bearing Information windows
•
GPS bearing pointers
System Overview
•
COMPARATOR ANNUNCIATIONS
Audio Panel and CNS
No Compare
Annunciations
Flight Management
Miscompare
Annunciations
Hazard Avoidance
Figure 2-47 Sensor Comparator Annunciations on the PFD
ALT
IAS
PIT
ALT
IAS
If either airspeed sensor detects > 35 knots, and the difference in
sensors is > 10 knots
If either airspeed sensor detects > 80 knots, and the difference in
sensors is > 7 knots.
Difference in heading sensors is > 6 degrees.
Difference in pitch sensors is > 5 degrees.
Difference in roll sensors is > 6 degrees.
Appendices
ROL
Difference in altitude sensors is > 200 ft.
Additional Features
HDG
Condition
Automatic Flight Control
System
Annunciation
Engine Indication System
The Comparator monitors critical values generated by redundant sensors. If differences in the
sensors exceed a specified amount, a miscompare annunciation is displayed in black text on an amber
background. If one or both of the sensed values are unavailable, a no compare annunciation is
displayed with black text on a white background. Refer to the Appendix A for more information on
alerts and annunciations.
Flight Instruments
These items should be verified when operating in Dead Reckoning Mode and they become
increasingly inaccurate over time.
No data from one or both altitude sensors.
No data from one or both airspeed sensors.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
105
System Overview
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Annunciation
HDG
Flight Instruments
PIT
ROL
Condition
No data from one or both heading sensors.
No data from one or both pitch sensors.
No data from one or both roll sensors.
REVERSIONARY SENSOR ANNUNCIATIONS
Reversionary sensor selection (Dual ADAHRS only) for the AHRS and ADC is annunciated on the
above the roll scale on the PFD. Reversionary sensor selection for the GPS is annunciated to the right
of the HSI. These annunciations reflect reversionary sensors selected on the PFD. Pressing the PFD
Opt Softkey accesses the Sensors Softkey. Pressing the Sensors Softkey accesses the ADC and AHRS
softkeys These softkeys allow switching of the sensors being viewed on the PFD. With certain types of
sensor failures, the system may make some sensor selections automatically. The GPS sensor cannot be
switched manually.
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Table 2-4 Sensor Comparator Annunciations
Figure 2-48 Reversionary Sensor Annunciations
Reversionary Sensor Window
Text
Condition
PFD1 is displaying data from the #2 Air Data Computer
Index
Appendices
PFD1 is displaying data from the #2 AHRS.
Table 2-5 Reversionary Sensor Annunciations
SVT TROUBLESHOOTING
SVT is intended to be used with traditional attitude, heading, obstacle, terrain, and traffic inputs.
SVT is disabled when valid attitude or heading data is not available for the display. In case of invalid
SVT data, the PFD display reverts to the standard blue-over-brown attitude display.
106
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
System Overview
SVT becomes disabled without the following data resources:
Attitude data
•
Heading data
•
GPS position data
•
4.9 Arc-second Terrain data
•
Obstacle data
•
TAWS/Terrain-SVT function is not available, in test mode, or failed
•
The position of the aircraft exceeds the range of the terrain database.
Flight Instruments
•
Engine Indication System
SVT IN REVERSIONARY MODE
UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
Nose High
Nose Low
Flight Management
When the aircraft enters an unusual pitch attitude, red chevrons pointing toward the horizon warn
of extreme pitch. The chevrons are displayed on the Attitude Indicator, starting at 50˚ above and 30˚
below the horizon line.
Audio Panel and CNS
SVT can be displayed on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. If it is enabled
when switching to Reversionary Mode, SVT will take up to 30 seconds to be displayed. The standard,
non-SVT PFD display will be shown in the interim.
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
PFD Setup Menu
AFCS Annunciations
Windows displayed in the lower Vertical Deviation, Glideslope, and
right corner of the PFD:
Glidepath Indicators
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Minimum Descent Altitude/
Decision Height readout
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
107
Index
Traffic Annunciations
Appendices
If pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚ or bank exceeds 65˚, some information displayed on the PFD is removed.
The Altimeter and Airspeed, Attitude, Vertical Speed, and Horizontal Situation indicators remain on
the display and the Bearing Information, Alerts, and Annunciation windows can be displayed during
such situations. The following information is removed from the PFD and its softkeys are disabled
when the aircraft experiences unusual attitudes:
Additional Features
Figure 2-49 Pitch Attitude Warnings with SVT Disabled
Inset Map
— References Window
Altimeter Barometric Setting
Outside Air Temperature
(OAT)
— Nearest Airports
Selected Altitude
Wind data
— Flight Plan
VNV Target Altitude
Selected Heading readout
— Messages
Ground Speed
Selected Course readout
— Procedures
True Airspeed
Transponder Status Box
System Time
SVT UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
During extreme pitch attitudes, the display shows either a brown or blue colored bar at the top or
bottom of the screen to represent earth or sky. The blue colored bar is also displayed when terrain
gradient is great enough to completely fill the display. This is intended to prevent losing sight of the
horizon during extreme pitch attitudes.
Nose High
Nose Low
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Figure 2-50 Pitch Attitude Warnings with SVT Enabled
108
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
System Overview
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
NOTE: Refer to the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) for limitations.
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
The system offers improved flight operations and reduces crew workload by automatically
monitoring critical system parameters and providing system alerts during all phases of flight. The
Engine Indication System (EIS) displays electrical, fuel, and engine information on the left side of the
Multi Function Display (MFD). EIS information can also be fully expanded to an entire page by
pressing the Engine Softkey. In Reversionary Mode, the display-combines Primary Flight Display
(PFD) symbology with the EIS.
Green bands on the instruments indicate normal ranges of operation; amber and red bands indicate
caution and warning, respectively. White or uncolored bands indicate areas outside of normal
operation. When unsafe operating conditions occur, the corresponding displays, pointers, and labels
change color corresponding to the level of the condition; warnings also flash (except fuel at
destination). If sensory data to an instrument becomes invalid or unavailable, an amber 'X' is displayed
across the instrument. However, the numeric displays in the Fuel Calculation Box, TKS FIKI Anti Ice
Box (optional), and the density altitude in the Air Data Box are replaced with dashes instead of 'X's
when the data is invalid or out of range.
Flight Management
EIS Display
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Figure 3-1 MFD (SR20)
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
109
3.1 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM (EIS) DISPLAY
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
1
1
2
2
3
3
Target
Fuel
Flow
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
(SR20)
Target
Fuel
Flow
(SR22 - Normal Aspirated)
Index
Appendices
Figure 3-2 EIS Display
110
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
System Overview
1
Flight Instruments
2
3
Engine Indication System
4
Target
Fuel
Flow
Audio Panel and CNS
5
6
Flight Management
7
8
9
Hazard Avoidance
10
Automatic Flight Control
System
12
11
Additional Features
Figure 3-3 EIS Display (SR22T)
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
111
Max Continuous Flow
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Best Econo my
1
Percent Power Indicator
(% Pwr)
Displays engine power as a percentage.
2
Tachometer (RPM)
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute.
3
Engine Manifold Pressure Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury to indicate
engine power.
Indicator (Man "Hg)
4
Fuel Quantity Indicator
(GAL)
Fuel Flow Indicator
(FFlow GPH)
Displays fuel quantities, in gallons, for the left (L) and right (R)
fuel tanks.
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour.
(SR20, SR22T Only) Displays a cyan target fuel flow indicator for
Lean of Peak to the right of the fuel flow indicator strip.
(SR22 Only) Displays black band indicator for Rich of Peak and
Lean of Peak fuel flow targets. See Figure 3-4 for example of
Max Continuous Flow, Best Power, and Best Economy
indications.
5
Gallons Used Indicator
(Gal Used)
6
Oil Temperature Indicator Displays engine oil temperature in degrees Fahrenheit.
(Oil ºF)
7
Oil Pressure Indicator (Oil Displays pressure of oil supplied to the engine in pounds per
square inch (psi).
PSI)
8
Ammeter (Batt1 A)
Displays the battery 1 load in amperes.
9
Voltmeter (ESS Bus V)
Displays the essential bus voltage in volts.
10
Cylinder Head
Temperature Indicator
(CHT ºF)
Displays the head temperature of the hottest cylinder (CHT;
cylinder number is shown below bar).
Displays the fuel used in gallons.
Index
Appendices
Best Power
Figure 3-4 EIS Fuel Flow Performance Indications
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
112
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Exhaust Gas Temperature Displays the exhaust gas temperature (cylinder number is shown
below bar) (normally aspirated models only, shown in Figure
Indicator (EGT ºF)
3-2).
12
Displays the temperature at the left (L) and right (R) turbine inlet
(Turbo models only, shown in Figure 3-3).
Engine Indication System
Left and Right Turbine
Inlet Temperature
Flight Instruments
Displays the exhaust gas temperature and turbine inlet
Exhaust Gas
Temperature/Turbine Inlet temperature (cylinder number or turbine inlet side is shown
below bar) (Turbo models only, shown in Figure 3-3).
Temperature Indicator
(EGT/TIT ºF)
System Overview
11
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
113
3.2 ENGINE PAGE
Pressing the Engine Softkey accesses the EIS - Engine Page, which displays all engine, fuel, fuel
calculation, electrical, air data, and optional ice protection information. Pressing the optional Anti-Ice
Softkey accesses the second-level softkeys. Pressing the Fuel-W&B Softkey accesses the second-level
softkeys.
NOTE: The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the
approved flight manual limitations. This option is only available on SR22 and SR22T models.
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Engine
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Displays full Engine Page and second-level
engine softkeys; press again to return to the EIS
Display and top-level softkeys (see the EIS
Section for more information).
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Anti-Ice
(Optional)
Displays Anti-Ice softkeys (optional -TKS FIKI
only; See Operational Note above).
Left
Selects manual mode and opens the left tank
valve and closes the right tank valve.
Auto
Selects auto tank selection mode.
Right
Selects manual mode and opens the right tank
valve and closes the left tank valve.
Back
Returns to the EIS Display and top-level
softkeys.
DCLTR
Removes bars and temperature displays from
the Engine Temperature Box.
Assist
Identifies EGT peaks.
Fuel-W&B
Fuel W&B Information.
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Description
Full
Sets onboard fuel quantity to full.
Tabs
Resets fuel totalizer to tabs (usable fuel).
Undo
Resets to the initial usable fuel amount shown
on the Initial Usable Fuel Page.
Fuel-W&B
Displays the Aux - W&B Page.
1
Percent Power
Indicator (% Pwr)
Displays engine power as a percentage.
2
Tachometer (RPM
x100)
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute.
Index
Appendices
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for engine operating limitations.
114
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
System Overview
Displays manifold pressure in inches of mercury to indicate engine
power.
4
Fuel Flow Indicator
(FFlow GPH)
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour.
(SR20, SR22T Only) Displays a cyan target fuel flow indicator for Lean
of Peak to the right of the fuel flow indicator strip.
(SR22 Only) Displays black band indicator for Rich of Peak and Lean of
Peak fuel flow targets.
5
Oil Temperature
and Pressure
Indicators (Oil °F
PSI)
Displays oil temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F) and pressure in
pounds per square inch (psi).
6
Electrical Group
(Electrical)
Displays the alternator and battery current in amperes and the
essential and main bus voltage.
7
Fuel Calculation
Group (Fuel
Calculation)
Displays calculated fuel at destination, fuel used, fuel remaining, time
remaining, range (in nautical miles) and economy (in nautical miles per
gallon) based on the displayed fuel remaining and the fuel flow
totalizer.
8
Fuel Quantity
Indicator
Displays fuel quantities, in gallons, for the left (L) and right (R) fuel
tanks.
9
Air Data
Displays density altitude, outside air temperature (OAT) in °F and °C,
and international standard atmosphere (ISA) temperature deviation.
10
Oxygen Pressure
Indicator
Displays oxygen pressure in tank in pounds per square inch (optional).
11
Anti-Ice Fluid
Quantity Indicator
(TKS FIKI)
TKS FIKI – Displays the quantity of anti-ice fluid remaining in the left (L)
and right (R) tanks in gallons (optional – See Operational Note below).
12
Engine Temperature Displays head (CHT) and exhaust gas temperatures (EGT) of all
cylinders in °F (all models) and turbine inlet temperatures (turbo
Group (Engine
models only).
Temperatures)
Engine Indication System
Engine Manifold
Pressure Indicator
(Man "Hg)
Flight Instruments
3
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
NOTE: Depictions of equipment may differ from the installed equipment. Examples shown
may not represent all possible aircraft configurations.
Additional Features
NOTE: The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the
approved flight manual limitations. This option is only available on SR22 and SR22T models.
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
115
System Overview
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Target Fuel
Flow Indicator
2
3
4
5
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
1
6
Audio Panel and CNS
12
7
Flight Management
8
9
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Figure 3-5 Engine Page (SR20)
116
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
System Overview
Target Fuel
Flow Indicator
2
3
4
5
Flight Instruments
1
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
6
12
7
Flight Management
8
11
9
Hazard Avoidance
10
Figure 3-6 Engine Page (SR22) with TKS FIKI and Oxygen
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
117
System Overview
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
2
3
4
Target Fuel
Flow Indicator
5
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
1
6
Audio Panel and CNS
12
7
11
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
8
9
10
Figure 3-7 Engine Page (SR22T) with TKS FIKI and Oxygen
FUEL CALCULATIONS
NOTE: Fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated
from the last time the fuel was reset.
Fuel used (Used), time remaining (Time Rem), range (in nautical miles), and economy (Econ) are
calculated based on the displayed fuel remaining (Rem) and the fuel flow totalizer. The calculated
range is based upon ground speed, distance, economy, and fuel remaining. See the Flight Management
Section for information regarding the map feature related to the EIS Fuel Calculations.
Additional Features
Adjusting the fuel totalizer quantity:
1) Press the Engine Softkey to display the Engine Page.
2) Press the Fuel — W&B Softkey to access the Initial Usable Fuel Page.
3) Turn the FMS Knob (small knob adjusts in 1 gallon increments and large knob in 10
Index
Appendices
gallon increments) to increase or decrease the initial usable fuel displayed.
118
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Calculated
Econo my
Fuel
Remaining
Flight Instruments
Calculated
Time
Remaining
System Overview
Calculated
Fuel Used
Calculated
Range
Engine Indication System
Figure 3-8 Fuel Calculation Group
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Change in
Fuel Level
Compu ted
Fuel Remaining
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Figure 3-9 Full Fuel (SR22 shown as example) Initial Usable Fuel Page
The system interfaces with the optional TKS Flight Into Known Icing (FIKI) anti-ice system. Refer to
the applicable Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for a detailed system description of the installed ice
protection system.
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
119
Index
The FIKI system offers five pilot-selectable (external to the system) modes of operation and a more
sophisticated quantity indicator located on the full Engine Page. To accommodate the additional
modes, the TKS FIKI system employs several additional sensors. The system receives inputs from these
sensors and provides indications as to the status of the TKS FIKI system.
Appendices
NOTE: The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the
approved flight manual limitations. This option is only available on SR22 and SR22T models.
Additional Features
TKS FLIGHT INTO KNOWN ICING (FIKI) ANTI-ICE SYSTEM
AUTO TANK SELECTION MODE
In the default tank selection mode (Auto), the system assures that the fluid levels of the two tanks
are kept relatively even by periodically closing the tank with the lowest level. The system uses the
anti-ice fluid tank quantities to control the tank shut-off valves. When the system is on and
operating in Auto mode, the shut-off valves close under the following conditions:
•
The fluid quantity is empty (indicated from the fluid level sensor and level switch)
•
The left and right tank level imbalance is greater than 0.25 gallons (low tank will be closed until
level balance is within 0.15 gallons)
•
The fluid quantity is unreliable (a miscompare between the level sensor and level switch or an out
of range level sensor value)
While operating in Auto mode a white box is displayed around the ‘L’ and ‘R’, located on top of
each fluid quantity indicator, when both tanks are open (Figure 3-10). During normal operation, the
white box will highlight the left or right tanks as the fluid levels change.
Figure 3-10 Auto Tank Mode (Normal)
If a fluid level comparison fault is detected (the fluid level sender disagrees with the fluid level
switch for a particular tank) the corresponding fluid quantity indicator is grayed out (Figure 3-11)
and that quantity is not used in the endurance and range calculations. When the fluid level sender is
out of range, the fluid quantity indicator is marked with an amber ‘X’ (Figure 3-12)
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Appendices
Figure 3-11 Fluid Level Unreliable
Index
Figure 3-12 Fluid Level Out Of Range
120
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Left Softkey – opens left tank valve and closes right tank valve
•
Auto Softkey – returns to Auto tank mode
•
Right Softkey – opens right tank valve and closes left tank valve
While operating in manual tank mode, only the selected/open tank’s quantity is used for the range
and endurance calculations.
Engine Indication System
•
Flight Instruments
Manual tank mode allows the pilot to control either tank’s shut-off valve. Manual may be selected
by pressing the Anti-Ice Softkey to access the second-level softkeys Left, Auto, and Right. A cyan
box is displayed around the selected tank, gallons remaining in the selected tank, and pump
operating mode.
System Overview
MANUAL TANK MODE
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Figure 3-13 Manual Tank Mode (Right tank selected)
PUMP OPERATING MODES
The Ice Protection systems consists of various pump operating modes listed below.
Operating Mode
System Operation
Hazard Avoidance
NOTE: The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the
approved flight manual limitations. This option is only available on SR22 and SR22T models.
Comments
Automatic Flight Control
System
System Off
No modes selected
Norm
Both pumps operate on a timed,
Provides 50% flow rate for light/
repeating cycle – 30 seconds ON and moderate icing †
90 seconds OFF
High
A single pump (#1) operates
continuously
Max (momentary)
Both pumps operate continuously for Provides 200% flow rate for severe
120 seconds
icing or to expedite the removal of
previous ice buildup †
Provides 100% flow rate for
moderate icing †
Additional Features
OFF
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
121
System Overview
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Flight Instruments
Pump Bkup
A single pump (#2) operates
continuously
This mode is used in the event of a
timer box failure or when Backup
mode is selected. Pump #2 provides
100% flow rate, bypassing the timer
box †
† — Refer to the POH for pilot recommended actions
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Table 3-1 FIKI System Operating Modes
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Figure 3-14 Normal Operating Mode
Appendices
Additional Features
Figure 3-15 High Operating Mode
Index
Figure 3-16 Max Operating Mode
122
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
System Overview
Flight Instruments
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
123
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Engine Indication System
Figure 3-17 Pump Backup Mode
3.3 LEANING ASSIST MODE
NOTE: The pilot should follow the engine manufacturer’s recommended leaning procedures
in the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH).
A leaning assist function is available on the Engine Page to assist in the leaning process.
When the Assist Softkey is pressed, the system initially highlights the number and places a cyan box
around the EGT display of the cylinder with the hottest EGT. The Δ Peak temperature is the difference
between the peak temperature and the present temperature for the peaked cylinder. When the first
peak is detected, “1st” is annunciated below that cylinder’s EGT bar and the temperature is enclosed in
a cyan box.
The system continues to detect peak EGTs for each cylinder lean of peak as the fuel flow is
decreased, and the peak of each cylinder’s EGT is indicated by a cyan marker on the graph. Once all
cylinders are lean of peak, the last cylinder to peak is denoted by the “Last” annunciation below its bar
on the graph.
Cyan Box
Rep rese nts Peak
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Hazard Avoidance
Tempe rature
Deviation
from Peak
Figure 3-18 Leaning Assist Mode
Automatic Flight Control
System
Accessing Leaning Assist Mode:
1) Press Engine softkey to display the Engine Page.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
2) Press the Assist Softkey to identify peaks.
124
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Flight Instruments
In reversionary mode, the display combines PFD symbology with the EIS Display (refer to the
System Overview for information about display Reversionary Mode).
In reversionary mode, the EIS is separated into two displays: Engine (identical to the normal EIS
Display on the MFD) and System. For a description of the EIS Display, refer to Section 3.1. The System
Display shows various system parameters and fuel calculations.
System Overview
3.4 REVERSIONARY MODE
Engine Indication System
EIS Display
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Figure 3-19 Reversionary Mode (SR22T)
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for limitations.
Percent Power Indicator
(% Pwr)
Displays engine power as a percentage.
2
Tachometer (RPM)
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute.
3
Engine Manifold Pressure
Indicator (Man "Hg)
Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury to indicate
engine power.
Appendices
1
Additional Features
In Reversionary Mode, the EIS System Display shows the engine, fuel calculations, electrical, and
various system parameters. Fuel calculations are based on the displayed fuel remaining and the fuel flow
totalizer.
Automatic Flight Control
System
NOTE: Fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated
anytime the initial usable fuel is changed.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
125
4
Fuel Calculation Group
(Fuel Calc)
Displays calculated fuel at destination, fuel used, fuel
remaining, time remaining, range (in nautical miles) and
economy (in nautical miles per gallon) based on the displayed
fuel remaining and the fuel flow totalizer.
5
Electrical Group
(Electrical)
Displays the alternator and battery current in amperes and the
essential and main bus voltage.
6
Miscellaneous (Misc)
Displays engine hours, anti-ice gallons (optional) and oxygen
pressure (optional).
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
5
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
5
Appendices
6
Figure 3-21 System Display (SR22 Models
with optional Anti-Ice and Oxygen)
Index
Figure 3-20 System Display (SR20)
6
126
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
System Overview
Accessing the EIS System Display:
1) Press Engine softkey.
2) Press the System Softkey.
Flight Instruments
3) To return to the default Engine Display, press the Engine or Back Softkey.
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
127
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
BLANK PAGE
128
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
System Overview
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.1 OVERVIEW
•
Multi Function Display (MFD)
•
Integrated Avionics Unit (2)
•
Audio Panel
•
Mode S Transponder
•
Control Unit
Audio Panel and CNS
Primary Flight Display (PFD)
Engine Indication System
•
Flight Instruments
The Communication/Navigation/Surveillance (CNS) system includes the Audio Panel,
communication radios, navigation radios, and a Mode S transponder. The System Overview Section
provides a block diagram description of the Audio Panels and CNS system interconnection.
CNS operation is performed by the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
The MFD/PFD controls are used to tune the communication transceivers and navigation radios.
The Audio Panel provides the traditional audio selector functions of microphone and receiver audio
selection. The Audio Panel includes an intercom system (ICS) between the pilot, copilot, and
passengers, a marker beacon system, and a COM clearance recorder. Ambient noise from the aircraft
radios is reduced by a feature called Master Avionics Squelch (MASQ). When no audio is detected,
MASQ processing further reduces the amount of background noise from the radios.
The Mode-S transponder is controlled with softkeys and the FMS Knob located on the Primary
Flight Display (PFD). The Transponder Data Box is located to the left of the System Time Box. The
data box displays the active four-digit code, mode, and reply status.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
129
System Overview
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
MFD/PFD CONTROLS AND FREQUENCY DISPLAY
2
3
4
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
1
5
Hazard Avoidance
6
7
Automatic Flight Control
System
8
1
COM Frequency Box – Displays COM standby and active frequency fields and volume. The
selected and decoded COM transceiver frequency is displayed in green.
2
COM Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz;
small knob for kHz). Press to move the frequency selected for tuning (cyan digits) and
Frequency Transfer Arrow between COM1 and COM2
3
COM Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies. Press
and hold this key for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz)
automatically into the active frequency field.
4
COM VOL/SQ Knob — Controls COM audio volume level. Press to turn the COM automatic
squelch on and off. Volume level is shown in the COM frequency field as a percentage.
5
DME Tuning Window — Displays DME frequency pairing mode. Display by pressing the
DME Softkey.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Figure 4-1 PFD Controls, COM Frequency Tuning Boxes, Transponder Code, and DME
Tuning Window
130
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
7
FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob, used to enter transponder codes and Autotune entries when NRST Window is present. Press the FMS Knob to turn the selection cursor
on and off. The large knob moves the cursor in the window. The small knob selects
individual characters for the highlighted cursor location.
8
Transponder Data Box – Indicates the selected transponder code, operating mode, reply,
and ident status for the transponder.
10
11
Engine Indication System
9
Flight Instruments
ENT Key – Validates or confirms DME pairing mode and Auto-tune selection.
System Overview
6
12
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Figure 4-2 MFD Controls and NAV Frequency Tuning Boxes
9
Appendices
NAV VOL/ID Knob — Controls NAV audio volume level. Press to turn the Morse code
identifier audio on and off. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a
percentage.
10 NAV Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
131
11 NAV Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small
knob for kHz). Press to move the tuning box (light blue box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow
between NAV1 and NAV2.
12 NAV Frequency Box – Displays NAV standby and active frequency fields, volume, and
station ID. The frequency of the NAV radio selected for navigation is displayed in green.
AUDIO PANEL CONTROLS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
24
25
10
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Flight Management
11
20
21
GMA 350 Controls
23
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
22
26
Additional Features
GMA 350c (Bluetooth) Controls
Figure 4-3 GMA 350/350c Audio Panel Controls
Index
Appendices
NOTE: When a key is selected, a triangular annunciator above the key is illuminated.
132
1
MKR/MUTE – Selects marker beacon receiver audio. Mutes the currently received marker
beacon receiver audio. Deactivates automatically and marker beacon audio is heard when
the next marker beacon signal is received. Also, stops play of recorded COM audio
2
COM1 – When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard.
3
COM2 – When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard.
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
System Overview
7
MUS 1 – Selects and deselects music entertainment audio. Press and hold to enable/disable
MUS1 muting during reception.
8
MUS 2 – Selects and deselects music entertainment audio. Press and hold to enable/disable
MUS2 muting during reception.
9
MAN SQ – Manual Squelch annunciator. When lit, intercom squelch is controlled manually.
10
Volume Indicator – Indicates volume/squelch setting relative to full scale.
11
Front Panel Jack – Used for an entertainment or telephone input.
12
MIC1 – Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected
when this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard.
COM2 receive can be added by pressing the COM2 Key. Selection of a second MIC button
initiates Split-COM mode. When in Split-COM mode, the pilot is using COM1, the copilot is
using the COM2.
13
MIC2 – Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected
when this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard.
COM1 receive can be added by pressing the COM1 Key. Selection of a second MIC button
initiates Split-COM mode. When in Split-COM mode, the pilot is using COM1, the copilot is
using the COM2.
14
PLAY – Press once to play the latest recorded memory block. Press while audio is playing
begins playing the previously recorded memory block. Each subsequent press thereafter
plays the previous block of memory.
15
AUX – When selected, audio from the ADF and DME (if equipped) can be heard
16
PILOT – Controls the pilot intercom isolation.
17
COPLT – Controls the copilot intercom system. Press and hold to toggle copilot
configuration between crew and passenger.
18
PASS – Controls the passenger intercom system. Press and hold to enable/disable passenger
muting during reception.
19
SPKR – Selects and deselects the cabin speaker. COM, NAV, AUX, and MKR receiver audio
can be heard on the speaker. Press and hold for 2 seconds for Passenger Address (PA). The
SPKR Key flashes during PA.
20
Cursor (CRSR) Control Knob – Turn to move the cursor (flashing white or blue
annunciator) to the desired source.
21
Volume (VOL) Control Knob – Turn the smaller knob to control volume or squelch of the
selected source (indicated by the flashing white or blue annunciator). When the volume
control cursor is not active press to switch to Blue-Select mode. If the volume control cursor
is active, press twice (once to cancel the cursor, twice to activate Blue-Select mode).
Appendices
133
Index
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Additional Features
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control
System
– Selects and deselects audio from a telephone or entertainment device connected to
the Front Panel Jack. Audio from a telephone device connected to the rear of the audio
panel is used if a device is not connected to the Front Panel Jack. Press and hold to enable/
disable
muting during reception.
Hazard Avoidance
6
Flight Management
NAV2 – When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.
Audio Panel and CNS
5
Engine Indication System
NAV1 – When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.
Flight Instruments
4
22
Bluetooth® Connection Annunciator – (GMA 350c only) A flashing blue annunciator
indicates the unit is discoverable. A solid blue annunciator indicates an active Bluetooth
connection.
23
Key Annunciator – (GMA 350c only) Assigns the Bluetooth device to the
audio
source. Press the
key until the annunciator turns blue. The key annunciator will cycle
from OFF to WHITE to BLUE. WHITE selects the wired audio source and BLUE selects the
Bluetooth audio source. NOTE: The Bluetooth audio can only be assigned to one source at a
time. Once the Bluetooth audio is assigned to an audio source, the remaining entertainment
audio sources will only cycle between OFF and WHITE.
24
MUS1 Key Annunciator – (GMA 350c only) Assigns the Bluetooth device to the MUS1
audio source. Press the MUS1 key until the annunciator turns blue. The key annunciator will
cycle from OFF to WHITE to BLUE. WHITE selects the wired audio source and BLUE selects
the Bluetooth audio source. NOTE: The Bluetooth audio can only be assigned to one source
at a time. Once the Bluetooth audio is assigned to an audio source, the remaining
entertainment audio sources will only cycle between OFF and WHITE.
25
MUS2 Key Annunciator – (GMA 350c only) Assigns the Bluetooth device to the MUS2
audio source. Press the MUS2 key until the annunciator turns blue. The key annunciator will
cycle from OFF to WHITE to BLUE. WHITE selects the wired audio source and BLUE selects
the Bluetooth audio source. NOTE: The Bluetooth audio can only be assigned to one source
at a time. Once the Bluetooth audio is assigned to an audio source, the remaining
entertainment audio sources will only cycle between OFF and WHITE.
26
Control Knob Press and Hold – (GMA 350c only) Press and hold for two seconds to enable
the GMA 350c as discoverable for pairing. The Bluetooth Annunciator with flash to indicate
that the unit is discoverable. The unit will remain discoverable for 90 seconds or until a
successful pair is established. Once a successful pair is established, the audio “Bluetooth
paired” is played.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
134
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
System Overview
CONTROL UNIT
Tuning Selection
Box
Flight Instruments
2
6
5
4
9
8
Engine Indication System
1
3
Audio Panel and CNS
15
Flight Management
10
11
7
Hazard Avoidance
Additional Features
13
Automatic Flight Control
System
12
14
Figure 4-4 Control Unit and Frequency Tuning Display on the PFD
2
ENT Key – Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
3
COM/NAV/CRS/XPDR Knob – Dual concentric knob used for data entry in one of four
modes. NAV/COM Tuning Modes: Acts as the NAV or COM Knob. XPDR Mode: Acts as the
XPDR Softkey.
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Index
MENU Key – Displays a list of options for accessing additional features or making setting
changes.
Appendices
1
135
BLUE Indicators – Indicates one of four modes is always active. Pressing the COM, NAV, CRS
or XPDR key selects that mode.
5
COM Key – Selects COM radio tuning mode on the Control Unit. The COM tuning box is
outlined with a cyan selection line when the COM frequency is active on the control unit.
Flight Instruments
6
FMS Knob – Activates the Control Unit cursor on pages that allow flight crew data input. It is
used to select DME modes, and Auto-tune entries when a NRST or WPT Window is present.
Press the FMS Knob to turn the selection cursor on and off. The large knob moves the cursor
in the window. The small knob selects individual characters for the highlighted cursor location.
7
HOME Key – Defaults to Navigation Map on the MFD.
8
XPDR Key – Places Control Unit in Transponder Mode. Transponder code entry can be
performed with either the number keypad or COM/NAV/CRS/XPDR Knob.
9
NAV Key – Selects NAV radio tuning mode on the Control Unit. The NAV tuning box is
outlined with a cyan selection line when the NAV frequency is active on the control unit.
10 CLR Key – Erases information, cancels entries, or removes menus.
11 Frequency Transfer Key (EMERG) – Transfers the standby and active COM or NAV
frequencies. Press and hold for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz)
automatically into the COM active frequency field.
12 Alphanumeric Keys – Allows data entry (rather than using the COM/NAV/CRS/XPDR Knob to
select characters/numbers). The numeric keys are white when entering data on the MFD and
blue when entering radio frequencies and transponder codes.
13 Decimal Key – Enters a decimal point.
14 BKSP Key – Moves cursor back one character space and removes last character entered.
15 IDENT Key – Pressing the IDENT key sends a distinct identity indication to Air Traffic Control
(ATC). A green IDENT indication is displayed in the PFD mode field of the Transponder Data
Box for a duration of 18 seconds. A white IDENT indicator is displayed on the Control Unit.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
4
Engine Indication System
System Overview
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
136
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
System Overview
4.2 COM OPERATION
COM TUNING BOXES
2
3
4
5
Engine Indication System
6
Flight Instruments
1
7
Audio Panel and CNS
8
NOTE: When turning on the system for use, the system remembers the last frequencies used
and the active COM transceiver state prior to shutdown.
3
Standby Field – The COM Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two standby
frequencies are on the right. Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in either cyan or
gray. The standby frequency that is selected for tuning is cyan. The other standby frequency is
gray.
4
Selected Tuning Frequency – The frequency selected for tuning is cyan and moves between
the upper and lower radio frequency fields with the Frequency Transfer Arrow. Indicates which
standby COM transceiver frequency is selected for tuning.
5
Automatic Squelch Indication – Indicates that Automatic Squelch is disabled. Automatic
Squelch quiets unwanted static noise when no audio signal is received, while still providing
good sensitivity to weak COM signals. When Automatic Squelch is disabled, COM audio
reception is always on. Continuous static noise is heard over the headsets and speaker, if
selected.
Appendices
Frequency Transfer Arrow – Moves between the upper and lower radio frequency fields
with the frequency tht is selected for tuning. Indicates which COM transceiver is selected for
frequency transfer between the Standby and Active fields.
Additional Features
2
Automatic Flight Control
System
Active Field – The COM Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two active frequencies
are on the left. An active COM frequency is displayed in green and indicates that the COM
transceiver is selected on the Audio Panel (MIC1 or MIC2 Key). Both active COM frequencies
appearing in white indicate that no COM radio is selected for transmitting.
Hazard Avoidance
1
Flight Management
Figure 4-5 COM Tuning Box Indications
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
137
6
Transmit and Receive Indications – During COM transmission, a white TX appears by the
active COM frequency replacing the Frequency Transfer Arrow. During COM signal reception,
a white RX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency Transfer Arrow.
7
Frequency Spacing – The COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975
MHz) or 8.33-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel
configuration. When 8.33-kHz channel spacing is selected, all of the 25-kHz channel spacing
frequencies are also available in the complete 3040-channel list.
8
COM Volume – COM radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/SQ
Knob. Turning the knob clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise
decreases volume. When adjusting volume, the level is displayed in place of the standby
frequencies. Volume level indication remains for two seconds after the change.
COM TRANSCEIVER MANUAL TUNING
The COM frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the upper right side of the PFD.
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Manually tuning a COM frequency:
1) Turn the COM Knob to tune the desired frequency (large knob for MHz; small knob for
Flight Management
kHz).
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the COM VOL/SQ Knob.
4) Press the COM VOL/SQ Knob to turn automatic squelch on and off.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Manually tuning a COM frequency from the Control Unit:
1) Press the COM Key to select the COM frequency box.
2) Turn the COM/NAV CRS/XPDR Knob to tune the desired frequency in the COM Tuning
Box (large knob for MHz; small knob for kHz).
3) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
AUTO-TUNING THE COM FREQUENCY
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
COM frequencies can be automatically tuned from the following:
•
Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
•
WPT – Airport Information Page
•
NRST – Nearest Airports Page
•
NRST – Nearest Frequencies Page (ARTCC, FSS, WX)
•
NRST – Nearest Airspaces Page
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE PFD
COM frequencies for the nearest airports can be automatically tuned from the Nearest Airports
Window on the PFD. When the desired frequency is entered, it becomes a standby frequency.
Pressing the Frequency Transfer Key places this frequency into the COM Active Frequency Field.
138
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
System Overview
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Press the NRST Softkey to Open
the Nearest Airports Window
Auto-tuning a COM frequency for a nearby airport from the PFD:
1) Press the Nearest Softkey on the PFD to open the Nearest Airports Window. A list of
Hazard Avoidance
Figure 4-6 Nearest Airports Window
25 nearest airport identifiers and COM frequencies is displayed.
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the COM Standby Frequency Field.
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE MFD
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the COM Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or
WPT page group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key.
Additional Features
Frequency Field.
Automatic Flight Control
System
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the list and highlight the desired COM frequency.
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
139
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest Frequencies Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
Figure 4-7 Nearest Pages Menus
On the WPT - Airport Information Page, the cursor can be placed on the frequency field by pressing
the FMS Knob and scrolling through the list. With the desired frequency highlighted, press the ENT
Key to bring up the ‘Load Frequency’ Options menu. Use the FMS Knobs to select the desired COM
radio field and press the ENT Key to load it.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
140
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
System Overview
Flight Management
Use the FMS Knob
to select the desired
COM radio field in
which to load the
frequency, and then
Press the ENT Key.
Hazard Avoidance
Press INFO-1
Softkey for
AIRPORT,
RUNWAYS, and
FREQUENCIES
Windows
Audio Panel and CNS
Press ENT Key
to display the
Load Frequency
Options Menu.
Engine Indication System
Runway
Information
Flight Instruments
Selected
Airport
Identifier and
Information
Automatic Flight Control
System
COM Frequency Loads into
selected Frequency Field
COM frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST - Nearest Airspaces, NRST - Nearest
Frequencies, and NRST - Nearest Airports Pages on the MFD in a similar manner using the
appropriate softkeys or MENU Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
Appendices
Auto-tuning a COM frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
Additional Features
Figure 4-8 Airport Information Page and PFD Frequency Display
1) From any page that the COM frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by
pressing the FMS Knob or pressing the appropriate softkey.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired COM frequency.
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Index
3) Press the ENT Key to display the Load Frequency options Menu.
141
System Overview
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired COM radio field in which to load the
frequency.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the selected COM radio field.
Flight Instruments
Or:
1) From any page that the COM frequency can be auto-tuned, press the MENU Key to
display the page menu.
Engine Indication System
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor on the desired selection.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the frequency options.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired COM radio field in which to load the
frequency.
7) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the selected COM radio field.
FREQUENCY SPACING
The COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or 8.33-kHz spacing
(118.000 to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration. When 8.33-kHz channel
spacing is selected, all of the 25-kHz channel spacing frequencies are also available in the complete
3040-channel list. COM channel spacing is set on the System Setup 1 Page of the Aux Page Group.
While the COM Configuration Window is selected, the softkeys are blank.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
5) Press the ENT Key to display the Load Frequency options Menu.
142
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
System Overview
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Select 8.33-kHz
or 25.0-kHz
COM Frequency
Channel Spacing
Hazard Avoidance
Figure 4-9 Aux - System Setup 1 Page
Automatic Flight Control
System
Changing COM frequency channel spacing:
1) Select the Aux – System Setup 1 Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
Additional Features
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Channel Spacing Field in the COM
Configuration Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired channel spacing.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the channel spacing selection.
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
143
4.3 NAV OPERATION
NAV TUNING BOXES
1
4
3
5
6
Figure 4-10 NAV Tuning Box Indications
1
Standby Fields – The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two standby
frequencies are on the left. Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in either cyan or
gray. The standby frequency selected for tuning is cyan. The other standby frequency is gray.
2
Frequency Transfer Arrow – Moves between the upper and lower radio frequency fields
with the frequency that is selected for tuning. Indicates which NAV transciever is selected for
frequency transfer between the Standby and Active fields.
3
Active Fields – The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two active frequencies
are on the right. An active NAV frequency is displayed in green. The active NAV radio is
selected by pressing the CDI softkey on the PFD. Both active NAV frequencies appearing in
white indicate that no NAV radio is selected.
4
Selected Tuning Frequency – The frequency selected for tuning is cyan and moves between
the upper and lower radio frequency fields with the Frequency Transfer Arrow. Indicates which
standby NAV frequency is selected for tuning.
5
VOR/LOC Morse Code Audio Indication – When the Morse Code Identifier audio is on for
a NAV radio, a white ID replaces the Frequency Transfer Arrow to the left of the active NAV
frequency. In order to listen to either station identifier, press the NAV1 or NAV2 Key on the
Audio Panel. Pressing the VOL/ID Knob turns on/off the Morse code audio only in the radio
with the NAV Tuning Box. To turn on/off both NAV IDs, transfer the NAV Tuning Box between
NAV1 and NAV2 by pressing the small NAV Knob and pressing the VOL/ID Knob again to
turn the Morse code off in the other radio.
6
Decoded Morse Code Station Identifier – The NAV Frequency Box displays the decoded
Morse Code station identifier that is received from the navigation source. Audio verification of
the selected station identifier is still required, and can be accomplished by selecting the
corresponding NAV radio on the audio panel and pressing the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
7
NAV VOLUME – NAV radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/SQ
Knob. Turning the knob clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise
decreases volume. When adjusting volume, the level is displayed in place of the standby
frequencies. Volume level indication remains for two seconds after the change.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
2
7
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
144
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
GPS – If GPS Mode is selected, a magenta single line arrow (not shown) appears on the HSI and
neither NAV radio is selected. Both active NAV frequencies are then displayed in white and the
previously selected NAV standby frequency remains selected for tuning.
See the Flight Instruments Section for selecting the DME and Bearing Information windows and
using VOR as the source for the bearing pointer.
The NAV Frequency Box displays the decoded Morse Code station identifier that is received from the
navigation source. Audio verification of the selected station identifier is still required, and can be
accomplished by selecting the corresponding NAV radio on the audio panel and pressing the NAV
VOL/ID Knob.
NAV radios are selected for listening by pressing the corresponding keys on the Audio Panel.
Pressing the NAV1, NAV2, or AUX Key selects and deselects the navigation radio source. Selected
audio can be heard over the headset and the speakers (if selected). All radios can be selected
individually or simultaneously.
Additional Features
NAV RECEIVER MANUAL TUNING
Automatic Flight Control
System
•
Hazard Avoidance
VOR2 (or LOC2) – If NAV2 is selected, a green double line arrow (shown) labeled either VOR2 or
LOC2 is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV2 frequency is displayed in green.
Flight Management
•
Audio Panel and CNS
VOR1 (or LOC1) – If NAV1 is selected, a green single line arrow (not shown) labeled either VOR1 or
LOC1 is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV1 frequency is displayed in green.
Engine Indication System
•
Flight Instruments
The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; two standby fields and two active fields. The
active frequencies are on the right side and the standby frequencies are on the left.
A NAV radio is selected for navigation by pressing the CDI Softkey located on the PFD. The active
NAV frequency selected for navigation is displayed in green. Pressing the CDI Softkey once selects
NAV1 as the navigation radio. Pressing the CDI Softkey a second time selects NAV2 as the navigation
radio. Pressing the CDI Softkey a third time activates GPS mode. Pressing the CDI Softkey again cycles
back to NAV1
While cycling through the CDI Softkey selections, the selected NAV standby frequency is selected for
tuning, the Frequency Transfer Arrow is placed in the selected NAV Frequency Field, and the active
NAV frequency color changes to green.
The three navigation modes that can be cycled through are:
System Overview
NAV RADIO SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
The NAV frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the upper left side of the MFD.
Manually tuning a NAV frequency:
1) Rotate the NAV Knob to tune the desired frequency in the NAV Tuning Box.
Appendices
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active
Frequency Field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
4) Press the NAV VOL/ID Knob to turn the Morse code identifier audio on and off.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
145
System Overview
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Manually tuning a NAV frequency from the Control Unit:
1) Press the NAV Key to select the NAV frequency box.
Box (large knob for MHz; small knob for kHz).
3) Press the Frequency TransferKey to transfer the frequency to the active field.
AUTO-TUNING A NAV FREQUENCY FROM THE MFD
NAV frequencies can be selected and loaded from the following MFD pages:
•
WPT – Airport Information
•
WPT – VOR Information
•
NRST – Nearest Airports
•
NRST – Nearest VOR
•
NRST – Nearest Frequencies (FSS, WX)
•
NRST – Nearest Airspaces
The MFD provides auto-tuning of NAV frequencies from waypoint and nearest pages. During
enroute navigation, the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV standby frequency field.
During approach activation the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV active frequency
field.
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or
WPT page group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key.
Auto-tuning a NAV frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the NAV frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by
pressing the FMS Knob, or by pressing the appropriate softkey.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
2) Turn the COM/NAV CRS/XPDR Knob to tune the desired frequency in the NAV Tuning
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired NAV identifier or NAV frequency.
3) Press the ENT Key to display the Load Frequency options window.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired NAV radio field in which to load the frequency.
Additional Features
5) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the selected NAV radio field.
Or:
1) When on the NRST pages, press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
Appendices
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor in the desired window.
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob.
Index
5) Press the ENT Key to display the Load Frequency options window.
146
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
7) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the selected NAV radio field.
System Overview
6) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired NAV radio field in which to load the frequency.
Flight Instruments
Nearest VOR Menu
Nearest Frequencies Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
In the example shown, the VOR list is selected with the VOR Softkey or from the page menu. The
FMS Knob or ENT Key is used to scroll through the list. The cursor is placed on the frequency with the
FREQ Softkey and loaded into the NAV Tuning Box with the ENT Key.
Audio Panel and CNS
Figure 4-11 Nearest Pages Menu
Engine Indication System
Nearest Airports Menu
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
147
System Overview
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Press ENT Key
to display the
Load Frequency
Options Menu.
Press the VOR Softkey to Place the
Cursor on the VOR Identifier
Press the FREQ Softkey to Place
the Cursor on the VOR Frequency
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
NAV Frequency Loads into
selected Frequency Field
Use the FMS Knob
to select the desired
NAV radio field in
which to load the
frequency, and then
Press the ENT Key.
Figure 4-12 Loading the NAV Frequency from the NRST – Nearest VOR Page
While enroute, NAV frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST — Nearest Airports, WPT —
Airport Information, WPT — VOR Information, and NRST — Nearest Frequencies Pages on the MFD in
a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
AUTO-TUNING NAV FREQUENCIES ON APPROACH ACTIVATION
Index
NOTE: The primary NAV frequency is auto-tuned upon loading a VOR or ILS/Localizer
approach.
148
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
•
If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, and if the approach frequency is already loaded into the
NAV1 standby frequency field, the standby frequency is transferred to active.
•
If the current CDI navigation source is NAV1 or NAV2, the approach frequency is transferred to the
standby frequency fields of the selected CDI NAV radio.
MARKER BEACON RECEIVER
Hazard Avoidance
The marker beacon receiver is used as part of the ILS. The marker beacon receiver is always on and
detects any marker beacon signals within the reception range of the aircraft.
The receiver detects the three marker tones – outer, middle, and inner – and provides the marker
beacon annunciations located on the Audio Panel and to the left of the Altimeter on the PFD.
Flight Management
NOTE: The marker beacon indicators operate independently of marker beacon audio and
cannot be turned off.
Audio Panel and CNS
If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, the approach frequency is transferred to the NAV1
active frequency field. The frequency that was previously in the NAV1 active frequency field is
transferred to standby.
Engine Indication System
•
Flight Instruments
NAV frequencies are automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box on approach activation.
When loading or activating a VOR or ILS/LOC approach, the approach frequency is automatically
transferred to a NAV frequency field as follows:
System Overview
NOTE: When an ILS/LOC approach has been activated while navigating by GPS, the system
automatically switches to LOC as the final approach course is intercepted (within 15 nm of
the FAF). See the Flight Management Section for details.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Figure 4-13 Marker Beacon Key and Annunciator Lights
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
149
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Appendices
The Audio Panel provides three different states of marker beacon operation; On, Muted, and
Deselected. Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key selects and deselects marker beacon audio. The key
annunciator indicates when marker beacon audio is selected. Marker beacon audio is not heard when
the annunciator is off or when the annunciator is on with the marker beacon audio muted.
During marker beacon audio reception, pressing the MKR/MUTE Key mutes the audio but does not
affect the marker annunciations. The marker tone is silenced, then waits for the next marker tone. The
MKR/MUTE Key Annunciator is illuminated, indicating audio muting. The audio returns when the
next marker beacon signal is received. If the MKR/MUTE Key is pressed during signal reception (O,
M, I indication) while marker beacon audio is muted, the audio is deselected and the MKR/MUTE
Key Annunciator is extinguished.
Pressing the HI SENS Key switches between high and low marker beacon receiver sensitivity. The HI
SENS function (annunciator illuminated) is used to provide an earlier indication when nearing a
marker during an approach. The LO SENS function (annunciator extinguished) results in a narrower
marker dwell while over a station.
DME TUNING
NOTE: When another auxiliary window is turned on, the DME Tuning Window is replaced on
the PFD.
NOTE: When turning on the system for use, the system will remember the last frequency
used for DME tuning and the NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD state prior to shutdown.
The PFD tunes the optional DME transceiver. The UHF DME frequency is tuned by pairing with a
VHF NAV frequency. DME frequency pairing is automatic and only the VHF NAV frequency is shown.
The DME Tuning Window is located to the right of the HSI in the lower right corner of the PFD. The
DME transceiver is tuned by selecting NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD in the DME Tuning Window. Pressing
the DME Softkey switches the DME Tuning Window on and off
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Figure 4-14 DME Tuning Window
The following DME transceiver pairing can be selected:
•
NAV1 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV1 frequency.
•
NAV2 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV2 frequency.
•
HOLD – When in the HOLD position, the DME frequency remains paired with the last selected NAV
frequency.
Pressing the CLR Key or FMS Knob while in the process of DME pairing cancels the data entry and
reverts back to the previously selected DME tuning state. Pressing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates
the cursor in the DME Tuning Window.
See the Flight Instruments Section for displaying the DME information window.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
DME
Modes
150
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
System Overview
Selecting DME transceiver pairing:
1) Press theDME Softkey to display the DME Tuning Window.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the DME tuning mode.
Flight Instruments
3) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
151
4.4 MODE S TRANSPONDER
Level-2 reply data link capability (used to exchange information between aircraft and ATC facilities)
•
Surveillance identifier capability
•
Flight ID (Flight Identification) reporting – The Mode S Transponder reports aircraft identification as
either the aircraft registration or a unique Flight ID.
•
Altitude reporting
•
Airborne status determination
•
Transponder capability reporting
•
Mode S Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) requirements
•
Acquisition squitter – Acquisition squitter, or short squitter, is the transponder 24-bit identification
address. The transmission is sent periodically, regardless of the presence of interrogations. The purpose
of acquisition squitter is to enable Mode S ground stations and aircraft equipped with a Traffic
Avoidance System (TAS) to recognize the presence of Mode S equipped aircraft for selective
interrogation.
•
Extended squitter – The extended squitter is transmitted periodically and contains information such as
altitude (barometric and GPS), GPS position, and aircraft identification. The purpose of extended
squitter is to provide aircraft position and identification to ADS-B Ground-Based Transceivers (GBTs)
and other aircraft.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
•
Engine Indication System
The system is equipped with a Mode S Transponder. The Mode S Transponder provides Mode A, Mode
C, and Mode S interrogation and reply capabilities. Selective addressing or Mode Select (Mode S)
capability includes the following features:
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Instruments
System Overview
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
The Hazard Avoidance Section provides more details on traffic avoidance systems.
TRANSPONDER CONTROLS
Transponder function is displayed on three levels of softkeys on the PFD: Top-level, Mode Selection,
and Code Selection. When the top-level XPDR Softkey is pressed, the following XPDR and Mode
Selection softkeys appear: Standby, On, ALT, VFR, Code, Ident, Back.
When the Code Softkey is pressed, the number softkeys appear: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, Ident, BKSP,
Back. The digits 8 and 9 are not used for code entry. Pressing the numbered softkeys in sequence
enters the transponder code. If an error is made, pressing the BKSP Softkey moves the code selection
cursor to the previous digit. Pressing the BKSP Softkey again moves the cursor to the next previous
digit.
Pressing the Back Softkey during code selection reverts to the Mode Selection Softkeys. Pressing the
Back Softkey during mode selection reverts to the top-level softkeys.
The code can also be entered with the FMS Knob on the PFD. Code entry must be completed with
either the softkeys or the FMS Knob, but not a combination of both.
Pressing the Ident Softkey while in Mode or Code Selection initiates the ident function and reverts to
the top-level softkeys.
After 45 seconds of transponder control inactivity, the system reverts back to the top-level softkeys.
152
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
System Overview
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Figure 4-15 XPDR Softkeys (PFD)
TRANSPONDER MODE SELECTION
STANDBY MODE (MANUAL)
Flight Management
Mode selection can be automatic (Altitude Mode) or manual (Standby, ON, and Altitude Modes).
The Standby, On, and ALT Softkeys can be accessed by pressing the XPDR Softkey.
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT function is inhibited.
Automatic Flight Control
System
STBY Mode (White
Code Number and
Mode)
Hazard Avoidance
Standby Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the Standby Softkey. In Standby, the
transponder is powered and new codes can be entered, but no replies or squitters are transmitted..
When Standby is selected, a white STBY indication and transponder code appear in the mode field
of the Transponder Data Box.
Additional Features
Figure 4-16 Standby Mode
MANUAL ON MODE
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
153
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Appendices
On Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the On Softkey. An On indication will appear in
the mode field of the Transponder Data Box. Selecting On mode enables transmission of transponder
replies and squitters, but transmissions will not include altitude information. The On indication and
transponder code in the Transponder Data Box will appear green while airborne and white while on
the ground. When the transponder is operating with an air state of on-ground it will disable replies
to Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S all-call interrogations so the aircraft will not show up on the traffic
systems of other aircraft.
System Overview
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Flight Instruments
On-Ground On Mode
(No Altitude Reporting)
Figure 4-17 On Mode
ALTITUDE MODE
ALT Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the ALT Softkey. When ALT mode is selected,
an ALT indication will appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box. Selecting ALT mode
enables transmission of transponder replies and squitters. Transmissions will include pressure
altitude information. The ALT indication and transponder code in the Transponder Data Box will
appear green while airborne and white while on the ground. When the transponder is operating
with an air state of on-ground it will disable replies to Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S all-call
interrogations so the aircraft will not show up on the traffic systems of other aircraft.
On-Ground ALT Mode
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Airborne On Mode
(No Altitude Reporting)
Additional Features
Airborne ALT Mode
Appendices
Figure 4-18 Altitude Mode
REPLY STATUS
Index
When the transponder sends replies to interrogations, a white R indication appears momentarily in
the reply status field of the Transponder Data Box.
154
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
System Overview
Reply to Interrogation
Flight Instruments
Figure 4-19 Reply Indication
Engine Indication System
Selecting a transponder mode:
1) Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Press the desired softkey to activate the transponder mode.
Pressing the CLR Key or small FMS Knob before code entry is complete cancels code entry and
restores the previous code. Waiting for 10 seconds after code entry is finished activates the code
automatically.
VFR Code
Hazard Avoidance
The VFR code can be entered either manually or by pressing the XPDR Softkey, then the VFR
Softkey. When the VFR Softkey is pressed, the pre-programmed VFR code is automatically displayed
in the code field of the Transponder Data Box. Pressing the VFR Softkey again restores the previous
identification code.
The pre-programmed VFR Code is set at the factory to 1200. If a VFR code change is required,
contact a Garmin-authorized service center for configuration.
Flight Management
VFR CODE
Audio Panel and CNS
ENTERING A TRANSPONDER CODE
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Figure 4-20 VFR Code
Entering a transponder code with softkeys:
1) Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Press the CODE Softkey to display the Transponder Code Selection Softkeys, for digit
3) Press the digit softkeys to enter the code in the code field. When entering the code, the
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
155
Index
next softkey in sequence must be pressed within 10 seconds, or the entry is cancelled
and restored to the previous code. Pressing the BKSP Softkey moves the code selection
cursor to the previous digit. Five seconds after the fourth digit has been entered, the
transponder code becomes active.
Appendices
entry.
System Overview
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Flight Instruments
Entering a Code
Figure 4-21 Entering a Code
Entering a transponder code with the PFD FMS Knob:
Engine Indication System
1) Press the XPDR and the CODE Softkeys as in the previous procedure to enable code
entry.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob on the PFD to enter the first two code digits.
Audio Panel and CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next code field.
4) Enter the last two code digits with the small FMS Knob.
Flight Management
5) Press the ENT Key to complete code digit entry.
Hazard Avoidance
Turn the Small
FMS Knob to
Enter Two Code
Digits at a Time
Press the
ENT Key to
Complete
Code Entry
Turn the Large
FMS Knob
to Move the
Cursor to the
Next Code Field
Figure 4-22 Entering a Code with the FMS Knob
Automatic Flight Control
System
Entering a transponder code with the Control Unit FMS Knob
1) Press the XPDRand the Code Softkeys on the PFD.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the first two code digits.
Additional Features
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next code field.
4) Enter the last two code digits with the small FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete code digit entry.
Index
Appendices
IDENT FUNCTION
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the Ident Softkey is inoperative.
Pressing the PFD Ident Softkey or Control Unit Ident key sends a distinct identity indication to Air
Traffic Control (ATC). The indication distinguishes the identing transponder from all the others on the
air traffic controller’s screen. The PFD Ident Softkey appears on all levels of transponder softkeys.
When the Ident Softkey is pressed, a green Ident indication is displayed in the PFD mode field of the
156
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
System Overview
Transponder Data Box for a duration of 18 seconds. A white Ident indicator is displayed on the
Control Unit.
After the Ident Softkey is pressed, the system reverts to the top-level softkeys.
Flight Instruments
Ident
Indication
Engine Indication System
Press the
IDENT Softkey
to Initiate the
ID Function
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Ident
Indication
Press the
IDENT key to
Initiate the ID
Function
Hazard Avoidance
Figure 4-23 Ident Softkey and Indications
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
157
4.5 ADDITIONAL AUDIO PANEL OPERATIONS
POWER-UP
The Audio Panel performs a self-test during power-up. During the self-test all Audio Panel
annunciator lights illuminate for approximately two seconds. Once the self-test is completed, most of
the settings are restored to those in use before the unit was last turned off.
MONO/STEREO HEADSETS
Stereo headsets are recommended for use in this aircraft.
Using a monaural headset in a stereo jack shorts the right headset channel output to ground. While
this does not damage the Audio Panel, a person listening on a monaural headset hears only the left
channel in both ears. If a monaural headset is used at one of the passenger positions, any other
passenger using a stereo headset hears audio in the left ear only.
SPEAKER
All of the radios can be heard over the cabin speaker. Pressing the SPKR Key selects and deselects
the cabin speaker. Speaker audio is muted when the PTT is pressed.
PASSENGER ADDRESS MODE (PA MODE)
Press and hold the SPKR Key for 2 seconds to initiate Passenger Address Mode. PA Mode is
annunciated by a rapid blinking of the SPKR annunciator. When in PA Mode the crew can use the
PTT “Push-to-Talk” button to deliver announcements over the speaker, to the passenger headsets, or
both depending on configuration.
SPLIT-PA MODE
During Split-PA Mode the pilot can continue to use the radio(s) while the copilot delivers PA
announcements. To initiate Split-PA Mode, first enter Split-COM Mode by pressing more than one
MIC Key simultaneously, then press and hold the SPKR Key for 2 seconds.
CLEARANCE RECORDER AND PLAYER
The Audio Panel contains a digital clearance recorder that records up to 2.5 minutes of the selected
COM radio signal. Recorded COM audio is stored in separate memory blocks. Once 2.5 minutes of
recording time have been reached, the recorder begins recording over the stored memory blocks,
starting from the oldest block.
The PLAY Key controls the play function. Pressing the PLAY Key once plays the latest recorded
memory block. Pressing the PLAY Key while audio is playing begins playing the previously recorded
memory block. Each subsequent press of the PLAY Key selects the previously recorded memory
block.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play. If a COM input signal is
detected during play of a recorded memory block, play is halted.
Powering off the unit automatically clears all recorded blocks.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
158
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
COPILOT CONFIGURED AS CREW OR PASSENGER
INTERCOM MODES
ALL INTERCOM MODE
In ‘All Intercom’ mode the Pilot, Copilot, and Passengers hear each other and hear the aircraft
audio.
Automatic Flight Control
System
NOTE: In the following modes the copilot position is configured as crew.
Hazard Avoidance
The copilot position can be configured as crew (COPLT Key enabled) or as a passenger (COPLT
Key disabled). Pressing and holding the COPLT Key toggles the copilot position configuration
between passenger and crew. The aural message “Copilot Configured as Passenger” or “Copilot
Configured as Crew” is heard.
Flight Management
NOTE: When the copilot position is configured as a passenger, the COPLT Key is disabled
and the copilot headset is treated as a ‘passenger’ for intercom and entertainment audio
distribution.
Audio Panel and CNS
Press the PILOT, COPLT, and/or PASS Keys to distribute as required. If the annunciators are lit,
those positions will share intercom audio. If an annunciator is NOT lit that position is isolated from
the others.
Engine Indication System
Figure 4-24 Intercom Controls
Flight Instruments
The GMA 350 includes a six-position intercom system (ICS), one music input, and one telephone/
entertainment input for the pilot, copilot and passengers. The intercom provides Pilot, Copilot, and
Passenger audio isolation.
System Overview
INTERCOM
Additional Features
PILOT ISOLATE MODE
Appendices
In ‘Pilot Isolate’ mode the Pilot, Copilot, and Passengers hear the aircraft audio. The Copilot and
Passengers also hear each other.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
159
System Overview
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
PASSENGER/CREW ISOLATE MODE
Flight Instruments
In ‘Passenger/Crew Isolate’ mode the Pilot and Copilot hear the aircraft audio and each other.
The Passengers hear each other.
Engine Indication System
In ‘Copilot Isolate’ mode the Pilot, Copilot, and Passengers hear the aircraft audio. The Pilot and
Passengers also hear each other. The Copilot has the option to use Split-COM mode.
Audio Panel and CNS
COPILOT ISOLATE MODE
ALL ISOLATE MODE
Flight Management
In ‘All Isolate’ mode the Pilot and Copilot hear the aircraft audio. The Copilot has the option to
use Split-COM mode. The Passengers hear each other.
PILOT & COPILOT ISOLATE MODE
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
In ‘Pilot & Copilot Isolate’ mode the Pilot, Copilot, and Passengers hear the aircraft audio. The
Passengers hear each other. The Copilot has the option to use Split-COM mode.
PILOT & PASSENGER ISOLATE MODE
Additional Features
In ‘Pilot & Passenger Isolate’ mode the Pilot and Copilot hear the aircraft audio. The Passengers
hear each other.
COPILOT & PASSENGER ISOLATE MODE
Index
Appendices
In ‘Copilot & Passenger Isolate’ mode the Pilot and Copilot can hear the aircraft audio. The
Copilot has the option to use Split-COM mode. The Passengers hear each other.
160
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Flight Instruments
The music (MUSIC) and telephone/entertainment ( ) audio are distributed using the Blue-Select
Mode. The following example indicates that the pilot, copilot, and passengers will all hear the
telephone/entertainment audio.
System Overview
BLUE-SELECT MODE (TELEPHONE/ENTERTAINMENT DISTRIBUTION)
Engine Indication System
The Blue-Select Mode is entered by pressing the small knob when the volume control cursor
(flashing white annunciator) is not active. If the volume control cursor is active, press the small knob
twice. The first press will cancel the volume control cursor, the second will activate Blue-Select
Mode.
Hazard Avoidance
Selecting any button other than PILOT, COPLT, PASS, MUS or
will cancel Blue-Select Mode.
Pressing the small knob will also cancel Blue-Select Mode. After approximately ten seconds with no
input, the Blue-Select Mode will automatically cancel.
Flight Management
The annunciator over the
Button will be flashing blue. Any combination of the annunciators
over the PILOT, COPLT, and PASS buttons may be blue. Select the desired button to turn the blue
annunciator on or off to distribute the telephone audio to selected crew/passenger positions. Turn
the large knob to select MUS, and select the crew/passenger positions to receive the music audio.
Audio Panel and CNS
Figure 4-25 Blue-Select Mode (Telephone/Entertainment Distribution)
ADJUSTING INTERCOM VOLUME
ADJUSTING SPEAKER VOLUME
ADJUSTING MKR, AUX,
, AND MUS VOLUME
ADJUSTING MANUAL SQUELCH
Appendices
When the cursor is on MKR, AUX,
, MUS1, or MUS2 the Volume Control Knob adjusts the
individual volume of the selected source.
Additional Features
When the cursor is on SPKR, the Volume Control Knob adjusts the speaker volume of the
selected sources (COM, NAV, AUX, MKR). Alert volumes are not affected by the speaker volume
control knob.
Automatic Flight Control
System
When the cursor is on PILOT, COPLT, or PASS, the Volume Control Knob adjusts the intercom
volume for the listener.
When the cursor is on MAN SQ, the Volume Control Knob adjusts the ICS Squelch Threshold
(the volume level that must be exceeded to be heard over the intercom).
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
161
System Overview
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Relative Volume/
Squelch Scale
Volume or Manual Squelch
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
Cursor
Figure 4-26 Volume/Squelch Control
SPLIT-COM OPERATION
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
Manual Squelch Annunciator; Off for
Automatic Squelch, On for Manual Squelch
NOTE: Split COM performance is affected by the distance between the COM antennas and
the separation of the tuned frequencies. If the selected COM1 and COM2 frequencies are
too close together, interference may be heard during transmission on the other radio.
During Split COM operation, both the pilot and the copilot can transmit simultaneously over
separate radios. In Split COM mode, the pilot uses COM1 and the copilot uses COM2.
Pressing both MIC Keys simultaneously initiates Split COM Mode (i.e., COM1/COM2). The
respective COM1/MIC1 or COM2/MIC2 annunciators are illuminated indicating Split COM operation.
Split COM operation is cancelled by pressing one of the selected MIC Keys again.
ENTERTAINMENT INPUTS
The audio panel provides three stereo telephone/entertainment inputs:
•
The telephone/entertainment Key ( )controls a telephone or entertainment device connected to the
rear of the audio panel or to the Front Panel Jack. For GSR 56 equipped aircraft, the Iridium phone
audio is connected to the rear input of the audio panel. To use the Iridium phone, ensure there is no
other audio source plugged into the Front Panel Jack.
•
The MUS1 and MUS2 Key controls the Entertainment Music audio input. External audio jacks can
also be used as an entertainment input. GDL 69 (SiriusXM Radio) audio, if equipped, is wired to the
MUS1 and MUS2 inputs. The Front Panel Jack does not disable audio connected to the MUS1 and
MUS2 inputs.
The Front Panel Jack can be used as an entertainment input or a telephone input. Plugging a device
into the Front Panel Jack will disable any audio source connected to the rear telephone/entertainment
jack (i.e. GSR 56, if so equipped). The Front Panel Jack is a 3.5-mm stereo jack that is compatible with
popular portable entertainment devices such as cell phones and other tablet devices. The headphone
outputs of the entertainment devices are plugged into the Front Panel Jack.
162
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
System Overview
Distribution of the entertainment inputs are configured in Blue-Select Mode.
TELEPHONE AND ENTERTAINMENT MUTING
ENABLING/DISABLING MUTING
SIRIUSXM RADIO ENTERTAINMENT
Audio Panel and CNS
SiriusXM Radio audio from the Data Link Receiver may be heard by the pilot and passengers
simultaneously (optional: requires subscription to SiriusXM Radio Service). Refer to the Additional
Features Section for more details on the Data Link Receiver.
Connecting a stereo input to the Stereo Input jack removes the SiriusXM Radio Audio from that
input.
Engine Indication System
Press and hold the MUS1, MUS2, or ( ) Key for two seconds to toggle muting on and off. The
aural message “Mute Music on Reception Enabled/Disabled” or “Mute Tel and Jack on Reception
Enabled/Disabled” is heard.
Flight Instruments
Telephone and entertainment muting can be enabled or disabled by the user, however it is always
muted during alerts.
3D AUDIO
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
3D Audio is useful when multiple audio sources are present. By using different responses in each ear,
3D audio processing creates the illusion that each audio source is coming from a unique location or
seat position.
Because this feature uses different signals for left and right channels, it requires wiring for stereo
intercom and stereo headsets. If 3D audio is activated when mono headsets are in use, the listener will
still hear all audio sources; however, there is no benefit from location separation.
With a single COM selected and 3D Audio enabled, the listener hears the audio source at the 12
o’clock position. If both COMs are selected, the listener hears COM1 at 11 o’clock and COM2 at the 1
o’clock position. All other intercom positions are processed to sound like their relative seat location.
By default, the GMA 350Hc assumes the pilot sits in the right seat. A Garmin authorized service center
can make changes to the default configuration.
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
163
Flight Instruments
System Overview
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
ENABLING 3D AUDIO
Press and hold the PILOT Key to toggle 3D audio processing on and off for all headset positions.
When 3D Audio is enabled, the aural message “3D audio left” is heard in the left ear followed by “3D
audio right” in the right ear. If the aural messages are not heard in only the left and then the right ear
respectively, the cause may be aircraft wiring or headset settings. Refer to the following table if a
headset or aircraft wiring problem is suspected.
Engine Indication System
Symptom(s)
Audio Panel and CNS
“3D audio left”
message heard in both
ears.
Or:
“3D audio right”
message not heard
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
“3D audio left”
message heard in both
ears, followed by “3D
audio right” message
heard in both ears
Automatic Flight Control
System
“3D audio right”
message heard in both
ears. “3D audio left”
not heard
Cause(s)
1) Mono headset in use
1) Use a stereo headset
2) Stereo headset in use
with mono/stereo switch
set to ‘mono’
2) Set mono/stereo switch on headset to
‘stereo’
3) Aircraft wiring has left
audio wired to both left
and right channels of stereo
headset jack
3) If after checking solutions #1 and #2 see
a service center as soon as possible to
inspect/correct wiring. This wiring fault can
cause fail-safe audio not to function.
1) Mono headset in use
1) Use a stereo headset
2) Stereo headset in use
with mono/stereo switch
set to mono
2) Set mono/stereo switch on headset to
‘stereo’
3) Incorrect aircraft wiring
3) If after checking solutions #1 and #2 see
(left/right shorted together) a service center as soon as possible to
inspect/correct wiring. This wiring fault can
cause fail-safe audio not to function.
1) Incorrect aircraft wiring
1) See a service center as soon as possible
(right channel used for
to inspect/correct wiring. This wiring fault
mono instead of left or left/ can cause fail-safe audio not to function.
right swapped)
1) Stereo headset is on
backwards
“3D audio left”
message heard in right
ear only followed by
“3D audio right”
message heard in left
2) Incorrect aircraft wiring
ear only
(left/right channels
swapped)
1) Verify correct orientation from the left/
right indication on each side of the
headset or the position of the boom mic
(usually attached on left side). If the
headset is backwards left/right position
information will be swapped.
2) See a service center as soon as possible
to inspect/correct wiring. This wiring fault
can cause fail-safe audio not to function.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Solutions(s)
164
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Cause(s)
System Overview
Symptom(s)
Solutions(s)
1) See a service center to wire the
installation for stereo headsets.
“3D audio right”
message heard in right
ear only, no audio
heard in left ear
1) Incorrect aircraft wiring
(right channel used for
mono instead of left, or
left/right swapped)
1) See a service center as soon as possible
to inspect/correct wiring. This wiring fault
can cause fail-safe audio not to function.
Engine Indication System
1) Aircraft wired for mono
intercom
Flight Instruments
“3D audio left”
message heard in left
ear only, no audio
heard in right ear.
Table 4-1 3D Audio Troubleshooting
BLUETOOTH® (GMA 350C ONLY)
Audio Panel and CNS
NOTE: Pairing is only necessary during the first attempt to connect a Bluetooth device to the
GMA 350c. Once paired, the GMA 350c and the device will connect automatically.
PAIRING A BLUETOOTH DEVICE WITH THE GMA 350C
Bluetooth audio will maintain a separate volume level and Blue Select distribution from the wired
audio source. If the Bluetooth connection is supporting a phone call, all intercom positions listening
to that source can also speak on the call through the headset MICs.
In addition to the 2 second press and hold of the inner knob discussed above, the knob has two
additional functions that are intended to be seldom or never used. The following functions are
available if needed for troubleshooting:
•
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
165
Index
Press and hold the inner knob for 5 seconds to turn off the Bluetooth radio. The aural message
“Bluetooth off” is heard. This function electrically turns off the radio, not just the audio source
selection. In the event that Bluetooth radio interference with communication or navigation
Appendices
ADDITIONAL BLUETOOTH CONTROL FUNCTIONS
Additional Features
NOTE: The Bluetooth audio can only be assigned to one source at a time. Once the
Bluetooth audio is assigned to an audio source, the remaining entertainment audio sources
will only cycle between OFF and WHITE.
Automatic Flight Control
System
or MUS key until the annunciator turns blue (the audio from the Bluetooth source
Press the
will not be heard until this step is complete). The key annunciator cycles OFF-WHITE-BLUE.
WHITE selects the wired audio source. BLUE selects the Bluetooth audio source. The BLUE source
assignment will persist through Bluetooth audio connection disruptions.
Hazard Avoidance
ASSIGNING AN AUDIO SOURCE TO THE BLUETOOTH DEVICE
Flight Management
Press and hold the inner knob for two seconds. The Bluetooth Annunciator flashes to indicate the
unit is discoverable and the aural message “Bluetooth discoverable” is heard. The GMA 350c will
remain discoverable for 90 seconds or until a successful pair is established. Once paired, the
Bluetooth Annunciator turns steady blue and the aural message “Bluetooth connected/paired” is
heard.
System Overview
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
equipment is suspected, the Bluetooth radio can be powered off without powering off the entire
audio panel. A subsequent 5 second press and hold turns the radio back on.
Press and hold the inner knob for 10 seconds to clear the memory of paired devices (up to 10 are
stored). Once cleared, the aural message “Bluetooth list cleared” is heard. This function is used as
a troubleshooting method when a device is not pairing, or to remove a device that is no longer
needed.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
•
166
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
System Overview
4.6 AUDIO PANEL PREFLIGHT PROCEDURE
Audio Panel and CNS
After powering up the system, the following steps aid in maximizing the use of the Audio Panel as well
as prevent pilot and copilot induced issues. These preflight procedures should be performed each time a
pilot boards the aircraft to insure awareness of all audio levels in the Audio Panel and radios.
Once this procedure has been completed, the pilot and copilot can change settings, keeping in mind
the notes above.
Engine Indication System
NOTE: When the MAN SQ Key is pressed, the ICS squelch can be set manually by the pilot
and copilot. If manual squelch is set to full open, background noise is heard in the ICS system
as well as during COM transmissions.
Flight Instruments
NOTE: If the pilot and/or copilot are using headsets that have a high/low switch or volume
control knob, verify that the switch is in the high position and the volume control on the
headsets are at maximum volume setting. On single pilot flights, verify that all other headsets
are not connected to avoid excess noise in the audio system.
Setting the Audio Panel During Preflight:
Flight Management
1) Verify that the PILOT, COPLT and PASS annunciators are lit.
2) Adjust radio volume levels (COM, NAV) to a suitable level.
3) Use the Blue-Select Mode to distribute the telephone/entertainment (
), MUS1, and
Hazard Avoidance
MUS2 appropriately.
4) Use the VOL/CRSR Knobs to adjust the intercom volumes to the desired level.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
167
4.7 ABNORMAL OPERATION
Abnormal operation of the system includes equipment failures of the system components and failure
of associated equipment, including switches and external devices.
STUCK MICROPHONE
If the PTT Key becomes stuck, the COM transmitter stops transmitting after 35 seconds of
continuous operation. An alert appears on the PFD to advise the pilot of a stuck microphone.
The MIC Key Annunciator on the Audio Panel flashes as long as the PTT Key remains stuck.
COM TUNING FAILURE
In case of a COM system tuning failure, the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) is automatically
tuned in the radio in which the tuning failure occurred. Depending on the failure mode, an amber X
may appear on the frequency display.
AUDIO PANEL FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
If there is a failure of the Audio Panel, a fail-safe circuit connects the pilot’s headset (left ear only if
stereo) and microphone directly to the COM1 transceiver. Audio is not available on the speaker during
Fail-safe operation.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
168
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.1 INTRODUCTION
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
The system is an integrated flight, engine, communication, navigation and surveillance system. This
section of the Pilot’s Guide explains flight management using the system.
The most prominent part of the system are the two full color displays: the Primary Flight Display
(PFD) and Multi Function Display (MFD). The information to successfully navigate the aircraft using the
GPS sensors is displayed on the PFDs and the MFD. A brief description of the GPS navigation data on
the PFD and MFD follows.
Navigation mode indicates which sensor is providing the course data (e.g., GPS, VOR) and the flight
plan phase (e.g., Departure (DPRT), Terminal (TERM), Enroute (ENR), Oceanic (OCN), RNAV
Approach (LNAV, LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, LPV), or Missed Approach (MAPR)). L/VNAV, LP, LP+V,
and LPV approach service levels are only available with SBAS.
The Inset Map and HSI Map are small versions of the Navigation Map. The Inset Map is displayed in
the lower left corner of the PFD (lower right during reversionary mode), and the HSI Map is displayed
in the center of the HSI. The Inset Map and the HSI Map may each be referred to as the PFD Map. A
PFD Map is displayed by pressing the Map/HSI Softkey, pressing the Layout Softkey, then pressing
either the Inset Map or HSI Map Softkey. Pressing the Map Off Softkey removes the PFD Map.
The Navigation Map displays aviation data (e.g., airports, VORs, airways, airspaces), geographic data
(e.g., cities, lakes, highways, borders), topographic data (map shading indicating elevation), and hazard
data (e.g., traffic, terrain, weather). The amount of displayed data for the PFD Map can be reduced by
pressing the Map/HSI Softkey on the PFD, then pressing the Detail Softkey. The amount of displayed
data for the Navigation Map can be reduced by pressing the Detail Softkey on the MFD. The Navigation
Map can be oriented three different ways: North Up (NORTH UP), Track Up (TRK UP), or Heading Up
(HDG UP).
An aircraft icon is placed on the Navigation Map at the location corresponding to the calculated
present position. The aircraft position and the flight plan legs are accurately based on GPS calculations.
The basemap upon which these are placed are from a source with less resolution, therefore the relative
position of the aircraft to map features is not exact. The leg of the active flight plan currently being flown
is shown as a magenta line on the navigation map. The other legs are shown in white.
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 250 feet to 1000 nm. The current range is indicated
in the upper left corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. To
change the map range on any map, turn the Joystick counter-clockwise to zoom in ( -, decreasing), or
clockwise to zoom out (+, increasing).
The ‘Direct To’ Window, the ‘Flight Plan’ Window, the ‘Procedures’ Window, and the ‘Nearest Airports’
Window can be displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD. Details of these windows are discussed
in detail later in the section.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
169
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Flight Instruments
Navigation Status Box
Engine Indication System
Navigation Mode
Audio Panel and CNS
Inset Map
Current Track Indicator
Location of:
- Direct To Window
- Flight Plan Window
- Procedures Window
- Nearest Airports Window
- References Window
Flight Management
Figure 5-1 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD Inset Map
Navigation Status Box
Hazard Avoidance
Navigation Mode
Automatic Flight Control
System
Current Track Indicator
Additional Features
HSI Map
Location of:
- Direct To Window
- Flight Plan Window
- Procedures Window
- Nearest Airports Window
- References Window
Index
Appendices
Figure 5-2 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD HSI Map
170
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Destination Airport Info
System Overview
Navigation Page Title
Flight Instruments
Navigation Status Box
- Estimated Time Enroute
- Fuel Over Destination
- Identifier
- Distance
- Bearing
Map Orientation
Navigation Map
- Aviation Data
- Geographic Data
- Topographic Data
- Hazard Data
Map Range
Flight Plan Leg
Engine Indication System
Active Flight Plan Leg
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Figure 5-3 GPS Navigation Information on the MFD Navigation Page
NAVIGATION STATUS BOX AND DATA BAR
Active flight plan leg (e.g., ‘D-> KICT’ or ‘KIXD -> KCOS’) or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘Turn
right to 021˚ in 8 seconds’)
•
Distance (DIS) and Bearing (BRG) to the next waypoint or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘TOD
within 1 minute’)
The symbols used in the PFD Status Box are:
Symbol
Description
Symbol
Additional Features
•
Automatic Flight Control
System
Figure 5-4 PFD Navigation Status Box
Hazard Avoidance
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the PFD contains two fields displaying the following
information:
Description
Left Holding
Pattern
Direct-to
Vector to Final
Right Procedure
Turn
Right DME Arc/
Radius to Fix Leg
Appendices
Active Leg
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
171
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Symbol
Symbol
Left Procedure
Turn
Description
Left DME Arc/
Radius to Fix Leg
Flight Instruments
Right Holding
Pattern
Table 5-1 PFD Status Box Symbols
The Navigation Data Bar located at the top of the MFD contains four data fields, each displaying one
of the following items:
Bearing
FOB
Fuel on Board
DEST
Destination Airport Identifier
GS
Ground Speed
DIS
Distance
ISA
Temperature at Standard Pressure
DTG
Distance to Go
LDG
ETA at Final Destination
DTK
Desired Track
MSA
Minimum Safe Altitude
END
Endurance
TAS
True Airspeed
ESA
Enroute Safe Altitude
TKE
Track Angle Error
ETA
Estimated Time of Arrival
TRK
Track
ETE
Estimated Time Enroute
VSR
Vertical Speed Required
FLT
Flight Timer
XTK
Cross-Track Error
Hazard Avoidance
BRG
Table 5-2 MFD Data Bar Field Items
Automatic Flight Control
System
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Description
Figure 5-5 MFD Navigation Data Bar
The navigation information displayed in the four data fields can be selected on the ‘MFD Data Bar
Fields’ Box on the ‘Aux-System Setup 1’ Page. The default selections (in order left to right) are GS,
DTK, TRK, and ETE.
Additional Features
Changing a field in the MFD Navigation Data Bar:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field number in the ‘MFD Data Bar
Appendices
Fields’ Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the data options list to select the
desired data.
Index
5) Press the ENT Key. Pressing the Defaults Softkey returns all fields to the default setting.
172
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Map displays are used extensively in the system to provide situational awareness in flight. Most system
maps can display the following information:
Flight Instruments
• Map Pointer information (distance and
bearing to pointer, location of pointer,
name, and other pertinent information)
• Fuel range ring
• Flight plan legs
• User waypoints
• Track vector
• Terrain
• Topography scale and data
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
• Airports, NAVAIDs, airspaces, airways,
land data (highways, cities, lakes, rivers,
borders, etc.) with names
• Map range
• Wind direction and speed
• Map orientation
• Icons for enabled map features
• Aircraft icon (present position)
• Obstacle data
The information in this section applies to the following maps unless otherwise noted:
• All Nearest Group Pages (‘NRST’)
• Direct To Window
• PFD Maps
• Procedure Loading Pages
Flight Management
• All Map Group Pages (‘Map’)
• All Waypoint Group Pages (‘WPT’)
• Trip Planning Page (‘Aux’)
• Flight Plan Pages (‘FPL’)
System Overview
5.2 USING MAP DISPLAYS
Automatic Flight Control
System
Maps are shown in one of three different orientation options, allowing flexibility in determining
aircraft position relative to other items on the map (north up) or for determining where map items are
relative to where the aircraft is going (track up or heading up). The map orientation is shown in the
upper left corner of the map.
Hazard Avoidance
MAP ORIENTATION
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
173
Figure 5-6 Map Orientation
•
North up (North up) aligns the top of the map display to north (default setting).
•
Track up (Track up) aligns the top of the map display to the current ground track.
•
Heading up (HDG up) aligns the top of the map display to the current aircraft heading.
The Auto North Up setting configures the map to switch automatically to a north up orientation
when the map range reaches a minimum range.
NOTE: When panning or reviewing active flight plan legs in a non-North Up orientation, the
map does not show the map orientation nor the wind direction and speed.
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Index
Appendices
NOTE: Map orientation can only be changed on the Navigation Map Page. Any other
displays that show navigation data reflect the orientation selected for the Navigation Map
Page.
174
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
Map Settings
Selection
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Figure 5-7 Navigation Map Page Menu Window
Audio Panel and CNS
Map Group Selection
Flight Management
Orientation Field
North Up Above Field
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Figure 5-8 Map Settings Window — Map Group
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
175
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Changing the Navigation Map orientation:
1) With the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key. The cursor
flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
Flight Instruments
2) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘Map Settings’ Window.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
Engine Indication System
5) Turn the large FMS Knob, or press the ENT Key once, to select the ‘Orientation’ Field.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired orientation.
7) Press the ENT Key to select the new orientation.
Audio Panel and CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the base page.
Enabling/disabling Auto North Up and selecting the minimum switching range:
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor
flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
Flight Management
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
Hazard Avoidance
5) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘North Up Above’ Field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’ using the small FMS Knob.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select the desired range.
9) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option.
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
MAP RANGE
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 250 feet to 1000 nm. The current range is
indicated in the upper left corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the
map. When the map range is decreased to a point that exceeds the capability of the system to
accurately represent the map, a magnifying glass icon is shown to the left of the map range. To change
the map range turn the Joystick counter-clockwise to decrease the range, or clockwise to increase the
range
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
range field.
176
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
Flight Instruments
Auto Zoom On
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Figure 5-9 Map Range
AUTO ZOOM
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Auto zoom allows the system to change the map display range to the smallest range clearly
showing the active waypoint. Auto zoom can be overridden by adjusting the range with the Joystick,
and remains until the active waypoint changes, a terrain or traffic alert occurs, the aircraft takes off,
or the manual override times out (timer set on ‘Map Settings’ Window). Auto zoom is suspended
while the map pointer is active.
If a terrain caution or warning occurs, all navigation maps automatically adjust to the smallest map
range clearly showing the potential impact areas. If a new traffic advisory alert occurs, any navigation
map displaying traffic advisory alerts automatically adjusts to the smallest map range clearly showing
the traffic advisory. When terrain or traffic alerts clear, the map returns to the previous auto zoom
range based on the active waypoint.
The auto zoom function can be turned on or off independently for the PFD and MFD. Control of
the ranges at which the auto zoom occurs is done by setting the minimum and maximum ‘look
forward’ times (set on the ‘Map Settings’ Window for the ‘Map’ Group). These settings determine the
minimum and maximum distance to display based upon the aircraft’s ground speed.
•
Waypoints that are long distances apart cause the map range to increase to a point where many
details on the map are decluttered. If this is not acceptable, lower the maximum look ahead time to
a value that limits the auto zoom to an acceptable range.
Appendices
•
Waypoints that are very short distances apart cause the map range to decrease to a point where
situational awareness may not be what is desired. Increase the minimum look ahead time to a
value that limits the auto zoom to a minimum range that provides acceptable situational
awareness.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
177
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
•
Flight plans that have a combination of long and short legs cause the range to increase and
decrease as waypoints sequence. To avoid this, auto zoom can be disabled or the maximum/
minimum times can be adjusted.
•
The ‘time out’ time (configurable on the ‘Map Settings’ Window for the Map Group) determines
how long auto zoom is overridden by a manual adjustment of the range knob. At the expiration of
this time, the auto zoom range is restored. Setting the ‘time out’ value to zero causes the manual
override to never time out.
•
When the maximum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the upper limit becomes the maximum
range available (1000 nm).
•
When the minimum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the lower limit becomes 1.5 nm.
Configuring automatic zoom:
Audio Panel and CNS
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor
flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
Flight Management
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Auto Zoom’ On/Off Field, and select ‘Off’ or
‘On’ using the small FMS Knob.
Hazard Avoidance
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the
‘Auto Zoom’ display selection Field.
7) Select ‘MFD’, ‘PFD’, or ‘All’ using the small FMS Knob.
8) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the ‘Max
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Look FWD’ Field. Times are from zero to 999 minutes.
9) Use the FMS Knobs to enter the ‘Max Look FWD’ time. Press the ENT Key.
10) Repeat step 9 for ‘Min Look FWD’ (zero to 99 minutes) and ‘Time Out’ (zero to 99
minutes).
11) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
MAP PANNING
Index
Appendices
Map panning allows the pilot to:
•
View parts of the map outside the displayed range without adjusting the map range
•
Highlight and select locations on the map
•
Review information for a selected airport, NAVAID or user waypoint
•
Designate locations for use in flight planning
•
View airspace and airway information
178
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Flight Instruments
NOTE: The map is normally centered on the aircraft’s position. If the map has been panned
and there has been no pointer movement for 60 seconds, the map reverts back to centered
on the aircraft position and the flashing pointer is removed.
System Overview
When the panning function is selected by pushing the Joystick, the Map Pointer flashes on the map
display. A window also appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude/longitude position
of the pointer, the bearing and distance to the pointer from the aircraft’s present position, and the
elevation of the land at the position of the pointer.
Engine Indication System
Map Pointer Information
Audio Panel and CNS
Map Pointer
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
When the Map Pointer is placed on an object, the name of the object is highlighted (even if the name
was not originally displayed on the map). When any map feature or object is selected on the map
display, pertinent information is displayed.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Figure 5-10 Navigation Map - Map Pointer Activated
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
179
Information about Point
of Interest
Map Pointer on
POI
Figure 5-11 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Point of Interest
When the Map Pointer crosses an airspace boundary, the boundary is highlighted and airspace
information is shown. The information includes the name and class of airspace, the ceiling in feet
above Mean Sea Level (MSL), and the floor in feet MSL.
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Panning the map:
1) Push the Joystick to display the Map Pointer.
Automatic Flight Control
System
2) Move the Joystick to move the Map Pointer around the map.
3) Push the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer and recenter the map on the aircraft’s
current position.
Reviewing information for an airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint:
Additional Features
1) With the desired map page displayed on the MFD, push the Joystick to display the
Map Pointer and place the Map Pointer on a waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘WPT - Waypoint Information’ Page for the selected
waypoint.
3) Press the Go Back Softkey, the CLR Key, or the ENT Key to exit the ‘WPT - Waypoint
Appendices
Information’ Page and return to the Navigation Map showing the selected waypoint.
Reviewing information for a special-use or controlled airspace:
1) With the desired map page displayed on the MFD, push the Joystick to display the
Index
Map Pointer and place the Map Pointer on an open area within the boundaries of an
180
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
airspace. (As the Map Pointer crosses the airspace boundary, the boundary is
highlighted and airspace information is shown.)
2) Press the ENT Key to display an options menu.
display the ‘Information’ Window for the selected airspace.
4) Press the FMS Knob, the CLR Key, or the ENT Key to exit the ‘Information’ Window.
Measurement
Information
Pointer Lat/Long
Audio Panel and CNS
Distance and bearing from the aircraft’s present position to any point on the viewable navigation
map may be calculated using the ‘Measure Bearing and Distance’ selection from Navigation Map page
menu. The bearing and distance tool displays a dashed Measurement Line and a Measure Pointer to
aid in graphically identifying points with which to measure. Lat/Long, distance and elevation data for
the Measure Pointer is provided in a window at the top of the navigation map.
Engine Indication System
MEASURING BEARING AND DISTANCE
Flight Instruments
3) ‘Review Airspaces’ should already be highlighted, if not select it. Press the ENT Key to
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Measurement Line
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Figure 5-12 Navigation Map - Measuring Bearing and Distance
Measuring bearing and distance between any two points:
1) Press the MENU Key (with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed).
3) Press the ENT Key. A Measure Pointer is displayed on the map at the aircraft’s present
Appendices
2) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Measure Bearing/Distance’ Field.
position.
4) Move the Joystick to place the reference pointer at the desired location. The bearing
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Index
and distance are displayed at the top of the map. Elevation at the current pointer
181
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
position is also displayed. Pressing the ENT Key changes the starting point for
measuring.
Measuring’ from the ‘Page Menu’ Window and press the ENT Key.
TOPOGRAPHY
All navigation maps can display various shades of topography colors representing land elevation,
similar to aviation sectional charts. The topographic data range is the maximum map range on which
topographic data is displayed.
Topographic data can be displayed or removed as described in the following procedures.
Topographic data can also be displayed on the selectable VSD Inset at the bottom of the navigation
map. In addition, the Navigation Map can display a topographic scale (located in the lower right hand
side of the map) showing a scale of the terrain elevation and minimum/maximum displayed elevations.
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
5) To exit the Measure Bearing/Distance option, push the Joystick; or select ‘Stop
Navigation Map
Topographic Data
Flight Management
Navigation Map
Black Background
TER Softkey 'Off'
Hazard Avoidance
Topographic Data
on VSD Inset
TER Softkey
'Topo'
Automatic Flight Control
System
TOPO Off
TOPO On
Additional Features
Figure 5-13 Navigation Map - Topographic Data
Topo Data On
Appendices
Topo Data Off
Index
Figure 5-14 PFD HSI Map - Topographic Data
182
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
Maximum Displayed Elevation
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Minimum Displayed Elevation
Audio Panel and CNS
Figure 5-16 Navigation Map - Topo Scale
Figure 5-15 Navigation Map - Topo Scale
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Press the TER Softkey until ‘Topo’ is shown on the softkey to display topographic data.
Flight Management
Displaying/removing topographic data on all MFD pages displaying navigation
maps:
3) Press the TER Softkey until ‘Off’ is shown on the softkey to remove topographic data
Hazard Avoidance
from the navigation map. When topographic data is removed from the page, all
navigation data is presented on a black background.
Displaying/removing topographic data on the PFD Map:
2) Press the TER Softkey.
3) Press the TER Softkey until ‘Off’ is shown on the softkey to remove topographic data
Additional Features
from the navigation map. When topographic data is removed from the page, all
navigation data is presented on a black background.
Automatic Flight Control
System
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
Displaying/removing topographic data using the Navigation Map Page Menu:
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor
flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
Appendices
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Terrain Display’ Field.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
183
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Topo’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
Flight Instruments
Selecting a topographical data range (Terrain Display):
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor
flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
Engine Indication System
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group.
Audio Panel and CNS
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
6) To change the Terrain Display range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Use the large FMS knob to highlight the ‘Terrain Display’ range field. Ranges are from 1
nm to 1000 nm.
range list.
7) Enter the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
Flight Management
8) Press the ENT Key.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
Displaying/removing the topographic scale (Topo Scale):
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor
Hazard Avoidance
flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group. Press the ENT Key.
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Topo Scale’ Field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
MAP SYMBOLS
This section discusses the types of land and aviation symbols that can be displayed. Each listed type
of symbol can be turned on or off, and the maximum range to display each symbol can be set. The
decluttering of the symbols from the map using the Detail Softkey is also discussed.
Appendices
LAND SYMBOLS
Index
The following items are configured on the land menu:
184
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
N/A
Interstate
Highway
(Freeway)
50
400
International
Highway
(Freeway)
50
400
US Highway
(National
Highway)
15
150
State Highway
(Local
Highway)
2.5
100
4
25
Railroads
(RAILROAD)
7.5
25
Large City (>
200,000)
100
1000
Medium City
(> 50,000)
50
400
Small City (>
5,000)
25
100
State/Province
400
1000
River/Lake
75
100
Latitude/
Longitude
(LAT/LON)
1
1000
Local Road
(Local Road)
N/A
Additional Features
N/A
Automatic Flight Control
System
Highways and
Roads
Hazard Avoidance
40
Flight Management
25
Audio Panel and CNS
User Waypoint
Engine Indication System
Max Range
(nm)
Flight Instruments
Default
Range (nm)
Symbol
System Overview
Land
Symbols
Table 5-3 Land Symbol Information
Appendices
AVIATION SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the aviation menu:
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
185
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Default
Range
(nm)
Max
Range
(nm)
Large Airport
(Longest Runway
>8100 ft)
100
1000
Medium Airport
(8100 ft > Longest
Runway >5000 ft,
or Longest Runway
< 5000 ft with
control tower)
50
400
Small Airport
(Longest Runway <
5000 ft without
control tower)
25
150
1.5
5
7.5
150
N/A
N/A
Intersection (INT)
25
40
Non-directional
Beacon (NDB)
25
50
VOR
50
250
N/A
N/A
Visual Reporting
Point (VRP)
25
1000
Temporary Flight
Restriction (TFR)
250
1000
VNAV Constraints
1000
1000
N/A
N/A
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
Aviation Symbols
Flight Management
Taxiways (SafeTaxi)
Symbols
See Additional
Features
Runway Extension
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Missed Approach
Preview On/Off
(Missed APR)
Additional Features
VOR Compass Rose
On/Off
Index
Appendices
(VNAV Constraints)
Show All (show all
constraints within
flight plan if VNAV
Constraints are
‘On’ above)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Table 5-4 Aviation Symbol Information
186
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
AIRSPACE SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the airspace menu:
N/A
N/A
N/A
Airspace Altitude Labels
(Airspace ALT LBL) On/
Off:
N/A
N/A
N/A
Class B Airspace
Altitude Label (ceiling/
floor)
N/A
N/A
Class C Airspace
Altitude Label (ceiling/
floor)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
50
150
50
100
10
100
50
100
50
250
50
250
•
•
Class D Airspace
Altitude
Label
(ceiling)
Class B Airspace/TMA
(CLASS B/TMA)
Class C Airspace/TCA
(CLASS C/TCA)
Class D Airspace (CLASS
D)
Alert/Prohibited/
Restricted/Warning
Areas (RESTRICTED)
Military Operations
Area [MOA(MILITARY)]
Other/Air Defense
Interdiction Zone
(OTHER/ADIZ)
Flight Management
Smart Airspace On/Off
Audio Panel and CNS
Max
Range
(nm)
Engine Indication System
Default
Range
(nm)
Flight Instruments
Symbol
Airspace Symbols
•
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Table 5-5 Airspace Symbol Information
SYMBOL SETUP
All navigation maps can display land, aviation and airspace symbols. Symbol types (e.g. runway
extensions, railroads) can be removed individually. The range sets the maximum range at which
items appear on the display. For example, enabling “Runway Extension” displays a dashed line on
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
187
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
the map extending from each runway of an airport in the flight plan when the range is set at or
below the value of the map settings option.
Setting up the Land, Aviation or Airspace group items:
Flight Instruments
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the
‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Settings Menu is displayed.
Engine Indication System
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the first field.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the desired option.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option and move the cursor to the next item.
8) Repeat steps 5-7 as necessary.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
MAP DECLUTTER
The declutter feature allows the pilot to progressively step through four levels of removing map
information. The declutter level is displayed in the Detail Softkey and next to the Declutter Menu
Option.
The following table lists the items that are decluttered at each map detail level. The ‘X’ represents
map items decluttered for each level of detail.
Item
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired setting (e.g. On/Off or maximum range).
188
Detail 3
Detail 2
Detail 1
Data Link Radar Precipitation
X
Data Link Lightning
X
Graphical METARs
X
Airports
X
Safe Taxi
X
Runway Labels
X
TFRs
X
Restricted
X
MOA (Military)
X
Intersections
X
X
NDBs
X
X
VORs
X
X
VRPs
X
X
User Waypoints
X
X
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Detail 3
Detail 1
Latitude/Longitude Grid
X
X
NAVAIDs (does not declutter if used to define airway)
X
X
Intersections (does not declutter if used to define airway)
X
X
Class B Airspaces/TMA
X
X
Class C Airspaces/TCA
X
X
Class D Airspaces
X
X
Other Airspaces/ADIZ
X
X
Obstacles
X
X
X
X
Roads
X
X
X
Railroads
X
X
X
State/Province Boundaries
X
X
X
Audio Panel and CNS
X
Engine Indication System
Cities
Flight Instruments
Detail 2
System Overview
Item
Table 5-6 Navigation Map Items Decluttered for each Detail Level
Press the Detail Softkey with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The current declutter
level is shown. With each softkey press, another level of map information is removed.
Flight Management
Decluttering the MFD Map:
Or:
Hazard Avoidance
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Declutter’. The current declutter level is shown.
3) Press the ENT Key to apply the next declutter level and return to the Navigation Map.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Decluttering the PFD Map:
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Detail Softkey. The current declutter level is shown. With each selection,
another level of map information is removed.
Appendices
This airways discussion is based upon the North American airway structure. The airway structure in
places other than North America vary by location, etc. and are not discussed in this guide. Low
Altitude Airways (Victor Airways or T-Routes) start 1,200 feet above ground level (AGL) and extend
up to 18,000 feet mean sea level (MSL). Low Altitude Airways are designated with a “V” or a “T” before
the airway number.
High Altitude Airways (Jet Routes or Q-Routes) start at 18,000 feet MSL and extend upward to
45,000 feet MSL. High Altitude Airways are designated with a “J” or a “Q” before the airway number.
Additional Features
AIRWAYS
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
189
Low Altitude Airways are drawn in gray (the same shade used for roads). High Altitude Airways are
drawn in green. When both types of airways are displayed, High Altitude Airways are drawn on top of
Low Altitude Airways.
When airways are selected for display on the map, the airway waypoints (VORs, NDBs and
Intersections) are also displayed.
High Altitude
Airway
(Jet Route)
Low Altitude
Airway
(Victor Airway)
Low Altitude
Airway
(T-Route)
High Altitude
Airway
(Q-Route)
Figure 5-16 Airways on MFD Navigation Page
Airways may be displayed on the map at the pilot’s discretion using either a combination of AWY
Softkey presses, or menu selections using the MENU Key from the Navigation Map Page. The Airway
range can also be programmed to only display Airways on the MFD when the map range is at or below
a specific number.
The following items are configured on the airways menu:
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Default
Range
(nm)
Maximum
Range (nm)
Low Altitude Airways
(V Routes and T
Routes)
50
100
High Altitude Airways
(J Routes and Q
Routes)
50
100
Appendices
Airways Symbols
Symbol
Index
Table 5-7 Airways Symbol Information
190
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
Displaying/removing airways:
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Press the AWY Softkey. Both High and Low Altitude Airways are displayed (AWY On).
Flight Instruments
3) Press the softkey again to display Low Altitude Airways only (AWY LO).
4) Press the softkey again to display High Altitude Airways only (AWY HI).
5) Press the softkey again to remove High Altitude Airways. No airways are displayed
Engine Indication System
(AWY Off).
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor
flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
Audio Panel and CNS
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ Group, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Low ALT Airways’ On/Off Field.
Flight Management
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Off’ or ‘On’.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
Selecting an airway range (Low ALT Airways or High ALT Airways):
Hazard Avoidance
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor
flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ Group, and press the ENT Key.
Automatic Flight Control
System
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Low ALT Airways’ or ‘High ALT Airways’
range field.
5) To change the range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
Additional Features
6) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
ADDITIONAL NAVIGATION MAP ITEMS
Appendices
Navigation maps can display some additional items. These items (e.g. track vector, wind vector, fuel
range ring, SVT field of view, and selected altitude intercept arc) can be displayed/removed
individually.
TRACK VECTOR
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
191
Index
The map can display a track vector that is useful in minimizing track angle error. The track vector
is a solid cyan line segment extended to a predicted location. The track vector look-ahead time is
selectable (30 sec, 60 sec (default), 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 20 min) and determines the length of the
track vector. The track vector shows up to 90 degrees of a turn for the 30 and 60 second time
settings. It is always a straight line for the 2 min, 5 min, 10 min and 20 min settings.
Track Vector
Figure 5-17 Navigation Map -Track Vector
SELECTED ALTITUDE INTERCEPT ARC
The map can display the location along the current track where the aircraft will intercept the
selected altitude. The location will be shown as a cyan arc when the aircraft is actually climbing or
descending.
Range to
Altitude Arc
Figure 5-18 Navigation Map - Range to Altitude Arc
WIND VECTOR
The map displays a wind vector arrow in the upper right-hand portion of the screen. Wind vector
information is displayed as a white arrow pointing in the direction in which the wind is moving for
wind speeds greater than or equal to 1 kt.
Wind Direction
Wind Speed
Figure 5-19 Navigation Map — Wind Vector
NOTE: The wind vector is not displayed until the aircraft is moving. It is not displayed on the
Waypoint Information pages.
FUEL RANGE RING
The map can display a fuel range ring which shows the remaining flight distance. A dashed green
circle indicates the selected range to reserve fuel. A solid green circle indicates the total endurance
range. If only reserve fuel remains, the range is indicated by a solid amber circle.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
192
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
Time to Reserve Fuel
Range to Reserve Fuel
Flight Instruments
Total Endurance Range
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Figure 5-20 Navigation Map — Fuel Range Ring
The map can display the boundaries of the PFD Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) lateral field of
view. The field of view is shown as two dashed lines forming a V shape in front of the aircraft symbol
on the map. This is only available if SVT is installed on the aircraft.
Flight Management
FIELD OF VIEW (SVT)
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Lateral Field
of View
Boundaries
Additional Features
Figure 5-21 Navigation Map — Field of View
Setting up additional Map group items:
Appendices
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor
flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group.
Index
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the first field.
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
193
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the desired option.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
Flight Instruments
Or
If it is a data field, use the FMS Knob to select the range or time value.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option and move the cursor to the next item.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
DESTINATION AIRPORT INFORMATION
Information for the destination airport is displayed in the upper right corner of the MFD, and is
determined as follows:
•
If no arrival or approach is loaded, or if an arrival waypoint is part of the active leg and no approach
is loaded, then the destination airport is displayed as the last airport in the active flight plan. The last
airport in the active flight plan will also be displayed as the destination airport when the active leg is
providing guidance past the Missed Approach Point (MAP) of an approach.
•
If an arrival waypoint is part of the active leg and an approach is loaded, or approach has been
activated, the displayed destination airport becomes the airport associated with the approach.
•
If an airport is entered as a direct-to waypoint and is not in the active flight plan, then that airport is
displayed as the destination airport.
If none of these conditions are met, then the destination airport is undefined and the destination
information fields are shown as dashes.
If FOD is positive, but less than 18 gallons, the FOD value is shown is amber. If FOD is zero or
negative, the FOD value is shown in red.
If FOD is less than –99 gallons, dashes will be displayed in place of the FOD value
Valid Destination Airport
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
8) Repeat steps 5-7 as necessary.
Airport
Identifier
Estimated
Time Enroute
Bearing
to Airport
Appendices
Enroute
Distance
Fuel Remaining
at Airport
Invalid Destination Airport
Index
Figure 5-22 Destination Airport Information
194
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Automatic Flight Control
System
Waypoint Location
Hazard Avoidance
Entered Waypoint on
Map
Flight Management
- Waypoint Identifier
- Type (symbol)
- Facility Name
- City
Audio Panel and CNS
City Entry Field
Facility
Entry Field
Engine Indication System
Identifier Entry Field
Flight Instruments
Waypoints are predetermined geographical positions (internal database) or pilot-entered positions,
and are used for all phases of flight planning and navigation.
Communication and navigation frequencies can be tuned “automatically” from various Waypoint
Information (WPT) pages, Nearest (NRST) pages, and the ‘Nearest Airports’ Window (on PFD). This
auto-tuning feature simplifies frequency entry over manual tuning. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS
section for details on auto-tuning.
Waypoints can be selected by entering the ICAO identifier, entering the name of the facility, or by
entering the city name. See the System Overview section for detailed instructions on entering data in the
system. As a waypoint identifier, facility name, or location is entered, the Spell’N’Find feature scrolls
through the database, displaying those waypoints matching the characters which have been entered to
that point. A direct-to navigation leg to the selected waypoint can be initiated by pressing the Direct-to
Key on any of the waypoint pages.
System Overview
5.3 WAYPOINTS
Additional Features
Figure 5-23 Waypoint Information Window
Appendices
If duplicate entries exist for an identifier, a ‘Duplicate Waypoints’ Window is displayed when the ENT
Key is pressed.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
195
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Flight Instruments
Identifier with
Duplicates
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Duplicate
Waypoints
Figure 5-24 Waypoint Information Window - Duplicate Identifier
AIRPORTS
NOTE: North Up orientation on the Airport Information Page cannot be changed; the pilot
needs to be aware of proper orientation if the Navigation Map orientation is different from
the Airport Information Page Map.
The Airport Information Page is the first page in WPT Page Group and allows the pilot to view
airport information, load frequencies (COM, NAV, and lighting), review runways, and review
instrument procedures that may be involved in the flight plan. See the Audio Panel and CNS Section
for more information on loading frequencies (auto-tuning). After engine startup, the Airport
Information Page defaults to the airport where the aircraft is located. After a flight plan has been
loaded, it defaults to the destination airport. On a flight plan with multiple airports, it defaults to the
airport which is the current active waypoint.
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and surrounding area, the Airport
Information Page displays airport information in three boxes labeled Airport, Runways, and
Frequencies. For airports with multiple runways, information for each runway is available. This
information is viewed on the Airport Information Page by pressing the Info Softkey until ‘Info 1’ is
displayed in the softkey label.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Duplicate Message
196
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Airport
Runway Information
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
Airport/Runway
Diagram
Audio Panel and CNS
- Identification
- Frequency
- Availability
- Additional Information
Engine Indication System
- Designation
- Length/Width/Surface
- Lighting Available
Flight Instruments
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
- Lat/Long/Elev
- Fuel Available
- Time Zone (UTC Offset)
System Overview
Airport Information
Flight Management
Figure 5-25 Airport Information Page
The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Information Page:
•
Runway surface type: Hard, Turf, Sealed, Gravel, Dirt, Soft, Unknown, or Water.
•
Runway lighting type: No Lights, Part Time, Full Time, Unknown, or PCL Freq (for pilot-controlled
lighting)
•
COM Availability: TX (transmit only), RX (receive only), PT (part time), i (additional information
available)
Automatic Flight Control
System
Usage type: Public, Military, Private, or Heliport
Hazard Avoidance
•
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
197
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Airport Information
Airport Directory
Information
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
Softkeys
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Figure 5-26 Airport Directory Page Example
The airport directory information is viewed on the Airport Directory Page by pressing the Info
Softkey until ‘Info 2’ is displayed in the softkey label. The following are types of airport directory
information shown (if available) on the Airport Directory Page:
•
Airport: Identifier, Type, Name, City, State, Map
•
Control Tower: Full/Part-time Hours, Days Open
•
Attendance: Annual, weekly, daily, hours
•
Facility Lighting and Beacon: Hours operating, Type and Location, CTAF, beacon colors
•
Noise Abatement: Flying Procedures
•
Pattern Altitudes: Aircraft Class/Altitude
•
Runways: Headings, Length, Width, Facility Obstructions, Surface, Condition, Clearance Slope
•
FBO: Name/Type, Frequencies, Services, Fees, Fuel, Credit Cards, Phone/Fax, Hours Internet,
Courtesy Car
•
Aircraft Businesses/Clubs: Name, Type (sales, training, servicing), Frequencies/Phone/Fax, Credit
Cards, Internet, Services
•
Frequencies: Type/Frequency
•
Instrument Approaches: Published Approach, Frequency
•
Services Available: Category, Specific Service
198
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
•
Weather Contacts: Service Type and Frequencies/Phone (AWOS/ASOS)
•
Obstructions: General Airport Obstructions
•
Flight Service Station (FSS): FSS Name, Phone Numbers
•
Approaches: Types
•
General Information and/or Notes: Fees, Airport Notes, Local Area Information
•
Special Operations at Airport: Helicopters, etc.
•
Restaurants: On the Field and Nearby
•
Transportation: Taxi Services, Car Rentals, Type and Availability (public, shuttle, limo, etc.)
•
Attractions: Hotels, Museums, Raceways, Golfing, etc.
•
NAVAIDs: Type, Identifier, Frequency, Radial, Distance
•
Charts: VFR Sectional
•
Elevation: Airfield Elevation (feet)
•
Mag Var: Airfield Magnetic Variation (degrees)
•
Airport Manager: Phone
Flight Instruments
Frequencies: Type/Frequency
System Overview
•
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Control
CTA *
Departure *
FSS
Gate
Ground
Helicopter
Multicom
Other
Pre-taxi
Radar
Ramp
Terminal *
TMA *
Tower
TRSA *
Unicom
ILS
LOC
Automatic Flight Control
System
Approach *
Arrival *
ASOS
ATIS
AWOS
Center
Class B *
Class C *
Clearance
Navigation Frequencies
Hazard Avoidance
Communication Frequencies
Flight Management
The airport ‘Frequencies’ Box uses the descriptions and abbreviations listed in the following table:
Table 5-8 Airport Frequency Abbreviations
Selecting an airport for review by identifier, facility name, or location:
Appendices
A departure, arrival, or approach can be loaded using the softkeys on the Airport Information Page.
See the Procedures section for details. METARs or TAFs applicable to the selected airport can be
selected for display (see the Hazard Avoidance section for details about weather).
Additional Features
* May include Additional Information
1) From the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page (Info 1 Softkey), press the FMS Knob.
2) Use the FMS Knobs and enter an identifier, facility name, or location.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
199
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Flight Instruments
Selecting a runway:
1) With the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page (Info 1 Softkey) displayed, press the FMS
Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘Runways’ Box, on the runway
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired runway (if more than one) for the
selected airport.
4) To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS Knob.
Viewing a destination airport:
From the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page (Info 1 Softkey) press the MENU Key. Select
‘View Destination Airport’. The Destination Airport is displayed.
The system provides a Nearest Softkey on the PFD, which gives the pilot quick access to nearest
airport information (very useful if an immediate landing is required). The ‘Nearest Airports’ Window
displays a list of up to 25 of the nearest airports (three entries can be displayed at one time). If there
are more than three they are displayed in a scrollable list. If there are no nearest airports available,
“None Within 200nm” is displayed.
Bearing/Distance to Airport
Airport Identifier/
Type
Approach Available
Length of Longest
Runway
COM Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
Additional Airports
(within 200 nm)
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
designator.
Nearest Softkey
Index
Figure 5-27 Nearest Airports Window on PFD
200
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
Pressing the ENT Key while the ‘Nearest Airports’ Window is shown displays the PFD ‘Airport
Information’ Window for the highlighted airport. Pressing the ENT Key again returns to the ‘Nearest
Airports’ Window with the cursor on the next airport in the list. Continued presses of the ENT Key
sequences through the information pages for all airports in the Nearest Airports list.
Flight Instruments
Airport Information
Airport Information
- Usage/Time/Elev
- Region
Audio Panel and CNS
Airport Information
Engine Indication System
- ID/Type/City
- Facility
- Lat/Long
Flight Management
Figure 5-28 Airport Information Window on PFD
Hazard Avoidance
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the PFD:
1) Press the Nearest Softkey to display the ‘Nearest Airports’ Window.
display the Airport Information Window.
3) To return to the Nearest Airports Window press the ENT Key (with the cursor on
4) Press the CLR Key or the Nearest Softkey to close the PFD Nearest Airports Window.
Appendices
The Nearest Airports Page on the MFD is first in the group of NRST pages because of its potential
use in the event of an in-flight emergency. In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected
airport and surrounding area, the page displays nearest airport information in five boxes labeled
Nearest Airports, Information, Runways, Frequencies, and Approaches.
The selected airport is indicated by a white arrow, and a dashed white line is drawn on the
navigation map from the aircraft position to the nearest airport. Up to five nearest airports, one
runway, up to three frequencies, and up to four approaches are visible at one time. If there are more
Additional Features
‘BACK’) or press the CLR Key. The cursor is now on the next airport in the ‘Nearest
Airports’ Window list. (Repeatedly pressing the ENT Key moves through the airport list,
alternating between the ‘Nearest Airports’ Window and the ‘Airport Information’
Window.)
Automatic Flight Control
System
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airport identifier, and press the ENT Key to
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
201
than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. If there are no items for display in a boxed area, text
indicating that fact is displayed. The currently selected airport remains in the list until it is unselected.
See the Audio Panel & CNS Section for frequency selection and the Procedures Section for
approaches.
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Nearest Airports
Engine Indication System
- ID/Type
- Bearing/Distance
Airport Information
Audio Panel and CNS
Runway Information
- Designation/Surface
- Length/Width
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Airport
Approaches Available
LD APR Softkey (only
available if an approach is
highlighted)
Window Selection
Softkeys
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
- Facility/City/Elevation
Nearest Airport
Figure 5-29 Nearest Airport Page
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the MFD:
Automatic Flight Control
System
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘NRST’ page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Nearest Airports’ Page (it is the first page of the
group, so it may already be selected). If there are no Nearest Airports available, ‘None
Within 200nm’ is displayed.
3) Press the APT Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight
Additional Features
‘Select Airport Window’ and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Nearest
Airports’ Box. The first airport in the nearest airports list is highlighted.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airport. (Pressing the ENT Key also moves
to the next airport.)
Index
Appendices
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
202
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
1) With the ‘NRST - Nearest Airports’ Page displayed, press the RNWY Softkey; or press
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
Audio Panel and CNS
Selecting nearest airport surface and minimum runway length matching criteria:
Engine Indication System
The ‘Nearest Airports’ Box on the System Setup Page defines the minimum runway length and
surface type used when determining the 25 nearest airports to display on the MFD Nearest Airports
Page. A minimum runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small
runways or runways that are not appropriately surfaced from being displayed. Default settings are
3000 feet (or meters) for runway length and “Hard Only” for runway surface type.
Flight Instruments
the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Runway Window’; and press the ENT Key. The cursor
is placed in the ‘Runways’ Box.
System Overview
Viewing runway information for a specific airport:
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Runway Surface’ Field in the ‘Nearest
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway option (Any, Hard Only, Hard/
Soft).
Flight Management
Airport’ Box.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the ‘Minimum Length’ Field in the ‘Nearest
Hazard Avoidance
Airport’ Box.
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter the minimum runway length (zero to 25,000 feet) and
press the ENT Key.
INTERSECTIONS
The Intersection Information Page is used to view information about intersections. In addition to
displaying a map of the currently selected intersection and surrounding area, the Intersection
Information Page displays information about the VOR which is nearest to the selected intersection.
Additional Features
NOTE: The VOR displayed on the Intersection Information Page is the nearest VOR, not
necessarily the VOR used to define the intersection.
Automatic Flight Control
System
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
203
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Intersection Identifier
Flight Instruments
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Intersection
Intersection Info
- Region
- Lat/Long
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Radial to VOR
- Distance to VOR
Selected Intersection
Figure 5-30 Intersection Information Page
The Nearest Intersections Page can be used to quickly find an intersection close to the flight path.
The selected intersection is indicated by a white arrow.
NOTE: The list only includes intersections that are within 200 nm.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Nearest VOR Info
204
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
Intersection Information
- Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to
intersection from
aircraft position
Intersection Lat/Long
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- VOR Frequency
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
Audio Panel and CNS
Reference VOR Info
Engine Indication System
Nearest
Intersection
Flight Instruments
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Intersection
Flight Management
Figure 5-31 Nearest Intersection Page
Selecting an intersection:
1) With the ‘WPT - Intersection Information’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob. The
Hazard Avoidance
cursor is placed in the ‘Intersection’ Box.
2) Use the FMS Knobs to enter an identifier.
3) Press the ENT Key.
Automatic Flight Control
System
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the ‘NRST - Nearest Intersections’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
Key .
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Additional Features
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select an identifier in the ‘Nearest INT’ Box, and press the ENT
NDB
Appendices
The NDB Information Page displays information for the selected NDB and a map of the surrounding
area. This page also provides the NDB Frequency and information for the airport nearest to the NDB.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
205
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
NDB
NDB Information
- Type
- Region
- Lat/Long
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
NDB Identifier/Type
NDB Frequency
Selected NDB
Nearest Airport Info
Figure 5-32 NDB Information Page
NOTE: Compass locator (LOM, LMM): a low power, low or medium frequency radio beacon
installed in conjunction with the instrument landing system. When LOM is used, the locator is
at the Outer Marker; when LMM is used, the locator is at the Middle Marker.
The Nearest NDB Page can be used to quickly find an NDB close to the flight path. A white arrow
before the NDB identifier indicates the selected NDB. In addition to displaying a map of the
surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest NDBs. The list only includes
NDBs that are within 200nm. If there are no NDBs in the list, text indicating that there are no nearest
NDBs is displayed, and the information and frequency fields are dashed.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
206
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
NDB Identifier/Symbol
Engine Indication System
Nearest NDB
Flight Instruments
- Bearing/Distance to
NDB from aircraft
position
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
NDB
NDB Information
NDB Frequency
Audio Panel and CNS
- Facility Name/City
- Type
- Lat/Long
Flight Management
Figure 5-33 Nearest NDB Page
Selecting an NDB:
placed in the ‘NDB’ Box.
2) Use the FMS Knobs to enter the NDB identifier, name, or the city in which it’s located.
Hazard Avoidance
1) With the ‘WPT - NDB Information’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob. The cursor is
3) Press the ENT Key.
Automatic Flight Control
System
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the ‘NRST - Nearest NDB’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Additional Features
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select an identifier in the ‘Nearest NDB’ Box, and press the ENT
VOR
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
207
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Appendices
The VOR Information Page displays information for the selected VOR and a map of the surrounding
area. This page can be used to view information about VOR and ILS navigation signals, or to quickly
auto-tune a VOR or ILS frequency.
Localizer information cannot be viewed on the VOR Information Page. If a VOR station is combined
with a TACAN station it is listed as a VORTAC on the VOR Information Page and if it includes only
DME, it is displayed as VOR-DME.
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
Navigation Map
Showing
Selected VOR
VOR Information
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Region
- Lat/Long
VOR Frequency
Selected VOR
Nearest Airport Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
Figure 5-34 VOR Information Page
The Nearest VOR Page can be used to quickly find a VOR station close to the aircraft. A white arrow
before the VOR identifier indicates the selected VOR. Also, a NAV frequency from a selected VOR
station can be loaded from the Nearest VOR Page. In addition to displaying a map of the surrounding
area, the Nearest VOR Page displays information for up to 25 nearest VOR stations. The list only
includes VORs that are within 200 nm. If there are no nearest VORs in the list, the information is
dashed.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
VOR Identifier/Type
208
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
VOR
VOR Identifier/Symbol
VOR Frequency
Audio Panel and CNS
- Facility Name/City
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Lat/Long
Engine Indication System
VOR Information
Nearest VOR
Flight Instruments
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
from aircraft position
Flight Management
Figure 5-35 Nearest VOR Page
Selecting a VOR:
1) With the ‘WPT - VOR Information’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob. The cursor is
2) Use the FMS Knobs to enter the VOR identifier, name, or the city in which it’s located.
3) Press the ENT Key.
Or:
1) With the ‘NRST - Nearest VOR’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob; or press the VOR
Automatic Flight Control
System
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Hazard Avoidance
place in the ‘VOR’ Box.
Softkey.
Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Additional Features
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select an identifier in the ‘Nearest VOR’ Box, and press the ENT
Or:
Appendices
1) With the ‘NRST - Nearest VOR’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Select VOR Window’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select an identifier in the ‘Nearest VOR’ Box, and press the ENT
Key.
Index
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
209
VRP
The VRP Information Page dispays information about the selected visual reporting point (VRPs) and
a map of the surrounding area.
Selected VRP
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Navigation Map Showing Selected VRP
Engine Indication System
VRP Identifier/Symbol
- VRP Name
VRP Information
Figure 5-36 VRP Information Page
The Nearest VRP Page can be used to quickly find a VRP close to the aircraft. A white arrow before
the VRP identifier indicates the selected VRP. In addition to displaying a map of the surrounding area,
the Nearest VRP Page displays information for up to 25 nearest VRPs. The list only includes VRPs that
are within 200 nm. If there are no nearest VRPs in the list, the information is dashed.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
- Country
- Bearing/Distance to VRP
from aircraft position
- Lat/Long
210
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
Navigation Map Showing Nearest VRP
Nearest VRP
- Bearing/Distance to VRP
from aircraft position
Flight Instruments
VRP Identifier/Symbol
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
VRP Information
- VRP Name
- Country
- Lat/Long
Flight Management
Selecting a VRP:
1) With the ‘WPT - VRP Information’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob. The cursor is
Automatic Flight Control
System
placed in the ‘VRP’ Box.
Hazard Avoidance
Figure 5-37 Nearest VRP Page
2) Use the FMS Knobs to enter the VRP identifier or name.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
1) With the ‘NRST - Nearest VRP’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select an identifier in the ‘Nearest VRP’ Box, and press the ENT
Additional Features
Or:
Key.
Appendices
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
USER WAYPOINTS
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
211
Index
The system can create and store up to 1,000 user-defined waypoints. User waypoints can be created
from any map page (except PFD Maps, Aux-Trip Planning Page, or Procedure Pages) by selecting a
position on the map using the Joystick, or from the User Waypoint Information Page by referencing a
bearing/distance from an existing waypoint, bearings from two existing waypoints, or a latitude and
longitude. Once a waypoint has been created, it can be renamed, deleted, or moved. Temporary user
waypoints are erased upon system power down.
User Waypoint Info
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
User Waypoint
- Identifier
- Temporary/Normal
- Waypoint Type
User Wpt Comment
Reference Wpt/Info
- Identifier/Rad/Dist or
- Identifiers/Radials or
- Region/Lat/Long
Selected User
Waypoint
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
User Waypoint List
- Identifier
- Comment
Flight Management
# User Wpts Used
Nearest User Wpt List
- Identifier
- Bearing/Distance from
aircraft position
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
User Waypoint
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Figure 5-38 User Waypoint Information Page
User Waypoint Info
- Comment
- Lat/Long
Reference Wpt Info
Appendices
Selected User
Waypoint
- Identifier
- Radial/Distance
Index
Figure 5-39 Nearest User Waypoint Page
212
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
Selecting a User Waypoint:
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob. The
cursor is placed in the ‘User Waypoint’ Box.
Flight Instruments
2) Use the FMS Knobs to enter the name of the User Waypoint; or use the large FMS
Knob to scroll to the desired waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box.
3) Press the ENT Key.
Or:
1) With the ‘NRST - Nearest User WPTS’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select an identifier in the ‘Nearest User’ Box, and press the ENT
Audio Panel and CNS
Key.
Engine Indication System
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Creating user waypoints from the User WPT Information Page:
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
3) Press the ENT Key. The current aircraft position is the default location of the new
Flight Management
1) Press the New Softkey, or press the MENU Key and select ‘Create New User Waypoint’.
waypoint.
Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two
reference waypoint identifiers and radials into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Box using the
FMS Knobs.
Hazard Avoidance
4) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
Automatic Flight Control
System
Or:
Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the
reference waypoint identifier, the radial, and the distance into the ‘Reference
Waypoints’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude
and longitude into the ‘Information’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
Additional Features
Or:
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
Appendices
6) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to temporary by moving the
cursor to ‘Temporary’ and selecting the ENT Key to check the box.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
213
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Are you sure you want to create the new user
Flight Instruments
waypoint AAAAAA?’ is displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
Engine Indication System
Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two
reference waypoint identifiers and radials into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Box using the
FMS Knobs.
Or:
Audio Panel and CNS
Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the
reference waypoint identifier, the radial, and the distance into the ‘Reference
Waypoints’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
Flight Management
Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude
and longitude into the ‘Information’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to temporary by moving the
Hazard Avoidance
cursor to ‘Temporary’ and selecting the ENT Key to check the box.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Creating user waypoints from map pages:
Automatic Flight Control
System
1) Push the Joystick to activate the panning function and pan to the map location of the
desired user waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page is displayed with the
Additional Features
captured position.
Appendices
NOTE: If the pointer has highlighted a map database feature, one of three things happens
upon pressing the ENT Key: 1) information about the selected feature is displayed instead of
initiating a new waypoint, 2) a menu pops up allowing a choice between ‘Review Airspaces’
or ‘Create User Waypoint’, or 3) a new waypoint is initiated with the default name being the
selected map item.
3) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name. The first reference waypoint box is
highlighted.
Index
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
214
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Flight Instruments
Or:
System Overview
Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two
reference waypoint identifiers and radials into the ‘Reference Waypoints’ Box using the
FMS Knobs.
Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the
reference waypoint identifier, the radial, and the distance into the ‘Reference
Waypoints’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude
and longitude into the ‘Information’ Box using the FMS Knobs.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
moving the cursor to ‘Temporary’ and selecting the ENT Key to check or uncheck the
box.
Audio Panel and CNS
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to temporary or normal by
Engine Indication System
Or:
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Flight Management
9) Press the Go Back Softkey to return to the map page.
EDITING USER WAYPOINTS
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate
the cursor. The cursor is placed in the ‘User Waypoint’ Box.
Additional Features
2) Use the FMS Knobs to enter the name of the User Waypoint; or turn the large FMS
Automatic Flight Control
System
Editing a user waypoint comment or location:
Hazard Avoidance
Once a user waypoint has been created, it may be edited, renamed, or deleted. A system generated
comment for a user waypoint incorporates the reference waypoint identifier, bearing, and distance. If
a system generated comment has been edited, a new comment can be generated.
The default type of user waypoint (normal or temporary) can be changed using the ‘WPT — User
Waypoint Information’ Page Menu. Temporary user waypoints are automatically deleted upon the
next power cycle.
Knob and scroll to the desired waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the desired field.
Appendices
5) Use the FMS Knobs to make any changes.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
215
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Renaming user waypoints:
1) With the ‘WPTS - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob. The
cursor is placed in the ‘User Waypoint’ Box.
Flight Instruments
2) Use the FMS Knobs to enter the name of the User Waypoint; or turn the large FMS
Knob and scroll to the desired waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box.
3) Press the Rename Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Rename User Waypoint’,
Engine Indication System
and press the ENT Key.
4) Enter a new name.
5) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Do you want to rename the user waypoint AAAAAA
to BBBBBB?’ is displayed.
Audio Panel and CNS
6) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Changing the location of an existing waypoint to the aircraft present position:
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate
Flight Management
the cursor. The cursor is placed in the ‘User Waypoint’ Box.
2) Use the FMS Knobs to enter the name of the User Waypoint; or turn the large FMS
Knob and scroll to the desired waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box.
Hazard Avoidance
3) Press the MENU Key.
4) Select ‘Use Present Position’.
5) Press the ENT Key twice. The new waypoint’s location is saved.
Automatic Flight Control
System
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Resetting the comment field to the system generated comment:
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate
the cursor. The cursor is placed in the ‘User Waypoint’ Box.
Additional Features
2) Use the FMS Knobs to enter the name of the User Waypoint; or turn the large FMS
Knob and scroll to the desired waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box.
3) Press the MENU Key.
4) Select ‘Auto Comment’.
Appendices
5) Press the ENT Key. The generated comment is based on the reference point used to
define the waypoint.
Changing the user waypoint storage duration default setting:
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key. The
Index
cursor is placed on ‘Waypoint Setup’ in the ‘Options’ Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
216
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor and return to the ‘WPT - User WPT
System Overview
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Normal’ or ‘Temporary’ as desired, and press the ENT Key.
Information’ Page.
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate
the cursor. The cursor is placed in the ‘User Waypoint’ Box.
Knob and scroll to the desired waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box.
3) Press the Delete Softkey or press the CLR Key. ‘YES’ is highlighted in the confirmation
window.
Audio Panel and CNS
4) Press the ENT Key.
Engine Indication System
2) Use the FMS Knobs to enter the name of the User Waypoint; or turn the large FMS
Flight Instruments
Deleting a single user waypoint:
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate
Flight Management
the cursor. The cursor is placed in the ‘User Waypoint’ Box.
2) Use the FMS Knobs to enter the name of the User Waypoint; or turn the large FMS
Knob and scroll to the desired waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box.
3) Press the MENU Key.
Hazard Avoidance
4) Select ‘Delete User Waypoint’.
5) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
NOTE: The option to ‘Delete All User Waypoints’ is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
the cursor. The cursor is placed in the ‘User Waypoint’ Box.
2) Use the FMS Knobs to enter the name of the User Waypoint; or turn the large FMS
Knob and scroll to the desired waypoint in the ‘User Waypoint List’ Box.
Additional Features
1) With the ‘WPT - User WPT Information’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate
Automatic Flight Control
System
Deleting all user waypoints:
3) Press the MENU Key.
Appendices
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Delete All User Waypoints’.
5) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
217
5.4 AIRSPACES
The system can display the following types of airspaces: Class B/TMA, Class C/TCA, Class D,
Restricted, MOA (Military), Other Airspace, Air Defense Identification Zone (ADIZ), and Temporary
Flight Restriction (TFR). For detailed information concerning TFRs, see the Hazard Avoidance Section.
Display settings for airspace altitude labels and airspace boundaries are selected from the ‘Airspace’
Group in the ‘Map Settings’ Window.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
218
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
Class B Airspace
Flight Instruments
Class D Airspace
MOA (Military)
Engine Indication System
Restricted Area
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Class C Airspace
Alert Area
Automatic Flight Control
System
ADIZ
Appendices
Figure 5-40 Airspace
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
219
Index
A selected frequency associated with the airspace can be loaded from the ‘Nearest Airspaces’ Page. In
addition to displaying a map of airspace boundaries and surrounding area, the ‘Nearest Airspaces’ Page
displays airspace information in four boxes labelled Airspace Alerts, Airspace Agency, Vertical Limits,
and Frequencies. Airspace alerts and associated frequencies are shown in scrollable lists on the ‘Nearest
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Additional Features
Warning Area
Airspaces’ Page. The Alerts and FREQ Softkeys place the cursor in the respective list. The FREQ Softkey
is enabled only if one or more frequencies exist for a selected airspace.
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Airspace Alerts Info
- Name
- Proximity (Ahead, Inside,
Ahead < 2nm, Within 2nm)
- Time till Intercept (only if
Ahead or Ahead < 2nm)
Engine Indication System
Airspace 1
Airspace/Agency Info
- Airspace Type
- Controlling Agency
Audio Panel and CNS
Airspace Vertical Limits
- Ceiling
- Floor
Associated Frequencies
Airspace 2
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
- Type
- Availability/Info
- Frequency
Airspace 3
Figure 5-41 Nearest Airspace Page
The ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box (Aux - System Setup 1 Page) on the MFD allows the pilot to turn the
controlled/special-use airspace message alerts on or off. This does not affect the alerts listed on the
Nearest Airspaces Page or the airspace boundaries depicted on the Navigation Map Page. It simply turns
on/off the message provided in the ‘Alerts’ Window on the PFD when the aircraft is approaching or near
an airspace. An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands” the vertical range above or below an
airspace. For example, if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above/below
an airspace, an alert message is not generated, but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above/below an
airspace and projected to enter it, the pilot is notified with an alert message. The default setting for the
altitude buffer is 200 feet.
Pressing the PFD Message/Alerts Softkey displays the ‘Alerts’ Window on the PFD. The following
airspace alerts are displayed in the ‘Alerts’ Window:
Comments
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead – less
than 10 minutes.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft
penetrates the airspace within 10 minutes.
Index
Appendices
Message
220
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Comments
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and
ahead.
Special use airspace is within 2 NM and the aircraft will
penetrate the airspace within 10 minutes.
Flight Instruments
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near – less than Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft
position.
2 nm.
System Overview
Message
Table 5-9 PFD Airspace Messages
Engine Indication System
Displaying and removing airspace altitude labels:
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page displayed. The cursor
flashes on the ‘Map Settings’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Map Settings’ Window is displayed.
Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Airspace ALT LBL’ Field.
Audio Panel and CNS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airspace’ Group, if necessary, and press the ENT
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ to display labels and ‘Off’ to remove labels.
Flight Management
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
Changing the altitude buffer distance setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page (Setup 1 Softkey).
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Altitude Buffer’ Field in the ‘Airspace Alerts’
Box.
the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Turning an airspace alert on or off:
Additional Features
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page (Setup 1 Softkey).
Automatic Flight Control
System
4) Use the FMS Knob or the alphanumeric keys to enter an altitude buffer value and press
Hazard Avoidance
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert On or counterclockwise to
Appendices
turn the alert Off.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
221
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selecting and viewing an airspace alert with its associated information:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘NRST - Nearest Airspaces’ Page.
2) Press the Alerts Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight
3) Select the desired airspace.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
The Smart Airspace function de-emphasizes airspaces above or below the current aircraft altitude. The
function does not require the aircraft present position or flight path to enter the lateral boundaries of the
airspace. If the current aircraft altitude is within 1100 feet of the vertical boundaries of the airspace, the
airspace boundary is shown normally. If the current aircraft altitude is not within 1100 feet of the
vertical boundaries of the airspace, the airspace boundary is shown subdued.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
‘Select Alerts’ Window, and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Airspace
Alerts’ Box.
Smart Airspace Off
Smart Airspace On
Additional Features
Figure 5-42 Smart Airspace
Turning smart airspace on or off:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key, and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘Group’ Box.
Appendices
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Airspace’ and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Smart Airspace’ Field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn smart airspace On or counterclockwise to
turn smart airspace Off.
Index
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
222
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Direct-to Point Info
Flight Instruments
The Direct-to method of navigation, initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key, is quicker to use than a flight
plan when the desire is to navigate to a single point such as a nearby airport.
Once a direct-to is activated, the system establishes a point-to-point course line from the present
position to the selected direct-to destination. Course guidance is provided until the direct-to is replaced
with a new direct-to or flight plan, or cancelled.
A vertical navigation (VNV) direct-to creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the
path) from the current altitude to a selected altitude at the direct-to waypoint. Vertical navigation is
based on barometric altitudes, not on GPS altitude, and is used for cruise and descent phases of flight.
The ‘Direct-to’ Window allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation. The ‘Direct To’ Window
displays selected direct-to waypoint data on the PFD and the MFD.
System Overview
5.5 DIRECT-TO NAVIGATION
- Identifier/Symbol/Region
- Facility Name
- City
VNV Constraints
Flight Management
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
Map of Selected Point
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Location of Destination
- Bearing/Distance
Desired Course
Additional Features
Figure 5-43 Direct To Window - MFD
Appendices
Figure 5-46 Direct-to Window - MFD
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
223
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Direct-to Point Info
Flight Instruments
- Identifier/Symbol/City
- Facility Name
VNV Constraints
Direct-to Point Info
- Bearing/Distance
- Desired Course
Activation Command
Figure 5-43 Direct-to Window - PFD
Figure 5-44 Direct To Window - PFD
Any waypoint can be entered as a direct-to destination from the ‘Direct To’ Window. Also, any
waypoint contained in the active flight plan can be selected as a direct-to waypoint from the ‘Direct To’
Window, the Active Flight Plan Page, or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window.
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
NOTE: In some cases, Origin and Destination airports may not be displayed in the PFD “Flight
Plan” or “Recent” submenu or the MFD ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page until the airport
waypoint is loaded into the flight plan.
Waypoint Submenu
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
- Flight Plan Waypoints
- Nearest Airports
- Recent Waypoints
- User Waypoints
The ‘Direct To’ Window can be displayed from any page and allows selection and activation of directto navigation. If the direct-to is initiated from any page except the WPT pages, the default waypoint is
the active flight plan waypoint (if a flight plan is active) or a blank waypoint field. Direct-to requests on
any WPT page defaults to the displayed waypoint.
When navigating a direct-to, the system sets a direct great circle course to the selected destination. The
course to a destination can also be manually selected using the ‘CRS’ or ‘Course’ Field on the ‘Direct To’
Window.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Figure 5-45 Waypoint Submenu
224
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
Entering a waypoint identifier, facility name, or city as a direct-to destination:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to begin entering a waypoint identifier (turning it
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the direct-to.
Selecting an active flight plan waypoint as a direct-to destination:
is displayed with the active flight plan waypoint as the default selection.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints
Audio Panel and CNS
1) While navigating an active flight plan, press the Direct-to Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window
Engine Indication System
3) Press the ENT Key. ‘Activate?’ is highlighted.
Flight Instruments
counter-clockwise brings up the waypoint selection submenu - press the CLR Key to
remove it), or turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Ident, Facility, City’ Field and use
the FMS alphanumeric keys or turn the small FMS Knob to begin entering an identifier,
facility, or city. If duplicate entries exist, additional entries can be viewed by turning the
small FMS Knob during the selection process.
(turning the knob counter-clockwise displays the waypoint submenu window).
Flight Management
3) Select the desired waypoint.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
1) Select the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD, or the ‘Flight Plan’ Window on
the PFD.
Automatic Flight Control
System
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on PFD), and turn the large
Hazard Avoidance
Or:
FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint.
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
Additional Features
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Selecting a Nearest, Recent or User waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display the waypoint submenu window.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint.
Appendices
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Nearest, Recent or User waypoints.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Index
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
225
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selecting any waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Select the page or window containing the desired waypoint type and select the desired
waypoint.
Flight Instruments
2) Press the Direct-to Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window with the selected waypoint as
the direct-to destination.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
Engine Indication System
4) Press ENT again to activate the direct-to.
Selecting a nearby airport as a direct-to destination:
1) Press the Nearest Softkey on the PFD; or turn the FMS Knob to display the ‘NRST -
Nearest Airports’ Page on the MFD and press the FMS Knob.
Audio Panel and CNS
2) Use the FMS Knob to select the desired airport (the nearest one is already selected).
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
Flight Management
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Selecting a manual direct-to course:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to begin entering a waypoint identifier (turning it
Hazard Avoidance
counter-clockwise brings up the waypoint selection submenu - press the CLR Key to
remove it), or turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Ident, Facility, City’ Field and use
the FMS alphanumeric keys or turn the small FMS Knob to begin entering an identifier,
facility name, or city. Press the ENT Key.
Automatic Flight Control
System
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ’CRS’ or Course’ Field.
4) Use the small FMS Knob or the FMS alphanumeric keys the desired course.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
Additional Features
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Reselecting the direct course from the current position:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The ‘Direct To’ Window is displayed with the cursor flashing in
the ‘Ident, Facility, City’ Box.
Appendices
2) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
3) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Index
Direct-to destinations may also be selected by using the pointer on the navigation map pages. If no
airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint exists at the desired location, a temporary waypoint named
‘MAPWPT’ is automatically created at the location of the map arrow.
226
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
Selecting a waypoint as a direct-to destination using the pointer:
1) From the Navigation Map Page, push the Joystick to display the pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to place the pointer at the desired destination location.
Flight Instruments
3) If the pointer is placed on an existing airport, NAVAID, VRP, or user waypoint, the
waypoint name is highlighted.
4) Press the Direct-to Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window with the selected point
Engine Indication System
entered as the direct-to destination.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘Activate?’.
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Cancelling a Direct-to:
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. If a flight plan is still active,
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
the system resumes navigating the flight plan along the closest leg.
A direct-to with altitude constraints creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path)
from the aircraft’s current altitude to the altitude of the direct-to waypoint. The altitude is reached at the
waypoint, or at the specified distance along the flight path if an offset distance has been entered. All
VNV altitudes prior to the direct-to destination are removed from the active flight plan upon successful
activation of a direct-to destination that is part of the active flight plan. All VNV altitudes following the
direct-to waypoint are retained. See the section on Vertical Navigation for more information regarding
the use and purpose of VNV altitudes and offset distances.
Audio Panel and CNS
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window.
Entering a VNV altitude and along-track offset for the waypoint:
Automatic Flight Control
System
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor over the ‘VNV’ altitude field.
3) Use the FMS knob or the FMS alphanumeric keys to enter the desired altitude.
airport, an additional choice is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘MSL’ or
‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude
5) The cursor is now flashing in the VNV offset distance field.
Additional Features
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an
6) Use the FMS knob or FMS alphanumeric keys to enter the desired along-track distance
Appendices
(‘-’ indicates distance before the waypoint and ‘+’ indicates distance after the
waypoint).
7) Press the ENT Key. ‘Activate?’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to activate.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
227
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Removing a VNV altitude constraint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window.
Flight Instruments
2) Press the MENU Key.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
3) With ‘Clear Vertical Constraints’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
228
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Engine Indication System
Flight Plan Leg Type
Flight Instruments
Flight planning on the system consists of building a flight plan by entering waypoints one at a time,
adding waypoints along airways, and inserting departures, airways, arrivals, or approaches as needed.
The system allows flight planning information to be entered from either the MFD or PFD. The flight
plan is displayed on maps using different line widths, colors, and types, based on the type of leg and the
segment of the flight plan currently being flown (departure, enroute, arrival, approach, or missed
approach).
System Overview
5.6 FLIGHT PLANNING
Symbol
Active Course Leg*
Active Heading Leg*
Audio Panel and CNS
Active Roll Steering Path*†
Course Leg in the current flight segment
Course Leg not in the current flight segment
Heading Leg
Flight Management
Roll Steering Path †
Future Roll Steering Path ‡
Turn Anticipation Arc
Hazard Avoidance
* The active leg or path is the one currently being flown, and is shown in magenta.
† A roll steering path is a computed transition between two disconnected legs.
‡ A roll steering path in the flight plan that is beyond the next leg appears as a future roll steering
path. When a future roll steering path becomes the next leg in the flight plan, it appears as a roll
steering path.
Additional Features
Appendices
Up to 99 flight plans with up to 100 waypoints each can be created and stored in memory. Upon
power up, the previously active flight plan is retained and automatically repopulated if the aircraft
position is at the origin airport and the aircraft is on the ground. If, however, the aircraft is not at the
origin, on the ground, or if more than 12 hours have passed since the last active flight plan modification,
the previously active flight plan is not retained. One flight plan can be activated at a time and becomes
the active flight plan. The active flight plan is overwritten when another flight plan is activated. When
storing flight plans with an approach, departure, or arrival, the system uses the waypoint information
from the current database to define the waypoints. If the database is changed or updated, the system
automatically updates the information if the procedure has not been modified. If an approach,
departure, or arrival procedure is no longer available, the procedure is deleted from the affected stored
flight plan(s), and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A) advising that one or
more stored flight plans need to be edited.
Whenever an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of
approach, departure, or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along with a header line
Automatic Flight Control
System
Table 5-10 Flight Plan Leg Symbols
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
229
describing the instrument procedure the pilot selected. The original enroute portion of the flight plan
remains active (unless an instrument procedure is activated) when the procedure is loaded.
When the database is updated, the airways need to be reloaded also. Each airway segment is reloaded
from the database given the entry waypoint, the airway identifier and the exit waypoint. This reloads the
sequence of waypoints between the entry and exit waypoints (the sequence may change when the
database is updated). The update of an airway can fail during this process. If that happens, the airway
waypoints are changed to regular (non-airway) flight plan waypoints, and an alert is displayed (see
Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A).
The following could cause the airway update to fail:
•
Airway identifier, entry waypoint or exit waypoint not found in the new database.
•
Airway entry/exit waypoint is not an acceptable waypoint for the airway – either the waypoint is no
longer on the airway, or there is a new directional restriction that prevents it being used.
•
Loading the new airway sequence would exceed the capacity of the flight plan.
FLIGHT PLAN CREATION
There are three methods to create or modify a flight plan:
•
Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
•
Flight Plan Window on the PFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
•
Flight Plan Catalog Page on the MFD (create/modify a stored flight plan)
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Active FPL Waypoint List
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Vertical Navigation Profile
Turn Anticipation
Arc
- Active Vertical WPT Alt/ID
- Time to Top of Descent
- Vertical Speed Target
- Flight Path Angle
- Vertical Speed Required
- Vertical Deviation
Non-Active,
Flight Plan Leg
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
- Comment
- Procedure Header
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
Index
Figure 5-46 Active Flight Plan Page
230
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Active Flight Plan Waypoint List
Engine Indication System
- Waypoint ID
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Airway Identifier
Figure 5-47 Active Flight Plan Window on PFD
Audio Panel and CNS
Catalog Contents
- # Used
- # Empty
Flight Management
Flight Plan List
- Comment
Hazard Avoidance
Selected
Flight Plan
Map
Selected FPL Info
Softkeys
The active flight plan is listed on the ‘Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD, and in the ‘Flight Plan’
Window on the PFD. It is the flight plan to which the system is currently providing guidance, and is
shown on the navigation maps. Stored flight plans are listed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page on the
MFD, and are available for activation (becomes the active flight plan).
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
231
Index
Auto-designation will determine the most likely airport of origin and auto-populate the Active Flight
Plan. Once determined, the airfield identifier automatically appears in the ‘Origin’ Field and the line
Appendices
NOTE: The system supports AFCS lateral guidance for all leg types (using NAV or GPS APR
mode). The system does not support course deviation for any heading leg types (VA, VD, VI,
VM, or VR).
Additional Features
Figure 5-48 Flight Plan Catalog Page
Automatic Flight Control
System
- Departure Waypoint
- Destination Waypoint
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
Active Flight
Plan Leg
System Overview
Active Flight Plan Comment
immediately below ‘Origin’ while keeping the runway (‘RW’) Field empty. The line below the Origin
line serves as the first point in the flight plan.
Auto-designation occurs between 15 and 60 seconds after display power-up under the following
conditions:
•
Aircraft position is known
•
Aircraft is on the ground
•
Nearest airport is within 200NM
•
Flight plan is empty
If the pilot manually enters the origin, or any other leg of the flight plan before auto-nomination
occurs, nothing gets inserted automatically. The automatic insertion logic only runs once, so the pilot
can edit the origin if the nearest airport is not the desired origin.
If the pilot enters a different airport into the first point of the flight plan, the Origin will change to
this entry, and the pilot will be prompted to enter the departure runway.
Both the Origin airport/runway and the first point of the flight plan will be the same unless a
departure is entered and a manual leg is inserted at the beginning of the loaded departure. Loading a
departure locks in the origin information.
FLIGHT PLAN PROGRESS
Active flight plan progress can be displayed on the navigation map.
NOTE: ETE can be displayed as either HH+MM (ETE greater than 60 minutes) or MM:SS (ETE
less than 60 minutes).
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
232
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Flight Plan
Progress
enabled
Audio Panel and CNS
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Flight Management
Figure 5-49 Flight Plan Progress displayed on Navigation Map
Displaying/removing the active flight plan progress on the navigation map:
Hazard Avoidance
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Press the Inset Softkey.
Automatic Flight Control
System
4) Press the FPL PROG Softkey to display the active flight plan progress.
5) To remove the active flight plan progress from the navigation map, press the Off
softkey.
Creating an active flight plan:
Additional Features
1) Press the FPL Key. Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (only on MFD).
2) Select the origin airport and runway.
a) Highlight the field below the Origin header to enter the origin airport identifier
b) Use the FMS Knob, alphanumeric keypad, or the waypoint submenu to enter the
Appendices
using the FMS Knob, or by moving the Quick Select Box (MFD only) with the
Joystick (the waypoint will be inserted at the insertion point indicator).
identifier, facility, or city name of the origin waypoint.
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Set Runway’ Window is displayed with the ‘Runway’ Field
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Index
highlighted.
233
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the runway, and press the ENT Key.
e) Press the ENT Key again to add the origin airport/runway to the flight plan.
Flight Instruments
3) Repeat step number 2 for the destination airport and runway.
4) Select the enroute waypoints.
a) Highlight the location to insert the waypoint using the FMS Knob, or by moving the
Engine Indication System
Quick Select Box (MFD only) with the Joystick (the waypoint will be inserted at the
insertion point indicator).
b) Use the FMS Knob, alphanumeric keypad, or the waypoint submenu to enter the
identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint. The active flight plan is modified as
each waypoint is entered.
Audio Panel and CNS
5) Repeat step number 4 to enter each additional enroute waypoint.
6) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor (if
required).
Creating a stored flight plan:
Flight Management
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
3) Press the New Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create New Flight Plan’, and
Hazard Avoidance
press the ENT Key to display a blank flight plan for the first empty storage location.
4) Select the origin airport and runway.
a) Highlight the field below the Origin header to enter the origin airport identifier
Automatic Flight Control
System
using the FMS Knob, or by moving the Quick Select Box (MFD only) with the
Joystick (the waypoint will be inserted at the insertion point indicator).
b) Use the FMS Knob, alphanumeric keypad, or the waypoint submenu to enter the
identifier, facility, or city name of the origin waypoint.
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Set Runway’ Window is displayed with the ‘Runway’ Field
Additional Features
highlighted.
d) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the runway, and press the ENT Key.
e) Press the ENT Key again to add the origin airport/runway to the flight plan.
5) Repeat step number 4 for the destination airport and runway.
Appendices
6) Select the enroute waypoints.
a) Highlight the location to insert the waypoint using the FMS Knob (If the enroute
Index
header is selected, the new waypoint is placed following the header. If an enroute
234
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
waypoint or the dashes are selected, the new waypoint will be placed ahead of the
selected item.)
b) Use the FMS Knob, alphanumeric keypad, or the waypoint submenu to enter the
c) Press the ENT Key. The stored flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
7) Repeat step number 6 to enter each additional enroute waypoint.
FLIGHT PLAN IMPORT/EXPORT
A flight plan file stored on the SD
card was successfully imported as a
stored flight plan.
‘File contained user
waypoints only. User
waypoints imported
successfully. No stored
flight plan data was
modified.’
The file stored on the SD card did
not contain a flight plan, only user
waypoints. These waypoints have
been saved to the system user
waypoints. No flight plans stored in
the system have been modified.
‘No flight plan files found
to import.’
The SD card contains no flight plan
data.
Automatic Flight Control
System
‘Flight plan successfully
imported.’
Hazard Avoidance
Description
Flight Management
Flight Plan Import/
Export Results
‘Flight plan import failed.’ Flight plan data was not successfully
imported from the SD card.
‘File contained user
waypoints only.’
The file stored on the SD card did
not contain a flight plan, only user
waypoints. One or more of these
waypoints did not import
successfully.
Appendices
Some flight plan waypoints were
successfully imported from the SD
card, however others had errors and
were not imported. A partial stored
flight plan now exists in the system.
Additional Features
‘Flight plan partially
imported.’
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight plans can be imported from an SD Card or exported to an SD Card from the Stored Flight
Plan Page.
Under certain conditions, the following messages may appear when a flight plan is imported or
exported from or to an SD card. Some messages may appear in conjunction with others.
Engine Indication System
8) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Flight Instruments
identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
235
Flight Plan Import/
Export Results
Description
‘Too many points. Flight
plan truncated.’
The flight plan on the SD card
contains more waypoints than the
system can support. The flight plan
was imported with as many
waypoints as possible.
‘Some waypoints not
loaded. Waypoints
locked.’
The flight plan on the SD card
contains one or more waypoints that
the system cannot find in the
navigation database. The flight plan
has been imported, but must be
edited within the system before it
can be activated for use.
‘User waypoint database
full. Not all loaded.’
The flight plan file on the SD card
contains user waypoints. The
quantity of stored user waypoints
has exceeded system capacity,
therefore not all the user waypoints
on the SD card have been imported.
Any flight plan user waypoints that
were not imported are locked in the
flight plan. The flight plan must be
edited within the system before it
can be activated for use.
‘One or more user
waypoints renamed.’
One or more imported user
waypoints were renamed when
imported due to naming conflicts
with waypoints already existing in
the system.
‘Flight plan successfully
exported.’
The stored flight plan was
successfully exported to the SD card.
‘Flight plan export failed.’
The stored flight plan was not
successfully exported to the SD card.
The SD card may not have sufficient
available memory or the card may
have been removed prematurely.
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Appendices
Table 5-11 Flight Plan Import/Export Messages
Importing a Flight Plan from an SD Card:
1) Insert the SD card containing the flight plan in the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
Index
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
236
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight an empty or existing flight plan.
6) Press the Import Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Import Flight Plan”, and
Flight Instruments
press the ENT Key.
If an empty slot is selected, a list of the available flight plans on the SD card will be
displayed.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan for importing.
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the import.
Exporting a Flight Plan to an SD Card:
1) Insert the SD card into the top card slot on the MFD.
Automatic Flight Control
System
2) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
Hazard Avoidance
NOTE: If the imported flight plan contains a waypoint with a name that duplicates the name
of a waypoint already stored on the system, the system compares the coordinates of the
imported waypoint with those of the existing waypoint. If the coordinates are different, the
imported waypoint is automatically renamed by adding characters to the end of the name.
Flight Management
9) Press the ENT Key again to confirm the import.
Audio Panel and CNS
If an existing flight plan is selected, an ‘Overwrite existing flight plan? OK or CANCEL’
prompt is displayed. Press the ENT Key to choose to overwrite the selected flight plan
and see the list of available flight plans on the SD card. If overwriting the existing flight
plan is not desired, select ‘CANCEL’ using the FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, select
another flight plan slot, and press the Import Softkey again.
Engine Indication System
Or:
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
6) Press the Export Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Export Flight Plan’.
7) If desired, change the name for the exported file by turning the large FMS Knob to the
left to highlight the name, then use the FMS knob or the FMS alphanumeric keys to
enter the new name, and press the ENT Key.
Additional Features
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be exported.
Appendices
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the export.
9) Press the ENT Key to confirm the export.
NOTE: The exported flight plan will not contain any procedures or airways.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
237
Flight plans can be transferred to or from a mobile device via the Flight Stream 510 Bluetooth
wireless connection. Transfer of a flight plan to a mobile device is controlled by the mobile device.
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Pending Flight Plan
Flight Management
Pending Flight Plan
Pop-Up Alert
Ignore Softkey
Preview Softkey
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Figure 5-50 Pending Flight Plan Transfer
238
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
Pending Flight Plan
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Store? or Activate?
Selection
Audio Panel and CNS
Delete Softkey
Flight Management
Store Softkey
Activate Softkey
Figure 5-51 Preview Flight Plan Page
Previewing a pending flight plan transfer from a wireless connection:
Plan pop-up alert appears in the lower right corner of the MFD, and a Connext
annunciation appears to the right of the MFD page name.
Or:
Press the Preview Softkey to display the ‘FPL - Preview Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
Automatic Flight Control
System
2) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘FPL - Preview Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
Hazard Avoidance
1) When a flight plan transfer has been initiated from a mobile device, a Pending Flight
Or:
Additional Features
a) Press the MENU Key,
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Preview Flight Plan’.
c) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘FPL - Preview Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
239
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Ignoring a pending flight plan transfer from a wireless connection:
1) When a flight plan transfer has been initiated from a mobile device, a Pending Flight
Flight Instruments
Plan pop-up alert appears in the lower right corner of the MFD, and a Connext
annunciation appears to the right of the MFD page name.
2) Press the CLR Key to remove the pop-up alert and ignore the pending flight plan. The
pending flight plan will still be available on the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
Engine Indication System
Or:
Press the Ignore Softkey to remove the pop-up alert and ignore the pending flight
plan. The pending flight plan will still be available on the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’
Page.
Audio Panel and CNS
Storing a pending flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
Flight Management
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the pending flight plan.
5) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘FPL - Preview Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
6) Press the Store Softkey to store the flight plan. The pending flight plan is stored and
Hazard Avoidance
the pending annunciation is removed.
Or:
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
Automatic Flight Control
System
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Store?’.
c) Press the ENT Key to store the flight plan. The pending flight plan is stored and the
pending annunciation is removed.
Or:
Additional Features
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.
c) Press the ENT Key to store the flight plan. The pending flight plan is stored and the
pending annunciation is removed.
Appendices
Activating a pending flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight
Plan Catalog’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the
Index
pending flight plan.
3) Press the ENT Key to display the ‘FPL - Preview Flight Plan’ Page.
240
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
4) Press the Activate Softkey. The ‘Activate Flight Plan?’ Window is displayed.
Or:
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
Flight Instruments
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate?’.
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate Flight Plan?’ Window is displayed.
Or:
Engine Indication System
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate Flight Plan’.
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate Flight Plan?’ Window is displayed.
pending flight plan becomes the active flight plan and is removed from the Flight Plan
Catalog Page. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
Flight Management
Deleting a pending flight plan:
Audio Panel and CNS
5) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to activate the pending flight plan. The
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
Hazard Avoidance
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired pending flight plan.
5) Press the Delete Softkey. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ Window is displayed.
Or:
Automatic Flight Control
System
Press the CLR Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ Window is displayed.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
Additional Features
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’.
c) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ Window is displayed.
6) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the pending flight plan. The
Deleting all pending flight plans:
Appendices
pending flight plan is removed from the Flight Plan Catalog Page. To cancel the request,
press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Index
3) Press the MENU Key.
241
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Delete All Pending’.
5) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all pending flight plans?’ confirmation Window is
6) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all pending flight plans. To cancel
the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
ADDING WAYPOINTS TO AN EXISTING FLIGHT PLAN
Waypoints can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose the flight plan,
select the desired point of insertion, enter the waypoint, and it is added in front of the selected
waypoint. Flight plans are limited to 100 waypoints (including waypoints within airways and
procedures). If the number of waypoints in the flight plan exceeds 100, the message “Flight plan is
full. Remove unnecessary waypoints.” appears and the new waypoint(s) are not added to the flight
plan.
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
displayed.
Flight Management
NOTE: Manually adding waypoints to a flight plan after a MANSEQ leg creates a lateral gap
in the flight plan. Time, fuel, and distance values for legs beyond the gap do not include the
distance across the gap.
Stored Flight Plan Selected
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
- Memory Slot
- Comment
- Procedure Identifier
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
Softkeys
Figure 5-52 Stored Flight Plan Page
Appendices
Adding a waypoint to a stored flight plan:
1) On the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to
Index
select “EDIT” and press the ENT Key. The ‘FPL — Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
242
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the point in the flight plan to add the new
waypoint . The new waypoint is placed directly in front of the highlighted waypoint.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window. (Turning it
6) Use the FMS Knob or the FMS alphanumeric keys to enter the identifier, facility, or city
NOTE: If the identifier entered in the ‘Waypoint Information’ Window has duplicates, a
‘Duplicate Waypoint’ Window is displayed. Use the FMS Knob to select the correct waypoint.
Audio Panel and CNS
NOTE: If the flight plan is successfully edited in the ‘Flight Plan’ Window from PFD while the
MFD Active Flight Plan Page is in the process of being edited, the ‘Flight Plan Modified By
Other User’ Window will appear on the MFD. Press the ENT key to return to the Active Flight
Plan Page with the accepted changes.
Engine Indication System
name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints and press
the ENT Key. The new waypoint now exists in the flight plan.
Flight Instruments
clockwise displays a blank ‘Waypoint Information’ Window, turning it counter-clockwise
displays the ‘Waypoint Information Window’ with a waypoint selection submenu
allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
Flight Management
Adding a waypoint to the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
the Quick Select Box (MFD only) with the Joystick (the waypoint will be inserted at the
insertion point indicator).
Hazard Avoidance
3) Highlight the location to insert the waypoint using the large FMS Knob, or by moving
4) Use the FMS Knob, alphanumeric keypad, or the waypoint submenu to enter the
Automatic Flight Control
System
identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint.
5) Press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
Creating and adding user waypoints to the active flight plan:
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
3) Highlight the location to insert the waypoint using the large FMS Knob, or by moving
Additional Features
1) Press the FPL Key
the Quick Select Box (MFD only) with the Joystick (the waypoint will be inserted at the
insertion point indicator).
Appendices
4) Push the Joystick for the MFD to activate the panning function on the ‘FPL - Active
Flight Plan’ Page and pan to the map location of the desired user waypoint.
5) Press the LD WPT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Waypoint’, and press
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Index
the ENT Key. The user waypoint is created with a name of USRxxx (using the next
available in sequence) and is added to the active flight plan.
243
Waypoints entered in the enroute segment of the flight plan may be treated as fly-by waypoints,
unless otherwise designated. A fly-by waypoint is a waypoint that marks the intersection of two
straight paths, with the transition from one path to another being made by the aircraft using a
precisely calculated turn that “flies by” but does not vertically cross the waypoint. A fly-over
waypoint is a waypoint that must be crossed vertically by the aircraft.
Active Leg to TOP
TOP as Fly-By Waypoint -
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Figure 5-53 TOP Fly-By Waypoint
244
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Active Leg to TOP
Flight Management
Fly-Over
Waypoint Symbol
TOP as Fly-Over Waypoint -
Figure 5-54 TOP Fly-Over Waypoint
Hazard Avoidance
Designating a fly-over waypoint:
1) For the active flight plan, press the FPL Key and press the FMS Knob to activate the
cursor (not required on the PFD or when using the Quick Select Box).
For a stored flight plan, highlight the desired flight plan on the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog
Page’ and press the Edit Softkey.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Or:
2) Highlight the desired waypoint using the large FMS Knob, or by using the Joystick to
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Set Fly-Over Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Set
[waypoint] to be a fly-over waypoint?’ Window is displayed.
Additional Features
move the Quick Select Box (not available for the stored flight plan).
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
5) To change the waypoint back to a fly-by waypoint, highlight the desired waypoint. Press
Appendices
highlight ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT Key.
the MENU Key, highlight ‘Set Fly-By Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Set
[waypoint] to be a fly-by waypoint?’ Window is displayed. With ‘OK’ highlighted, press
the ENT Key.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
245
ADDING AIRWAYS TO A FLIGHT PLAN
Airways can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose a flight plan (add the
desired airway entry point if not already in the flight plan), select the waypoint after the desired airway
entry point, select the airway, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. An airway can only be
loaded if there is a waypoint in the flight plan that is part of the desired airway and is not part of an
arrival or approach procedure. The system also anticipates the desired airway and exit point based on
loaded flight plan waypoints.
Airway Entry Waypoint
Selected Airway
Airways Available at TOP
Airway Waypoint
Sequence
Preview of
Selected Airway
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Figure 5-55 Select Airway Page - Selecting Airway
246
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
Airway Entry Waypoint
Selected Exit Point
Preview of
Selected Airway
Engine Indication System
Selected Airway Exit
Point
Flight Instruments
Selected Airway
Airway Exit Points
Available
Audio Panel and CNS
1) Press the FPL Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint after the desired airway entry point.
If this waypoint is not a valid airway entry point, a valid entry point should be entered at
this time.
the MENU Key and select ‘Load Airway’. The Select Airway Page/Window is displayed.
The LD AIRWY Softkey or the ‘Load Airway’ menu item is available only when a valid
airway entry waypoint has been chosen (the waypoint ahead of the cursor position).
Appendices
4) Turn the small FMS Knob one click clockwise and press the LD AIRWY Softkey, or press
Additional Features
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
Automatic Flight Control
System
Adding an airway to a flight plan:
Hazard Avoidance
Some airways have directional restrictions on all or part of the route. For example, Airway A2 in
Europe has a directional restriction over the whole route such that it can be flown only one direction.
For example, airway UR975 in North Africa has more complicated directional restrictions within the
list of airway waypoints. That is, each waypoint may have its own conditional route in relation to
another waypoint.
In the US, airways that are one-way for specified hours of operation are not uncommon. These
airways are always bidirectional in the system database.
The system only allows correct airway sequences to be inserted. If the pilot subsequently inverts the
flight plan, the system inverts the airway waypoint sequence and removes the airway header.
Flight Management
Figure 5-56 Select Airway Page - Selecting Exit Point
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway from the list, and press the ENT Key.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
247
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
6) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway exit point from the list, and press the
ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is highlighted.
7) Press the ENT Key. The system returns to editing the flight plan with the new airway
Flight Instruments
inserted.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key.
Engine Indication System
2) Use the Joystick to place the QuickSelect Box on the waypoint after the desired airway
entry point. If this waypoint is not a valid airway entry point, a valid entry point should
be entered at this time.
3) Press the MENU Key and select “Load Airway”. The Select Airway Page is displayed.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway exit point from the list, and press the
ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is highlighted.
6) Press the ENT Key. The system returns to editing the flight plan with the new airway
inserted.
ADDING PROCEDURES TO A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
The system allows the pilot to insert pre-defined instrument procedures from the navigation
database into a flight plan. The procedures are designed to facilitate routing of traffic leaving an airport
(departure), arriving at an airport (arrival), and landing at an airport (approach). See the procedures
section for more details.
Flight Plan Name
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
4) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway from the list, and press the ENT Key.
Additional Features
Flight Plan Waypoint
List
Appendices
Softkeys
Load Departure Load Arrival Load Approach Activate Flight Plan -
Index
Figure 5-57 Stored Flight Plan Page
248
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one
departure can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of a departure,
the transition waypoints, and a runway.
Flight Instruments
Departure Airport
Engine Indication System
Selected
Departure
Preview of
Selected
Departure
System Overview
DEPARTURE
Departures Available at
KMCI
Departure Waypoint
Sequence
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Figure 5-58 Departure Loading Page - Selecting the Departure
Departure Airport
Selected
Departure End
Point
Selected Runway
Selected Transition
Automatic Flight Control
System
Preview of
Selected
Departure
Hazard Avoidance
Selected
Departure
Departure Transition
Points Available
Additional Features
Figure 5-59 Departure Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
Loading a departure procedure into a stored flight plan:
2) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the
Appendices
1) Select a stored flight plan from the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
3) Press the LD DP Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Departure’, and press the
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Index
ENT Key. The ‘PROC - Departure Loading’ Page is displayed.
249
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
4) Select a departure. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a runway served by the selected departure, if required. Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected departure procedure.
ARRIVAL
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) is loaded at the destination airport in the flight plan. Only one
arrival can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
Destination Airport
Selected Arrival
Arrivals Available at
KCOS
Selected Runway
Arrival Waypoint
Sequence
Preview of
Selected Arrival
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
6) Select a transition for the selected departure, if required. Press the ENT Key.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Figure 5-60 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Arrival
250
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
Destination Airport
Flight Instruments
Selected Arrival
Selected Transition
Arrival Waypoint
Sequence
Preview of
Selected Arrival
Engine Indication System
Transitions Available
with DBRY1
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Figure 5-61 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
Loading an arrival procedure into a stored flight plan:
2) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the
ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
Hazard Avoidance
1) Select a stored flight plan from the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
3) Press the LD STAR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Arrival”, and press the
Automatic Flight Control
System
ENT Key. The ‘PROC - Arrival Loading’ Page is displayed.
4) Select an arrival. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a transition for the selected arrival, if required. Press the ENT Key.
Additional Features
6) Select a runway served by the selected arrival, if required. Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected arrival procedure.
APPROACH
Appendices
An Approach Procedure (APR) can be loaded at any airport that has an approach available. Only
one approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route for a selected approach is defined by
designating transition waypoints.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
251
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Flight Instruments
Destination Airport
Selected
Approach
Engine Indication System
Approaches Available at
KCOS
Audio Panel and CNS
Preview of
Selected
Approach
Approach Waypoint
Sequence
Flight Management
Figure 5-62 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Approach
Hazard Avoidance
Destination Airport
Automatic Flight Control
System
Selected
Approach
Selected Transition
Transitions Available with
Selected Approach
Additional Features
Preview of
Selected
Approach
Approach Waypoint
Sequence
Load Approach?
Appendices
Figure 5-63 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
Loading an approach procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
2) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the
Index
ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
252
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
the ENT Key. The ‘PROC - Approach Loading’ Page is displayed.
System Overview
3) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Approach’, and press
4) Select the airport and approach:
Flight Instruments
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
Or:
Knob to move the cursor to the ‘Approach Channel’ Field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key
to accept the approach channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
Audio Panel and CNS
5) Select a transition for the selected approach. Press the ENT Key.
Engine Indication System
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS
6) Press the ENT Key to load the selected approach procedure.
STORED FLIGHT PLAN
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
The system can store up to 99 flight plans, numbered 1 through 99. The active flight plan is erased
when the system is powered off or when another flight plan is activated. Details about each stored
flight plan can be viewed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page and on the Stored Flight Plan Page.
A stored flight plan may be viewed or edited. The system also allows copying a flight plan into a
new flight plan memory slot, allowing editing, etc., without affecting the original flight plan. This
can be used to duplicate an existing stored flight plan for use in creating a modified version of the
original stored flight plan.
Activating a stored flight plan erases the active flight plan and replaces it with the flight plan being
activated. Inverting a stored flight plan reverses the waypoint order, erases the active flight plan, and
replaces it with the flight plan being activated (the stored flight plan is not changed).
Lastly, individual or all stored flight plans can be deleted from the system memory.
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
253
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan
Flight Plan Name
(Comment)
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Stored Flight Plan Info
- Departure Airport
- Destination Airport
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
Flight Management
Stored FPL Editing
Softkeys
Figure 5-64 Stored Flight Plan Information
Hazard Avoidance
Storing an active flight plan from the Active Flight Plan Page or the ‘Active Flight
Plan’ Window:
1) Press the MENU Key.
Automatic Flight Control
System
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The flight plan is stored in the next available
position in the flight plan list on the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
Additional Features
Viewing information about a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’
Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the
Appendices
desired flight plan.
4) The ‘Flight Plan Info’ Box displays departure, destination, total distance, and enroute
Index
safe altitude information for the selected flight plan.
254
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
5) Press the Edit Softkey to open the ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page and view the
waypoints in the flight plan.
6) Press the FMS Knob to exit the ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page.
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’
Page.
desired flight plan.
3) Press the Activate Softkey; or press the ENT Key twice; or press the MENU Key,
highlight ‘Activate Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘activate stored flight plan?’
Window is displayed.
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the
desired flight plan.
press the ENT Key. The ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ Window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’
Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the
3) Press the Copy Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Copy Flight Plan’, and press
the ENT Key. The ‘Copy to flight plan XX?’ Window is displayed.
Additional Features
desired flight plan.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Copying a stored flight plan on the MFD:
Hazard Avoidance
3) Press the Invert Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL?’, and
Flight Management
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’
Audio Panel and CNS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
Engine Indication System
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the
Flight Instruments
Activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to copy the flight plan. The flight plan is
Appendices
stored in the next available position in the flight plan list on the ‘FPL - Flight Plan
Catalog’ Page. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
255
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Deleting an individual waypoint from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’
Flight Instruments
Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the
flight plan to be edited.
Engine Indication System
4) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the
ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ Window is displayed.
Audio Panel and CNS
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Flight Management
Deleting an entire airway from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’
Page.
Hazard Avoidance
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the
flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the
ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
Automatic Flight Control
System
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the header of the airway to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove [airway name] from flight plan?’ Window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
Additional Features
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire procedure from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
Appendices
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’
Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the
flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the
Index
ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
256
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the header of the procedure to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove [procedure name] from flight plan?’ Window is
displayed.
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’
Page.
flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the
ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
Flight Management
5) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight
Audio Panel and CNS
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the
Engine Indication System
Or:
Flight Instruments
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
‘Remove [procedure]’.
6) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove [procedure name] from flight plan?’ Window is
displayed.
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Changing a stored flight plan comment:
Hazard Avoidance
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’ Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the
4) Press the Edit Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the
ENT Key. The ‘FPL - Stored Flight Plan’ Page is displayed.
Additional Features
flight plan to be edited.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
Appendices
6) Use the FMS Knobs or the FMS alphanumeric keys to edit the comment.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
257
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Deleting a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’
Page.
Flight Instruments
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the
desired flight plan.
3) Press the Delete Softkey; press the CLR Key; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete
Engine Indication System
Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete flight plan XX?’ Window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the flight plan. To cancel the
request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Audio Panel and CNS
NOTE: The option to delete all stored flight plans is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all stored flight plans:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the ‘FPL - Flight Plan Catalog’
Page.
Flight Management
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Delete All’ and press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all flight
plans?’ confirmation window is displayed.
request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
The active flight plan can be edited by adding or removing flight plan items. The edits made to the
active flight plan affect navigation as soon as they are entered. The system allows deleting an active
flight plan. Deleting the active flight plan suspends navigation by the system. Individual waypoints,
entire airways, and entire procedures can be deleted from a flight plan. Some waypoints in the final
approach segment (such as the FAF or MAP) can not be deleted individually. Attempting to delete a
waypoint that is not allowed results in a window displaying ‘Invalid flight plan modification’.
The comment field (or name) of each flight plan can be changed to something that is useful for
identification and sorting.
The flight plan leg which is currently being used for navigation guidance is referred to as the ‘active
leg’. The system automatically sequences from one active leg to the next as defined by the active flight
plan. Any leg in the active flight plan successive to the leg currently being flown may be selected to
become the new active leg.
Lastly, the active flight plan may be inverted (reversed) for navigation back to the original departure
point.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all flight plans. To cancel the
258
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
System Overview
Activating a flight plan leg:
Window (PFD).
FMS Knob to highlight the destination waypoint for the desired leg, or use the Joystick
to place the Quick Select Box on the destination waypoint for the desired leg.
Flight Instruments
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large
3) Press the ACT Leg Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Leg’,
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the flight plan leg. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘Cancel’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Window (PFD).
Flight Management
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. An ‘Invert
Audio Panel and CNS
Inverting the active flight plan:
Engine Indication System
and press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed with ‘Activate’ highlighted.
active flight plan?’ confirmation window is displayed.
3) Select ‘OK’.
4) Press the ENT Key to invert and activate the active flight plan. To cancel, press the CLR
Deleting the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Hazard Avoidance
Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Window (PFD).
all waypoints in flight plan?’ Window is displayed.
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the active flight plan. To cancel the
request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Window (PFD).
Additional Features
Deleting an individual waypoint from the active flight plan:
Automatic Flight Control
System
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large
Appendices
FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint to be deleted, or use the Joystick to place the
Quick Select Box on the waypoint to be deleted (MFD only).
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ Window is displayed.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
259
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Flight Instruments
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
NOTE: If removal of a flight plan item (waypoint, procedure, etc.) results in deletion of the
end waypoint of the active leg, an off-route direct-to to the deleted waypoint is created and
activated.
Engine Indication System
Deleting an entire airway from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large
Audio Panel and CNS
FMS Knob to highlight the header of the airway to be deleted; or use the Joystick to
place the Quick Select Box on the header of the airway to be deleted (MFD only).
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove [airway name] from flight plan?’ Window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
Flight Management
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire procedure from the active flight plan:
Hazard Avoidance
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large
Automatic Flight Control
System
FMS Knob to highlight the header of the airway to be deleted; or use the Joystick to
place the Quick Select Box on the header of the airway to be deleted (MFD only).
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove [procedure name] from flight plan?’ Window is
displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
Additional Features
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Appendices
Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight
Index
‘Remove [procedure]’.
260
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove [procedure name] from flight plan?’ Window is
displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
Flight Instruments
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Changing the active flight plan comment:
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
the comment field.
3) Use the FMS Knob, or the FMS alphanumeric keys to edit the comment.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
Audio Panel and CNS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Engine Indication System
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
Flight Management
2) Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the Comment field.
3) Use the alphanumeric keys on the Display Controller to edit the comment.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
ALONG TRACK OFFSETS
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
A waypoint having an “along track offset” distance from an existing waypoint can be entered into a
flight plan. Along track offset waypoints lie along the path of the existing flight plan, and can be used
to make the system reach a specified altitude before or after reaching the specified flight plan
waypoint. Offset distances can be entered from 1 to 999 nm in increments of 1 nm. Entering a
negative offset distance results in an along track offset waypoint inserted before the selected waypoint,
whereas entering a positive offset distance results in an along track offset waypoint inserted after the
selected waypoint. Multiple offset waypoints are allowed.
A waypoint must be adjacent to its parent waypoint in the flight plan, so the system limits the alongtrack distance to less than the length of the leg before or after the selected waypoint. If the selected
waypoint is the active waypoint, the distance is limited to less than the distance to go to the active
waypoint. Assigning an along track offset to a leg with indeterminate length is not permitted. An along
track offset is not allowed after the final approach fix of an approach.
An along track offset distance cannot be modified once entered. If the along track offset distance
must be changed, the existing along track offset waypoint must be deleted and a new one created with
the new offset distance.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
261
Along Track Offset
Waypoint and
Distance from Flight
Plan Waypoint
Along Track
Offset Waypoint
and Distance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-65 Along Track Offset
Entering an along track offset distance:
Hazard Avoidance
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large
3) Press the ATK OFS Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create ATK
Offset Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter a positive or negative offset distance in the range of
+/- 1 to 999 nm (limited by leg distances).
5) Press the ENT Key to create the offset waypoint.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
PARALLEL TRACK
The Parallel Track (PTK) feature allows creation of a parallel course offset of 1 to 50 nm left or right
of the current flight plan. When Parallel Track is activated, the course line drawn on the map pages
shows the parallel course, and waypoint names have a lower case “p” placed after the identifier.
Activation of parallel track will apply from the current position along the flight plan until a leg that
does not meet the criteria for parallel track. Guidance will be computed to return to the original track
at the beginning of that leg.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint for the along track offset.
262
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
If an approach leg is active, the status indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track
with the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable Approach Leg Active’.
•
If the offset direction and distance results in an unreasonable route geometry (e.g., there is a sharp
turn of more than 120 degrees), the status indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel
track because of invalid geometry (‘Parallel Track Unavailable Invalid Route Geometry’).
•
If the active leg is not a track between two fixes (TF) or a course to a fix (DF) leg, the status indicates
that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because parallel track is not available for the
active leg type (‘Parallel Track Unavailable Not Allowed for Active Leg’).
•
If there are no legs remaining in the flight plan after the given leg, or OBS mode is active.
Audio Panel and CNS
•
Engine Indication System
Initiating a direct-to, to the selected waypoint.
Flight Instruments
•
System Overview
If the parallel track proposed by the offset direction and distance is not allowed by the system, the
activation prompt is displayed, but disabled.
The following will inhibit activation of a parallel track:
The following will cancel the parallel track:
Initiating a direct-to, to a waypoint.
•
Initiating a hold at the present position.
•
If a course change occurs greater than 120° or the parallel tracks overlap as a result of the course
change.
•
No legs are remaining in the flight plan after the given leg, or OBS mode is active.
Hazard Avoidance
Initiating a hold at a waypoint will result in the aircraft flying the parallel track until a turn is
required to fly to the hold waypoint. If the hold is removed prior to reaching the hold waypoint, the
parallel track will be resumed. Once the holding pattern is active, the parallel track will not be
resumed upon exiting the hold.
Flight Management
•
Automatic Flight Control
System
NOTE: Vertical navigation is unavailable while the Parallel Track feature is active.
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
263
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Offset Direction
Offset Distance
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
Activation Prompt
Flight Management
Figure 5-66 Parallel Track Window
- TIFTO-p
- TOP-p
- ...
- LAA-p
Activating Parallel Track
affects the active flight
plan from the current
position on (will not affect
an approach)
Original Track
Parallel Track
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Parallel Track Waypoints
Figure 5-67 Parallel Track Active
Appendices
Activating parallel track:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Parallel
Index
Track’ Window is displayed with the ‘Direction’ Field highlighted.
264
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘LEFT’ or ‘RIGHT’ and press the ENT Key. The
‘Distance’ Field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter a distance from 1-99 nm and press the ENT Key.
Flight Instruments
‘Activate Parallel Track’ is highlighted.
5) Press the ENT Key to activate parallel track. Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to
cancel the parallel track activation.
Cancelling parallel track:
Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Parallel
Track’ Window is displayed with ‘Cancel Parallel Track?’ highlighted.
FLIGHT PLAN VIEWS
Flight Management
Information about flight plans can be viewed in more than one way. The active flight plan can be
configured to show cumulative distance over the length of the flight plan or the distance for each leg of
the flight plan, and the active flight plan can be viewed in a narrow or wide view. In the wide view,
additional information is displayed: Fuel Remaining (FUEL REM), Estimated Time Enroute (ETE),
Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA), and Bearing to the waypoint (BRG).
Audio Panel and CNS
3) Press the ENT Key.
Engine Indication System
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Changing the flight plan view:
Hazard Avoidance
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the View Softkey to display the Wide, Narrow, Leg-Leg, and CUM Softkeys.
3) Press the CUM Softkey to view cumulative waypoint distance, or press the Leg-Leg
Automatic Flight Control
System
Softkey to view leg-to-leg waypoint distance.
4) Press the Wide Softkey to display the wide view, or select the Narrow Softkey to
display the narrow view.
5) Press the Back Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
Additional Features
Appendices
Charts may also be viewed alongside the active flight plan in split screen mode. With an active flight
plan loaded into the system, the Charts Page can be set to automatically display a chart depending on
the active flight plan leg. For more information on Charts, see the Additional Features Section.
Activating split screen mode from the active flight plan displays the Charts Page which removes the
Flight Plan Map. The Flight Plan Map can be re-displayed on the active flight plan page. However,
replacing the Flight Plan Map on the active flight plan page in split screen mode limits the flight plan
content which can be displayed. For example, displaying the Flight Plan Map while in split screen
narrow view removes the ‘Active VNV Profile’ Box. See the following figures below depicting the
different split screen displays with the active flight plan.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
265
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Display Title shows ‘Chart + Active Flight Plan
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
- AUTO indicates the chart shown automatically corresponds to the phase of flight
Split Screen Narrow View
Split Screen Wide View
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Figure 5-68 Split Screen Narrow and Wide View
Split Screen Narrow View with Flight Plan Map
Split Screen Wide View with Flight Plan Map
Index
Appendices
Figure 5-69 Split Screen Mode with Flight Plan Map
266
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
Viewing charts and active flight plan page in split screen mode:
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the Charts Softkey. Split screen mode is now enabled showing the Charts Page
3) To quickly view the chart corresponding to the active flight plan leg, press the AUTO
Flight Instruments
alongside the Active Flight Plan Page, and Charts Page is bordered by a dark purple box
indicating it is the active display pane.
Softkey.
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the Charts Softkey. Split screen mode is now enabled showing the Charts Page
3) Move the Joystick to select the Active Flight Plan page as the active display pane.
4) Press the MENU Key. ‘Show Flight Plan Map’ is highlighted. Press the ENT Key.
Press the ENT Key.
COLLAPSING AIRWAYS
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
The system allows airways on the active flight plan to be collapsed or expanded from the Stored or
Active Flight Plan Page/Window. When airways have been collapsed, it is indicated on the airway
heading.
When airways are collapsed, leg-to-leg computed values such as DIS or ETE shown for the exit
waypoint reflect the total of all the legs on the airway that have been hidden in the collapsed display.
The DTK value is inhibited because it is not usable in this context.
The Active Flight Plan Page always keeps the following three waypoints visible: “From” waypoint,
“To” waypoint, and “Next” waypoint. To prevent one or more of these waypoints from being hidden
in a collapsed airway segment, the airway segment that contains either the “To” or the “Next”
waypoint is automatically expanded. When an airway is loaded, airways are automatically expanded
to facilitate flight plan review.
Flight Management
5) To remove the Flight Plan Map, press the MENU Key and select ‘Hide Flight Plan Map’.
Audio Panel and CNS
alongside the active flight plan, and the Charts Page is bordered by a dark purple box
indicating it is the active display pane.
Engine Indication System
Displaying the flight plan map on the active flight plan page in split mode:
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
267
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Flight Instruments
V4.SLN Airway
Expanded View
Engine Indication System
All Airways
Collapsed View
Audio Panel and CNS
Figure 5-70 Expanded/Collapsed Airways
Collapsing/expanding the airways in the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Collapse Airways’ or ‘Expand Airways’, and press the
ENT Key. The airways are collapsed/expanded.
CLOSEST POINT OF FPL
‘Closest Point of FPL’ calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes a
reference waypoint, and creates a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a
chosen reference waypoint.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Determining the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Closest Point Of FPL’’, and press the ENT Key. A
window appears with the reference waypoint field highlighted.
and distance (DIS) to the closest point along the flight plan to the selected reference
waypoint and creates a user waypoint at this location. Press the ENT Key. The name for
the new user waypoint is derived from the identifier of the reference waypoint.
USER-DEFINED HOLDING PATTERNS
A holding pattern can be defined at any active flight plan waypoint, at the aircraft present position,
or at a direct-to waypoint.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
3) Enter the identifier of the reference waypoint. The system displays the bearing (BRG)
268
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
Engine Indication System
Waypoint
Selected
Flight Instruments
Hold At
Waypoint
Menu
Selection
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Hold Entry Course
Location of Hold
Course Direction
Inbound or Outbound
(Time or Distance)
Leg Length
Hazard Avoidance
Leg Length Mode Button
(Time in nm or Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
(Right or Left)
Automatic Flight Control
System
Map of Hold Location
Additional Features
Appendices
Expect Further Clearance Time
Index
Load Hold in Active Flight Plan
Figure 5-71 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at an Active Flight Plan Waypoint
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
269
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Waypoint
Selected
Hold Entry Course
Location of Hold
Course Direction
Flight Management
(Inbound or Outbound)
Leg Length
(Time in nm or
Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
Hazard Avoidance
(Right or Left)
Leg Length Mode
Button
Automatic Flight Control
System
(Time or Distance)
Additional Features
Map of Hold Location
Appendices
Expect Further
Clearance Time
Load Hold and
Activate Direct To
Hold At Direct To Waypoint Selection
Index
Figure 5-72 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at a Direct To Waypoint
270
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
System Overview
Creating a user-defined hold at an active flight plan waypoint:
Window (PFD).
FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint for the hold.
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Hold
Flight Instruments
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large
at’ Window appears with the ‘Course’ Field highlighted.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Inbound’ or ‘Outbound’ course direction, and press
the ENT Key.
Key.
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Right’ or ‘Left’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key while ‘Load?’ is highlighted to insert the hold into the flight plan.
Flight Management
9) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC Time), and press the
Audio Panel and CNS
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Time’ or ‘Distance’ length mode, and press the ENT
Engine Indication System
4) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the course, and press the ENT Key.
Creating a user-defined hold at the aircraft present position:
Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Present Position’, and press the ENT Key. The
3) If desired, use the FMS Knobs to edit the course, and press the ENT Key.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Inbound’ or ‘Outbound’ course direction, and press
the ENT Key.
Key.
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
Additional Features
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Time’ or ‘Distance’ length mode, and press the ENT
Automatic Flight Control
System
‘Hold at’ Window appears with the ‘Course’ Field highlighted.
Hazard Avoidance
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
7) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Right’ or ‘Left’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
ENT Key.
Appendices
8) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC Time), and press the
9) Press the ENT Key while ‘Activate?’ is highlighted to create an Offroute Direct-to hold
waypoint at the aircraft present position and activate the hold.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
271
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Creating a user-defined hold at a direct-to waypoint:
1) Press a Direct-to Key and set up the direct-to waypoint as desired, but select ‘Hold?’
instead of ‘Activate?’ when finished.
Flight Instruments
2) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the course, and press the ENT Key.
3) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Inbound’ or ‘Outbound’ course direction, and press
the ENT Key.
Engine Indication System
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Time’ or ‘Distance’ length mode, and press the ENT
Key.
5) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Right’ or ‘Left’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
Audio Panel and CNS
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC Time), and press the
ENT Key.
8) Press the ENT Key while ‘Activate?’ is highlighted to activate the direct-to with the user-
Flight Management
defined hold defined at the direct-to waypoint. (If the direct-to waypoint is part of the
active flight plan, the hold is inserted into the active flight plan. If the direct-to
waypoint is not part of the active flight plan, an off-route direct-to hold is created.)
Editing a user-defined hold:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Hazard Avoidance
Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large
FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint for the hold.
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Edit Hold’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Hold at’
Automatic Flight Control
System
Window appears with the ‘Course’ Field highlighted.
4) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the course, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Inbound’ or ‘Outbound’ course direction, and press
Additional Features
the ENT Key.
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Time’ or ‘Distance’ length mode, and press the ENT
Key.
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
Appendices
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘Right’ or ‘Left’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
9) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC Time), and press the
ENT Key.
Index
10) Press the ENT Key while ‘Update?’ is highlighted to update the hold.
272
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Press the SUSP Softkey. The system will provide guidance to follow the holding pattern
to the inbound course and resume automatic waypoint sequencing.
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Window (PFD).
FMS Knob to highlight the ‘HOLD’ waypoint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove Holding Pattern?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed from the active
Audio Panel and CNS
flight plan. Select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key to cancel the removal of the
holding pattern.
Engine Indication System
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large
Flight Instruments
Removing a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
System Overview
Exiting a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
Removing a user-defined hold at an off-route direct-to:
1) Press a Direct To Key to display the ‘Direct To’ Window (PFD or MFD).
NAV’ selection.
3) Press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed.
Flight Management
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu with the cursor on the ‘Cancel Direct-To
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
273
5.7 VERTICAL NAVIGATION
NOTE: The system supports vertical path guidance and altitude constraints for the following
leg types: AF, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FC, FD, PI, RF, and TF. Altitude constraints are not retained in
stored flight plans.
The system Vertical Navigation (VNV) feature provides vertical profile guidance during the enroute
and terminal phases of flight. Guidance based on specified altitudes at waypoints in the active flight plan
or to a direct-to waypoint is provided. It includes vertical path guidance to a descending path, which is
provided as a linear deviation from the desired path. The desired path is defined by a line joining two
waypoints with specified altitudes or as a vertical angle from a specified waypoint/altitude. The vertical
waypoints are integrated into the active flight plan. Both manual and autopilot-coupled guidance are
supported.
Canceling vertical navigation results in vertical deviation (V DEV), vertical speed required (VS REQ),
and time to top of descent/bottom of descent (TOD/BOD) going invalid. The Vertical Deviation Indicator
(VDI) and Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) on the PFD are removed, and the V DEV, VS REQ,
and TOD items displayed in the ‘Active VNV Profile’ Box are dashed. VNV remains disabled until
manually enabled. Vertical guidance in reversionary mode can only be enabled for a direct-to waypoint.
The system allows a vertical navigation direct-to for any waypoint in the active flight plan with an
altitude constraint “designated” for vertical guidance. Pressing the VNV Direct-to Softkey on the Active
Flight Plan Page allows the flight plan to be flown, while vertical guidance based on the altitude
constraint at the VNV direct-to waypoint is provided. The altitude change begins immediately and is
spread along the flight plan from current position to the vertical direct-to waypoint, not just along the
leg for the direct-to waypoint. A direct-to with altitude constraint activated by pressing the Direct-to Key
also provides vertical guidance, but would bypass flight plan waypoints between the current position in
the flight plan and the direct-to waypoint. A top of descent (TOD) point is computed based on the
default flight path angle; descent begins once the TOD is reached.
The vertical navigation profile can be modified by directly entering a vertical speed target (VS TGT)
and/or flight path angle (FPA) in the ‘Active VNV Profile’ Box.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
274
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Disabled (fields dashed)
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Enabled (valid data)
System Overview
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
CNCL VNV Softkey
Flight Management
ENBL VNV Softkey
Figure 5-73 Enabling/Disabling Vertical Navigation
Enabling and Disabling VNV guidance:
2) Press the ENBL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Enable VNV’, and press
Automatic Flight Control
System
the ENT Key. Vertical navigation is enabled, and vertical guidance begins with the
waypoint shown in the ‘Active VNV Profile’ Box (defaults first waypoint in the active
flight plan with an altitude enabled for vertical navigation).
Hazard Avoidance
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD to display the ‘FPL- Active Flight Plan’ Page.
3) To Disable VNV guidance, press the Cncl VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key,
highlight ‘Cancel VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical navigation is disabled.
Activating a vertical navigation direct-to:
Additional Features
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the
desired waypoint.
Appendices
NOTE: The selected waypoint must have a designated altitude constraint (cyan number) to
be used. If not, the first waypoint in the flight plan with a designated altitude constraint is
selected.
3) Press the VNV Direct-To Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘VNV Direct-To’,
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Index
and press the ENT Key. An ‘Activate vertical Direct-to to: NNNNNFT at XXXXXX?’
confirmation window is displayed.
275
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
4) Press the ENT Key. Vertical guidance begins to the altitude constraint for the selected
waypoint.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Flight Instruments
Modifying the VS TGT and FPA:
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the VNV Prof Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select VNV Profile
3) Turn the FMS Knobs as needed to edit the values.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS
The system can use altitude constraints associated with lateral waypoints to give guidance for vertical
navigation. These altitudes are, depending on the specific instance, manually entered or retrieved from
the published altitudes in the navigation database.
Altitudes associated with arrival and approach procedures are “auto-designated”. This means the
system automatically provides descending vertical speed and deviation guidance to an altitude(s)
chosen by the system for any waypoint prior to the FAF. These altitudes are displayed as cyan text.
Additionally, altitudes can be manually designated up to and including the FAF. Manually designated
altitudes are displayed as cyan text with the pencil icon. For all designated altitudes, the system will
automatically calculate altitude constraints prior to the designated altitude, which are displayed as
white text.
Altitudes that have been designated for use in vertical guidance can be “un-designated” using the
CLR Key. The altitude is now displayed only as a reference (white text). It is not used to give vertical
guidance. Other displayed altitudes may change due to re-calculations or be rendered invalid as a
result of manually changing an altitude to a non-designated altitude.
Altitude constraints are displayed and entered in feet mean sea level (MSL) values to the nearest
hundred. An altitude constraint in feet above ground level (AGL) format is supported for airports.
When a database altitude restriction is displayed, the system allows entry of a different altitude when
creating a waypoint, effectively overriding the database restriction (only before the FAF). When a
database altitude restriction of type “AT or ABOVE” or “AT or BELOW” is activated, the system uses
the “AT” portion of the restriction to define the vertical profile.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Window’, and press the ENT Key. The cursor is now located in the ‘Active VNV Profile’
Box.
276
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
Altitude Constraint
Examples
Displayed Text
Examples
White Text with
Altitude Restriction Bar
Temperature
Compensated
Figure 5-74 Waypoint Altitude Constraints
Cyan Text
5OOOFT
Altitude is designated for use in determining
vertical guidance. A pencil icon indicates manual
designation or manually edited data entry.
5OOOFT
Automatic Flight Control
System
The system cannot use this altitude in determining
Altitude retrieved from the navigation
database. White line above or below indicates vertical guidance because of an invalid constraint
condition.
the type of constraint, as shown in the
preceding figure. These altitudes are provided
as a reference, and are not designated to be
used in determining vertical guidance.
Hazard Avoidance
Altitude calculated by the system estimating
the altitude of the aircraft as it passes over the
navigation point. No white line above or
below to indicate a potential constraint.
Flight Management
White Text
Audio Panel and CNS
Cross AT or BELOW
3,000 ft
Engine Indication System
Cross AT 2,300 ft
Flight Instruments
System Calculated Altitude
(White Text)
Edited Altitude Constraint
(Cyan Text with Pencil Icon)
Designated Altitude Constraint
(Cyan Text)
Cross AT or ABOVE
5,000 ft
Table 5-12 Altitude Constraint Color Coding
Appendices
Manually designating a waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
Additional Features
NOTE: All designated altitudes (cyan text) will be displayed in the Active Flight Plan Page and
Flight Plan Window without restriction bars regardless of what is shown on the published
procedure.
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint
altitude field.
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Index
3) Use the FMS Knobs to enter the desired altitude.
277
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
4) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in cyan, indicating it is usable for vertical
guidance.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Flight Instruments
Manually designating a procedure waypoint altitude to be used for vertical
guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
Engine Indication System
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint
altitude field.
3) Use the FMS Knobs to enter the desired altitude
4) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in cyan, indicating it is usable for vertical
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
An altitude constraint is invalid if:
•
Meeting the constraint requires the aircraft to climb
•
Meeting the constraint requires the maximum flight path angle or maximum vertical speed to be
exceeded
•
The constraint is within a leg type for which altitude constraints are not supported
•
The altitude constraint is added to the FAF of an approach that provides vertical guidance (i.e., ILS
or GPS SBAS approach)
•
The altitude constraint is added to a waypoint past the FAF
Altitude constraints can be modified or deleted after having been added to the flight plan. In the
event an altitude constraint is deleted and the navigation database contains an altitude restriction for
the lateral waypoint, the system displays the altitude restriction from the database provided no
predicted altitude can be provided. The system also provides a way to reinstate a published altitude
constraint that has been edited.
Entering/modifying an altitude constraint:
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
guidance.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint
altitude constraint.
3) Enter an altitude constraint value using the FMS Knobs, or the FMS alphanumeric keys.
Appendices
To enter altitudes as a flight level, turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise past zero
or clockwise past 9 on the first character, and the system automatically changes to
show units of Flight Level. Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to highlight the first zero
and enter the three digit flight level.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an
Index
airport, an additional choice is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘MSL’ or
‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude.
278
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
2) Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the desired waypoint altitude
Flight Instruments
constraint.
3) Enter an altitude constraint value using the alphanumeric keys on the Display
Controller. To enter altitudes as a flight level, enter F as the first character.
airport, an additional choice is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘MSL’ or
‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude.
Deleting an altitude constraint provided by the navigation database:
Audio Panel and CNS
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
Engine Indication System
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob highlight the desired waypoint
altitude constraint; or use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the desired
waypoint altitude constraint (MFD only), and press the FMS Knob.
Flight Management
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove VNV altitude?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key.
Deleting an altitude constraint that has been manually entered:
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the desired waypoint altitude
constraint (MFD only), and press the FMS Knob.
confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘REMOVE’ and press the ENT Key. The manually entered altitude is deleted (it is
replaced by a system calculated altitude, if available).
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
Additional Features
Reverting a manually entered altitude constraint back to the navigation database
value:
Automatic Flight Control
System
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’
Hazard Avoidance
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint; or
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint; or
Appendices
use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the desired waypoint altitude
constraint (MFD only), and press the FMS Knob.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’
confirmation window is displayed.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
279
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
4) Select ‘REVERT’ and press the ENT Key. The altitude is changed to the navigation
database value.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Flight Instruments
Modifying a system calculated altitude constraint:
1) Press the FPL Key for the MFD to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint
Engine Indication System
altitude constraint; or use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the desired
waypoint altitude constraint (MFD only), and press the FMS Knob.
3) Press the CLR Key. An ‘Edit or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’
confirmation window is displayed.
5) Edit the value using the FMS Knobs or the FMS alphanumeric keys, and press the ENT
Key.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
VERTICAL SITUATION DISPLAY (VSD)
A Vertical Situation Display (VSD) can be shown on the bottom of the Navigation Map Page. The
terrain, obstacles, vertical track vector, selected altitude, and active flight plan information (active
flight plan information consists of waypoints, associated altitude constraints, current VNAV profile,
TOD/BOD, and destination runway) can be displayed on the VSD, depending on the selected mode.
See the Hazard Avoidance section for information about winds aloft, obstacles, and relative terrain on
the VSD.
NOTE: Certain leg types (e.g. holds, heading legs) do not support VNAV PATH descents
because the lateral distance of those legs in unknown. The VSD will not show a VNAV profile
for any legs that have no vertical path guidance.
The VSD horizontal range is equal to the navigation map indicated range when the VSD is in Track
mode. When the VSD is in Flight Plan mode, the horizontal range is the lower of twice the navigation
map indicated range or the lowest range the displays all of the remaining active flight plan. The VSD
altitude range automatically changes when the navigation map range is changed to keep a constant
ratio of altitude range to horizontal range, until both minimum and maximum display limits have been
met. At ranges above the maximum, the altitude range remains constant at the maximum.
The aircraft symbol is displayed on the left side of the VSD. The position of the aircraft symbol on
the vertical scale is close to the top for a descent phase and in the middle for a cruise phase or if the
phase is unknown.
If two waypoints are close together, and their labels or constraint values overlap enough to obscure
any text, one waypoint label/constraint value is removed and the vertical dashed line for that waypoint
is displayed as darker gray. The priority for which waypoint remains displayed is: (1) the current TO
waypoint, (2) waypoint with an altitude constraint, and (3) waypoint closer to the aircraft.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
4) Select ‘EDIT’ and press the ENT Key.
280
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
Flight Instruments
Terrain/obstacles are available on the VSD, and will be shown if the aircraft altitude is low enough
for the terrain/obstacles to be in view (terrain will be shown in gray if the terrain is selected Off on the
Navigation Map). The depicted terrain profile represents an approximate forward-looking contour of
the terrain based upon the highest reported terrain elevations, measured at intervals defined by the
terrain database resolution, within a predefined width along the active flight plan between the aircraft
present position and the end of the map range or active flight plan. The predefined width is
determined by the flight phase.
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
FPL Waypoints
VSD Mode (AUTO)
Flight Management
Altitude Constraints
Destination Runway
Selected Alt. (10000 FT)
Vertical Situation
Display (VSD)
Absolute Terrain
Obstacle
Current VNAV Profile
VSD Mode Buttons
Hazard Avoidance
- FPL
- TRK
- Auto
Figure 5-75 Vertical Situation Display (VSD)
Displayed
Mode
Items available on VSD
AUTO TRK
(1) Active FPL available &
Terrain/obstacles along the
aircraft not within FPL swath, current track, vertical track
or (2) Active FPL not available vector, and selected altitude
Additional Features
AUTO FPL
Terrain/obstacles along the active
Available active FPL & aircraft flight plan route, vertical track
within FPL swath
vector, selected altitude, and
active flight plan information
Auto
Active FPL available
Terrain/obstacles along the active
flight plan route, vertical track
vector, selected altitude, and
active flight plan information
Active FPL not available
Only shows message 'Flight Plan
Not Available'
FPL
Appendices
Flight Plan
FPL Criteria
Automatic Flight Control
System
VSD Mode
Button
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
281
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
VSD Mode
Button
Displayed
Mode
Flight Instruments
Track
FPL Criteria
TRK
Items available on VSD
Terrain/obstacles along the
current track, vertical track
vector, and selected altitude
NA
Active flight plan information consists of waypoints, associated altitude constraints, current
VNAV profile, TOD/BOD, and destination runway
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Table 5-13 VSD Modes
Flight Phase
Width of Swath
Approach, Departure
0.6 nm
Terminal
2.0 nm
En Route, Oceanic
4.0 nm
Table 5-14 VSD Width of Swath
Flight Management
VSD MESSAGES
Under certain conditions, some messages may appear in conjunction with others.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Message
Description
‘Loading...’
VSD is loading data due to a range
change, full/half switch, or first being
selected for display
‘Flight Plan Not Available’
Flight Plan mode is selected and there
is not a flight plan loaded with at
least one leg.
All of the following are true:
Additional Features
‘Flight Plan mode unavailable
because aircraft off course and
active leg over 200 NM’
•
Flight Plan mode is selected
•
The active leg is greater than 200
NM
The aircraft is outside the swath
Flight Plan mode is selected and the
aircraft’s position, as projected on the
flight plan, is past the end of the
active leg.
Flight Plan mode is selected and the
aircraft’s position, as projected on the
flight plan, is prior to the beginning
of the active leg.
•
Appendices
‘Aircraft Beyond Active Leg’
Index
‘Active Leg Begins Beyond
Aircraft Position’
282
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
Message
Description
At least one of the following is true:
Valid terrain database not available
•
GPS MSL altitude not available
•
Current barometric
available
•
Neither current track nor current
heading available
•
GPS position not available
‘VSD Not Available’
altitude
Flight Instruments
•
not
Engine Indication System
Map range setting is less than 1 nm
VSD data has failed to update for 2
seconds or more.
•
Audio Panel and CNS
‘VSD Data Old. Deselect and
Reselect VSD’
Table 5-15 VSD System Messages
Enabling the Vertical Situation Display:
Flight Management
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Press the Inset Softkey.
Hazard Avoidance
4) Press the VSD Softkey to enable the Vertical Situation Display.
5) Press the VSD [Mode] Softkey to choose between Auto, FPL, or TRK.
Or:
Automatic Flight Control
System
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show VSD’ and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
Additional Features
5) Press the Inset Softkey.
6) Press the VSD [Mode] Softkey to choose between Auto, FPL, or TRK.
Disabling the Vertical Situation Display:
Appendices
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Press the Inset Softkey
4) Press the Off Softkey.
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Index
Or:
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
283
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Hide VSD’ and press the ENT Key.
284
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Manually Sequenced Heading Leg
Flight Instruments
The system can access the whole range of instrument procedures available. Departures (DPs), arrivals
(STARs), and non-precision and precision approaches (APRs) are stored within the database and can be
loaded using any Procedures (PROC) Key.
The selected procedure for the departure or arrival airport is added to the active flight plan. No
waypoints are required to be in the active flight plan to load procedures; however, if the origin and
destination airport are already loaded, the procedure loading window defaults to the appropriate airport,
saving some time selecting the correct airport on the Procedure Loading Page.
The system adds terminal procedures to the flight plan based on leg types coded within that procedure
in the navigation database. If the terminal procedure in the flight plan contains an identifier like ‘6368ft’,
that indicates a leg that terminates when the specified altitude (6368 feet) has been exceeded. A heading
leg in the flight plan displays ‘hdg’ preceding the DTK (e.g. ‘hdg 008°’). A flight plan leg requiring the
pilot to manually initiate sequencing to the next leg displays ‘MANSEQ’ as the identifier.
System Overview
5.8 PROCEDURES
Heading Leg Terminating at the
Specified Altitude
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Figure 5-76 Procedure Leg Identifiers
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
285
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Viewing available procedures at an airport:
1) From the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page:
Flight Instruments
Press the DP Softkey. The ‘WPT - Departure Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to
the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
Or:
Engine Indication System
Press the STAR Softkey. The ‘WPT - Arrival Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to
the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
Or:
Press the APR Softkey. The ‘WPT - Approach Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting
to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
Audio Panel and CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor. To select another airport, enter an identifier/
facility name/city, and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the procedure in its respective box. The
procedure is previewed on the map.
Flight Management
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the list of available procedures. Press the ENT Key to
select the procedure. The cursor moves to the next box (runway or transition). The
procedure is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the FMS Knobs, as required, to highlight a runway or transition. Press the ENT Key
Hazard Avoidance
to select the runway or transition. The cursor moves to the next box. The procedure is
previewed on the map.
6) Repeat Step 5, until desired information has been viewed for the chosen procedure.
7) Press the Info 1 Softkey or the Info 2 Softkey to return to the ‘WPT - Airport
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Information’ Page.
286
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
Loading a procedure into the active flight plan from the [Procedure] Information
Page:
1) From the ‘WPT - Airport Information’ Page:
Or:
Or:
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor. To select another airport, enter an identifier/
facility name/city, and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the procedure in its respective box. The
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the list of available procedures, and turn the FMS
Knob to move the cursor. Press the ENT Key to select the procedure. The cursor moves
to the next box (runway or transition). The procedure is previewed on the map.
the FMS Knob to move the cursor. Press the ENT Key to select the runway or transition.
The cursor moves to the next box
6) Repeat Step 5, until the cursor moves to the ‘Sequence’ Box or the ‘Minimums’ Box.
Automatic Flight Control
System
7) Press the MENU Key to display the [Procedure] Information Page Menu.
Hazard Avoidance
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the list of available runways or transitions, and turn
Flight Management
procedure is previewed on the map.
Audio Panel and CNS
Press the APR Softkey. The ‘WPT - Approach Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting
to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
Engine Indication System
Press the STAR Softkey. The ‘WPT - Arrival Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to
the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
Flight Instruments
Press the DP Softkey. The ‘WPT - Departure Information’ Page is displayed, defaulting to
the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
8) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Load [procedure]’.
9) Press the ENT Key to load the procedure into the active flight plan.
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If a departure is loaded when another departure is already in
the active flight plan, the new departure replaces the previous departure. The route is defined by
selection of a departure, the transition waypoints, and a runway.
Additional Features
DEPARTURES
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
287
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Departure Airport
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
Available Procedure Actions
Flight Management
Loaded Procedures
Departure Choices
Departure Preview
Figure 5-77 Departure Selection
Loaded Departure
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Selected Departure
Appendices
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
Index
Figure 5-78 Departure Loading
288
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
Loading a departure into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The ‘Procedures’ Window is displayed.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Select Departure’.
Flight Instruments
3) Press the ENT Key. The Departure Loading Page/Window is displayed.
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport, if necessary, and press the ENT Key.
5) Select a departure from the list and press the ENT Key.
Engine Indication System
6) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key.
7) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the departure procedure.
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Window (PFD).
Audio Panel and CNS
Removing a departure procedure from the active flight plan:
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Departure’.
Flight Management
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove [procedure name] from flight plan?’ Window is
displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Window (PFD).
Automatic Flight Control
System
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the departure header in the active flight
Hazard Avoidance
Or:
plan; or use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the departure header.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove [procedure name] from flight plan?’ Window is
displayed.
Additional Features
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ARRIVALS
Appendices
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available. Only one
arrival can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an arrival is loaded when another arrival is already in
the active flight plan, the new arrival replaces the previous arrival. The route is defined by selection of
an arrival, the transition waypoints, and a runway.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
289
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Destination Airport
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
Available Procedure Actions
Flight Management
Loaded Procedures
Arrival Choices
Arrival Preview
Figure 5-79 Arrival Selection
Loaded Arrival
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Selected Arrival
Appendices
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
Index
Figure 5-80 Arrival Loading
290
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
Loading an arrival into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The ‘Procedures’ Window is displayed.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Select Arrival’.
Flight Instruments
3) Press the ENT Key. The Arrival Loading Page/Window is displayed.
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport, if necessary, and press the ENT Key.
5) Select an arrival from the list and press the ENT Key.
Engine Indication System
6) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
7) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the arrival procedure.
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Window (PFD).
Audio Panel and CNS
Removing an arrival from the active flight plan:
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Arrival’.
Flight Management
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove [procedure name] from flight plan?’ Window is
displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Window (PFD).
use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the arrival header.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove [procedure name] from flight plan?’ Window is
displayed.
Additional Features
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight
Automatic Flight Control
System
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the arrival header in the active flight plan; or
Hazard Avoidance
Or:
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPROACHES
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
291
Index
An Approach Procedure (APR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available, and provides
guidance for non-precision and precision approaches to airports with published instrument approach
Appendices
NOTE: If certain GPS parameters (SBAS, RAIM, etc.) are not available, some published
approach procedures for the desired airport may not be displayed in the list of available
approaches.
procedures. Only one approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an approach is loaded when
another approach is already in the active flight plan, the new approach replaces the previous approach.
The route is defined by selection of an approach and the transition waypoints.
When selecting an approach, a “GPS” designation to the right of the procedure name indicates the
procedure can be flown using the GPS receiver. Some procedures do not have this designation,
meaning the GPS receiver can be used for supplemental navigation guidance only. If the GPS receiver
cannot be used for primary guidance, the appropriate navigation receiver must be used for the selected
approach (e.g., VOR or ILS). The final course segment of ILS approaches, for example, must be flown
by tuning the NAV receiver to the proper frequency and selecting that NAV receiver on the CDI.
The SBAS GPS allows for flying LNAV, LNAV+V, LNAV/VNAV, LP, LP+V, and LPV approach service
levels according to the published chart. LNAV+V is an LNAV with advisory vertical guidance provided
for assistance in maintaining a constant vertical glidepath similar to an ILS glideslope on approach.
This guidance is displayed on the system PFD in the same location as the ILS glideslope using a
magenta diamond. In all cases where LNAV+V is indicated by the system during an approach, LNAV
minima are used. The active approach service level is annunciated on the HSI as shown in the
following table:
HSI
Annunciation
LNAV
LNAV+V
Description
Example on HSI
RNAV GPS approach using
published LNAV minima
RNAV GPS approach using
published LNAV minima.
Advisory vertical guidance is
provided
L/VNAV
(available only
if SBAS
available)
RNAV GPS approach using
published LNAV/VNAV
minima (downgrades to
LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
LP (available
only if SBAS
available)
RNAV GPS approach using
published LP minima
(downgrades to LNAV if
SBAS unavailable)
Approach Service Level
- LNAV, LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, LPV
LP+V (available RNAV GPS approach using
only if SBAS published LP minima.
available)
Advisory vertical guidance is
provided (downgrades to
LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
LPV (available
only if SBAS
available)
RNAV GPS approach using
published LPV minima
(downgrades to LNAV if
SBAS unavailable)
Table 5-16 Approach Service Levels
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
292
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
293
Engine Indication System
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Flight Instruments
190–02183–01 Rev. A
System Overview
LNAV/VNAV Downgrade
If SBAS becomes unavailable prior to one minute to the FAF on an RNAV LNAV/VNAV approach, L/
VNAV will be shown in amber, the system will switch to LNAV/VNAV (Baro VNAV) service level (L/
VNAV shown in magenta), and an APR ADVISORY system message will be generated (the VDI will be
flagged NO GP until the ‘APR ADVISORY’ system message has been acknowledged). If the ‘APR
ADVISORY’ system message is not acknowledged prior to the FAF, the system will downgrade to LNAV
service level (LNAV shown in magenta), the VDI will remain flagged ‘NO GP’, and no additional
downgrade system message will be generated.
If SBAS becomes unavailable after one minute to the FAF, the system will downgrade to LNAV
service level, with no downgrade system message generated. If SBAS becomes unavailable after one
minute to the FAF, and there is no LNAV minima, the approach will abort when past the FAF
waypoint.
LNAV+V Switching
If SBAS becomes unavailable prior to one minute to the FAF on an RNAV LNAV+V approach, LNAV
+V will be shown in amber, the system will switch to LNAV+V (Baro VNAV) service level (LNAV+V
shown in magenta), and an ‘APR ADVISORY’ system message will be generated (the vertical deviation
will be flagged NO GP until the ‘APR ADVISORY’ system message has been acknowledged).
If SBAS becomes unavailable after one minute to the FAF, the system will downgrade to LNAV
service level, with no downgrade system message generated.
LP Downgrade
If SBAS becomes unavailable prior to one minute to the FAF on an RNAV LP approach, LP will be
shown in amber, but the CDI will continue to be shown. At one minute to the FAF, the system will
downgrade to LNAV service level (LNAV shown in magenta), and an ‘APR DWNGRADE’ system
message will be generated (the CDI will be removed until the ‘APR DWNGRADE’ system message has
been acknowledged).
If SBAS becomes unavailable after one minute to the FAF, the approach will abort.
LP+V Downgrade
If SBAS becomes unavailable prior to one minute to the FAF on an RNAV LP+V approach, LP+V will
be shown in amber and the VDI will be flagged NO GP, but the CDI will continue to be shown. At one
minute to the FAF, the system will downgrade to LNAV service level (LNAV shown in magenta), and
an ‘APR DWNGRADE’ system message will be generated (the CDI will be removed until the ‘APR
DWNGRADE’ system message has been acknowledged).
If SBAS becomes unavailable after one minute to the FAF, the approach will abort.
LPV Downgrade
If SBAS becomes unavailable prior to one minute to the FAF on an RNAV LPV approach, LPV will be
shown in amber, but the VDI will continue to be shown. At one minute to the FAF, the system will
downgrade to:
1) LNAV/VNAV service level (Baro VNAV) (L/VNAV shown in magenta), and an APR DWNGRADE
system message will be generated (the VDI will be flagged ‘NO GP’ until the APR DWNGRADE system
message has been acknowledged);
or
2) LNAV service level (LNAV shown in magenta), the VDI will be flagged ‘NO GP’, and an APR
DWNGRADE system message will be generated.
If SBAS becomes unavailable after one minute to the FAF, the system will downgrade to LNAV
service level when past the FAF, with no downgrade system message generated.
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Destination Airport
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Available Procedure Actions
Loaded Procedures
Approach Preview
Approach Choices
Hazard Avoidance
Figure 5-81 Approach Selection
Loaded Approach
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Selected Approach
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
LOAD or ACTIVATE? Annunciation
Index
Figure 5-82 Approach Loading
294
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
Loading an approach into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The ‘Procedures’ Window is displayed.
2) Use the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Select Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The
Flight Instruments
Approach Loading Page/Window is displayed.
3) Select the airport and approach:
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport, if necessary, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS
Knob to move the cursor to the Approach Channel Field.
number, and press the ENT Key to accept the approach channel number. The airport
and approach are selected.
Audio Panel and CNS
b) Use the FMS Knob or the FMS alphanumeric keys to enter the approach channel
Engine Indication System
b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
4) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
a) To set ‘Minimums’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’, and
press the ENT Key. Turn the small FMS Knob or use the FMS alphanumeric keys to
select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
the small FMS Knob or use the FMS alphanumeric keys to enter the temperature,
and press the ENT Key
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key with ‘Load?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the
NOTE: When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT
APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must
to be switched to a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
Appendices
NOTE: If there is no arrival procedure in the active flight plan, loading an approach after a
destination airport has already been entered will result in a duplicate destination airport
waypoint being added to the end of the enroute segment.
Additional Features
large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the
approach procedure.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Or:
Hazard Avoidance
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the ‘TEMP At’ [airport] Field. Turn
Flight Management
5) Minimums
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
295
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Loading an approach into the active flight plan from the Nearest Airport Page:
1) Select the ‘NRST - Nearest Airports’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired nearest
Flight Instruments
airport. The airport is previewed on the map.
3) Press the APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Approach Window’,
and press the ENT Key.
Engine Indication System
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired approach.
5) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Load Approach’, and
press the ENT Key. The ‘PROC - Approach Loading’ Page is displayed with the
‘Transition’ Field highlighted.
Audio Panel and CNS
6) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired transition, and press the ENT Key.
7) Minimums
a) To set ‘Minimums’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’, and
Flight Management
press the ENT Key. Turn the small FMS Knob or use the FMS alphanumeric keys to
enter the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the ‘TEMP At’ [airport] Field. Turn
the small FMS Knob or use the FMS alphanumeric keys to enter the temperature,
and press the ENT Key.
Hazard Avoidance
Or:
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key. ‘Load?’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key with ‘Load?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the
approach procedure. The system continues navigating the current flight plan until the
approach is activated. When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach
course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to
the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV receiver to fly the final course
of the approach.
Removing an approach from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
Window (PFD).
Appendices
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Approach’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove [procedure name] from flight plan?’ Window is
displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’
and press the ENT Key.
Index
Or:
296
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Window (PFD).
System Overview
1) Press the FPL Key to display the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page (MFD) or the ‘Flight Plan’
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the approach header in the active flight
Flight Instruments
plan; or use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the approach header.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove [procedure name] from flight plan?’ Window is
displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’
Engine Indication System
and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ACTIVATING AN APPROACH
Hazard Avoidance
1) Press the PROC Key. The ‘Procedures’ Window is displayed with ‘Activate Approach’
Flight Management
Activating a previously loaded approach:
Audio Panel and CNS
Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either ‘Load’ or ‘Activate’ is given. ‘Load’ adds the
approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation guidance. This
allows continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps the
procedure available for quick activation when needed. ‘Activate’ also adds the procedure to the end
of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in the approach.
In many cases, it may be easiest to ‘load’ the full approach while still some distance away, enroute
to the destination airport. Later, if vectored to final, use the steps below to select ‘Activate Vector-ToFinal’ — which makes the inbound course to the FAF waypoint active.
highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
Activating a previously loaded approach with vectors to final:
Automatic Flight Control
System
1) Press the PROC Key to display the ‘Procedures’ Window.
2) Use the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate Vector-to-Final’ and press the ENT Key.
Loading and activating an approach using the MENU Key:
page menu is displayed with ‘Load & Activate Approach’ highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key. When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course,
Or:
Appendices
the message ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the
approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV receiver to fly the final course of
the approach.
Additional Features
1) From the ‘WPT - Approach Information’ Page, press the MENU Key on the MFD. The
1) Press the PROC Key.
2) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Select Approach’ and press the ENT Key.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
297
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
3) From the ‘PROC - Approach Loading’ Page, press the MENU Key on the MFD. The page
menu is displayed with ‘Load & Activate Approach’ highlighted.
the message ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the
approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV receiver to fly the final course of
the approach.
MISSED APPROACH
In this missed approach procedure (see figure below), the altitude immediately following the MAP
(in this case ‘6600ft’) is not part of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA)
leg which guides the aircraft along the runway centerline until the altitude required to safely make
the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded. This altitude is provided by the navigation database,
and may be below, equal to, or above the published minimums for this approach. In this case, if the
aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,600 feet) after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is
established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of 6,600 feet is reached. After
reaching 6,600 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case ADANE). If the
aircraft altitude is above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to the
published fix (ADANE) to begin the missed approach procedure.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
4) Press the ENT Key. When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course,
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Course to Altitude Leg
Figure 5-83 Course to Altitude
Figure 5-83 Course to Altitude
In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published
procedure. For example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to
the Missed Approach Hold Point (MAHP). In either case, the Course to Altitude leg is portrayed by
the system in the list of waypoints. Again, if the aircraft altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude,
a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg when the missed approach procedure is
activated.
298
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
Activating a missed approach in the active flight plan:
1) Press the PROC Key.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate Missed Approach’.
Flight Instruments
3) Press the ENT Key.
Or:
Engine Indication System
Press the Go-Around Button. Prior to the MAP, the aircraft will continue to laterally
navigate to the MAP before executing the missed approach. Otherwise, the aircraft
automatically sequences to the MAHP.
Or:
Fly past the MAP, and press the SUSP Softkey on the PFD.
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
The system provides a visual approach feature. Unlike instrument approaches, visual approaches
are not defined in the navigation database and do not follow a precise prescribed path. Instead, the
system calculates the lateral and vertical path for the chosen runway and creates visual approach
waypoints based on runway position and course as specified in the navigation database.
Each visual approach will have two transitions, the straight in transition (STRAIGHT) and the
Vectors-to-Final transition (VECTORS). The visual approach waypoints (fixes) consist of the initial
fix (STRGHT), the final approach fix (FINAL), and the missed approach point (RWxx). A 3 degree
glide path is calculated from the missed approach point up to each waypoint along the extended
straight-in path.
For visual approaches, the pilot is responsible for avoiding terrain, obstacles and traffic. Therefore,
when a visual approach is selected, the message “Obstacle clearance is not provided for visual
approaches” is displayed on the approach selection page and must be acknowledged before the
visual approach is loaded into the flight plan.
Audio Panel and CNS
VISUAL APPROACH
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
299
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-84 Loading Visual Approach
Loading and activating a visual approach using the PROC Key:
Hazard Avoidance
1) Press the PROC Key. The ‘Procedures’ Window is displayed.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Select Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The
‘PROC - Approach Loading’ Page is displayed.
Automatic Flight Control
System
3) Select the airport and approach:
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport, if necessary, and press the ENT Key.
b) Select a visual approach from the ‘Approach’ list and press the ENT Key.
4) Select a transition and press the ENT Key.
Additional Features
5) Minimums
a) To set ‘Minimums’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP and
press the ENT Key. Turn the small FMS Knob or use the FMS alphanumeric keys to
enter the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
Appendices
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Turn the
small FMS Knob or use the FMS alphanumeric keys to enter the temperature, and
press the ENT Key.
Or:
Index
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
300
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Activate?’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the
approach procedure.
Flight Instruments
7) The message ‘Obstacle clearance is not provided for visual approaches’ is displayed.
System Overview
6) Press the ENT Key with ‘Load?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure or turn the
Press ENT to continue.
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATED ALTITUDE
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
NOTE: Initiating the VNAV direct-to function or manually specifying an FPA at the FAF will
disrupt the VNAV function from creating a lateral offset. Thus, temperature is not
compensated for and the baro-VNAV path and may not intersect the approach descent path.
Audio Panel and CNS
NOTE: Manually specifying temperature compensation for an approach will disrupt the
system from automatically creating a lateral offset of the VNAV function in use.
Engine Indication System
If desired, the system can compensate the loaded approach altitudes based on a pilot-supplied
temperature at the destination. For example, if the pilot enters a destination temperature of -40º C,
the system increases the approach altitudes accordingly. A temperature compensated altitude is
displayed in white text with a snowflake icon next to it.
Manually inputting the temperature for compensation is explained in the following procedures.
However, the system already automatically offsets the lateral position of the baro-VNAV bottom of
descent without manual input. Once calculated, the VNAV function seamlessly applies the lateral
adjustment to the baro-VNAV descent path so that a smooth transition onto the approach vertical
path occurs. For example, on a day with temperatures colder than ISA, the baro-VNAV path will
typically be below the actual approach descent path. The system will automatically adjust for this by
calculating a lateral distance prior to the FAF which is applied to ensure the baro-VNAV path
intersects the approach descent path.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
301
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selected
Temperature
Compensated
Altitude
Temperature
Compensation
Selected
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
FAF Altitude
Compensated
Altitudes
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Figure 5-85 Temperature Compensation
Uncompensated
Altitudes
Figure 5-86 Temperature Compensation in the Active Flight Plan
Manually activating temperature compensated altitude:
Appendices
1) From the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page, press the MENU Key on the MFD. The ‘Page
Menu’ Window is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Temperature Compensation’ Window is displayed.
Index
4) Use the small FMS Knob or use the FMS alphanumeric keys to enter the temperature.
The compensated altitude is computed as the temperature is selected.
302
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
plan.
Cancelling temperature compensated altitude:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU Key. The ‘Page Menu’ Window is
Audio Panel and CNS
displayed.
Engine Indication System
6) Press the ENT Key. The compensated altitudes for the approach are shown in the flight
Flight Instruments
5) Press the ENT Key. ‘Activate Compensation?’ is highlighted.
System Overview
NOTE: The temperature at the destination can be entered in the ‘Temperature
Compensation’ Window on the MFD, or in the ‘References’ Window on the PFD. There is
only one compensation temperature for the system, therefore, changing the temperature will
affect both the loaded approach altitudes and the minimums. Refer to the Flight Instruments
section for information about applying temperature compensation to the MDA/DH.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Temperature Compensation Window is displayed.
4) Press the ENT Key. ‘Cancel Compensation?’ is highlighted.
Hazard Avoidance
NOTE: Activating/cancelling temperature compensation for the loaded approach altitudes
does not select/deselect temperature compensated minimums (MDA/DH), nor does selecting/
deselecting temperature compensated minimums activate/cancel temperature compensated
approach altitudes.
Flight Management
5) Press the ENT Key. The temperature compensated altitude at the FAF is cancelled.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
303
5.9 WEIGHT PLANNING
The ‘Aux - Weight and Balance’ Page is available to manage actual weight, estimated weight, center of
gravity (CG), and fuel quantity throughout an entire flight.
The ‘Station vs Weight’ Box displays a visual representation of the aircraft’s center of gravity from
takeoff to landing for a given flight plan, plus the remaining fuel burn. The takeoff CG icon is
representated as a triangle, current CG as a diamond, landing CG as a square, and fuel burn as a line. All
that lie within the white bordered polygon, are considered to be within the weight balance parameters
and, therefore, are colored green.
Pressing the Graph Softkey reveals a Zoom Softkey which enlarges the graph representation.
Landing Longitudinal CG
Takeoff Longitudinal CG
Aircraft Load Entry
- Pilot Weight Entry
- Copilot Weight Entry
- TKS Fluid Weight Entry
- Passenger Middle Weight Entry
- Passenger Left Weight Entry
- Passenger Right Weight Entry
- Baggage Weight Entry
Aircraft Weight & Balance
Calculator
Basic Empty Weight Zero Fuel Weight Calculation Fuel On Board Ramp Weight Calculation Taxi Fuel Entry Takeoff Weight Calculation Current Weight Calculation Longitudinal Station CG Calculation % MAC Calculation -
Predicted CG Movement due to
Fuel Burn
Current Longitudinal CG
Estimated Weight Calculator
Graph Softkey
Est. Landing Weight Calculation Est. Landing Fuel Calculation Fuel Reserves Entry Excess Fuel Calculation -
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Fuel Softkey
Confirm Softkey
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Figure 5-87 Weight and Balance Page
304
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Predicted CG Movement
due to Fuel Burn
Current Longitudinal CG
Flight Instruments
Takeoff Longitudinal CG
System Overview
Landing Longitudinal CG
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Zoom Softkey
Back Softkey
The ‘ ‘Aircraft Weight and Balance’ and ‘ Estimated Weight’ Boxes contain entry fields for fuel,
preflight, and inflight weight calculations which use the following formulas:
‘Zero Fuel Weight’ = Basic Empty Weight + Aircraft Load
•
‘Fuel on Board’ = Weight in pounds equal to set gallons on the Initial Usable Fuel Page (via the Fuel
Softkey)
•
‘Ramp Weight’ = Zero fuel weight + the confirmed Fuel on Board weight (static value confirmed by the
pilot)
•
‘Takeoff Weight’ = Ramp Weight - fuel burned for start, taxi, and run-up
•
‘Current Weight’ = Zero Fuel Weight + current Fuel on Board
•
‘Est Landing Weight’ = Zero Fuel Weight + Estimated Landing Fuel Weight
•
‘Est Landing Fuel’ weight = Fuel on Board weight - (fuel flow x ETE)
•
‘Excess Fuel’ weight = Estimated Landing Fuel Weight - Fuel Reserves Weight
Additional Features
•
•
‘Est Landing Fuel’ weight
•
‘Excess Fuel’ weight
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Index
‘Est Landing Weight’
Appendices
When the aircraft is in the air and a destination waypoint has been entered, the fuel calculations can
be completed. If the aircraft is on the ground or a destination waypoint has not been entered, the
following fields display invalid values consisting of four dashes:
•
Automatic Flight Control
System
‘Basic Empty Weight’ is calculated by summing the weights of the airframe/engine, fixed equipment,
unusable fuel, full oil and other items necessary for flight.
Hazard Avoidance
•
Flight Management
Figure 5-88 Weight & Balance Graph Zoomed
305
WEIGHT WARNING CONDITIONS
If the zero fuel weight is greater than the maximum allowable zero fuel weight, then the zero fuel
weight is displayed in amber.
If the ramp weight is greater than the maximum allowable ramp weight, then the ramp weight is
displayed in amber.
If the takeoff weight is greater than the maximum allowable takeoff weight, then the aircraft weight is
displayed in amber.
If the current weight is outside the envelope, then the current weight is displayed in amber.
If the estimated landing weight is greater than the maximum allowable landing weight, then the
estimated landing weight is displayed in amber.
If the estimated landing fuel weight is positive, but less than or equal to the fuel reserves weight, the
following values are displayed in amber:
•
‘Est Landing Fuel’ weight
•
‘Excess Fuel’ weight
If the estimated landing fuel weight is zero or negative, then the following values are displayed in
amber:
•
‘Est Landing Fuel’ weight
•
‘Excess Fuel’ weight
If the aircraft CG will lie outside the specified CG envelope at any time (to include remaining fuel
burn calculated after landing), the respective Take Off triangle, Current diamond, Fuel Burn line,
and/or Landing square will be displayed in amber.
If the value for the ‘Station’ Field is outside of the specified CG envelope, the data in the ‘Station’
Field and ‘MAC’ Field will be displayed in amber.
When any portion of the Current CG diamond lies outside the visible chart area, the following
amber text will appear on the chart, “THE CURRENT CG EXCEEDS THE CHART LIMITS.”
Viewing the zoomed CG Graph:
1) From the ‘Aux - Weight Planning’ Page, press the Graph Softkey.
2) Press the Zoom Softkey to switch between the zoomed and normal view.
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Entering aircraft load:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
Appendices
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field within the ‘Aircraft Load’ Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob or use the FMS alphanumeric keys to enter the weight.
4) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
5) Repeat steps 2 through 4 until all seat and baggage weight values are accurate.
Index
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
306
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
Entering the fuel on board weight on the Initial Usable Fuel Page:
1) From the ‘Aux - Weight Planning’ Page, press the Fuel Softkey to display the ‘Intital
Usable Fuel’ Page.
Flight Instruments
2) Add or subtract fuel by using the FMS Knobs.
3) Press the ENT Key or the W&B Softkey to return to the ‘Aux - Weight and Balance’
Page.
Engine Indication System
4) Press the ENT Key or the Confirm Softkey to confirm the Weight and Balance Page
entries.
Entering taxi fuel weight:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and highlight the ‘Taxi Fuel’ Field.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor
Flight Management
Entering fuel reserves weight:
Audio Panel and CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob or use the alphanumeric keys to enter the taxi fuel weight.
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and highlight the ‘Fuel Reserves’ Field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the fuel reserves amount.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
Hazard Avoidance
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
307
5.10 TRIP PLANNING
The system allows the pilot to view trip planning information, fuel information, and other information
for a specified flight plan or flight plan leg based on automatic data, or based on manually entered data.
TRIP PLANNING
All of the input of data needed for calculation and viewing of the statistics is done on the Trip
Planning Page located in the Aux Page Group.
Selected Flight Plan Segment
- FPL Number/Cumulative Legs (CUM or REM) or Leg Number (NN)
- Waypoints Defining Selected Flight Plan/Flight Plan Leg
Trip Planning Page Mode
- Automatic/Manual
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan/
Flight Plan Leg
Trip Input Data (sensor/pilot)
- Departure Time (local)
- Ground Speed
- Fuel Flow
- Fuel On Board Aircraft
- Calibrated Airspeed
- Indicated Altitude
- Barometric Pressure
- Total Air Temperature
Trip Statistics
Desired Track Distance Est. Time Enroute Est. Time of Arrival Enroute Safe Altitude Sunrise Time (local) Sunset Time (local) -
Other Statistics
- Density Altitude
- True Airspeed (TAS)
Fuel Statistics
Efficiency Total Endurance Remaining Fuel Remaining Endurance Fuel Required Total Range -
Softkeys
- Automatic/Manual Page Mode
- Flight Plan/Waypoint Mode
Figure 5-89 Trip Planning Page
The trip planning inputs are based on sensor inputs (automatic page mode) or on pilot inputs
(manual page mode). Some additional explanation of the sources for some of the inputs is as follows:
•
Departure Time - In automatic page mode, this defaults to the current time in and the computations
are from the aircraft present position, so the aircraft is always just departing.
•
Calibrated Airspeed - The primary source is from the air data system, and the secondary source of
information is GPS ground speed.
•
Indicated Altitude - The primary source is the barometric altitude, and the secondary source of
information is GPS altitude.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
308
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Estimated time enroute (ETE) - ETE is shown as hours:minutes until less than an hour, then it is
shown as minutes:seconds.
•
Estimated time of arrival (ETA) - ETA is shown as hours:minutes and is the local time at the
destination.
•
If a flight plan other than the active flight plan is selected it shows the ETA by adding to the
departure time all of the ETEs of the legs up to and including the selected leg. If the entire flight
plan is selected, then the ETA is calculated as if the last leg of the flight plan was selected.
•
If the active flight plan is selected the ETA reflects the current position of the aircraft and the
current leg being flown. The ETA is calculated by adding to the current time the ETEs of the
current leg up to and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the ETA
is calculated as if the last leg of the flight plan was selected.
•
Enroute safe altitude (ESA) - The ESA is shown as nnnnnFT
•
Destination sunrise and sunset times (SUNRISE, SUNSET) - These times are shown as
hours:minutes of the time at the destination.
Appendices
If in waypoint mode then the ETA is the ETE added to the departure time.
Additional Features
•
Automatic Flight Control
System
•
Hazard Avoidance
Distance - The distance is shown in tenths of units up to 99.9, and in whole units up to 9999.
Flight Management
•
Audio Panel and CNS
Desired Track - Desired Track is shown as nnn° and is the desired track between the selected
waypoints. It is dashed unless only a single leg is selected.
Engine Indication System
•
Flight Instruments
The trip statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip
planning inputs, derived from the flight plan. The system calculates these values depending on the
specified mode, flight plan mode (FPL Softkey enabled) or waypoint mode (WPTs Softkey enabled).
Stored Flight Plans may be used by selecting its corresponding number from the Flight Plan Catalog
(‘01’–’99’). ‘00’ is the default number for the Active Flight Plan.
In flight plan mode, with a stored flight plan selected, and the entire flight plan (‘CUM’) selected,
the waypoints are the starting and ending waypoints of the selected flight plan.
In flight plan mode , with a stored flight plan selected, and the desired leg selected (flight plan legs
are numbered in increasing order starting from ‘01’), the waypoints are the endpoints of the selected
leg.
In flight plan mode, with the active flight plan selected, and the remaining flight plan (REM)
selected, the ‘from’ waypoint is the present position of the aircraft and the ‘to’ waypoint is the
endpoint of the active flight plan.
In flight plan mode, with the active flight plan selected, and a specific leg selected, the ‘from’
waypoint is the current aircraft position and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the selected leg.
In waypoint mode, these are manually selected waypoints (if there is an active flight plan, these
default to the endpoints of the active leg).
Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has
already been flown.
System Overview
TRIP STATISTICS
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
309
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FUEL STATISTICS
The fuel statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip
planning inputs. Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active
flight plan has already been flown.
•
Fuel efficiency (Efficiency) - This value is calculated by dividing the current ground speed by the
current fuel flow.
•
Time of fuel endurance (Total Endurance) - This time is shown as hours:minutes. This value is
obtained by dividing the amount of fuel on board by the current fuel flow.
•
Fuel on board upon reaching end of selected leg (Remaining Fuel) - This value is calculated by
taking the amount of fuel onboard and subtracting the fuel required to reach the end of the
selected leg.
•
Fuel endurance remaining at end of selected leg (Remaining Endurance) - This value is calculated
by taking the time of fuel endurance and subtracting the estimated time enroute to the end of the
selected leg.
•
Fuel required for trip (Fuel Required) - This value is calculated by multiplying the ETE by the fuel
flow.
•
Total range at entered fuel flow (Total Range) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time of
fuel endurance by the ground speed.
OTHER STATISTICS
These statistics are calculated based on the system sensor inputs or the manual trip planning
inputs.
•
Density Altitude
•
True Airspeed
The pilot may select Automatic or Manual page mode, and flight plan or waypoint mode. In
automatic page mode, only the FPL, LEG, or waypoint IDs are editable (based on FPL/WPTs
selection). In manual page mode, the other eight trip input data fields must be entered by the pilot,
in addition to flight plan and leg selection.
Selected Leg(s)
Selected Flight Plan NN 00 is Active FPL
01-99 are Stored FPLs
Appendices
Starting and Ending Waypoint of
Selected Flight Plan Segment
Stored Flight Plan
- CUM: Beginning to End of FPL
- NN: Beginning to End of Selected Leg
Active Flight Plan
- REM: Pres. Pos. to End of FPL
- NN: Pres. Pos. to End of Selected Leg
Index
Figure 5-90 Trip Planning Page - Flight Plan Mode
310
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
Selected Flight Plan
Selected Leg(s)
Not Available
Not Available
Flight Instruments
Selected Starting and Ending Waypoints
Figure 5-91 Trip Planning Page - Waypoint Mode
From the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, press the Auto Softkey or the Manual Softkey; or
press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Auto Mode’ or ‘Manual Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
From the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, press the FPL Softkey or the WPTs Softkey; or
press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Flight Plan Mode’ or ‘Waypoints Mode’, and press the
ENT Key.
1) From the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor in the
‘FPL’ Field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired flight plan number.
viewed by turning the small FMS Knob to select the desired leg. The Trip Planning Map
also displays the selected data.
Hazard Avoidance
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CUM’ or ‘REM’. The statistics for each leg can be
Flight Management
Selecting a flight plan and leg for trip statistics:
Audio Panel and CNS
Selecting flight plan or waypoint mode:
Engine Indication System
Selecting automatic or manual page mode:
Selecting waypoints for waypoint mode:
highlight ‘Waypoints Mode’, and press the ENT Key. The cursor is positioned in the
waypoint field directly below the FPL Field.
2) Turn the FMS Knobs to select the desired waypoint (or select from the Page Menu ‘Set
3) Turn the FMS Knobs to select the desired waypoint, and press the ENT Key. The
statistics for the selected leg are displayed.
Additional Features
WPT to Present Position’ if that is what is desired), and press the ENT Key. The cursor
moves to the second waypoint field.
Automatic Flight Control
System
1) From the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, press the WPTs Softkey; or press the MENU Key,
Entering manual data for trip statistics calculations:
from the Page Menu, and press the ENT Key. The cursor may now be positioned in any
field within the Input Data Box.
Appendices
1) From the ‘Aux - Trip Planning’ Page, press the Manual Softkey or select ‘Manual Mode’
2) Turn the FMS Knobs to move the cursor onto the ‘Departure Time’ Field and enter the
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
311
Index
desired value. Press the ENT Key. The statistics are calculated using the new value and
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
the cursor moves to the next entry field. Repeat until all desired values have been
entered.
312
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
System Overview
5.11 ABNORMAL OPERATION
This section discusses the Dead Reckoning mode of operation and the subsequent indications.
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Also, while the system is in DR Mode, some terrain functions are not available. Additionally, the
accuracy of all nearest information (airports, airspaces, and waypoints) is questionable. Finally, airspace
alerts continue to function, but with degraded accuracy.
Audio Panel and CNS
NOTE: GPS derived information will remain displayed in magenta (not amber) on the Flight
Plan Progress inset when operating in Dead Reckoning mode. However, this information shall
still be considered as degraded navigation source information.
Engine Indication System
While in Enroute or Oceanic phase of flight, if the system detects an invalid GPS solution or is unable
to calculate a GPS position, the system automatically reverts to Dead Reckoning (DR) Mode. In DR
Mode, the system uses its last-known position combined with continuously updated airspeed and
heading data (when available) to calculate and display the aircraft’s current estimated position.
It is important to note that estimated navigation data supplied by the system in DR Mode may become
increasingly unreliable and must not be used as a sole means of navigation. If while in DR Mode
airspeed and/or heading data is also lost or not available, the DR function may not be capable of
accurately tracking estimated position and, consequently, the system may display a path that is different
than the actual movement of the aircraft. Estimated position information displayed by the system
through DR while there is no heading and/or airspeed data available should not be used for navigation.
DR Mode is inherently less accurate than the standard GPS/SBAS Mode due to the lack of satellite
measurements needed to determine a position. Changes in wind speed and/or wind direction compound
the relative inaccuracy of DR Mode. Because of this degraded accuracy, other navigation equipment must
be relied upon for position awareness until GPS-derived position data is restored.
DR Mode is indicated on the system by the appearance of the letters ‘DR’ superimposed in amber over
the ‘own aircraft’ symbol. In addition, ‘DR’ is prominently displayed in amber on the HSI slightly below
and to the left of the aircraft symbol on the CDI. The CDI deviation bar remains, but is shown in amber
and then removed from the display after 20 minutes in DR Mode. The autopilot will remain coupled in
DR mode as long as the deviation info is available (20 min). Furthermore, a ‘GPS NAV LOST’ alert
message appears on the PFD. Normal navigation using GPS/SBAS source data resumes automatically
once a valid GPS solution is restored.
As a result of operating in DR Mode, all GPS-derived data is computed based upon an estimated
position and is displayed as amber text on the display to denote degraded navigation source information
as shown in the following figure. If the VSD Inset is selected on the MFD, ‘VSD Not Available’ will be
displayed.
Flight Instruments
NOTE: Dead Reckoning Mode only functions in Enroute (ENR) or Oceanic (OCN) phase of
flight. In all other phases, an invalid GPS solution produces a “NO GPS POSITION”
annunciation on the map and the system stops using GPS.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
313
System Overview
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Ground
Speed
Course Deviation
Indicator
Current
Track
Indicator
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
GPS Navigation
Lost Message
Bearing
Pointer/
Distance
Destination
Airport
Information
Nav Data Bar
All data except
Active Leg, TAS,
and DTK are in
amber
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
Distance &
Estimated
Time Enroute
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
Appendices
Additional Features
Subdued Aircraft
Symbol
Index
Figure 5-92 Dead Reckoning Mode - GPS Derived Data Shown in Amber
314
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.1 OVERVIEW
•
GSR 56 Garmin Connext Weather (Optional)
•
Flight Information Services-Broadcast (FIS-B) Weather (Optional)
•
L-3 Stormscope® WX-500 Lightning Detection System (Optional)
Audio Panel and CNS
69/69A SXM SiriusXM Weather (Service Requires Subscription)
Engine Indication System
•
Terrain Avoidance
Terrain Proximity
•
Terrain SVT (included with the Garmin SVT option)
•
Terrain Awareness and Warning System Class B (TAWS-B) (Optional)
Flight Management
•
Traffic
•
GTS 800 Traffic Advisory System (TAS) (Optional)
•
Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast (ADS-B) Traffic (Optional)
Flight Instruments
Hazard avoidance features available for the system are designed to aid situational awareness and
provide advisory information with regard to potential hazards to flight safety associated with weather,
terrain, and air traffic.
Weather
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
315
6.2 DATA LINK WEATHER
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around
areas of hazardous weather. Information contained within data link weather products may
not accurately depict current weather conditions.
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The Data Link Weather feature enables the system to receive weather information from a variety of
weather sources, depending on the equipment installed in the aircraft. These sources may include
SiriusXM Weather and Garmin Connext Weather. For each source, a ground-based system processes the
weather information collected from a network of sensors and weather data providers.
The SiriusXM Weather service, available with the Garmin 69A SXM data link receiver and an active
service subscription, updates its weather data periodically and automatically, and transmits this
information to the aircraft’s receiver via satellite on the S-Band frequency. This service provides
continuous reception capabilities at any altitude throughout North America.
The FIS-B Weather service, available when equipped with a capable transponder or data link receiver
which can receive 978 MHz Universal Access Transceiver (UAT) data, delivers subscription-free weather
information periodically and automatically to the aircraft. FIS-B uses a network of FAA-operated
Ground-Based Transceivers (GBTs) to transmit the information to the aircraft’s receiver. Reception is
limited to line-of-sight, and is available below 24,000 feet MSL in the United States. FIS-B broadcasts
provide weather data in a repeating cycle which may take approximately ten minutes to transmit all
available weather data. Therefore, not all weather data may be present immediately upon initial FIS-B
signal acquisition. FIS-B is a component of the Automatic Dependent Surveillance (ADS-B) system,
which offers both weather and traffic data; refer to the ADS-B Traffic discussion later in this section for a
more detailed discussion of the ADS-B system and its capabilities.
The Garmin Connext Weather service, available when equipped with the Garmin GSR 56 Iridium
Satellite Transceiver and an active service subscription, provides data link weather information to the
aircraft after the pilot defines a geographic area and subsequently selects a manual or automatically
recurring Connext Data Request. The transceiver then contacts the Garmin Connext Weather service
using the Iridium Satellite telephone system and retrieves the weather data for the specified area. The
Garmin Connext Weather service offers worldwide weather coverage, but the availability of individual
weather products, such as radar precipitation, varies by region.
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of
the weather information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays
inherent in gathering and processing weather data for data link transmission, the weather
information shown by the data link weather product may be older than the indicated
weather product age.
Index
NOTE: To check the availability of Garmin Connext weather products offered in a particular
region, visit www.flygarmin.com.
316
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
ACTIVATING DATA LINK WEATHER SERVICES
ACTIVATING THE SIRIUSXM WEATHER SERVICE
The ‘Aux - XM’ Information Page on the MFD
•
The SiriusXM Activation Instructions included with the Data Link Receiver
•
The label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
After SiriusXM has been contacted, it may take approximately 15 minutes until the activation
occurs.
Audio Radio ID
(for SiriusXM Satellite
Radio)
Flight Management
Data Radio ID
(for SiriusXM
Weather
Audio Panel and CNS
•
Engine Indication System
Before SiriusXM Weather can be used, the service must be activated by providing SiriusXM’s
customer service the coded ID(s) unique to the installed data link receiver. The Data Radio ID
must be provided to activate the weather service. A separate Audio Radio ID, if present, enables the
receiver to provide SiriusXM Radio entertainment. To view this information, refer to the following
locations:
Flight Instruments
NOTE: Not all weather products offered by SiriusXM are supported for display on this
system. This pilot’s guide only discusses supported weather products.
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Weather Products
(Available Products for
Service Class Indicated
in Green)
Additional Features
Select to Display XM
Information page
Figure 6-1 ‘Aux — XM Information’ Page
Appendices
NOTE: Not all weather products offered by SiriusXM are supported for display on this
system. This pilot’s guide only discusses supported weather products.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
317
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Establishing an account for SiriusXM services:
1) Select the XM Radio Page in the Auxiliary Page Group.
Flight Instruments
2) If necessary, press the Info Softkey to display the ‘Aux - XM Information’ Page.
3) Note the Data Radio ID (for SiriusXM Weather data) and/or the Audio Radio ID (for
SiriusXM Satellite Radio).
4) Contact SiriusXM customer service through the phone number listed on its website,
Engine Indication System
www.siriusxm.com.
5) Provide SiriusXM customer service the Data Radio ID and/or Audio Radio ID, in addition
to payment information, and the desired weather product subscription package.
Verifying the SiriusXM Weather service activation:
Audio Panel and CNS
1) Once a SiriusXM Weather account has been established, select the XM Radio Page in
the Auxiliary Page Group.
2) If necessary, press the Info Softkey to display the ‘Aux - XM Information’ Page.
unavailable weather product; a green filled box appears next to an available weather
product. During activation, it may take several minutes for weather products in the
selected subscription package to become available.
ACTIVATING GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER
Garmin Connext weather requires an active Iridium satellite network account and an active
subscription to the Garmin Connext Weather service.
A subscriber account must be established for the Iridium transceiver prior to using the Iridium
Satellite System for telephone services. Before setting up an Iridium account, obtain the serial
number of the Iridium Transceiver (GSR1) and the System ID by selecting the ‘Aux - System Status’
Page. Then Contact Garmin through the phone number listed at its website, www.flygarmin.com.
When an account is established, Garmin provides an Access Code which must be entered on the
system in order to complete the registration process.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
3) View the list of supported Weather Products. A white empty box appears next to an
318
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
Flight Instruments
System ID Number
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Iridium Transceiver
Serial Number
When an account is established, Garmin provides an Access Code which must be entered on the
system in order to complete the registration process.
Flight Management
Figure 6-2 Identification Needed for Iridium Registration
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Figure 6-3 Select ‘Register With Connext’
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
319
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-4 Enter Access Code
Registering the system to receive Garmin Connext Weather:
Hazard Avoidance
1) With the aircraft outside and having a clear view of the sky, turn the large FMS Knob to
select the Map page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ Page. If
Automatic Flight Control
System
another data link weather source such as ‘XM’ or ‘FIS-B’ is displayed in the page title, it
will be necessary to change the data link weather source to CNXT before continuing.
Refer to ‘Viewing the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page’ procedure to change the data
link source to prior to registration.
3) If the system displays the Connext Registration Window, proceed to step 6. Otherwise,
press the MENU Key. The page menu window is now displayed.
Additional Features
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Register With Connext’ in the menu list.
5) Press the ENT Key. The Connext Registration Window appears.
6) Enter the access code provided by Garmin in the ‘Access Code’ field.
Appendices
7) Press the ENT Key. ‘Register’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key. The system contacts Garmin through the Iridium network. System
registration is complete when the Current Registration Window displays the correct
information for the Airframe, Tail Number, Airframe Serial Number, and Iridium Serial
Number.
Index
9) When finished, push the FMS Knob to remove the Connext Registration Window.
320
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Viewing legends for displayed weather products on the Weather Data Link Page:
Flight Instruments
Unlike real-time weather information collected directly from weather sensors on-board an aircraft,
data link weather by contrast relies on service providers to collect, process, and transmit weather
information to the aircraft. This information can come from a variety of sources such as government
agencies. Due to the time it takes to collect, process, and distribute data link weather information, it is
imperative for pilots to understand that data link weather information is not real-time information and
may not accurately depict the current conditions.
For each data link weather product which can be displayed as a map overlay, such as radar
precipitation, the system can also show a weather product age. This age represents the elapsed time, in
minutes, since the weather service provider compiled the weather product and the current time. It
does not represent the age of the information contained within the weather product itself. For
example, a single mosaic of radar precipitation is comprised data from multiple radar sites providing
data at differing scan rates or intervals. The weather service provider periodically compiles this data to
create a single composite image, and assigns one time to this image which becomes the basis of the
product age. The service provider then makes this weather product available for data link transmission
at the next scheduled update time. The actual age of the weather data contained within the mosaic is
therefore older than its weather product age and should never be considered current.
SiriusXM and FIS-B weather products are broadcast automatically on a repeating cycle without pilot
intervention.
Each data link weather product age has an expiration time. The weather product age is shown in
white if it is less than half of this expiration time, otherwise it is shown in amber until reaching its
expiration time. After a weather product has expired, the system removes the expired weather product
from the displays, and shows white dashes instead of the age. If the data link receiver has not yet
received a weather product ‘N/A’ appears instead of the age to show the product is currently not
available for display. This may occur, for example, after powering on the system but before the data
link receiver has received a complete weather data transmission. It could also indicate a possible
outage of a weather product.
The weather product age is shown automatically for weather products displayed on MFD maps. For
PFD maps, the pilot can manually enable/disable the age information.
System Overview
WEATHER PRODUCT AGE
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
Or:
Additional Features
2) Press the Legend Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
a) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the legends if more are available than fit in the
Appendices
b) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
window.
4) To remove the Weather Legends Window, press the Legend Softkey, the ENT or the
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Index
CLR Key, or press the FMS Knob.
321
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The following tables show the weather product symbols, the expiration times and the broadcast rates
for SiriusXM Weather and FIS-B Weather, respectively. The broadcast rate represents the interval at
which the SiriusXM Weather service transmits new signals that may or may not contain updated weather
product information. It does not represent the rate at which the weather information is updated or when
the Data Link Receiver receives new data. The service provider and its weather data suppliers define and
control the data update intervals, which are subject to change.
SiriusXM Weather Product
Symbol
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
Broadcast Rate
(Minutes)
NEXRAD
30
5 (U.S.)
10 (Canada)
Cloud Top (CLD TOP)
60
15 (69/69A)
30 (69/69A SXM)
Echo Top (ECHO TOP)
30
7.5
SiriusXM Lightning (LTNG)
30
5
Cell Movement
30
1.25
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
60
12
METARs
90
12
City Forecast
90
12
Surface Analysis
60
12
Freezing Levels
120
12
Winds Aloft
90
12
County Warnings
60
5
Cyclone Warnings
60
12
Icing Potential (CIP and SLD)
90
22
Pilot Weather Report (PIREP)
90
12
Air Report(AIREP)
90
12
Turbulence
180
12
30
5
No product image
Index
Radar Coverage Not Available
322
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
Broadcast Rate
(Minutes)
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
No product image
60
12
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast (TAF)
No product image
60
12
Flight Instruments
Symbol
Table 6-1 SiriusXM Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
FIS-B Weather Product
Symbol
NEXRAD Composite (US)
30
15
NEXRAD Composite (Regional)
30
2.5
METARs
90
5
Pilot Weather Report (PIREP)
90
10
Winds Aloft
90
10
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
60
5
2.5
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast (TAF)
no product
image
60
10
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
no product
image
60
10
Hazard Avoidance
30
Flight Management
no product
image
Audio Panel and CNS
Broadcast Rate
(Minutes)
Symbol
Refresh Rate
(Minutes)
Appendices
Expiration
Time
(Minutes)
U.S.: 3*
Radar
Precipitation
30
Canada: 3*†
Europe: 15
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Index
Australia: 15^
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Additional Features
The following table shows the Garmin Connext Weather product symbols, the expiration times and
the refresh rates. The refresh rate represents the interval at which Garmin Connext weather service
makes available the most current known weather data. It does not necessarily represent the rate at which
the service receives new data from various weather sources. The pilot chooses how often to contact the
Garmin Connext weather service in order to retrieve weather data through the Connext Data Request.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Table 6-2 FIS-B Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
Garmin
Connext
Weather
Product
Engine Indication System
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
No Radar Coverage
System Overview
SiriusXM Weather Product
323
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Refresh Rate
(Minutes)
Flight Instruments
Infrared
Satellite
60
30
Datalink
Lightning
30
Continuous
SIGMETs/
AIRMETs
60
Continuous
METARs
90
Continuous
Winds Aloft
90
Continuous
Pilot
Weather
Report
(PIREPs)
90
Continuous
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Expiration
Time
(Minutes)
Engine Indication System
Garmin
Connext
Weather
Product
no product
image
60
Continuous
Terminal
Aerodrome
Reports
(TAFs)
no product
image
60
Continuous
* The composite precipitation image is updated every 3
minutes, but individual radar sites may take between 3 and
10 minutes to provide new data.
† Canadian radar precipitation data provided by
Environment Canada.
^ Australian radar precipitation data provided by the
Australian Bureau of Meteorology.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Temporary
Flight
Restrictions
(TFRs)
Table 6-3 Garmin Connext Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
DISPLAYING DATA LINK WEATHER PRODUCTS
WEATHER DATA LINK PAGE
The ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM/FIS-B/CNXT)’ Page is the principal map page for viewing data
link weather information. This page provides the capability for displaying the most data link weather
products of any map on the system. The ‘Map - Weather Data Link’ Page also provides system-wide
controls for selecting the data link weather source, if more than one source has been installed. The
page title indicates the selected data link weather source (e.g., “XM”, ”FIS-B’, “CNXT”).
Index
Appendices
Symbol
324
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
Flight Instruments
NEXRAD Weather
Product Display
Enabled
NEXRAD Weather
Product Ages
(US)
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
NEXRAD
Weather Product
Selected for
Display
Figure 6-5 Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Figure 6-6 Changing the Data Link Weather Source
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
325
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Viewing the Weather Data Link Page and changing the data link weather source, if
applicable:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
Flight Instruments
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link (XM or CNXT or FIS-B) Page.
The currently selected data link weather source appears in the page title.
3) If the page title does not contain the desired weather source, press the MENU Key.
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
a) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Display XM Weather’, or ‘Display Connext
Weather’ or ‘Display FIS-B Weather’ (choices may vary depending on the installed
equipment).
b) Press the ENT Key.
WEATHER DATA LINK (XM) PAGE SOFTKEYS
NOTE: Only softkeys pertaining to data link weather features are shown in the following
tables.
The system presents the softkeys for the selected source on the Weather Data Link Page, and for
map overlays used throughout the system. The following figures show the softkeys for the Weather
Data Link Page based on the selected source.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Level 1
326
Level 2
Level 3
Description
NEXRAD
Enables/disables the
NEXRAD weather product
overlay.
Echo Top
Enables/disables the Echo
Tops weather product
overlay.
CLD Top
Enables/disables the
Cloud Tops weather
product overlay.
XM LTNG
Enables/disables the
SiriusXM Lightning
weather product overlay.
Cell MOV
Enables/disables the Cell
Movement weather
product overlay.
SIG/AIR
Enables/disables the
SIGMET/AIRMET weather
product overlay.
METAR
Enables/disables the
graphical METAR weather
product overlay.
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Level 2
Level 3
Description
Displays second-level
SiriusXM Weather product
softkeys.
SFC
Displays third level softkey
for enabling/disabling the
Surface Analysis and City
Forecast weather product
and selecting a forecast
period.
Off
12 HR,
24 HR,
36 HR,
48 HR
These softkeys display a
Surface Analysis and City
Forecast overlay for the
selected future time
period.
Legend
Enables/disables the
SiriusXM Weather
Legends Window. Softkey
available for selection
when at least one
SiriusXM Weather product
is enabled.
Hazard Avoidance
Current
Displays the Surface
Analysis for the current
time period overlay.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Back
FRZ LVL
Disables the Surface
Analysis and City Forecast
weather product overlay.
Flight Management
Enables/disables the
Cyclone weather product
overlay.
Audio Panel and CNS
Cyclone
Engine Indication System
More WX
Flight Instruments
Legend
Enables/disables the
SiriusXM Weather
Legends Window. Softkey
available for selection
when at least one
SiriusXM Weather product
is enabled.
System Overview
Level 1
Returns to the secondlevel softkeys.
Enables/disables the
Freezing Level weather
product overlay.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
327
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Displays third level
softkeys for enabling/
disabling the Winds Aloft
weather product and
selecting a winds aloft
altitude.
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
Wind
PREV
Shows the previous level
of winds aloft altitude
softkeys.
Off
Disables the Winds Aloft
weather product overlay.
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Softkeys
available
for
selecting
winds
from the
Surface
to
42,0000
feet
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Next
Legend
Additional Features
Back
Enables/disables the
Winds Aloft weather
product for the surface
(SFC) through 42,000
feet. Softkeys available for
3,000 foot increments of
altitude.
Shows the next level of
winds aloft altitude
softkeys.
Enables/disables the
SiriusXM Weather
Legends Window. Softkey
available for selection
when at least one
SiriusXM Weather product
is enabled.
Returns to the secondlevel softkeys.
Displays altitude softkeys
for the Icing weather
product overlay.
ICNG
PREV
Shows the previous level
of Icing altitude softkeys.
Off
Disables the Icing weather
product.
Index
Appendices
Description
328
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Level 2
System Overview
Level 1
Softkeys
available
for
selecting
winds
from the
Icing
altitude
from to
1,000 to
30,000
feet
Enables/disables the Icing
weather product overlay
from 1,000 feet to 30,000
feet. Softkeys available for
3,000 foot increments of
altitude.
TURB
Hazard Avoidance
Displays softkeys for
enabling/disabling the
Turbulence weather
product overlay.
Flight Management
Legend
Enables/disables the
SiriusXM Weather
Legends Window. Softkey
available for selection
when at least one
SiriusXM Weather product
is enabled.
Audio Panel and CNS
Next
Shows the next level of
Icing weather product
softkeys.
Engine Indication System
Description
Flight Instruments
Level 3
Disables the Turbulence
weather product overlay.
Softkeys
available
for
selecting
Turbulenc
e altitude
from
21,000
feet to
45,000
feet
Enables/disables the Icing
weather product overlay
from 21,000 feet to
45,000 feet. Softkeys
available for 3,000 foot
increments of altitude.
Appendices
Off
Additional Features
Shows the previous level
of Turbulence altitude
softkeys.
Automatic Flight Control
System
PREV
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
329
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Flight Instruments
Next
Engine Indication System
Legend
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Back
Shows the next level of
Icing weather product
softkeys.
Enables/disables the
SiriusXM Weather
Legends Window. Softkey
available for selection
when at least one
SiriusXM Weather product
is enabled.
Returns to the secondlevel softkeys.
AIREPS
Enables/disables the
AIREPs weather product
overlay.
PIREPS
Enables/disables the
PIREPs weather product
overlay.
County
Enables/disables the
County Warnings weather
product overlay.
Returns to the first level
softkeys.
Back
Hazard Avoidance
Description
Automatic Flight Control
System
Table 6-4 SiriusXM Weather Softkeys
Level 2
Level 3
Description
PRECIP
Enables/disables the Precipitation weather
product overlay.
IR SAT
Enables/disables the infrared Satellite
weather product overlay.
SIG/AIR
Enables/disables the SIGMET/AIRMET
weather product overlay.
METAR
Enables/disables the graphical METAR
weather product overlay.
Legend
Enables/disables the Connext Weather
Legends Window. Softkey available for
selection when at least one Connext
Weather product is enabled.
More WX
Displays second-level Connext Weather
product softkeys.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Level 1
330
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Level 2
Level 3
Description
Wind
PREV
Shows the previous level of winds aloft
altitude softkeys.
Softkeys
available for
selecting winds
from the Surface
to 42,0000 feet
Enables/disables the Winds Aloft weather
product for the surface (SFC) through
42,000 feet. Softkeys available for 3,000
foot increments of altitude.
Next
Back
Enables/disables the Connext Weather
Legends Window. Softkey available for
selection when at least one Connext
Weather product is enabled.
Returns to the second-level softkeys.
Back
Hazard Avoidance
Enables/disables the PIREPs weather
product overlay.
PIREPs
Returns to the first level softkeys.
Table 6-5 Garmin Connext Weather Softkeys
Level 2
Description
Cycles through NEXRAD display modes:
NEXRAD (annunciator disabled): No
NEXRAD shown.
US: Displays NEXRAD for Continental US
(CONUS).
RGNL: Displays regional NEXRAD data.
US/RGNL: Displays regional NEXRAD data
where available, and CONUS NEXRAD
data in other coverage areas.
SIG/AIR
Enables/disables the SIGMET/AIRMET
weather product overlay.
METAR
Enables/disables the METAR weather
product overlay.
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Index
Enables/disables the Infrared Satellite
weather product overlay.
Appendices
IR SAT
Additional Features
NEXRAD
or
US
or
RGNL
or
US/RGNL
Level 3
Automatic Flight Control
System
Level 1
Flight Management
Legend
Shows the next level of winds aloft
altitude softkeys.
Audio Panel and CNS
Disables the Winds Aloft weather product
overlay.
Engine Indication System
Off
Flight Instruments
Displays third level softkeys for enabling/
disabling the Winds Aloft weather
product and selecting a winds aloft
altitude.
System Overview
Level 1
331
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Level 2
Level 3
Description
Legend
Enables/disables the Connext Weather
Legends Window. Softkey available for
selection when at least one Connext
Weather product is enabled.
More WX
Displays second-level Connext Weather
product softkeys.
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
Level 1
Displays third level softkeys for enabling/
disabling the Winds Aloft weather
product and selecting a winds aloft
altitude.
Wind
Audio Panel and CNS
PREV
Off
Flight Management
Softkeys
available for
selecting winds
from the Surface
to 42,0000 feet
Hazard Avoidance
Next
Legend
Automatic Flight Control
System
Back
Shows the previous level of winds aloft
altitude softkeys.
Disables the Winds Aloft weather
product overlay.
Enables/disables the Winds Aloft weather
product for the surface (SFC) through
42,000 feet. Softkeys available for 3,000
foot increments of altitude.
Shows the next level of winds aloft
altitude softkeys.
Enables/disables the Connext Weather
Legends Window. Softkey available for
selection when at least one Connext
Weather product is enabled.
Returns to the second-level softkeys.
Enables/disables the PIREPs weather
product overlay.
PIREPs
Back
Returns to the first level softkeys.
Additional Features
Table 6-6 FIS-B Weather Softkeys
The Weather Data Link Page can display a legend for each enabled weather product.
Viewing legends for displayed weather products on the Weather Data Link Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
Appendices
2) Press the Legend Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
Index
b) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
332
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
window.
System Overview
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the legends if more are available than fit in the
4) To remove the Weather Legends Window, press the Legend Softkey, the ENT or the
Flight Instruments
CLR Key, or press the FMS Knob.
Setting up and customizing the Weather Data Link Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather Setup’, then press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Product Group 1’ or ‘Product Group 2’, and press
the ENT Key.
Audio Panel and CNS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
Engine Indication System
2) Press the MENU Key.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range
settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
changed settings.
The pilot can select a map orientation for the Weather Data Link Page, or choose to synchronize the
map orientation to the same orientation used on the Navigation Map Page.
Hazard Avoidance
Selecting a map orientation for the Weather Data Link Page:
Flight Management
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page with the
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
Automatic Flight Control
System
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather Setup’.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Group options.
5) If SiriusXM is the selected data link weather source, turn the small FMS Knob to
highlight the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key.
If FIS-B or Garmin Connext is the selected data link weather source, turn the large FMS
Knob to highlight the ‘Orientation ‘ field at the bottom of the Product Group 1 list.
Additional Features
Or:
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired map orientation: North up, Track up,
Appendices
HDG up, or SYNC, then press the ENT Key.
Restoring default Weather Data Link Page settings:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Index
2) Press the MENU Key.
333
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather Setup’, then press the ENT Key.
4) Press the MENUKey.
6) When finished, press the FMS Knob or press the CLR Key.
WEATHER PRODUCTS MAP OVERLAYS
Other PFD and MFD maps and pages can display a smaller set of data link weather products. The
following table shows which data link weather products can be displayed on specific maps, indicated
with a ‘+’ symbol.
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
5) Highlight the desired default(s) to restore (all or for selection) and press ENT Key.
Data Link
Weather
Product
PFD
MAPS
NEXRAD/
Radar
Precipitati
on
+
+
+
Echo Top
+
Infrared
Satellite
+
+
Cell
Movement
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
METARs
Flight
Plan
Pages
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Surface
Analysis &
City
Forecast
+
Freezing
Levels
+
Winds
Aloft
Nearest
Page
Group
+
SIGMETs/
AIRMETs
+*
+
+
+
County
Warnings
+
Cyclone
Warnings
+
Index
Appendices
+
Cloud Top
Data Link
Lightning
Hazard Avoidance
Navigatio Weather Weather Aux - Trip
n Map
Data Link Informati Planning
Page
Page
on Page
Page
334
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PFD
MAPS
Navigatio Weather Weather Aux - Trip
n Map
Data Link Informati Planning
Page
Page
on Page
Page
PIREPs
+
+
AIREPs
+
+
Turbulence
(TURB)
+
+
+
+
TFRs
+
+
+
+
+
+
TAFs
+
+
+
+
+
+
* Winds Aloft data is available inside the VSD when VSD is enabled on the Navigation Map Page.
Table 6-7 Weather Product Display Maps
Flight Management
Displaying Data Link Weather Products on the Navigation Map Page:
Audio Panel and CNS
No Radar
Coverage
Engine Indication System
+
Flight
Plan
Pages
Flight Instruments
Icing
Potential
Nearest
Page
Group
System Overview
Data Link
Weather
Product
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Press the softkey to enable/disable the desired weather product.
Hazard Avoidance
Showing/removing the weather legend on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
3) Press the Legend Softkey to show the weather legends window.
4) When finished, press the Legend Softkey again, or press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key
Additional Features
to remove the window.
The ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page also allows the pilot to select the maximum map range to display
weather products. If the pilot increases the map range beyond this selected maximum range, the
system removes the weather product from the map. The system uses this setting for all navigation
maps, including those displayed on the PFD.
Automatic Flight Control
System
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
Setting up and customizing weather data for the navigation maps:
Appendices
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key.
Index
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
335
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, range
settings).
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the
changed settings.
The system can also display data link weather information on the PFD navigation maps.
Displaying Data Link Weather products on the PFD:
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the desired weather product softkey(s) to enable/disable the display of data link
products on the PFD map.
On the MFD maps, the weather product icon and age appear automatically when a weather is
enabled and the range is within the maximum display limits. On PFD maps, this information is
available using the PFD softkeys.
Enabling/disabling the weather product icon and age display (PFD maps):
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
2) Press the Layout Softkey.
3) Press the WX LGND Softkey to enable/disable the weather product age, source, and
icon box display on PFD Maps.
The setup menus for the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page and the Weather Data Link Page control the
map range settings above which weather products data are decluttered from the display. If a map range
larger than the weather product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed
from the map. The page menus also provide an alternative to using the softkeys to enable/disable data
link weather product overlays on maps.
CONNEXT DATA REQUESTS
NOTE: Data requests are not applicable to the SiriusXM Weather or FIS-B Weather services.
The Connext Data Request Menu provides the pilot with the options to define the requested weather
coverage area(s), choose automatic weather update intervals (if desired), and the ability to send or cancel
weather data requests. A Request Status Window inside the menu shows the status of the Connext Data
Request.
Before a Connext Data Request can occur, a valid request coverage area must be defined from which all
currently available Garmin Connext Weather products will be retrieved. At a minimum, either the
aircraft’s present position or a waypoint (as part of a flight plan or entered directly in the ‘WAYPOINT’
coverage field) must be part of the request coverage area, otherwise the request status window indicates
‘INVALID COVERAGE AREA’ and the system will not allow a request to occur.
It is not necessary for a destination (based on an active flight plan), a flight plan, or waypoint to be
specified prior to enabling these coverage areas; however no weather data will be retrieved for these
option(s) until a flight plan or waypoint is provided, respectively.
336
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Figure 6-7 Weather Data Link Page Menu
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Figure 6-8 Connext Data Request Menu
Manually Requesting Garmin Connext Weather information:
Automatic Flight Control
System
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Connext Data Request’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
Key to show or hide a green check mark to select one of more of the following
coverage selections:
Present Position – Requests data based on current location.
•
Destination – Requests data based on the active flight plan destination (Direct-To
destinations excluded). See the Flight Management section for more information about
entering and activating flight plans.
Appendices
•
Additional Features
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired coverage option(s) and press the ENT
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
337
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
•
FPL – Requests data along an active flight plan, if one currently exists. Turn the small FMS
Knob to select the desired flight plan look-ahead distance option (or choose ‘Remaining
FPL’ to request weather data for the remainder of the flight plan), then press the ENT Key.
•
Waypoint – Requests data based on a waypoint (which may be off-route). Turn the large
and small FMS Knobs to enter a waypoint, then press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob highlight to the ‘Diameter / Route Width’ distance field and
Engine Indication System
turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired diameter and route width of the request,
then press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob until the ‘Send Request’ field is highlighted. Press the ENT
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Key to initiate the request immediately or press the FMS Knob to return to the Weather
Data Link (CNXT) Page without requesting weather data.
338
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Present Position Selected,
200 nm Diameter
Requested
Destination Selected,
200 nm Diameter
Requested
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Off-Route Waypoint
Selected, 200 nm Diameter
Requested
Appendices
During a Connext Data Request, the Request Status Window initially displays “Contacting Connext...”.
Once a connection is established, the Request Status Window displays “Receiving Wx Data... Time
Remaining:” with an estimated data transfer time (either minutes or seconds). If desired, the Connext
Data Request Menu may be removed while the data request is processing by pressing the FMS Knob; the
data request will continue to process in the background. Connext Data Requests typically take between
1 to 4 minutes to complete depending on the size of the selected weather coverage area, the amounts of
weather activity present, and the Iridium signal strength.
The system retrieves all available Garmin Connext Weather products within the selected coverage area
during an initial Connext Data Request, regardless of which products (if any) are currently enabled for
display. On subsequent requests, the system retains previously retrieved textual data (such as METARs
Additional Features
Figure 6-9 Garmin Connext Weather Data Request Results with Precipitation Data Displayed
Automatic Flight Control
System
Next 80 nm of Flight Plan
Selected, 200 nm Route
Width Requested
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
339
and TAFs) if it has not expired, while new textual weather data matching the current coverage area and
all graphical weather data is transferred to the aircraft during every data request.
At the completion of a successful weather data request, the Request Status Window indicates ‘OK’ if
the Connext Data Request menu is still within view.
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Cancelling a Connext Data Request in Progress:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ Page.
3) With ‘Connext Data Request’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Cancel Request’ field and press the ENT Key.
The request status box indicates ‘Request Cancelled’.
5) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
The flight crew can schedule Connext Data Requests to recur automatically. Automatic requests remain
enabled until the flight crew disables them, or an avionics power cycle occurs. The Request Status
Window indicates the number of minutes or seconds until the next automatic data request occurs.
NOTE: If automatic Connext Data Requests were enabled prior to the system entering
Reversionary Mode, the automatic weather data requests will continue in Reversionary Mode,
however the Connext Data Request Window and its associated options will not be available
in Reversionary Mode.
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
2) Press the MENU Key.
Hazard Avoidance
Enabling/disabling automatic Connext Data Requests:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
Automatic Flight Control
System
3) With ‘Connext Data Request’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Choose the desired weather coverage options.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Update Rate’ field. Then turn the small FMS
Additional Features
Knob to highlight the desired automatic update frequency (Off, 5 Min, 10 Min, 15 Min,
20 Min, 30 Min, 45 Min, or 60 Min), then press the ENT Key
6) The ‘Send Request’ field is highlighted and a countdown timer is displayed in the
‘Request Status’ Window based on the currently selected update rate. Press the ENT
Key to send an immediate Connext Data Request.
Appendices
Or:
Press the FMS Knob to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
WEATHER PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Index
The following is an overview of data link weather products the system can display.
340
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
NEXRAD (SIRIUSXM)
NOTE: Data link weather radar information cannot be displayed at the same time as relative
terrain, echo tops, icing, or turbulence data.
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
The National Weather Service (NWS) operates the WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation
RADar) system, an extensive network of 156 high-resolution Doppler radar systems. The NEXRAD
network provides centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and
selected overseas locations. The maximum range of a single NEXRAD site is 250 nm.
Individual NEXRAD sites supply the network with radar images, and the images from each radar
site may arrive at the network at different rates and times. Periodically, the weather data provider
compiles the available individual site images from the network to form a composite image, and
assigns a single time to indicate when it created the image. This image becomes the NEXRAD
weather product. Individual images--gathered from each NEXRAD site--differ in age, and are always
older than the displayed NEXRAD weather product age. The data provider then sends the NEXRAD
data to the SiriusXM Weather service, whose satellites transmit this information during the next
designated broadcast time for the NEXRAD weather product.
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the NEXRAD weather product, the
displayed weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the
current radar synopsis and may not depict the current weather conditions. The NEXRAD weather
product should never be used as a basis for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather regardless of the information it contains.
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Figure 6-10 Weather Data Link (XM) Page
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
341
Index
For radar sites in the United States, the NEXRAD weather product shows a composite reflectivity
image. This shows the highest radar energy received from multiple antenna tilt angles at various
altitudes. For radar sites based in Canada, the NEXRAD weather product shows radar returns from
the lowest antenna tilt angle, known as base reflectivity. The display of the information is colorcoded to indicate the intensity of the echoes and the type of precipitation, if known.
Enabling/disabling NEXRAD weather information on the Weather Data Link (XM)
Page:
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
Engine Indication System
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
Enabling/disabling NEXRAD weather information on MFD navigation maps:
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
A mosaic of data from all the available NEXRAD radar sites is shown for the selected region (US or
Canada). The pilot can change the region on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
Changing the NEXRAD coverage region:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Enabling/disabling NEXRAD weather information on PFD maps:
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather Setup’ and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the NEXRAD Region datafield.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘US’ or ‘CNDA’ (Canada) and press the ENT Key.
The display of No Radar Coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or Echo Tops is selected.
Areas where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not
being collected are indicated in gray shade of purple.
The system can animate a loop of NEXRAD information. The animated view is available on the
Weather Data Link (XM) Page, and on navigation maps with the exception of the HSI Map. Animation
begins after the system has received at least two recent NEXRAD images since the avionics power cycle.
When NEXRAD animation is enabled, a timeline appears in the upper-right corner of the map, except
for the PFD Inset Map. A pointer on the timeline indicates the relative position of the displayed frame of
animation, from oldest to newest. The NEXRAD weather product age corresponds to the displayed
frame. The system can show up to six frames of NEXRAD animation when the USA coverage option is
selected, and up to three frames of animation when Canada is selected.
Enabling/disabling animated SiriusXM NEXRAD on the Weather Data Link (XM)
Page:
Index
1) Press the Menu Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Weather Setup’ and press the ENT Key.
342
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Animation On/Off field.
System Overview
3) With ‘Product Group 1’ Selected, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the NEXRAD
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’, then press the ENT Key.
Flight Instruments
5) To remove the menu, push the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
Displaying Time-Lapse NEXRAD Animation on navigation maps:
1) Select the ‘Map — Navigation Map’ Page.
Engine Indication System
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ group and press the ENT Key.
Audio Panel and CNS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the NEXRAD Animation On/Off field.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘On’ or ‘Off’ and press the ENT Key.
7) To remove the menu, push the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
REFLECTIVITY
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the
NEXRAD display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates
to hazardous weather can be very complex.
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of
weather reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an
indication of the weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection,
while dry hail does not. Both wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z).
NEXRAD measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver
(designated by the letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
Additional Features
Appendices
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-11 SiriusXM NEXRAD Legend
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
343
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD (FIS-B)
The National Weather Service (NWS) operates the WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation
RADar) system, an extensive network of 156 high-resolution Doppler radar systems. The NEXRAD
network provides centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and select
overseas locations. The maximum range of a single NEXRAD site is 250 nm.
Individual NEXRAD sites supply the network with radar images, and the images from each radar
site may arrive at the network at different rates and times. Periodically, the weather data provider to
FIS-B compiles the available individual site images from the network to form a composite image, and
assigns a single time to indicate when it created the image. This image becomes the NEXRAD
weather product. Individual images--gathered from each NEXRAD site--differ in age, and are always
older than the displayed NEXRAD weather product age. The data provider then sends the NEXRAD
data to the FIS-B GBTs, which transmit this information during the next designated broadcast time
for the NEXRAD weather product.
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the NEXRAD weather product, the
displayed weather information contained within the product may be older than the current radar
synopsis and may not depict the current weather conditions. NEXRAD information should never be
used as a basis for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the
information it contains.
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
NOTE: The NEXRAD weather product cannot be displayed at the same time as terrain.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Boundary
of Regional
NEXRAD Data
Regional
NEXRAD
Weather Product
Icon and Age
Appendices
Additional Features
No radar coverage
within coverage
boundary
Regional
NEXRAD
Weather Product
enabled
Index
Figure 6-12 Regional NEXRAD Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
344
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Continental
USA NEXRAD
Weather Product
Icon and Age
System Overview
The FIS-B NEXRAD weather product may be displayed for a region around the GBT (higher
resolution, updated more frequently) or for across the continental United States (lower resolution,
updated less frequently). A combined version of both weather products is also available for display
on the same map. When the combined NEXRAD is selected, regional NEXRAD takes display
precedence where data is available, and continental US NEXRAD is displayed outside of the regional
NEXRAD coverage area.
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
No radar coverage
Hazard Avoidance
Regional
NEXRAD
Weather Product
enabled
Figure 6-13
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Figure 6-14 Weather Data Link (FIS-B)
Page Menu
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
345
Index
Figure 6-15 Weather Data Link (FIS-B)
Page Setup Menu
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying the NEXRAD weather product on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (FIS-B)’ Page.
2) Press the NXRD Softkey. Each selection cycles though a coverage option displayed on
Flight Instruments
the softkey in cyan (‘Off’, ‘US’, ‘REG’, or ‘All’).
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
Engine Indication System
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather Setup’ and press the ENT Key.
3) To enable/disable the display of NEXRAD informations, turn the small FMS Knob to
highlight the NEXRAD On/Off field.
a) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘On’ to enable the display of NEXRAD or ‘Off’
Audio Panel and CNS
to disable.
b) Press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Region’ field..
Flight Management
a) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following options: ‘CONUS’ for the
continental United States, ‘Regional’ for regional NEXRAD, or ‘Combined’ to show
regional NEXRAD where data is available, and continental NEXRAD outside of the
regional coverage area.
Hazard Avoidance
b) Press the ENT Key.
5) When finished, push the FMS Knob.
Displaying the FIS-B NEXRAD weather product on the Navigation Map Page:
Automatic Flight Control
System
1) Select the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Select the NEXRAD Softkey.
3) To change the type of NEXRAD displayed, press the MENU Key.
4) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
Additional Features
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group, then press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the NEXRAD Data Region field.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘CONUS’ (continental United States), ‘RGNL’
Appendices
(regional), or ‘Combined’, then press the ENT Key. This selection also affects display of
NEXRAD on the PFD Maps.
8) When finished, press the FMS Knob or press the CLR Key.
Displaying the FIS-B NEXRAD weather product on PFD maps:
1) Press the Map/HSI Softkey.
Index
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey to enable/disable the display of NEXRAD information.
346
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
The regional NEXRAD weather product coverage area varies, as it is determined by the data received
from ground-based sources. When the regional NEXRAD weather product is enabled, a white spiked
boundary encloses this area to indicate the geographic limits of the regional NEXRAD coverage being
displayed. The system shows composite radar data from all available NEXRAD sites inside of this
boundary area.
If the continental United States version of the NEXRAD weather product is shown (US Softkey
enabled), the coverage boundary is not shown on the map.
This data is composed of the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The display of
the information is color-coded to indicate the weather severity level. All weather product legends can be
viewed on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page. For the NEXRAD legend, select the Legend Softkey
when the NEXRAD weather product is enabled.
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
No Radar Coverage
Hazard Avoidance
Regional NEXRAD
Coverage Boundary
Figure 6-16 NEXRAD Weather Product Legend (FIS-B)
Additional Features
NOTE: If the system has not received all available NEXRAD weather data (such as during
initial FIS-B signal acquisition or in areas of marginal or poor signal reception), the system
may display areas of no radar coverage which are subsequently removed as radar data is
received. It may take up to approximately ten minutes to receive all FIS-B data, when
adequate reception is available.
Automatic Flight Control
System
The display of no radar coverage is enabled when NEXRAD is selected for display. Areas where radar
data is not currently available, has not yet been received, or is not being collected are indicated in gray
shade of purple.
PRECIPITATION (GARMIN CONNEXT)
Appendices
NOTE: Precipitation data cannot be displayed at the same time as terrain data.
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
347
Index
The Precipitation weather product provides radar precipitation information in selected radar
coverage areas. This information comes from individual weather radar sites and weather data sources
such as government agencies. Each radar site or source may provide weather data at differing rates
and times. Periodically, the Garmin Connext Weather service compiles the available information to
form a composite image, and assigns a single time to indicate when it created the image. This image
becomes the Precipitation weather product. Individual images--gathered from each radar site--differ
in age, and are always older than the displayed Precipitation weather product age.
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the Precipitation weather product,
the displayed weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the
current radar synopsis and may not depict the current weather conditions. The Precipitation weather
product should never be used as a basis for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather regardless of the information it contains.
Precipitation
Weather Product
Icon and Age
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Precipitation
Weather Product
enabled
Figure 6-17 Precipitation Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
Displaying Precipitation weather information:
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey (for PFD maps, press the Map/HSI or Map Opt Softkey).
This step is not necessary on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the PRECIP Softkey.
The system displays either base or composite radar imagery, depending on the region.
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Boundary of
weather data
request
Region
Radar Reflectivity Type
United States
Composite Reflectivity
Canada, Europe, Australia
Base Reflectivity
Index
The base reflectivity precipitation weather product shows the radar returns from the perspective of a
single antenna tilt angle. The composite reflectivity precipitation weather product shows the highest
348
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
radar energy received from multiple antenna tilt angles. The display of the information is color-coded
to indicate the intensity of the echoes and the type of precipitation.
All weather product legends can be viewed on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page. For the
Precipitation legend, press the Legend Softkey when Precipitation is selected for display.
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
No radar coverage
Boundary of weather
data request
REFLECTIVITY
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the
Precipitation display directly correlate to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to
hazardous weather can be very complex.
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of
weather reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an
indication of the weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while
dry hail does not. Both wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
The different radar echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). Weather
radars measure the reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by
the letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
Hazard Avoidance
The display of radar coverage is enabled active when Precipitation is selected for display. Areas where
precipitation radar coverage is not currently available or is not being collected are indicated in gray
shade of purple. A white boundary line depicting the selected coverage area of the Connext Data
Request encloses the precipitation data when this weather product is displayed.
Flight Management
Figure 6-18 Precipitation Weather Product Legend (Garmin Connext)
PRECIPITATION LIMITATIONS
Appendices
Radar images may have certain limitations:
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
349
•
Radar composite reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to determine precipitation
characteristics (wet hail vs. rain). For example, it is not possible to distinguish between wet snow,
wet hail, and rain.
•
An individual radar site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information
about storms directly over the site.
•
At smaller map ranges, individual blocks of radar data are viewable. Each block of radar information
represents approximately four square kilometers and depicts the highest level of reflectivity detected
within that area.
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-19 Garmin Connext Precipitation with a 10 NM Map Range
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed radar images:
•
Ground clutter
•
Spurious radar data
•
Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
•
Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
•
Metallic dust (chaff) from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
ECHO TOPS (SIRIUSXM)
NOTE: Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time as Cloud Tops or NEXRAD data is
displayed.
The Echo Tops weather product shows the location, elevation, and direction of the highest radar
echo. The highest radar echo does not indicate the top of a storm or clouds; rather it indicates the
highest altitude at which precipitation is detected. Information is derived from NEXRAD data.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Block represents
4 km2
350
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Figure 6-20 Echo Tops Weather Product
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
No Radar Coverage
Automatic Flight Control
System
Figure 6-21 Echo Tops Legend
Displaying Echo Tops information:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
Additional Features
2) Press the Echo Top Softkey.
CLOUD TOPS (SIRIUSXM)
NOTE: Cloud Tops and Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time.
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
351
Index
The Cloud Tops weather product depicts cloud top altitudes as determined from satellite imagery.
Appendices
NOTE: The broadcast rate for Cloud Tops is 30 minutes. As with all SiriusXM Weather
products, the product age becomes amber when it reaches half of the expiration time, which
is 60 minutes for Cloud Tops. Therefore, this weather product age may be amber during
routine operation.
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Figure 6-22 Cloud Tops Weather Product
Additional Features
Figure 6-23 Cloud Tops Legend
Displaying Cloud Tops information:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page with the FMS Knob.
DATA LINK LIGHTNING (SIRIUSXM, GARMIN CONNEXT)
NOTE: Lightning from a data link source cannot be displayed simultaneously on the same
map as information from an optional on-board lightning detection system.
Index
Appendices
2) Select the CLD Top Softkey.
352
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
The Data Link Light weather product shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground lightning
strikes. A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two-kilometer region. The exact
location of the lightning strike is not displayed.
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Lightning
Strikes
Audio Panel and CNS
Figure 6-24 SiriusXM Lightning Weather Product
Flight Management
To display the Lightning legend on the Weather Data Link Page, select the Legend Softkey when
Data Link Lightning is selected for display.
Hazard Avoidance
Figure 6-25 SiriusXM Lightning Legend
Automatic Flight Control
System
Displaying Data Link Lightning information on Weather Data Link Page:
1) Turn the FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM or CNXT)’ Page.
2) Press the XM LTNG or DL LTNG Softkey.
Displaying Data Link Lightning information on the Navigation Map Page:
Additional Features
1) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Press the XM LTNG or DL LTNG Softkey.
Appendices
Displaying Data Link Lightning on PFD Maps:
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Lightning Softkey.
3) Press the Datalink Softkey.
Index
4) When finished, press the Back Softkey.
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
353
CELL MOVEMENT (SIRIUSXM)
The Cell Movement weather product shows the location and movement of storm cells as identified
by the ground-based system. Cells are represented by yellow squares, with direction of movement
indicated with short, orange arrows.
Figure 6-26 Cell Movement Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
On the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, the Cell Movement weather product has a dedicated CEL
MOV softkey for enabling/disabling this weather product on this page.
NOTE: The Storm Cell base height is not available with the installed data link receiver. the
Storm Cell base height is displayed as 0 feet when the Map Pointer selects a storm cell.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Additional Features
Figure 6-27 Cell Movement Legend
Displaying Cell Movement information on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page using the FMS Knob.
Index
Appendices
2) Select the Cell MOV Softkey.
For navigation maps, the pilot can enable/disable the Cell Movement weather product using the
NEXRAD Softkey. For this to occur, the pilot must first enable the ‘Cell Movement’ option in the
Map Settings menu of the Navigation Map Page.
After the ‘Cell Movement’ option is set to ‘On’, refer to the previous procedures for enabling/
disabling the NEXRAD weather product to control both products simultaneously on navigation maps
using the NEXRAD Softkey.
354
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
Setting up the system to display Cell Movement with NEXRAD on navigation
maps:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
Flight Instruments
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Weather’ and press the ENT Key.
set to ‘On’, Cell Movement is enabled/disabled with the NEXRAD weather product on
navigation maps. When set to ‘Off’, Cell Movement is not displayed on navigation
maps.
INFRARED SATELLITE (GARMIN CONNEXT)
The Infrared Satellite (IR SAT) weather product depicts cloud top temperatures from satellite
imagery. Brighter cloud top colors indicate cooler temperatures occurring at higher altitudes.
Audio Panel and CNS
6) When finished, push the FMS Knob or CLR Key to remove the menu.
Engine Indication System
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to ‘On’ or ‘Off’ for the Cell Movement menu option. When
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Figure 6-28 Infrared Satellite on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
355
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-29 Infrared Satellite Legend
Audio Panel and CNS
Displaying Infrared Satellite Information:
1) Select the ‘Map — Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ Page.
2) Press the IR SAT Softkey.
SIGMET (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMET (AIRmen’s METeorological
Information) are issued for potentially hazardous weather. A Convective SIGMET is issued for
hazardous convective weather such as severe or widespread thunderstorms. A localized SIGMET is a
significant weather condition occurring at a localized geographical position.
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
SIGMETS AND AIRMETS
Automatic Flight Control
System
NOTE: If SiriusXM Weather is the active data link weather source and a GDL 69A SXM
receiver installed, the SIGMET and AIRMET weather products are not available unless at least
one SIGMET or AIRMET has been received. The weather product age indicates ‘N/A’ when no
SIGMET or AIRMET is available.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
NOTE: For Garmin Connext Weather only, the entire SIGMET or AIRMET is shown on the
map as long as any portion of it is issued within the selected coverage area of the Connext
Data Request.
356
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
AIRMET for Icing
Flight Instruments
AIRMET for IFR
Conditions
Engine Indication System
AIRMET for
Turbulence
AIRMET for
Mountain
Obscuration
Audio Panel and CNS
Figure 6-30 SIGMET/AIRMET Weather Product
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Sample SIGMET Text
SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
Figure 6-31 SIGMET/AIRMET Full Text and Legend
Automatic Flight Control
System
Displaying SIGMETs and AIRMETs:
1) Select the ‘Map- Weather Data Link (XM or CNXT or FIS-B)’ Page.
2) Press the SIG/AIR Softkey.
Additional Features
3) To view the text of the SIGMET or AIRMET, press the Joystick and move the Map
Pointer over the icon.
4) Press the ENT key.
METARS AND TAFS
Appendices
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure as reported for METARs is given in hectopascals (hPa), except
for in the United States, where it is reported in inches of mercury (in Hg). Temperatures are
reported in Celsius.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
357
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed navigation database service
area.
METARs (METeorological Aerodrome Reports) typically contain information about the
temperature, dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric
pressure at an airport or observation station. They can also contain information on precipitation
amounts, lightning, and other critical data. METARs reflect hourly observations; non-routine updates
include the code “SPECI” in the report. METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide
them.
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-32 METAR Information on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
TAFs (Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts) are weather predictions for specific airports within a 24hour period, and may span up to 36 hours. TAFs typically include forecast wind, visibility, weather
phenomena, and sky conditions using METAR codes.
METAR and TAF text are displayed on the Weather Information Page. METAR and TAF data is
displayed first in a decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the original text may contain
additional information not found in the decoded version.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Original METAR text
for selected METAR
symbol
358
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
Flight Instruments
METAR Text
Engine Indication System
TAF Text
Audio Panel and CNS
Figure 6-33 METAR and TAF Information on the Weather Information Page
Flight Management
To display the METAR legend on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, select the Legend Softkey
when METARs are enabled for display. The METAR flag color is determined by the information in
the METAR text. The system displays a gray METAR flag when the system cannot determine the
METAR category based on the information available.
Hazard Avoidance
Displaying METAR and TAF text on the MFD:
Additional Features
The system also shows METAR flags and their associated text on the Active Flight Plan Page on the
MF.D. The system shows a METAR flag next to waypoints in the flight plan with an available
METAR.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Figure 6-34 METAR Flag Legend
1) On the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM or FIS-B or CNXT)’ Page, press the METAR
Softkey.
Appendices
2) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired airport.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with METAR and TAF text.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
359
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. METAR
text must be completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link Page.
Flight Instruments
Or:
1) Select the Weather Information Page.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
Engine Indication System
b) Select the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.
Audio Panel and CNS
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. Note that
the METAR text must be completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF
text.
Displaying original METAR text on the Active Flight Plan Page:
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
1) Select the ‘FPL - Active Flight Plan’ Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight a waypoint with an available METAR (indicated
with a METAR flag next to it). The METAR text will appear in the ‘Selected Waypoint
Weather’ Window below.
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor or press the FPL Key to exit
the Active Flight Plan Page.
Original METAR text is also accessible on navigation maps displaying METAR flags. When the map
pointer is panned over a METAR flag, the METAR text is shown in a box near the flag.
Displaying original METAR text information on the PFD Inset Map:
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
Additional Features
2) Press the METAR Softkey.
3) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired METAR flag. Original METAR text appears on
the map.
4) When finished, press the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer.
Surface Analysis and City Forecast information is available for current and forecast weather
conditions. Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24, 36, and 48 hours.
Index
Appendices
SURFACE ANALYSIS AND CITY FORECAST (SIRIUSXM)
360
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Figure 6-35 Surface Analysis and City Forecast Weather Product
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Figure 6-36 Surface Analysis and City Forecast Legend
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
361
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying Surface Analysis and City Forecast information:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
3) Press the SFC Softkey.
4) Press the softkey for the desired forecast time: Current, 12 HR, 24 HR, 36 HR, or 48
HR. The SFC Softkey label changes to show the forecast time selected.
Or:
Press the Off Softkey to disable the display of the weather product.
FREEZING LEVEL (SIRIUSXM)
The Freezing Level weather product shows the color-coded contour lines for the altitude and
location at which the first isotherm is found. When no data is displayed for a given altitude, the data
for that altitude has not been received, or is out of date and has been removed from the display. New
data appears when it becomes available.
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
Index
Appendices
Figure 6-37 Freezing Level Weather Product
362
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Figure 6-38 Freezing Level Legend
Audio Panel and CNS
Displaying Freezing Level information:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
WINDS ALOFT
Hazard Avoidance
The Winds Aloft weather product shows the forecast wind speed and direction at the surface and
at selected altitudes. Altitude can be displayed in 3000-foot increments beginning at the surface up
to 42,000 feet MSL.
If the FIS-B option is installed and FIS-B is the active data link weather source, the Winds Aloft
weather product also displays temperatures aloft next to the winds aloft arrows on the Weather Data
Link (FIS-B) Page.
Flight Management
3) Press the FRZ LVL Softkey.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Index
Figure 6-39 Winds Aloft Weather Product
363
Figure 6-40 Winds Aloft Legend
Headwind and tailwind components aloft are available inside the Vertical Situation Display (VSD)
on the Navigation Map Page when the SirusXM or Garmin Connext Weather service is the active
data link weather source. The displayed components are relative to current aircraft altitude and
track, but not to aircraft speed.
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Winds Aloft Data Age
Wind Component
Velocity and Direction
Arrows
Altitude Scale
Figure 6-41 Navigation Map Page with Winds Aloft Information on the VSD
Arrows pointing to the left indicate headwind components; tailwind component arrows point to
the right, as shown in the table.
Headwind Symbol
Tailwind Symbol
Headwind/Tailwind Component
None
None
Less than 5 knots
Appendices
5 knots
10 knots
50 knots
Index
Table 6-8 VSD Headwind/Tailwind Component Symbols
364
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
Displaying the Winds Aloft weather product:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
4) Press a softkey for the desired altitude level: SFC (surface) up to 42,000 feet. Press the
Enabling/disabling the Vertical Situation Display (containing winds aloft data):
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
Engine Indication System
Next or Prev Softkey to cycle through the altitude softkeys. The Wind Softkey label
changes to reflect the altitude selected.
Flight Instruments
3) Press the Wind Softkey.
Audio Panel and CNS
3) Press the Inset Softkey.
4) Press the VSD Softkey to enable/disable the Vertical Situation Display.
Or:
b) Press the MENU Key.
c) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show VSD’ or ‘Hide VSD’ and press the ENT Key.
Hazard Avoidance
Enabling/disabling winds aloft data display for the VSD:
Flight Management
a) Select the Navigation Map Page.
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
Automatic Flight Control
System
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘VSD’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Winds on/off field.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
Additional Features
7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the
changed settings.
COUNTY WARNINGS (SIRIUSXM)
Appendices
The County warning weather product provides specific public awareness and protection weather
warnings from the National Weather Service (NWS). This can include information on tornadoes,
severe thunderstorms, and flood conditions.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
365
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Engine Indication System
Thunderstorm
Warning
Additional
Information
on Flood
Warning
Selected
with Map
Pointer
Audio Panel and CNS
Flood
Warnings
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Figure 6-42 County Flood Warning
Figure 6-43 County Warning Legend
Displaying County Warning information:
Additional Features
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
2) Press the More WXSoftkey.
3) Press the County Softkey.
The Cyclone weather product shows the current location of cyclones (hurricanes), tropical storms,
and their projected tracks. The system displays the projected track information in the form of DD/
HH:MM.
NOTE: The Cyclone weather product is not available unless at least one cyclone or tropical
storm has been received. The weather product age indicates ‘N/A’ when no cyclone or
tropical storm has been received.
Index
Appendices
CYCLONE (SIRIUSXM)
366
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Cyclone
Audio Panel and CNS
Figure 6-44 Cyclone (Hurricane) Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Flight Management
Figure 6-45 Cyclone Legend
Hazard Avoidance
Displaying cyclone (hurricane) track information:
1) Select the ‘Map — Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
ICING (CIP & SLD) (SIRIUSXM)
Additional Features
The Current Icing Product (CIP) weather product shows a graphical view of the current icing
environment. Icing severity is displayed in four categories: light, moderate, severe, and extreme (not
specific to aircraft type). The CIP product is not a forecast, but a presentation of the current
conditions at the time of the analysis.
Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) icing conditions are characterized by the presence of relatively
large, super cooled water droplets indicative of freezing drizzle and freezing rain aloft. SLD threat
areas are depicted as magenta dots over the CIP colors.
Automatic Flight Control
System
3) Press the Cyclone Softkey.
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
367
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Flight Instruments
Supercooled Large
Droplet Threat
Light Icing Potential
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Moderate Icing
Potential
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Figure 6-46 Icing Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Automatic Flight Control
System
Figure 6-47 Icing Potential Weather Product
Displaying icing data:
1) Select the ‘Map — Weather Data Link (XM)’ Page.
3) Press the ICNG Softkey.
4) Press a softkey for the altitude level: 1,000 feet up to 30,000 feet. Press the Next or
PREV Softkey to cycle through the available altitude softkeys. The ICNG Softkey label
changes to indicate the icing altitude which was selected.
TURBULENCE (SIRIUSXM)
The Turbulence weather product identifies the potential for erratic movement of high-altitude air
mass associated winds. Turbulence is classified as light, moderate, severe or extreme, at altitudes
between 21,000 and 45,000 feet. Turbulence information is intended to supplement AIRMETs,
SIGMETs, and PIREPs.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
368
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Figure 6-48 Turbulence Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Figure 6-49 Turbulence Legend
Automatic Flight Control
System
Displaying turbulence information:
1) Select the ‘Map — Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
4) Press a softkey for the desired altitude: 21,000 up to 45,000 feet. Press the Next or
PREV Softkey to cycle though the available softkeys. The TURB Softkey label changes
to indicate the turbulence altitude selection.
Additional Features
3) Press the TURB Softkey.
PIREPS AND AIREPS
Appendices
NOTE: AIREPs are only available with the SiriusXM Weather service.
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
369
Index
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) are in-flight weather observations collected from pilots. When
significant weather conditions are reported or forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are
required to solicit PIREPs. A PIREP may contain adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight
visibility, icing conditions, wind shear, and turbulence. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or
Urgent (UUA).
Another type of PIREP is an Air Report (AIREP). Commercial airlines typically generate AIREPs.
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Engine Indication System
Urgent
PIREP
Audio Panel and CNS
AIREP
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Routine
PIREP
Selected
PIREP selected with
Map Pointer
Automatic Flight Control
System
Figure 6-50 PIREPs and AIREPs on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Additional Features
Decoded PIREP text
Appendices
Original full PIREP text
Index
Figure 6-51
370
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
The PIREP color is determined by the type (routine or urgent).
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Figure 6-52 PIREPs and AIREPs Legend
Displaying PIREP and AIREP text:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM or FIS-B or CNXT)’ Page.
3) Press the PIREPS or AIREPS Softkey. (Note the AIREPS Softkey is only available with the
SiriusXM Weather service.)
around the weather report when it is selected.
5) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with PIREP or AIREP text.
The data is first displayed in a decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the
original text may contain additional information not present in the decoded version.
Flight Management
4) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired weather report. A gray circle will appear
Audio Panel and CNS
2) Press the More WX Softkey.
Hazard Avoidance
6) Turn the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the PIREP or AIREP text.
7) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
information. Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service
Stations or Air Traffic Control.
Additional Features
Appendices
In the United States, the FAA issues Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) to designate areas where
flight is restricted. TFRs are issued to restrict flight for a variety of reasons including national
security, law enforcement, natural disasters, and large sporting events. TFRs may be issued at any
time, and TFR data displayed on the system is only intended to supplement official TFR information
obtained from Flight Service Stations (FSS), and air traffic control.
The age of TFR data is not shown; however, if TFR data is not available or has expired, the system
displays ‘TFR N/A’ in the upper-left corner of maps on which TFRs can be displayed.
Automatic Flight Control
System
TFRS
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
371
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Information for
selected TFR
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Figure 6-53 TFR Information on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Figure 6-54 Full TFR Text for a Selected TFR
Automatic Flight Control
System
Displaying TFR Data:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (XM or FIS-B or CNXT)’ Page or Navigation Map
Page.
2) Press the Joystick and pan the map pointer over a TFR to highlight it. The system
Additional Features
displays TFR summary information above the map.
3) Press the ENT Key. The system displays a pop-up menu.
4) If necessary, turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Review Airspaces’ and press the ENT Key.
The system displays the TFR Information window.
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page control the map range settings above which TFR data
is decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the TFR product map range setting is
selected, the TFR product data is removed from the map.
Maps other than the Navigation Map Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation
Map Page.
Index
Appendices
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to remove the TFR Information window.
372
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
Setting up and customizing TFR data for maps on which TFR data can be
displayed:
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
Flight Instruments
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aviation’ Group and press the ENT Key.
Engine Indication System
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll to the TFR product range settings.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (Off, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
changed settings.
FIS-B WEATHER STATUS
Flight Management
Additional information about the status of FIS-B weather products is available on the ‘Aux - ADS-B
Status Page’.
Audio Panel and CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Figure 6-55 Viewing FIS-B Weather Status on the ‘Aux — ADS-B Status' Page
FIS-B Weather Status: FISB Processing
Status Message
Description
Enabled
The FIS-B weather feature is enabled to
process and display FIS-B weather products.
Disabled
190–02183–01 Rev. A
The FIS-B weather feature is disabled
No FIS-B weather data received from the
transponder.
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
373
Index
--------------
Appendices
ADS-B Status Page Item
ADS-B Status Page Item
Weather Products:
AIRMET CONUS NEXRAD
METAR METAR
GRAPHICAL NOTAM/TFR
PIREP REGIONAL NEXRAD
SIGMET TAF WINDS/
TEMPS ALOFT
Available
Description
FIS-B weather data is available for display
for the weather product.
Not Available
FIS-B weather data is not available for the
weather product, and/or the system is not
receiving the FIS-B weather service.
Awaiting Data
The system is receiving the FIS-B weather
service, and is waiting to receive the
weather product from the FIS-B data
broadcast.
On the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) page, the pilot can enable/disable the FIS-B weather feature, which
includes all FIS-B weather products and related softkeys on various maps.
Viewing FIS-B status:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - ADS-B Status’ Page.
Enabling/disabling the FIS-B weather feature:
1) Select the ‘Map - Weather Data Link (FIS-B)’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Status Message
Table 6-9 Aux-ADS-B Status Page Messages for FIS-B Weather
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Enable FIS-B Weather’ or ‘Disable FIS-B
Weather’, and press the ENT Key. The system will not receive FIS-B weather information
when FIS-B Weather is disabled.
ABNORMAL OPERATIONS FOR GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER
If the system cannot complete a Connext Data Request, one or more messages will appear in the
Request Status Window.
Weather Request Status
Message
Auto requests inhibited Send
manual request to reset.
Description
The system has disabled automatic weather data requests due to
excessive errors. Automatic weather data requests have stopped.
Send a manual weather data request to resume automatic
updates.
Auto update retry: ## Seconds The system will attempt another automatic weather data request
after an error occurred during the previous request. Timer counts
down until the next automatic request occurs.
A general error has occurred. If the error persists, the system
should be serviced.
Index
Connext Comm Error [1]
374
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
Weather Request Status
Message
Description
A communications error has occurred. The system should be
serviced if this error persists.
Connext Comm Error [3]
A general error has occurred. If the error persists, the system
should be serviced.
Connext Comm Error [4]
This occurs if multiple automatic weather data requests have
recently failed, or an LRU is off-line.
Connext Comm Error [5]
This can occur if an LRU is off-line or not configured, or the Iridium
or Garmin Connext services are not accessible. Check Iridium
signal strength. If this error persists, the system should be serviced.
Connext Comm Error [6]
A communications error has occurred. It this error persists, the
system should be serviced.
Connext Comm Error [7]
A weather data transfer has timed out. Check Iridium signal
strength and re-send the data request.
Connext Comm Error [8]
A server error has occurred or invalid data received.
Connext Comm Error [9]
An error occurred while reading or writing data. If the error
persists, the system should be serviced.
Connext Login Invalid
There is a problem with the Garmin Connext registration. Contact
Garmin through the phone number listed at its website,
www.flygarmin.com.
Connext Server Temp Inop
The Garmin Connext Weather data server is temporarily out of
service, but is expected to return to service in less than 30 minutes.
Connext Server Inop
The Garmin Connext Weather data server will be out of service for
at least 30 minutes.
Invalid Coverage Area
The weather data request coverage area does not contain at least
one of the following: a waypoint, a flight plan, or a flight plan
destination. Verify at least one of the coverage options is enabled
(checked) and contains required criteria, then re-send the data
request.
Automatic Flight Control
System
No Connext Subscription
The system is not be currently subscribed to Garmin Connext
services or the access code is incorrect. Verify the access code.
Contact Garmin via the phone number listed on its website at
www.flygarmin.com..
Additional Features
Reduce Request Area
The size of the received weather data has exceeded system
memory limits. Reduce the size of the coverage area and issue
another Connext Data Request to ensure all available weather data
has been received.
Request Canceled
The user has cancelled a Connext Data Request.
Request Failed - Try Again
The weather data request timed-out. Re-send data request.
Flight Instruments
Connext Comm Error [2]
Audio Panel and CNS
Hazard Avoidance
Appendices
Index
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Flight Management
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Engine Indication System
Table 6-10 Abnormal Garmin Connext Data Request Status Messages
375
When the system is operating in Reversionary Mode, only those weather products which can be
displayed on the PFD maps will be available for display. f manual Connext Data Requests were enabled
prior to entering Reversionary Mode, no new weather data will be retrieved while operating in
Reversionary Mode. If automatic Connext Data Requests were enabled prior to Reversionary Mode
operation, the system will continue the automatic data requests in Reversionary Mode (provided
automatic requests have not been inhibited due to a system error).
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
376
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
6.3 STORMSCOPE
The system can display L-3 WX-500 Stormscope lightning detection system information on the
Stormscope Page, and as an overlay on navigation maps. The system uses the symbols shown in the
following table to depict lightning strikes and cells based on the age of the information.
Audio Panel and CNS
Lightning Age
Engine Indication System
NOTE: Stormscope lightning information cannot be displayed simultaneously on the same
map as lightning information from data link lightning sources.
Flight Instruments
WARNING: Do not rely on information from the lightning detection system display as the
sole basis for hazardous weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may cause
the system to display inaccurate or incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the
lightning detection system manufacturer for detailed information about the system.
Symbol
Strike is less than 6 seconds old
Strike is between 6 and 60 seconds old
Flight Management
Strike is between 1 and 2 minutes old
Strike is between 2 and 3 minutes old
Table 6-11 Lightning Age and Symbols
On the Stormscope Page, lightning information can be displayed at the ranges of 25 NM, 50 NM,
100 NM, and 200 NM.
Hazard Avoidance
USING THE STORMSCOPE PAGE
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
377
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Stormscope Mode
Lightning Strike
Rate Per Minute
Stormscope Navigation Map
Overlay Enabled Icon
Flight Management
Figure 6-56 Stormscope Page with Lightning Information
Adjusting the Stormscope Map Range:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
Hazard Avoidance
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Stormscope Page.
3) Turn the Joystick clockwise to increase the map range or counter-clockwise to decrease
the map range.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Selecting ‘cell’ or ‘strike’ mode on the Stormscope Page:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Select the Mode Softkey. The Cell and Strike Softkeys are displayed.
3) Press the Cell Softkey to display cell data or press the Strike softkey to display strike
Additional Features
data. ‘Cell’ or ‘Strike’ is annunciated in the mode box in the top-right corner of the
Stormscope Page.
4) Press the Back Softkey to return to the top level softkeys for the Stormscope Page.
Or:
Appendices
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Stormscope Page Menu. Either ‘Cell Mode’ or
‘Strike Mode’ is highlighted in cyan to indicate the mode to be selected.
3) Press the ENT Key to select the highlighted mode and remove the menu. To remove the
Index
menu without changing the modes, press the MENU Key or the CLR Key, or push the
FMS Knob.
378
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Flight Instruments
The pilot can overlay Stormscope lightning information on navigation maps. When the overlay is
enabled, and the map range is within the maximum map range setting limits to display Stormscope
lightning, a Stormscope icon appears on the map. On the Navigation Map Page, the selected
Stormscope mode and strike rate appear in the upper-right corner of the map. The Navigation Map
Page also has menus for selecting the Stormscope mode, and for selecting the maximum map range to
display lightning symbols for navigation maps.
System Overview
ADDITIONAL STORMSCOPE DISPLAYS
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Stormscope Mode
Lightning Strike
Rate Per Minute
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Stormscope Navigation Map
Overlay Enabled Icon
Figure 6-57 Navigation Map Page with Stomscope Overlay Enabled
Automatic Flight Control
System
Displaying Stormscope information on MFD navigation maps:
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
2) Press the STRMSCP Softkey.
Setting up Stormscope options on the Navigation Map Page:
Additional Features
1) On the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the group selection window. Turn the small FMS
Knob to select ‘Weather’, then press the ENT Key.
Appendices
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight and move among the following selections:
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
379
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
•
Stormscope maximum display range – Selects the maximum map range to display
Stormscope symbols. Stormscope data is removed when a map range greater than this
value is selected.
•
Stormscope Mode – Selects the Cell or Strike mode of lightning activity. Cell mode
identifies clusters or cells of electrical activity. Strike mode indicates the approximate
location of lightning strikes.
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the menu.
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Stormscope On/Off field — Enables/disables the display of Stormscope lightning symbols
on the map.
5) When an item is highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the option.
Displaying Stormscope information on PFD maps:
1) On the PFD, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Lightning Softkey.
3) Press the STRMSCP Softkey.
STORMSCOPE ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
If heading input is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after the execution of each
turn. This is to ensure that the strike and/or cell positions are depicted accurately in relation to the
nose of the aircraft. Clearing Stormscope lightning on any map clears this information from all displays
on the system.
Manually clearing Stormscope lightning symbols from map displays:
1) Select the ‘Map — Stormscope’ Page.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
•
2) Press the Clear Softkey.
Or:
Additional Features
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Clear Lightning Data’, then press the ENT Key.
Or:
a) Select the ‘Map — Navigation Map’ Page.
Appendices
b) Press the MENU Key.
c) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Clear Stormscope™ Lightning’ then press the ENT
Index
Key.
380
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
6.4 TERRAIN DISPLAYS
NOTE: Terrain and obstacle alerting is not available north of 89º North latitude and south of
89º South latitude. This is due to limitations present within the Terrain database and the
system’s ability to process the data representing the affected areas.
Terrain Proximity
•
Terrain-SVT (included with the Garmin SVT option when the Terrain Awareness and Warning
System Class-B (TAWS-B) is not installed; refer to the Flight Instruments section for more
information about Garmin SVT.
•
TAWS-B (optional)
Valid 3-D GPS position
•
Valid terrain and obstacle databases
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
381
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Appendices
The terrain system uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government and other sources.
Terrain information is based on terrain elevation information in a database that may contain
inaccuracies. Individual obstructions, such as towers or power lines, may be shown if available in the
database. Garmin verifies the data to confirm accuracy of the content. However, the displayed
information should never be understood as being all-inclusive and data may still contain inaccuracies.
The terrain and obstacle databases used by the terrain system are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS
position and GSL altitude, the terrain system displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and
Additional Features
•
Automatic Flight Control
System
The installed terrain system provides color indications on map displays when terrain or obstacles,
including certain power lines, are within a certain altitude threshold from the aircraft. Terrain-SVT and
TAWS-B furthermore provide advisory visual annunciations and voice alerts to indicate the presence of
threatening terrain or obstacles relevant to the projected flight path. This alerting capability is not
present in the Terrain Proximity feature. Compared to Terrain-SVT alerting, TAWS-B uses more
sophisticated algorithms to assess aircraft distance from terrain and obstacles. The TAWS-B system
includes more alerting capabilities than the Terrain-SVT system.
The terrain system requires the following for proper operation:
Hazard Avoidance
•
Flight Management
The terrain system increases situational awareness and aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain
(CFIT) and obstacles.
One of the following terrain systems is installed on this aircraft:
Audio Panel and CNS
NOTE: Terrain and obstacle alerting requires the Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B option. No terrain or
obstacle alerting occurs for the Terrain Proximity feature.
Engine Indication System
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain
database coverage area.
Flight Instruments
WARNING: Do not use terrain avoidance displays as the sole source of information for
maintaining separation from terrain and obstacles. Garmin obtains terrain and obstacle data
from third party sources and cannot independently verify the accuracy of the information.
obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the aircraft. Furthermore, for the Terrain-SVT or
TAWS-B systems, the system uses the GPS position and GSL altitude to calculate and “predict” the
aircraft’s flight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this manner, the TerrainSVT or TAWS-B systems can provide advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions.
Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local
atmospheric conditions. The most accurate baro-corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently
updating the altimeter setting to the nearest reporting station along the flight path. However, because
actual atmospheric conditions seldom match the standard conditions defined by the International
Standard Atmosphere (ISA) model (where pressure, temperature, and lapse rates have fixed values), it
is common for the baro-corrected altitude (as read from the altimeter) to differ from the GSL altitude.
This variation results in the aircraft’s GSL altitude differing from the baro-corrected altitude.
RELATIVE TERRAIN SYMBOLOGY
The terrain system uses colors and symbols to represent terrain and point obstacles (with heights
greater than 200 feet above ground level present in the databases relative to aircraft altitude. The
system dynamically adjusts these colors as the aircraft altitude changes, and after takeoff and landing.
While the aircraft is on the ground, the system displays relative terrain 400 feet or more above the
aircraft altitude using red, and terrain at less than 400 feet above aircraft altitude using black, as shown
on the On-Ground Legend. When the aircraft is in the air, the system displays relative terrain
information using red, yellow, green, and black, as shown on the In-Air Legend. As the aircraft
transitions from on-ground to in-air, or from in-air to on-ground, the display of relative terrain
momentarily fades into the corresponding colors. For Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B systems, if an alert
occurs, the relative terrain colors transition to the In-Air Legend if the On-Ground Legend was shown
in order to provide the pilot with the most information possible.
On-Ground Legend
In-Air Legend
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-58 Relative Terrain Legends
Index
The following figure shows the relative terrain coloring for the Terrain Proximity system.
382
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Terrain above or within 100 feet
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow
Terrain is between 100 feet and
1000 feet below aircraft altitude
Lighted Obstacle
2000 ft
Flight Instruments
Red
System Overview
100 ft Threshold
Green Terrain is between 1000 feet and
2000 feet below aircraft altitude
Engine Indication System
Black Terrain is at least 2000 feet
below aircraft altitude
Figure 6-59 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain Proximity
The following figure shows relative terrain coloring for the Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B systems.
100 ft Threshold
Terrain above or within 100 feet
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow
Terrain is between 100 feet and
1000 feet below aircraft altitude
Lighted Obstacle
2000 ft
Green Terrain is between 1000 feet and
2000 feet below aircraft altitude
Flight Management
Red
Audio Panel and CNS
Projected Flight Path
Hazard Avoidance
Black Terrain is at least 2000 feet
below aircraft altitude
Figure 6-60 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B Systems
The following tables show the relative obstacle coloring used by the terrain systems.
Automatic Flight Control
System
NOTE: The Vertical Situation Display (VSD) Inset Window shows terrain at least 2000 feet
below the aircraft altitude as gray.
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
383
Unlighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL
Lighted Obstacle
> 1000’ AGL
< 1000’ AGL
> 1000’ AGL
Engine Indication System
Yellow point obstacle is
between the aircraft altitude to
within 250 feet below the
aircraft altitude
White point obstacle is more
than 250 ft below the aircraft
altitude
Audio Panel and CNS
Table 6-12 Relative Point Obstacle Symbols and Colors
Wire Obstacle
Wire Obstacle Location
Red wire obstacle is at or above the aircraft altitude
Flight Management
Yellow wire obstacle is between the aircraft altitude to
within 250 feet below the aircraft altitude
White wire obstacle is more than 250 ft below the
aircraft altitude
Hazard Avoidance
Table 6-13 Relative Wire Obstacles and Colors
Unlighted Wind
Turbine Obstacle
Lighted Wind
Turbine Obstacle
Wind Turbine Obstacle Location
Automatic Flight Control
System
Red wind turbine obstacle is at or above the
aircraft altitude
Yellow wind turbine obstacle is between the
aircraft altitude to within 250 feet below the
aircraft altitude
Additional Features
White wind turbine obstacle is more than 250 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Table 6-14 Relative Wind Turbine Obstacles and Colors
The Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B systems show potential impacts areas for terrain and obstacles using
yellow and red as shown in the following table.
Index
Appendices
Obstacle Location
Red point obstacle is at or
above the aircraft altitude
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
384
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TAWS-B Warning:
Terrain-SVT Warning:
Engine Indication System
or
Warning
Example Annunciation
Flight Instruments
or
Alert Type
System Overview
Potential Impact Area Examples
Caution
Audio Panel and CNS
Table 6-15 Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B Potential Impact Area with Annunciations
TERRAIN PAGE
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
The ‘Map - Terrain Proximity’, or ‘Map - Terrain-SVT’, or ‘Map - TAWS-B’ Page is specialized to show
terrain, and obstacle in relation to the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap.
This page is the principal page for viewing terrain information. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and
other NAVAIDs) can be enabled for reference.
For Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B systems only, this page also shows potential impact areas. If terrain or
obstacles (including wire obstacles) and the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect, the display
automatically adjusts to a map range if necessary to emphasize the display of the potential impact area.
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading, in which case
the orientation is track up. Map range is adjustable with the Joystick from 250 feet to 1000 nm, which
is indicated on the map range arc.
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
385
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
Black Terrain
(Terrain More than
2000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Yellow Terrain
(Caution - Terrain
Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Yellow Lighted Obstacles
(Between 100’ and 1000’
Below Aircraft Altitude)
Red Terrain
(Warning - Terrain
Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Annunciation Window
Figure 6-61 Terrain-SVT Page
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying the terrain page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
Hazard Avoidance
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Terrain Proximity/Terrain-SVT/TAWS-B Page.
Showing/hiding aviation information on the terrain page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
Automatic Flight Control
System
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice
dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
Showing/hiding aviation information on the terrain page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
Additional Features
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice
dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
Appendices
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key.
Index
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
386
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
•
Point Obstacle – Enables/disables the display of point obstacle data and sets maximum
range at which point obstacles are shown
•
Wire Obstacle – Enables/disables the display of wire obstacle data and sets maximum range
at which wire obstacles are shown
Flight Instruments
Terrain Display – Enables the display of relative (‘REL’) terrain data or select ‘Off’ to disable;
also sets maximum map range at which terrain is shown.
System Overview
•
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (On/Off, range
Engine Indication System
settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the
changed settings.
The ‘Map - Terrain Proximity’ or ‘Map - Terrain-SVT’ or ‘Map - TAWS-B’ Page is the principal map
page for viewing terrain information. Terrain and obstacle information can be displayed on the
following maps and pages:
Trip Planning Page
‘Map — Navigation Map’ Page
Flight Plan Page
Flight Management
PFD Maps
Audio Panel and CNS
ADDITIONAL TERRAIN DISPLAYS
Terrain Proximity/Terrain-SVT/TAWS-B Page
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
When relative terrain is shown on maps other than the terrain page, a relative terrain icon appears
on the map. A relative terrain legend appears with the icon on the Navigation Map Page. The legend
appears by itself on the terrain page.
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides controls for enabling/disabling the display of relative
terrain, point obstacles (such as towers), and wire obstacles (such as power lines). The setup menu
also controls the map range settings above which terrain and obstacle data are decluttered from the
display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map.
For terrain data, the enable/disable function applies only to the MFD, while the maximum range
setting also affects the PFD maps.
The pilot can display relative terrain information independently of point or wire obstacle
information; however, obstacles for which Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B warnings and cautions are issued
are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within the setting limit.
Additional information about obstacles can be displayed by panning over the display on the map.
The map panning feature is enabled by pressing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning
the Joystick. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map
Pointer.
Maps besides the terrain page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page. The
maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the
Navigation Map.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
387
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
VERTICAL SITUATION DISPLAY (VSD) TERRAIN
The system offers a Vertical Situation Display (VSD), which includes a profile of terrain and obstacles
in an inset window on the bottom of the Navigation Map Page. Although the VSD does not display
Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B alerts and potential impact areas, the VSD does use many of the same colors and
symbols as these systems to depict relative terrain and obstacles within the VSD.
Enabling/disabling the Vertical Situation Display (VSD):
Engine Indication System
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
3) Press the Inset Softkey.
4) Press the VSD Softkey to enable/disable the VSD.
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show VSD’ or ‘Hide VSD’ (choice dependent on
current state) and press the ENT Key.
VSD DISPLAY
The same controls which enable/disable the display of relative terrain and obstacles on the
Navigation Map Page also control the display of this information in the VSD.
When the VSD is enabled, terrain and obstacles in the VSD will be shown if the aircraft altitude is
low enough or the VSD altitude range is high enough for the terrain to be in view (absolute terrain
will be shown in gray if the TER Softkey is selected off on the Navigation Map Page).
The depicted terrain profile represents an approximate forward-looking contour of the terrain
based upon the highest reported terrain elevations, measured at intervals defined by the terrain
database resolution, within a predefined width along the aircraft track between the aircraft present
position and the end of the map range. The predefined width is determined by the flight phase, as
annunciated on the HSI, and is widest during enroute or oceanic phases.
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Or:
Flight Phase
Total VSD Width
Approach
0.6 NM
Departure
0.6 NM
Terminal
2.0 NM
Enroute
4.0 NM
Oceanic
4.0 NM
Index
Table 6-16 VSD Terrain Width Varies According to Flight Phase
The forward looking swath of terrain is based on the selected VSD Mode, annunciated in the topleft corner of the VSD Inset Window. In Flight Plan Mode, the contour follows the active flight plan,
and if no active flight plan is present, the VSD Inset Window displays ‘Flight Plan Not Available’. In
388
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
Track Mode, the contour is based on the aircraft ground track. In Auto Mode, the contour is based
on the active flight plan, when available, otherwise, it is based on the ground track.
Selecting a VSD Mode:
2) Press the Inset Softkey.
3) Press the VSD Softkey, which displays the VSD mode in cyan. Each press of the softkey
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
selects a mode: FPL (Flight Plan), TRK (track), or Auto.
When the Navigation Map range is adjusted with the Joystick, the horizontal distance of the VSD is
adjusted to match the distance shown on the map range arc, down to one nautical mile. If the
Navigation Map range is adjusted below one nautical mile, the VSD range remains at one nautical mile.
When Navigation Map range is adjusted to remove altitude-correlated colored terrain data (as shown in
the Terrain Legend) or obstacles from the Navigation Map, these items are also removed from the VSD;
only an outline of the terrain will be displayed in black in the VSD Inset Window.
Flight Instruments
1) Select the Navigation MapPage.
Flight Management
Track Mode
Boundary enabled
Hazard Avoidance
VSD Mode
Altitude Scale
Automatic Flight Control
System
VSD Total Distance
Figure 6-62 VSD on the Navigation Map Page with Relative Terrain Information
Additional Features
Obstacles with heights greater than 200 feet AGL appear relative to aircraft altitude along the altitude
scale. The top of the obstacle symbol on the scale represents the obstacle’s height AGL. If the obstacle’s
height AGL is higher than can be represented by the obstacle symbol itself (e.g. for especially tall
obstacles), a vertical line appears below the obstacle symbol in order to depict the top of the obstacle
symbol at its height AGL, as shown in the following figure.
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
389
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Engine Indication System
Figure 6-63 VSD with Tall Obstacles
Customizing the Track Mode Boundary display on the ‘Map - Navigation Map’
Page:
Audio Panel and CNS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the ‘VSD’ group, then press the ENT Key.
Flight Management
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Track Mode Boundary ‘On’ or ‘Off’ field. Turn
the small FMS Knob if needed to change this setting.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the maximum map range to display the Track
Hazard Avoidance
Mode Boundary. Turn the small FMS Knob to select a maximum range, then press the
ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the
changed settings.
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B
software algorithms. Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B alerts typically employ a caution or a warning alert
severity level, or both. When an alert is issued, visual annunciations are displayed and voice alerts are
simultaneously issued.
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The terrain alert annunciation
appears to the left of the Selected Altitude box on the PFD, and bottom on the MFD. If the terrain page
is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the MFD. To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
•
Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
•
Press the ENT Key (accesses the ‘Map - Terrain-SVT’ or ‘Map - TAWS-B’ Page)
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
TERRAIN-SVT AND TAWS-B ALERTING DISPLAYS
390
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Pop-up
Alert
System Overview
Alert Annunciation
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Figure 6-64 TAWS-B Alert Annunciations
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Terrain Display Enabled Icon
Terrain Legend
Additional Features
Alert Annunciation
Figure 6-65 TAWS-B Page with Alert Annunciation
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
391
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Alert Type
Appendices
MFD Pop-Up Alert
(except TerrainSVT Page)
Voice Alert
Reduced Required
Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required
Line Clearance (RLC)
Warning
“Warning; Wire, Wire”
Imminent Terrain
Impact Warning (ITI)
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required
Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle
Impact Warning (IOI)
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Reduced Required
Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Line Impact
Caution (ILI)
“Caution, Wire, Wire”
Imminent Terrain
Impact Caution (ITI)
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required
Line Clearance
Caution (RLC)
“Caution, Wire, Wire”
Reduced Required
Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle
Impact Caution (IOI)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Table 6-17 Terrain-SVT Alerts Summary
Alert Type
Index
PFD/Terrain—
SVT Page Alert
Annunciation
PFD/TAWS—B Page MFD Pop-Up
Alert Annunciation Alert (except
TAWS-B Page)
Voice Alert
Excessive Descent
Rate Warning (EDR)
“Pull Up”
Reduced Required
Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull
Up”
392
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PFD/TAWS—B Page MFD Pop-Up
Alert Annunciation Alert (except
TAWS-B Page)
System Overview
Alert Type
Voice Alert
Reduced Required
Line Clearance
Warning (RLC)
“Wire, Wire; Pull Up, Pull Up”
Imminent Terrain
Impact Warning (ITI)
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull
Up”
Reduced Required
Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up,
Pull Up”
Imminent Obstacle
Impact Warning (IOI)
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up,
Pull Up”
Reduced Required
Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)
“Caution, Terrain; Caution,
Terrain”
Imminent Terrain
Impact Caution (ITI)
“Caution, Terrain; Caution,
Terrain”
Required Reduced
Line Clearance (RLC)
Impact Caution
“Caution, Wire; Caution, Wire”
Imminent Line
Clearance Impact
Caution (ILI)
“Wire Ahead; Wire Ahead”
Reduced Required
Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution,
Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle
Impact Caution (IOI)
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution,
Obstacle”
Premature Descent
Alert Caution (PDA)
“Too Low, Terrain”
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
“Five-Hundred”
“Sink Rate”
Negative Climb Rate
Caution (NCR)
“Don’t Sink”
Appendices
Excessive Descent
Rate Caution (EDR)
Flight Management
None
Audio Panel and CNS
Altitude Voice Callout None
(VCO) “500”
Engine Indication System
“Wire Ahead; Pull Up, Pull Up”
Flight Instruments
Imminent Line Impact
Warning (ILI)
Table 6-18 TAWS-B Alerts Summary
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
393
FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE
The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) feature of Terrain-SVT or TAWS-B compares the
projected flight path as derived from GPS data with terrain features and obstacles from the terrain and
obstacle databases. The system issues FLTA alerts when the projected flight path conflicts with terrain
or obstacles.
The projected flight path is a calculated area ahead of, to the sides, and below the aircraft. The size of
the projected flight path varies based on factors including ground speed (the path ahead is larger when
the ground speed is higher), whether the aircraft is level, turning, or descending, and the proximity to
the nearest runway along the current track. As the aircraft approaches the runway, the projected flight
path becomes narrower until the system automatically disables FLTA alerts or the pilot manually
inhibits them.
There are two types of FLTA alerts, Reduced Required Terrain/Obstacle/Line Clearance
(RTC /ROC/RLC respectively) and Imminent Terrain/Obstacle/Line Impact (ITI/IOI/ILI respectively).
Level (FT)
Descending (FT)
800
Required
Clearance
(FT)
Required Terrain
Clearance (FT)
700
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
600
500
400
300
200
0
0
5
10
15
20
Distance From Runway (NM)
25
30
Figure 6-66 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
The system automatically disables FLTA alerts when the aircraft is less than 200 feet above the
destination runway elevation while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or the aircraft is between
runway ends.
INHIBITING FLTA ALERTING
The pilot can manually inhibit FLTA alerts. If TAWS-B is installed, PDA alerts are also inhibited with
FLTA alerts.
Terrain-SVT System
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
100
TAWS-B System
Figure 6-67 FLTA Inhibited Annunciations for Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B
Inhibiting/enabling FLTA Alerting (Terrain SVT and TAWS-B only):
1) Select the terrain page.
Index
2) Press the Inhibit Softkey. FLTA alerting is inhibited when softkey annunciator is green.
394
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired inhibit or enable option, then press the
ADDITIONAL TAWS-B ALERTING
EXCESSIVE DESCENT RATE ALERT
6000
5500
5000
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
4500
4000
n: “S
io
Caut
3500
INK
”
RATE
Audio Panel and CNS
The purpose of theExcessive Descent Rate (EDR) alert is to provide notification when the aircraft
is determined to be closing (descending) upon terrain at a rate that is calculated to be excessive
relative to height above terrain. The following figure shows the parameters for the alert.
Engine Indication System
In addition to the FLTA alerting discussed previously, TAWS-B provides the following additional
types of alerts.
Flight Instruments
ENT Key.
3000
Flight Management
2500
2000
Warning: “PULL UP”
1500
1000
12000
10000
Descent Rate (FPM)
11000
8000
9000
7000
5000
6000
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
0
500
Hazard Avoidance
Figure 6-68 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria
PREMATURE DESCENT ALERTING
Automatic Flight Control
System
A Premature Descent Alert (PDA) is issued when the system detects that the aircraft is significantly
below the normal approach path to a runway.
PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is below 700 feet AGL within 15 nm of the destination
airport and ends when the aircraft is 0.5 nm from the runway threshold.
800
Additional Features
Height Above Destination (Feet)
700
600
500
400
300
PDA ALERTING AREA
200
100
Appendices
15
14
13
12
11
9
10
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
Distance to Destination (NM)
Figure 6-69 PDA Alerting Threshold
NEGATIVE CLIMB RATE AFTER TAKEOFF ALERT (NCR)
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
395
Index
The Negative Climb Rate (NCR) After Takeoff alert (also referred to as “Altitude Loss After
Takeoff”) provides alerts when the system determines the aircraft is losing altitude (closing upon
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
terrain) after takeoff. The voice alert “Don’t Sink” is given for NCR alerts, accompanied by visual
annunciations. NCR alerting is only active when departing from an airport and when the following
conditions are met:
•
Height above the terrain is less than 700 feet
•
Distance from the departure airport is 5 nm or less
•
Heading change from the departure heading is less than 110 degrees
Engine Indication System
NCR alerts can be triggered by either altitude loss or sink rate.
1000
Audio Panel and CNS
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
900
800
700
600
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
500
400
300
200
100
0
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
Flight Management
Altitude Loss (Feet)
Figure 6-70 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Altitude Loss
1000
Hazard Avoidance
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
900
800
700
600
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
500
400
300
100
0
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000
5500
6000
6500
7000
Sink Rate (FPM)
Figure 6-71 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Sink Rate
FIVE-HUNDRED VOICE ALERT
The purpose of the TAWS-B “Five-hundred” voice alert is to provide an advisory alert when the
aircraft descends to within 500 feet above the terrain or runway threshold. When the aircraft is
within 5 NM of an airport, the “Five Hundred” voice alert is based on the nearest runway threshold
elevation. When the aircraft is more than 5 NM of the nearest airport, the “Five Hundred” voice alert
is based on the height above terrain (as determined by the GPS altitude and Terrain Database).
There are no display annunciations or pop-up alerts that accompany the voice alert.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
200
396
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
SYSTEM STATUS
TERRAIN-SVT
TERRAIN TEST
None
None
Single Aural Chime
Terrain Alerting Inhibited
None
None
No GPS Position
NO GPS
POSITION
“Terrain System Not
Available”*
Excessively degraded GPS
signal; or Out of database
coverage area
None
“Terrain System Not
Available”*
Terrain System Test Fail;
Terrain or Obstacle
database unavailable or
invalid; Invalid software
configuration; or System
audio fault
TERRAIN FAIL
“Terrain System Failure”
TERRAIN
DATABASE
FAILURE
None
System Test Passed
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
None
Hazard Avoidance
MFD Terrain or Obstacle
database unavailable or
invalid, and Terrain-SVT
operating with PFD Terrain
or Obstacle databases
None
Flight Management
System Test in Progress
Voice/Aural Alert
Audio Panel and CNS
PFD/Terrain-SVT Terrain-SVT Page
Page
Center Banner
Annunciation
Annunciation
Engine Indication System
Alert Type
Flight Instruments
At the beginning of an avionics power cycle, Terrain-SVT conducts a system test for its alerting
capabilities. An aural chime indicates a successful test; otherwise a voice alert and visual
annunciations indicate failure. Terrain-SVT continually monitors several system-critical items such as
database validity, hardware status, and GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available,
the system issues the voice alert “Terrain System Failure” along with the ‘TER FAIL’ alert
annunciation. Terrain-SVT requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical
accuracy minimums. Should the navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the
database coverage area, the annunciation ‘TER N/A’ is generated in the annunciation window and on
the ‘Map - Terrain-SVT’ Page. The voice alert “Terrain System Not Available” is generated. When
sufficient GPS signal returns and the aircraft is within the database coverage area, the voice alert
“Terrain System Available” is generated.
* “Terrain System Available” will be heard when sufficient GPS signal is received, or Terrain database
coverage area re-entered.
Appendices
Table 6-19 Terrain-SVT System Status Annunciations
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
397
TAWS-B
At the beginning of an avionics power cycle, TAWS-B conducts a system test for its alerting
capabilities. An aural chime indicates a successful test; otherwise a voice alert and visual
annunciations indicate failure. The pilot can also manually select a TAWS-B system test. The system
test option is unavailable when the ground speed exceeds 30 knots.
TAWS-B continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware
status, and GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the voice alert “TAWS System
Failure” is generated along with the ‘TAWS FAIL’ alert annunciation.
TAWS-B requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums.
Should the navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage
area, the system displays the ‘TAWS N/A’ annunciation, and issues the “TAWS Not Available” voice
alert. When the GPS signal integrity returns and the aircraft is within the database coverage area, the
system issues the voice alert, “TAWS Available”
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Alert Type
PFD/TAWS—B Page
Annunciation
TAWS—B Page
Center Banner
Annunciation
Voice/Aural Alert
TAWS TEST
None
None
Single Aural Chime
None
None
NO GPS
POSITION
“TAWS Not Available”*
Excessively degraded GPS
signal; or Out of database
coverage area
None
“TAWS Not Available”*
TAWS-B System Test Fail;
Terrain or Obstacle
database unavailable or
invalid; Invalid software
configuration; or System
audio fault
TAWS FAIL
“TAWS System Failure”
TERRAIN
DATABASE
FAILURE
None
Flight Management
System Test in Progress
System Test Passed
None
Terrain Alerting Inhibited
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
No GPS Position
Appendices
Additional Features
MFD Terrain or Obstacle
database unavailable or
invalid, and TAWS—B
operating with PFD
Terrain or Obstacle
databases
None
Index
Table 6-20 TAWS—B System Status Annunciations
398
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
6.5 TAS TRAFFIC
Appendices
The TAS surveillance system monitors the airspace within ±10,000 feet of own altitude. Under ideal
conditions, the TAS system scans transponder traffic up to 22NM in the forward direction. The range
is somewhat reduced to the sides and aft of own aircraft due to the directional interrogation signal
patterns. In areas of greater transponder traffic density, the on-board traffic system automatically
reduces its interrogation transmitter power (and therefore range) in order to limit potential
interference from other signals.
The system can display the symbols shown in the following table.
Additional Features
TAS SURVEILLANCE VOLUME AND SYMBOLOGY
Automatic Flight Control
System
When the traffic system is in Operating Mode, the system interrogates the transponders of other
aircraft in the vicinity while monitoring for transponder replies. The system uses this information to
derive the distance, relative bearing, and if reported, the altitude and vertical trend for each aircraft
within its surveillance range. The traffic system then calculates a closure rate to each intruder based on
the projected Closest Point of Approach (CPA). If the closure rate meets the threat criteria for a Traffic
Advisory (TA), the traffic system provides visual annunciations and voice alerts.
Hazard Avoidance
THEORY OF OPERATION
Flight Management
The optional Garmin GTS 800 is a Traffic Advisory System (TAS). The traffic system enhances flight
crew situational awareness by displaying traffic information for transponder-equipped aircraft. The
traffic system also provides visual annunciations and voice traffic alerts to assist in visually acquiring
traffic.
The traffic system is capable of tracking up to 45 intruding aircraft equipped with Mode A, C, or S
transponders in order to issue alerts if warranted. The system can display up to 30 aircraft with the
highest threat potential simultaneously. No TAS surveillance is provided for aircraft without operating
transponders.
Audio Panel and CNS
NOTE: Refer to the ADS-B Traffic discussion for more information about ADS-B traffic
displays.
Engine Indication System
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all
of the traffic information within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal
reception, and/or inaccurate information from other aircraft, traffic may be present but not
represented on the display.
Flight Instruments
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance
maneuvering. The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories
and does not under any circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see
and avoid other aircraft.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
399
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Symbol
Description
Traffic Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the
intruder aircraft track.
Flight Instruments
Traffic Advisory without directional information.
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range with directional
information. Displayed at outer range ring at proper bearing.
Engine Indication System
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range without directional
information. Displayed at outer range ring at proper bearing.
Proximity Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of
the aircraft track.
Audio Panel and CNS
Proximity Advisory without directional information.
Other Non-Threat traffic with directional information. Points in the direction
of the intruder aircraft track.
Flight Management
Other Non-Threat traffic without directional information.
Traffic located on the ground with directional information. Points in the
direction of the aircraft track. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B
is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
Non-aircraft ground traffic. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is
in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
Table 6-21 ADS-B Traffic Symbology with GTX 345R Transponder
If not equipped with an Automatic Dependent Surveillance - Broadcast (ADS-B) transponder, traffic
symbology will be displayed as in the following table:
Symbol
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Ground traffic without directional information. Ground traffic is only
displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the
ground.
Description
Traffic Advisory without directional information.
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range without directional
information. Displayed at outer range ring at proper bearing.
Appendices
Proximity Advisory without directional information.
Other Non-Threat traffic without directional information.
Index
Table 6-22 TAS Symbol Description with GTX 335 Transponder
400
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Vertical trend arrow
TA ALERTING CONDITIONS
A
Yes
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of
vertical and horizontal separation.
Or:
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of
horizontal separation and vertical separation is within
600 feet.
Or:
Intruder range is within 0.2 nm and vertical separation is
within 600 feet.
A
No
Intruder closing rate provides less than 15 seconds of
separation or intruder range is within 0.2 NM.
Index
TA Alerting Conditions
Appendices
Intruder Altitude
Available
Additional Features
Sensitivity
Level
Automatic Flight Control
System
The traffic system automatically reduces its TA sensitivity level to reduce the likelihood of nuisance
TA alerting during certain flight conditions. Level A (reduced) TA sensitivity normally applies when
the aircraft is less than 2,000 feet above ground level. If the system cannot determine this height, then
Level A TA sensitivity applies when the groundspeed is less than 120 knots. In all other conditions, the
system uses Level B (increased) sensitivity in order to determine TA threats.
Hazard Avoidance
If the intruding aircraft is providing ADS-B track information, a motion vector line extending beyond
the traffic symbol in the direction of the track may also be displayed when either absolute or relative
motion vectors are enabled; refer to the ADS-B Traffic discussion for more information.
Flight Management
Figure 6-72 Intruder Altitude and Vertical Trend Arrow
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Flight Instruments
Relative Altitude
190–02183–01 Rev. A
System Overview
A Traffic Advisory (TA), displayed as a amber circle or triangle, alerts the crew to a potentially
hazardous intruding aircraft, if the closing rate, distance, and vertical separation meet TA criteria. A TA
that is beyond the selected display range (off scale) is indicated by a half TA symbol at the edge of the
screen at the relative bearing of the intruder.
A Proximity Advisory (PA), displayed as a solid white diamond or triangle, indicates the intruding
aircraft is within ±1200 feet and is within a 6 nm range, but is still not considered a TA threat. A Nonthreat Advisory, shown as an open white diamond or triangle, is displayed for traffic beyond 6 nm that
is neither a TA or PA.
Relative altitude, when available, is displayed above or below the corresponding intruder symbol in
hundreds of feet . When this altitude is above own aircraft, it is preceded by a ‘+’ symbol; a minus sign
‘-’ indicates traffic is below own aircraft. The system displays the altitude vertical trend as an up/down
arrow (for speeds greater than 500 fpm in either direction) to the right of the intruder symbol.
401
Sensitivity
Level
Intruder Altitude
Available
TA Alerting Conditions
B
Yes
Intruder closing rate provides less than 30 seconds of
vertical and horizontal separation.
Or:
Intruder closing rate provides less than 30 seconds of
horizontal separation and vertical separation is within
800 feet.
Or:
Intruder range is within 0.55 nm and vertical separation
is within 800 feet.
B
No
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of
separation or intruder range is within 0.55 NM.
Table 6-23 TA Sensitivity Level and TA Alerting Criteria
TRAFFIC ALERTS
When the traffic system detects a new TA, the following occur:
•
The system issues a single “Traffic!” voice alert, followed by additional voice information about the
bearing, relative altitude, and approximate distance from the intruder that triggered the TA. For
example, the announcement “Traffic! 12 o’clock, high, four miles,” would indicate the traffic is in
front of own aircraft, above own altitude, and approximately four nautical miles away.
•
A ‘TRAFFIC’ Annunciation appears at the right of the airspeed tape on the PFD, flashes for five
seconds, and remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
•
The system displays the TA traffic on a PFD map. If a navigation map, such as the Inset Map or HSI
map was already shown on the PFD prior to the TA occurrence, the system automatically enables the
traffic overlay on the map if necessary in order to show the TA. If no map was shown on the PFD
prior to the TA, then the Traffic Inset Map is displayed on the PFD.
•
If the bearing of TA traffic cannot be determined, a yellow text banner will be displayed in the center
of the Traffic Map Page and in the lower-left of the PFD inset map instead of a TA symbol. The text
will indicate “TA” followed by the distance, relative altitude, and vertical trend arrow for the TA
traffic, if known.
A TA will be displayed for at least eight seconds, even if the condition(s) that initially triggered the TA
are no longer present.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
402
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
Traffic
Annunciation
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
Audio Panel and CNS
Figure 6-73 Traffic Annunciation on the PFD with Inset Traffic Map
Approximate Distance
(nm)
“One o’clock” through
“Twelve o’clock” or “No
Bearing”
“High”, “Low”, “Same Altitude” (if
within 200 feet of own altitude), or
“Altitude not available”
“Less than one mile”, “One
Mile” through “Ten Miles”,
or “More than ten miles”
Table 6-24 TA Descriptive Voice Announcements
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
The ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page shows surrounding traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current
position and altitude, without basemap clutter. It is the principal map page for viewing traffic
information. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Map range is
adjustable with the Joystick (up to 40 nm) as indicated by the map range rings.
The system annunciates the traffic mode and altitude display mode in the upper right corner of the
‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
Hazard Avoidance
Relative Altitude
Flight Management
Bearing
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
403
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TAS Operating Mode
Annunciation
Non-Threat
Traffic,
Altitude Not
Reported
Other Non-Threat
Traffic, 1000 below,
climbing
Traffic Advisory,
200’ above,
climbing
Traffic Display
Range Rings
No-bearing
Traffic Advisory,
4.0 nm away,
1100’ above,
descending
Non-Threat
Traffic with
ADS-B
Directional
Information,
6000’ Above,
Level
Traffic
Advisory OffScale, 400’
Below, Level
Figure 6-74 Traffic Map Page
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Press the Operate or TAS OPER Softkey to select Operating Mode.
4) Press the Standby or TAS STBY Softkey to select Standby Mode.
SYSTEM TEST
NOTE: Traffic surveillance is not available during the system test. Use caution when
performing a system test during flight.
The traffic system provides a system test mode to verify normal operation. The test takes
approximately ten seconds to complete. When the system test is initiated, a test pattern of traffic
symbols appears on the traffic maps.
If the aircraft has ADS-B In capability, the system announces “Traffic System Test”, and the test
pattern corresponds to the current aircraft heading. A climbing TA is shown to the west, level Other
Non-Threat traffic is shown to the northwest, and a descending Proximity Advisory is in the northeast,
relative to own aircraft. If the system test passes, the traffic system enters standby mode, and no traffic
failure annunciations are displayed on the traffic maps.
If the aircraft does not have ADS-B In capability, the test pattern is fixed and does not correspond to
the aircraft heading. If the system test passes, the system announces, “TAS System Test Passed”
404
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Test Mode
Annunciation
Flight Instruments
TAS Test Mode
System Overview
Otherwise the system announces, “TAS System Test Failed.” When the system test is complete, the
traffic system enters Standby Mode.
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Figure 6-75 System Test in Progress with Test Pattern
Testing the Traffic System:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
for the outer range ring. This ensures the full traffic test pattern is depicted on the map.
3) If the traffic system is in Operating Mode, press the Standby or TAS STBY Softkey.
4) Press the Test Softkey.
Automatic Flight Control
System
2) Turn the Joystick to adjust the map range to 2 NM for the inner range ring, and 6 NM
Additional Features
Or:
1) On the Traffic Map Page, press the MENU Key and turn the FMS Knob to highlight
‘Test Mode’.
2) Press the ENT Key.
Appendices
OPERATION
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
405
Index
NOTE: The traffic system automatically transitions from Standby to Operating mode eight
seconds after takeoff. The system also automatically transitions from Operating to Standby
mode 24 seconds after landing.
At the beginning of the avionics power cycle, the traffic system is in Standby Mode. The system must
be in Operating Mode for traffic to be displayed and TAs to be issued.
Pressing the Operate Softkey allows the traffic unit to switch from Standby Mode to Operating Mode
as necessary. Pressing the Standby Softkey forces the unit into Standby Mode.
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Selecting a TAS Operating Mode:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
2) To select Standby Mode, press the Standby or TAS STBY Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired mode and press the ENT Key.
ALTITUDE DISPLAY MODE
The pilot can select the volume of airspace in which Other Non-Threat and Proximity Advisory
traffic is displayed. TAs occurring outside of these limits will always be shown.
Flight Management
Changing the altitude range of traffic to display:
1) On the ‘Map — Traffic Map’ Page, press the ALT Mode Softkey.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
2) Press one of the following softkeys:
•
Above: Displays Other Non-Threat and Proximity Advisory traffic from 9900 feet above the
aircraft to 2700 feet below the aircraft. Typically used during climb phase of flight.
•
Normal: Displays Other Non-Threat and Proximity Advisory traffic from 2700 feet above
the aircraft to 2700 feet below the aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
•
Below: Displays Other Non-Threat and Proximity Advisory traffic from 2700 feet above the
aircraft to 9900 feet below the aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.
•
UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900 feet below
the aircraft.
Additional Features
3) To return to the Traffic Map Page, press the Back Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following softkeys (see previous
•
Above
•
Normal
Index
Appendices
description):
406
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Below
•
Unrestricted
System Overview
•
3) Press the ENT Key.
Flight Instruments
Selecting a display range on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Select the ‘Map — Traffic Map’ Page.
the map range.
ADDITIONAL TRAFFIC DISPLAYS
Navigation Map Page
Nearest Page
Active Flight Plan Page
Trip Planning Page
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, the system shows a traffic status
icon to indicate traffic is enabled for display.
Flight Management
IFR/VFR Charts Page
Audio Panel and CNS
The ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page is the principal map page for viewing traffic information. Traffic
information can also be displayed on the following other maps for additional reference on the MFD
when the traffic unit is operating:
Engine Indication System
2) Turn the Joystick clockwise to increase the map range or counter-clockwise to decrease
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Proximity
Advisory
Additional Features
Traffic Advisory
Appendices
Traffic overlay
enabled icon and
Altitude Display
Mode
Traffic
Advisory OffScale Banner
Annunciation
Figure 6-76 TAS Traffic on Navigation Map Page
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
407
Index
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Garmin Synthetic Vision
Technology (SVT) option is installed and enabled. See the Flight Instruments section for details.
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Enabling/disabling traffic information (MFD navigation maps):
1) Press the Map Opt Softkey.
Flight Instruments
2) Press the Traffic Softkey to enable/disable the traffic overlay.
3) Press the Back Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.
Customizing the traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
Engine Indication System
1) Select the ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Settings’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key.
•
Traffic – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
•
Traffic Mode – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
•
All Traffic - Displays all traffic
•
TA/PA - Displays Traffic Advisories and Proximity Advisories
•
TA Only - Displays Traffic Advisories only
•
Traffic Symbols – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
•
Traffic Labels – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown with the
option to turn off
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (On/Off, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page.
The ‘Map - Navigation Map’ Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu
controls the map range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display.
If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps
besides the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page use settings based on those selected for the ‘Map - Navigation
Map’ Page.
A Traffic Map is available on the PFD by pressing the TFC Map Softkey. A traffic map will appear
in heading up orientation. Traffic information can also be overlaid with navigation, topographic and
optional data link weather information on navigation maps.
The HSI can also present a version of the Traffic Map. Traffic operating mode information is not
present on this map. Refer to the Flight Instruments section for more information about displaying
maps on the HSI.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through the selections.
408
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Figure 6-77 HSI Traffic Map
Audio Panel and CNS
Enabling/disabling traffic information on PFD navigation maps:
1) With the Inset Map or HSI Map displayed, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
2) Press the Traffic Softkey to enable/disable the traffic overlay.
Flight Management
3) Press the Back Softkey to return to the top-level PFD softkeys.
Enabling/disabling traffic information on the PFD Inset navigation map:
1) With the Inset map displayed, press the Map/HSI Softkey.
Hazard Avoidance
2) Press the Traffic Softkey to enable/disable the display of traffic information.
SYSTEM STATUS
Mode
Operating
Traffic Display
Status Icon
(Other Maps)
TEST (‘TEST MODE’ shown in center of page)
OPERATING
Standby
Traffic System Failed*
Additional Features
STANDBY(also shown in center of page)
Automatic Flight Control
System
Traffic System Test Initiated
Traffic Mode Annunciation (Traffic Map
Page)
FAIL
* See the following table for additional failure annunciations.
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper right corner of the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the
‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page. During a failure condition, the Operating Mode cannot be selected.
Appendices
Table 6-25 Traffic Modes
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
409
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Traffic Map Page Center Annunciation
Data is not being received from the traffic unit
DATA FAILED
Data is being received from the traffic unit, but
the unit is self-reporting a failure
FAILED
Incorrect data format received from the traffic
unit
Flight Instruments
NO DATA
Table 6-26 Traffic Failure Annunciations
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left
corner of maps on which traffic can be displayed.
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Description
TA OFF SCALE
Flight Management
TA X.X ± XX
Hazard Avoidance
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
Description
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the
selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in
hundreds of feet, and altitude trend arrow (climbing/
descending).
Traffic unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or sending
incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the traffic unit
Automatic Flight Control
System
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Table 6-27 Traffic Status Annunciations
410
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
6.6 ADS-B TRAFFIC
Automatic Flight Control
System
1090 ES
UAT
RADAR
Composite
GPS
Hazard Avoidance
ADS-B is a core technology in the FAA NextGen air traffic control system and is comprised of three
segments: ADS-B (Broadcast), ADS-R (Rebroadcast), and Traffic Information Service-Broadcast (TIS-B).
ADS-B is the automatic broadcast of position reports by aircraft, surface vehicles, and transmitters on
fixed objects. These broadcasts contain information such as GPS position, identity (Flight ID, Call
Sign, Tail Number, ICAO registration number, etc), ground track, ground speed, pressure altitude, and
emergency status.
Flight Management
ADS-B SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
The optional Garmin GTX 345R transponder sends and receives Automatic Dependent SurveillanceBroadcast (ADS-B) traffic information on the 1090 MHz Extended Squitter (1090 ES) frequency. It
receives ADS-B traffic and data link weather information on the 978 MHz Universal Access Transceiver
(UAT) frequency. The system provides visual annunciations and voice traffic alerts to help the pilot
visually acquire potentially conflicting traffic. This discussion covers the traffic features of the GTX
transponder; refer to the Flight Information Service-Broadcast (FIS-B) Weather section for more
information about the UAT data link weather features of the GTX 345.
Engine Indication System
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all
of the traffic information within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal
reception, and/or inaccurate information from other aircraft, traffic may be present but not
represented on the display.
Flight Instruments
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance
maneuvering. The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories
and does not under any circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see
and avoid other aircraft.
Additional Features
1090 ES
18,000 FT
10,000 FT
Mode A/C
ATC
UAT
UAT
Appendices
RADAR
UAT
1090 ES
ADS-B Ground Station (ADS-R,
TIS-B, FIS-B)
Figure 6-78 ADS-B System
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
411
For the purpose of distinguishing between levels of ADS-B service, there are three classifications of
aircraft or system capability: ADS-B In, ADS-B Out, and ADS-B participating. ADS-B In refers to the
capability to receive ADS-B information. ADS-B Out refers to the capability to transmit ADS-B
information. ADS-B participating refers to the capability to both send and receive ADS-B information.
Aircraft lacking either ADS-In, ADS-B Out, or both ADS-B capabilities may also be referred to as ADSB nonparticipating aircraft.
AUTOMATIC DEPENDENT SURVEILLANCE-REBROADCAST (ADS-R)
Because it is not required that ADS-B In capable aircraft be able to receive ADS-B data on both the
1090 MHz and 978 MHz data links, a method exists to get data from one data link to the other.
ADS-R is the rebroadcast of ADS-B data by FAA ground stations, which provide this service by
taking data from one link and rebroadcasting it on the other. For example, two aircraft are in the
service volume for a ground station, and one is transmitting on 1090 MHz and the other on 978
MHz, the ground station retransmits the data from each aircraft on the other link to ensure the two
aircraft can “see” each other.
Because the GTX 345R transponder sends and receives ADS-B traffic reports on the 1090 ES
frequency, but only receives traffic reports on the 978 MHz UAT frequency, the presence of an ADS-R
ground station is necessary for an aircraft with only UAT-capabilities to ‘see’ the aircraft with the GTX
345R transponder.
TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE-BROADCAST (TIS-B)
TIS-B provides the bridge between the radar-based ATC system and the ADS-B-based system.
When an ADS-B In or Out capable aircraft is within the service volume of an FAA ADS-B ground
station, the ground station broadcasts a portion of the ATC radar data to the aircraft. This aircraft is
then included in the list of aircraft being provided TIS-B service and is then considered a “TIS-B
participant.”
TIS-B coverage is available when the aircraft is within ground station coverage, in Secondary
Surveillance Radar coverage, and the other aircraft is also in Secondary Surveillance Radar coverage,
and is transmitting its altitude.
The ground station provides ATC radar information for other aircraft within ±3,500 feet and 15
NM of the participant, to include altitude, position, ground speed, and ground track. TIS-B
broadcasts occur once every three to thirteen seconds, depending on the characteristics of the
ground station providing the TIS-B service.
The following table describes the aircraft that are observed by a GTX 345R-equipped aircraft
according to the level of equipment installed in the other aircraft.
Other Aircraft Equipment
Viewable by GTX 345R Equipped Aircraft
1090ES Out Equipped
Yes
UAT Receive Only Capable
No
UAT Transmit Equipped
Yes
No Transponder, No ADS-B
No
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
412
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Viewable by GTX 345R Equipped Aircraft
Non ADS-B Equipped, but with Mode C or S
Transponder
Yes*
Table 6-28 Aircraft Available for Viewing by an ADS-B Equipped Own Aircraft
Vertical
Threshol
d for
Alert
(feet)
Protecte
d
Volume
(NM)
Any
Any
Any
20
850
0.2
4
Unavailable
Approach
Any
20
850
0.2
5
Any
Any
Any
25
850
0.2
Any
Any
25
850
0.2
Terminal
Any
25
850
0.2
5
5
190–02183–01 Rev. A
>1000
<=2350
Unavailable
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Index
4
Appendices
Sensitivit
yLevel
Own
GPS Phase
Altitude
of Flight
(Feet)
Additional Features
Lookahead
time
(sec)
Height
Above
Terrain
(HAT)
Automatic Flight Control
System
Conflict Situational Awareness (CSA) is an alerting algorithm which provides ADS-B traffic alerting
similar to the TAS system discussed previously.
The system issues a voice alert when a Traffic Advisory (TA) is displayed, for example “Traffic! Two
O’clock, Low, Two Miles.”
The own aircraft altitude above terrain determines the sensitivity of the CSA algorithm to minimize
nuisance alerts. Height Above Terrain, and Geodetic Sea Level (GSL) altitude are used to adjust the
sensitivity of the CSA algorithm in accordance with the following table:
Hazard Avoidance
CONFLICT SITUATIONAL AWARENESS AND ALERTING
Flight Management
NOTE: When operating on the edges of ATC radar coverage or when using an optional
active traffic system providing intermittent traffic data, a single aircraft may be briefly or
periodically depicted as two aircraft on the display.
Audio Panel and CNS
When an optional active traffic system, such as a Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is installed and
operating with an optional GTX 345R transponder, the transponder receives traffic from the active
traffic system and attempts to match (or “correlate”) this traffic with ADS-B traffic the transponder is
tracking. When a correlation is made, only the traffic with the most accurate information is displayed
to the flight crew. Any traffic that is not correlated (i.e., only detected by one system but not the other)
is also displayed for the flight crew. This correlation of traffic by the transponder improves the
accuracy of the traffic displayed, while reducing the occurrence of the same aircraft being displayed
twice.
Engine Indication System
ADS-B WITH TAS
Flight Instruments
*Only when in ADS-B ground station coverage and when the other aircraft is in ATC radar
coverage, or own aircraft is equipped with a TAS system and traffic is within the TAS surveillance
range.
System Overview
Other Aircraft Equipment
413
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Flight Instruments
Sensitivit
yLevel
Engine Indication System
6
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
7
Hazard Avoidance
8
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
9
Height
Above
Terrain
(HAT)
Own
GPS Phase
Altitude
of Flight
(Feet)
Lookahead
time
(sec)
Vertical
Threshol
d for
Alert
(feet)
Protecte
d
Volume
(NM)
Unavailable
or >2350
Not
approach
and not
Terminal
(including
unavailable)
<=5000
30
850
0.35
Unavailable
or >2350
Not
>5000
approach
and not
<=10,00
Terminal
0
(including
unavailable)
40
850
0.55
Unavailable
or >2350
Not
>10,000
approach
and not
<=20,00
Terminal
0
(including
unavailable)
45
850
0.8
Unavailable
or >2350
Not
>20,000
approach
and not
<=42,00
Terminal
0
(including
unavailable)
48
850
1.1
Table 6-29 CSA Alerting Thresholds for ADS-B Traffic
When the system detects a new Traffic Advisory (TA), the following occur:
•
The system issues a single “Traffic!” voice alert, followed by additional voice information about the
bearing, relative altitude, and approximate distance from the intruder that triggered the TA (Table
6-34). For example, the announcement “Traffic! 12 o’clock, high, four miles,” would indicate the
traffic is in front of own aircraft, above own altitude, and approximately four nautical miles away.
•
A ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation appears to the right of the Airspeed Indicator on the PFD, flashes for five
seconds, and remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
•
If the PFD Inset Map was already displayed, the traffic is shown on the displayed map. Otherwise
the Traffic Map is shown on the PFD.
•
If the bearing of TA traffic cannot be determined, a yellow text banner will be displayed in the center
of the Traffic Map and in the lower-left of the PFD inset map instead of a TA symbol. The text will
indicate ‘TA’ followed by the distance, relative altitude, and vertical trend arrow for the TA traffic, if
known.
414
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
Traffic
Annunciation
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
Relative Altitude
Approximate Distance
(nm)
“One o’clock” through
“Twelve o’clock” or “No
Bearing”
“High”, “Low”, “Same Altitude”
(if within 200 feet of own
altitude), or “Altitude not
available”
“Zero miles”, “Less than one
mile”, “One Mile” through
“Ten Miles”, or “More than
ten miles”
Hazard Avoidance
NOTE: ADS-B traffic voice alerts are suppressed when below 500 feet.
Flight Management
Bearing
Audio Panel and CNS
Figure 6-79 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
AIRBORNE AND SURFACE APPLICATIONS
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
ADS-B can help the pilot visually acquire traffic both in the air and on-the-ground. There are two
ADS-B applications or modes: Airborne Situational Awareness (AIRB) and Surface Situational
Awareness (SURF). The system automatically selects the appropriate application based on conditions.
The AIRB application is on when the aircraft is more than five nautical miles and 1,500 feet above
the nearest airport. When the AIRB application is active, the system only displays traffic which is
airborne.
The SURF application is on when the aircraft is within five nautical miles and less than 1,500 feet
above field elevation. When the SURF applications is on, the system displays airborne and on the
ground traffic. At a Traffic Map Page range of one nautical mile or less, the airport environment
(including taxiways and runways) appears in addition to traffic. The airport displays are derived from
the SafeTaxi database. Refer to the Additional Features section for more information about SafeTaxi
displays.
NOTE: Do not rely solely on the traffic display to determine the runway alignment of traffic,
especially when runways are in close proximity to each other.
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
415
Index
Due to the varying precision of the data received via ADS-B, ADS-R, and TIS-B services, not all traffic
symbols may be depicted on the traffic display. Because higher data precision is required for traffic to
be displayed in the SURF environment, some traffic eligible for AIRB will not be displayed while SURF
is on. Availability for AIRB and SURF is depicted on the ‘Aux - ADS-B Status’ Page, discussed later in
this section.
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SURF Application On
Aircraft on the
ground
Figure 6-80 Traffic Map Page with SURF Mode On
TRAFFIC DESCRIPTION
The symbols used to display ADS-B traffic are shown in the table below. Above or below the traffic
symbol is the traffic identifier, and altitude. A small up or down arrow next to the traffic symbol
indicates that the traffic is climbing or descending at a rate of at least 500 feet per minute.
Symbol
Description
Traffic Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the
intruder aircraft track
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Ground-based
vehicle
Traffic Advisory without directional information.
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range with directional information.
Displayed at outer range ring at proper bearing.
Appendices
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range without directional information.
Displayed at outer range ring at proper bearing.
Proximity Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the
aircraft track.
Index
Proximity Advisory without directional information.
416
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
Symbol
Description
Other Non-Threat traffic with directional information. Points in the direction of
the intruder aircraft track.
Traffic located on the ground with directional information. Points in the direction
of the aircraft track. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface
(SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
Engine Indication System
Ground traffic without directional information. Ground traffic is only displayed
when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
Non-aircraft ground traffic. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in
Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
Other Non-Threat
Traffic, 1000 below,
climbing
Hazard Avoidance
AIRB Application On
Flight Management
The ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page shows surrounding traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current
position and altitude, without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there
is no valid heading. Map range is adjustable with the Joystick, as indicated by the map range rings.
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper left corner of the page.
Audio Panel and CNS
OPERATION
Automatic Flight Control
System
Traffic Advisory,
200’ above,
climbing
No-bearing
Traffic Advisory,
4.0 nm away,
1100’ above,
descending
Additional Features
Traffic Display
Range Rings
Flight Instruments
Other Non-Threat traffic without directional information.
Appendices
Proximity
Advisory, 1200’
feet below,
descending
Figure 6-81 Traffic Map Page with ADS-B Traffic Displayed
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
417
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Testing the display of ADS-B traffic:
1) Select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
2) If necessary, turn the Joystick to select a map range of 2 and 6 nm to ensure full test
Flight Instruments
pattern display.
3) Ensure the ADS-B Softkey is disabled.
4) If the optional TAS is installed, ensure the TAS STBY Softkey is enabled.
Or:
Press the MENU Key.
a) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Test Mode’.
b) Press the ENT Key.
The traffic system provides a system test mode to verify normal operation. The test takes about ten
seconds to complete. When the system test is initiated, a test pattern of traffic symbols appears on
any displayed traffic maps. The test pattern corresponds to the current aircraft heading. A climbing
TA is shown to the west, level Other Non-Threat traffic is shown to the northwest, and a descending
Proximity Advisory is in the northeast, relative to own aircraft. The voice alert “Traffic System Test”
indicates the traffic system test is complete, and the system enters Standby Mode.
ADS-B Test Mode
Figure 6-82 ADS-B System Test with Example Test Pattern Relative to Current Heading
The pilot can select the volume of airspace in which Other Non-Threat and Proximity traffic is
displayed. TAs occurring outside of these limits will always be shown.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
5) Press the Test Softkey.
418
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
Changing the altitude range:
1) On the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page, press the ALT Mode Softkey.
2) Select one of the following softkeys:
Normal: Displays Other Non-Threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft
to 2700 feet below the aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
•
Below:Displays Other Non-Threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to
9000 feet below the aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.
•
UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900 feet below
the aircraft.
3) To return to the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page, select the Back Softkey.
Or:
Audio Panel and CNS
•
Engine Indication System
Above: Displays Other Non-Threat and proximity traffic from 9000 feet above the aircraft
to 2700 feet below the aircraft. Typically used during climb phase of flight.
Flight Instruments
•
1) Press the MENU Key.
Flight Management
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight one of the following options (see softkey
description in step 2 above):
Above
•
Normal
•
Below
•
Unrestricted
Hazard Avoidance
•
3) Press the ENT Key.
Additional Features
When Absolute Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors extending from the traffic symbols depict
the traffic’s reported track and speed over the ground. When Relative Motion Vectors are selected,
the vectors extending from the traffic symbols display how the traffic is moving relative to own
aircraft. These vectors are calculated using the traffic’s track and ground speed and own aircraft’s
track and ground speed. These two values are combined to depict where the traffic is moving purely
with respect to own aircraft, and provide a forecast of where the traffic will be, relative to own
aircraft, in the near future.
Automatic Flight Control
System
DISPLAYING MOTION VECTORS
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
419
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Audio Panel and CNS
Absolute
Motion Vectors
Absolute Motion Vectors
selected
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Figure 6-83 Traffic Map Page with Absolute Motion Vectors Enabled
Automatic Flight Control
System
Relative Motion
Vectors
Additional Features
Relative Motion Vectors
selected
Index
Appendices
Figure 6-84 Traffic Map Page with Relative Motion Vectors Enabled
420
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
Enabling/disabling the Motion Vector display:
1) Select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
2) Press the Motion Softkey.
Flight Instruments
3) Press one of the following softkeys:
Absolute: Displays the motion vector pointing in the absolute direction.
•
Relative: Displays the motion vector relative to own aircraft
•
Off: Disables the display of the motion vector.
Engine Indication System
•
Or:
1) Select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Relative Motion’, ‘Absolute Motion’ or ‘Motion Vector
Off’.
Audio Panel and CNS
2) Press the MENU Key.
4) Press the ENT Key.
Flight Management
Adjusting the duration for the Motion Vector projected time:
1) Select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
2) Press the Motion Softkey.
Hazard Avoidance
3) Press the Duration Softkey.
4) Press a softkey for the desired duration (30 SEC, 1 MIN, 2 MIN, 5 MIN).
5) When finished, press the Back Softkey to return to the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
Showing additional traffic information:
1) Select the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
Additional Features
The Traffic Map Page can display additional information for a selected aircraft symbol. This may
include the aircraft tail number/Flight ID, type of aircraft (e.g., glider, small/medium/large aircraft,
service vehicle, unmanned airborne vehicle (UAV), course, track, groundspeed), and other
information.
Automatic Flight Control
System
DISPLAYING ADDITIONAL TRAFFIC INFORMATION
2) Press the FMS Knob. The first selected traffic symbol is highlighted in cyan. Additional
3) To select a different aircraft symbol, turn the FMS Knob until the selected aircraft traffic
Appendices
information appears in a window in the upper-right corner of the ‘Map - Traffic Map’
Page.
symbol is highlighted.
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob again to disable the traffic selection.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
421
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Changing the display range on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the Joystick.
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
2) The following range options are available:
•
500 feet
•
500 and 1000 feet
•
1000 and 2000 feet
•
2000 feet and 1 NM
•
1 and 2 NM
•
2 and 6 MN
•
6 and 12 NM
•
12 and 24 NM
•
24 and 40 NM
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper right corner of the ‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page.
ADS-B Mode
Traffic Mode
Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
Traffic Map Page
Center Banner
Annunciation
ADS-B System Test
Initiated
ADS-B: TEST
TEST MODE
ADS-B Operating in
Airborne Mode
ADS-B: AIRB
NONE
ADS-B Operating in
Surface Mode
ADS-B: SURF
NONE
ABS-B Traffic Off
ADS-B: OFF
ADS-B TRFC OFF
ADS-B Traffic Not
Available
ADS-B: N/A
NO TRK/HDG
ADS-B Failed*
ADS-B: FAIL
FAILED
Traffic Display Status
Icon (Other Maps)
* See ‘Traffic Failure Annunciations’ Table for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-30 ADS-B Modes
If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the
‘Map - Traffic Map’ Page. During a failure condition, the Operating Mode cannot be selected.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
ADS-B SYSTEM STATUS
422
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
System Overview
Traffic Map Page Center Annunciation
Description
Data is not being received from the traffic unit
DATA FAILED
Data is being received from the traffic unit, but the unit
is self-reporting a failure
FAILED
Incorrect data format received from the traffic unit
Flight Instruments
NO DATA
Table 6-31 Traffic Failure Annunciations
TA OFF SCALE
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the
selected display range.
TA X.X±XX
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude
separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend arrow
(climbing/descending).
TRFC FAIL
Traffic unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or
sending incorrectly formatted data).
Flight Management
Description
Audio Panel and CNS
Traffic Status Banner Annunciation
Engine Indication System
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left
corner of maps on which traffic can be displayed.
Data is not being received from the traffic unit.
NO TRFC DATA
Hazard Avoidance
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Table 6-32 Traffic Status Annunciations
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional information about the status of ADS-B traffic products is available on the ‘Aux - ADS-B
Status’ Page.
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
423
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-85 Viewing ADS-B Traffic Status on the ‘Aux - ADS-B Status’ Page
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - ADS-B Status’ Page.
ADS-B Status
Page Item
Traffic Application
Status: Airborne
(AIRB), Surface
(SURF), Airborne
Alerts (CSA)
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Viewing ADS-B Traffic Status:
Status Message
On
Traffic application is currently on. Required input data
is available, and it meets performance requirements.
Available to Run
Traffic application is not currently active, but
application is ready to run when condition(s) determine
the application should be active. Required input data is
available, and it meets performance requirements.
Not Available
Traffic application is not available. Required input data
is available, but it does not meet performance
requirements.
Fault
Traffic application is not available. Required input data
is not available or the application has failed.
Not Configured
Appendices
Description
Traffic application status is invalid or unknown.
Index
----------------
Traffic application is not available, because it has not
been configured. If this annunciation persists, the
system should be serviced.
424
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TIS-B/ADS-R
Coverage
Available
The system is receiving the ADS-R coverage from an
FAA ground station.
Not Available
The system is not receiving the ADS-R coverage from
an FAA ground station.
ADS-R coverage is invalid or unknown.
External #1
The GTX 345R is using the #1 GPS receiver for the GPS
position source.
External #2
The GTX 345R is using the #2 GPS receiver for the GPS
position source.
The GPS source is invalid or unknown.
Flight Management
Table 6-33 ‘Aux-ADS-B Status’ Page Messages for ADS-B Traffic
Audio Panel and CNS
Number of minutes, Displays the number of minutes since the last uplink
or ‘------’
from a ground station occurred. If no uplink has been
received, or the status is invalid, dashes appear instead
of a number of minutes.
Engine Indication System
--------------
--------Ground Uplink
Status: Last Uplink
Description
Flight Instruments
GPS Status: GPS
Source
Status Message
System Overview
ADS-B Status
Page Item
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
425
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
BLANK PAGE
426
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
System Overview
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.1 AFCS OVERVIEW
•
Flight Director (FD) — The aircraft has two flight directors, each operating within a GIA and referred
to as pilot-side and copilot-side. The flight director provides:
Command Bars showing pitch/roll guidance
•
Vertical/lateral mode selection and processing
•
Autopilot communication
Audio Panel and CNS
•
•
Yaw Damper (YD) — The yaw servo is self-monitoring and provides Dutch roll damping and turn
coordination in response to yaw rate, roll angle, lateral acceleration, and airspeed.
•
Manual Electric Pitch Trim (MEPT) — The pitch trim servo provides manual electric pitch trim
capability when the autopilot is not engaged.
Automatic Flight Control
System
AFCS CONTROLS
HDG Key
Selects/deselects Heading Select Mode
2
APR Key
Selects/deselects Approach Mode
3
AP Key
Engages/disengages the autopilot
4
LVL Key
Engages the autopilot (if the autopilot is disengaged and the aircraft is
within the autopilot engagement limitations) in level vertical and lateral
modes
5
NOSE
UP/DN
Wheel
Adjusts the vertical mode reference in Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, Indicated
Airspeed, and Altitude Hold modes
6
FLC Key
Selects/deselects Flight Level Change Mode
7
VNV Key
Selects/deselects Vertical Path Tracking Mode for Vertical Navigation flight
control
8
ALT Knob
Controls the Selected Altitude in 100-ft increments
Additional Features
1
Appendices
Index
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Hazard Avoidance
Autopilot (AP) — Autopilot operation occurs within the pitch, roll, and pitch trim servos. It also
provides servo monitoring and automatic flight control in response to flight director steering
commands, Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) attitude and rate information, and
airspeed.
Flight Management
•
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Engine Indication System
The Garmin AFCS is a digital Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS), fully integrated within the
system avionics architecture. The System Overview section provides a block diagram to support this
system description.
The GarminAFCS can be divided into these main operating functions:
Flight Instruments
NOTE: The approved Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) always supersedes this Pilot’s Guide.
427
9
ALT Key
Selects/deselects Altitude Hold Mode
10
VS Key
Selects/deselects Vertical Speed Mode
11
FD Key
Activates/deactivates the flight director only
12
NAV Key
Selects/deselects Navigation Mode
13
HDG Key
Selects/deselects Heading Select Mode
1
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
2
13
4
3
12
11
5
6 7
10
9
Figure 7-1 GMC 707 AFCS Control Unit
ADDITIONAL AFCS CONTROLS
AP DISC
Button
(Autopilot
Disconnect)
Disengages the autopilot, yaw damper, and interrupts pitch trim operation An AP
DISC Button is located on the pilot’s control stick. This button may be used to
acknowledge an autopilot disconnect alert and mute the associated aural tone.
Selects flight director Takeoff (on ground) or Go Around (in air) Mode
GA Button
(Go Around) If an approach procedure is loaded, this switch also activates the missed approach
when the selected navigation source is GPS or when the navigation source is
VOR/LOC and a valid frequency has been tuned.
The GA Button is located on the power lever.
MET Switch Used to command manual electric pitch trim
An MET Switch is located on the pilot and copilot control stick.
(Manual
Electric Trim) Press DN (forward) and UP (rearward) for manual electric trim.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
The following AFCS controls are located separately from the AFCS Control Unit:
428
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
System Overview
7.2 FLIGHT DIRECTOR OPERATION
FLIGHT DIRECTOR OPERATION
Control Pressed
Modes Selected
Lateral
Vertical
PIT
AP Key
Roll Hold (default)
ROL
Roll Hold (default)
PIT
GA Button
Takeoff (on ground)
Go Around (in air)
TO
GA
Takeoff (on Ground)
Go Around (in air)
TO
GA
ALT Key
Roll Hold (default)
ROL
Altitude Hold
ALT
VS Key
Roll Hold (default)
ROL
Vertical Speed
VS
VNV Key
Roll Hold (default)
ROL
Vertical Path Tracking*
VPTH
NAV Key
Navigation**
FMS
VOR
LOC
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
APR Key
Approach**
FMS
VOR
LOC
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
HDG Key
Heading Select
HDG
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
LVL Key
Level Hold
LVL
Level Hold
LVL
*Valid VNV flight plan must be entered before VNV Key press activates flight director.
Additional Features
Pitch Hold (default)
Automatic Flight Control
System
ROL
Hazard Avoidance
Roll Hold (default)
Flight Management
FD Key
Audio Panel and CNS
An initial press of a key listed in the following table(when the flight director is not
active) activates the flight director in the listed modes. The flight director may be turned
off and the Command Bars removed from the display by pressing the FD Key again. The
FD Key is disabled when the autopilot is engaged.
Engine Indication System
Activating The Flight Director
Flight Instruments
The flight director function provides pitch and roll commands to the AFCS and displays them on the
PFD. With the flight director active, the aircraft can be hand-flown to follow the path shown by the
Command Bars. Maximum commanded pitch (-15°, +20°) and roll (25°) angles, vertical acceleration,
and roll rate are limited to values established during AFCS certification. The flight director also provides
commands to the autopilot.
**The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course
before NAV or APR Key press activates flight director.
Appendices
AFCS STATUS BOX
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
429
Index
Flight director mode annunciations are displayed on the PFDs when the flight director is active. Flight
director selection and autopilot and yaw damper statuses are shown in the center of the AFCS Status
Box. Lateral flight director modes are displayed on the left and vertical on the right. Armed modes are
displayed in white and active in green.Th
System Overview
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Lateral Modes
Active
Vertical Modes
Active
Mode
Reference
Armed
Figure 7-2 PFD AFCS Display
FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODES
Flight director modes are normally selected independently for the pitch and roll axes. Unless
otherwise specified, all mode keys are alternate action (i.e., press on, press off). In the absence of specific
mode selection, the flight director reverts to the default pitch and/or roll modes. Mode keys on the AFCS
controller are accompanied by annunciator lights which are illuminated when their respective modes are
armed or active.
Armed modes are annunciated in white and active in green in the AFCS Status Box. Under normal
operation, when the FD Key is pressed, the flight director reverts to the default mode(s) for the axis(es).
Automatic transition from armed to active mode is indicated by the white armed mode annunciation
moving to the green active mode field and flashing for 10 seconds.
If the information required to compute a flight director mode becomes invalid or unavailable, the
flight director automatically reverts to the default mode for that axis. A flashing yellow mode
annunciation and annunciator light indicate loss of sensor (ADC) or navigation data (VOR, LOC, GPS,
VNV, SBAS) required to compute commands. When such a loss occurs, the system automatically begins
to roll the wings level (enters Roll Hold Mode) or maintain the pitch angle (enters Pitch Hold Mode),
depending on the affected axis. The flashing annunciation stops when the affected mode key is pressed
or another mode for the axis is selected. If after 10 seconds no action is taken, the flashing annunciation
stops.
Figure 7-3 Loss of GPS Signal
The flight director is automatically disabled if the attitude information required to compute the default
flight director modes becomes invalid or unavailable.
COMMAND BARS
Upon activation of the flight director, Command Bars are displayed in magenta on the PFDs as a single
cue. The Aircraft Symbol (in yellow) changes to accommodate the Command Bar format; the Command
Bars do not override the Aircraft Symbol. The single-cue Command Bars move together vertically to
indicate pitch commands and bank left or right to indicate roll commands.
If the attitude information being sent to the flight director becomes invalid or unavailable, the
Command Bars are removed from the display. The flight director Command Bars also disappear if the
pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚ or bank exceeds 65˚.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
Armed
Yaw
Autopilot Damper
Status Status
430
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
The AFCS is capable of operating in a variety of independent Lateral Modes, Vertical Modes and
Combination of both the Lateral and Vertical Modes.
Vertical Mode
Control
Annunciation
Holds the current aircraft
pitch attitude; may be
used to climb/descend to
the Selected Altitude
(default)
PIT
-15° to
+20°
*
ALTS
Holds the current
Altitude Reference
ALT Key
ALT
nnnnn
ft
Vertical Speed
Maintains the current
aircraft vertical speed;
may be used to climb/
descend to the Selected
Altitude
VS Key
VS
nnnn
fpm
Maintains the current
aircraft airspeed while
the aircraft is climbing/
descending to the
Selected Altitude
FLC Key
FLC
±150 ft
10 ft
-3000 to
+1500 fpm
100 fpm
80 to 185kt
1 kt
Automatic Flight Control
System
Altitude Hold
0.5°
Hazard Avoidance
Captures the Selected
Altitude
Reference
Change
Increment
Flight Management
Selected
Altitude
Capture
Flight Level
Change, IAS
Hold
Reference
Range
Audio Panel and CNS
Pitch Hold
Description
Engine Indication System
The following table lists the vertical modes with their corresponding controls and annunciations. The
mode reference is displayed next to the active mode annunciation for Altitude Hold, Vertical Speed, and
Flight Level Change modes. The NOSE UP/DN Wheel can be used to change the vertical mode
reference while operating under Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, or Flight Level Change Mode.
Flight Instruments
VERTICAL MODES
System Overview
7.3 AFCS MODES
nnn kt
Additional Features
* ALTS armed automatically when PIT, VS, FLC, TO, or GA active, and under VPTH when Selected
Altitude is to be captured instead of VNV Target Altitude
PITCH HOLD MODE (PIT)
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
431
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Appendices
When the flight director is activated (the FD Key is pressed), Pitch Hold Mode is selected by default.
Pitch Hold Mode is indicated as the active vertical mode by the ‘PIT’ annunciation. This mode may be
used for climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter), since Selected Altitude
Capture Mode is automatically armed when Pitch Hold Mode is activated.
In Pitch Hold Mode, the flight director maintains a constant pitch attitude, the pitch reference. The
pitch reference is set to the aircraft pitch attitude at the moment of mode selection. If the aircraft pitch
System Overview
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
attitude exceeds the flight director pitch command limitations, the flight director commands a pitch
angle equal to the nose-up/down limit.
Changing the Pitch Reference
Flight Instruments
When operating in Pitch Hold Mode, the pitch reference can be adjusted by:
•
Using the NOSE UP/DN Wheel
Engine Indication System
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
Selected Altitude
Capture Mode Armed
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Selected
Altitude
Command Bars Maintain
Desired Pitch Reference
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Figure 7-4 Pitch Hold Mode
SELECTED ALTITUDE CAPTURE MODE (ALTS)
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed with activation of the following modes:
•
Pitch Hold
•
Vertical Speed
•
Flight Level Change
•
Takeoff/Go Around (if the Selected Altitude is at least 400 feet above the current aircraft altitude)
•
Vertical Path Tracking (if the Selected Altitude is to be captured instead of the VNV Target Altitude)
The white ‘ALTS’ annunciation indicates Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed (see previous
figure for example). The ALT SEL Knob is used to set the Selected Altitude (shown above the
Altimeter) until Selected Altitude Capture Mode becomes active. As the aircraft nears the Selected
Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode with Altitude
Hold Mode armed (next figure). This automatic transition is indicated by the green ‘ALTS’
annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT’ annunciation. The
Selected Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTS’ annunciation. At 50 feet from
the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from Selected Altitude Capture to
Altitude Hold Mode and holds the Selected Altitude (shown as the Altitude Reference). As Altitude
432
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
System Overview
Hold Mode becomes active, the white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and
flashes green for 10 seconds to indicate the automatic transition.
Altitude Reference
(in this case, equal to
Selected Altitude)
Flight Instruments
Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition
Engine Indication System
Figure 7-5 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
Changing the Selected Altitude
Audio Panel and CNS
Use of the ALT SEL Knob to change the Selected Altitude while Selected Altitude
Capture Mode is active causes the flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode with
Selected Altitude Capture Mode armed for the new Selected Altitude.
ALTITUDE HOLD MODE
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Altitude Hold Mode can be activated by pressing the ALT Key; the flight director maintains the
current aircraft altitude (to the nearest 10 feet) as the Altitude Reference. The flight director’s Altitude
Reference, shown in the AFCS Status Box, is independent of the Selected Altitude, displayed above the
Altimeter. Altitude Hold Mode active is indicated by a green ‘ALT’ annunciation in the AFCS Status
Box. Altitude Hold Mode is automatically armed when the flight director is in Selected Altitude
Capture Mode. Selected Altitude Capture Mode automatically transitions to Altitude Hold Mode when
the altitude error is less than 50 feet. In this case, the Selected Altitude becomes the flight director’s
Altitude Reference.
Changing The Altitude Reference
Automatic Flight Control
System
NOTE: Turning the ALT SEL Knob while in Altitude Hold Mode changes the Selected
Altitude, but not the flight director’s Altitude Reference, and does not cancel the mode.
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
433
System Overview
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Flight Instruments
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
Engine Indication System
Selected
Altitude
Selected
Altitude
Bug
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Command Bars Hold Pitch Attitude
to Maintain Altitude Reference
Figure 7-6 Altitude Hold Mode
VERTICAL SPEED MODE
In Vertical Speed Mode, the flight director acquires and maintains a Vertical Speed Reference.
Current aircraft vertical speed (to the nearest 100 fpm) becomes the Vertical Speed Reference at the
moment of Vertical Speed Mode activation. This mode may be used for climb or descent to the
Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter) since Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically
armed when Vertical Speed Mode is selected. When Vertical Speed Mode is activated by pressing the
VS Key, ‘VS’ is annunciated in green in the AFCS Status Box along with the Vertical Speed Reference.
The Vertical Speed Reference is also displayed above the Vertical Speed Indicator. A Vertical Speed
Reference Bug corresponding to the Vertical Speed Reference is shown on the indicator.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Altitude
Reference
Changing the Vertical Speed Reference
The Vertical Speed Reference (shown both in the AFCS Status Box and above the
Vertical Speed Indicator) may be changed by:
Using the NOSE UP/DN Wheel
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
•
434
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Selected
Altitude Capture
Mode Armed
Flight Instruments
Selected
Altitude
System Overview
Vertical Speed
Mode Active
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Engine Indication System
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Bug
Command Bars Indicate Climb to
Attain Vertical Speed Reference
Audio Panel and CNS
Figure 7-7 Vertical Speed Hold Mode
FLIGHT LEVEL CHANGE MODE
•
Additional Features
The Airspeed Reference (shown in both the AFCS Status Box and above the Airspeed
Indicator) may be adjusted by:
Automatic Flight Control
System
Changing the Airspeed Reference
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Level Change Mode is selected by pressing the FLC Key. This mode acquires and maintains
the Airspeed Reference in IAS while climbing or descending to the Selected Altitude (shown above the
Altimeter). When Flight Level Change Mode is active, the flight director continuously monitors
Selected Altitude, airspeed, and altitude. The Airspeed Reference is set to the current airspeed upon
mode activation. Flight Level Change Mode is indicated by a green ‘FLC’ annunciation beside the
Airspeed Reference in the AFCS Status Box. The Airspeed Reference is also displayed directly above
the Airspeed Indicator, along with a bug corresponding to the Airspeed Reference along the tape.
Engine power must be adjusted to allow the autopilot to fly the aircraft at a pitch attitude
corresponding to the desired flight profile (climb or descent) while maintaining the Airspeed
Reference. The flight director maintains the current altitude until either engine power or the Airspeed
Reference are adjusted and does not allow the aircraft to climb or descend away from the Selected
Altitude.
Flight Management
NOTE: The Selected Altitude should be set before selecting Flight Level Change Mode.
Using the NOSE UP/DN Wheel
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
435
System Overview
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Flight Instruments
Flight Level
Change Mode
Active
Airspeed
Reference
Airspeed
Reference
Bug
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Selected
Airspeed Altitude Capture
Reference Mode Armed
Command Bars Indicate Climb
to Attain Selected Altitude
Figure 7-8 Flight Level Change Mode
LATERAL MODES
The following table relates each Garmin AFCS lateral mode to its respective control and annunciation.
Refer to the combination modes section for information regarding Go Around and Takeoff modes.
Lateral Mode
Description
Control
Annunciation
Maximum
Roll
Command
Limit
Roll Hold
Holds the current
aircraft roll attitude
or rolls the wings
level, depending on
the commanded
bank angle
(default)
ROL
25°
Heading Select
Captures and tracks
the Selected
Heading
HDG Key
HDG
25°
GPS
25° Capture
10° Track
VOR
25° Capture
10° Track
LOC
25° Capture
10° Track
Navigation, GPS Arm/
Capture/Track
Navigation, VOR Enroute
Arm/Capture/Track
Navigation, LOC Arm/
Capture/Track (No
Glideslope)
Captures and tracks
the selected
navigation source
(FMS, VOR, LOC)
NAV Key
Index
The AFCS limits turn rate to 3 degrees per second (standard rate turn).
436
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
System Overview
ROLL HOLD MODE (ROL)
When the flight director is activated or switched, Roll Hold Mode is selected by default. This mode is
annunciated as ‘ROL’ in the AFCS Status Box. The current aircraft bank angle is held, subject to the
bank angle condition.
Engine Indication System
Flight Director Response
Rolls wings level
Maintains current aircraft roll attitude
Limits bank to 25°
Audio Panel and CNS
Bank Angle
< 6°
6 to 25°
> 25°
Flight Instruments
NOTE: If Roll Hold Mode is activated as a result of a mode reversion, the flight director rolls
the wings level.
Figure 7-9 Roll Hold Mode Responses
Heading Select Mode is activated by pressing the HDG Key. Heading Select Mode acquires and
maintains the Selected Heading. The Selected Heading is shown by a light blue bug on the HSI and in
the box to the upper left of the HSI.
NOTE: Pressing the HDG Knob synchronizes the Selected Heading to the current heading.
Additional Features
Turns are commanded in the same direction as Selected Heading Bug movement, even
if the bug is turned more than 180° from the present heading (e.g., a 270° turn to the
right). However, Selected Heading changes of more than 330° at a time result in turn
reversals.
Automatic Flight Control
System
The Selected Heading is adjusted using the HDG Knob on either PFD.
Hazard Avoidance
Changing The Selected Heading
Flight Management
HEADING SELECT MODE (HDG)
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
437
System Overview
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
Heading Select
Mode Active
Selected
Heading
Bug
Command Bars Track
Selected Heading
Figure 7-10 Heading Select Mode
NAVIGATION MODES (FMS, VOR, LOC)
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active FMS
course for the flight director to enter Navigation Mode.
Pressing the NAV Key selects Navigation Mode. Navigation Mode acquires and tracks the selected
navigation source (FMS, VOR, LOC). The flight director follows FMS roll steering commands when
FMS is the selected navigation source. When the navigation source is VOR or LOC, the flight director
creates roll steering commands from the Selected Course and deviation. Navigation Mode can also be
used to fly non-precision FMS and LOC approaches where vertical guidance is not required. If the
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) shows greater than one dot when the NAV Key is pressed, the
selected mode is armed. If the CDI shows less than one dot, Navigation Mode is automatically
captured when the NAV Key is pressed. The armed annunciation appears in white to the left of the
active lateral mode.
Figure 7-11 FMS Navigation Mode Armed
When the CDI has automatically switched from FMS to LOC during a LOC/ILS approach, FMS
Navigation Mode remains active, providing FMS steering guidance until the localizer signal is
captured. LOC Navigation Mode is armed automatically when the navigation source switch takes place
if the APR Key is not pressed prior to the automatic source switch.
If Navigation Mode is active and either of the following occur, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold
Mode (wings rolled level):
•
Different VOR tuned while in VOR Navigation Mode (VOR Navigation Mode reverts to armed)
•
Navigation source manually switched (with the CDI Softkey)
•
During a LOC/ILS approach, the FAF is crossed while in FMS Navigation Mode after the automatic
navigation source switch from FMS to LOC
438
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
If the navigation source is VOR or localizer or OBS Mode has been enabled when using
GPS, the Selected Course is controlled using the COM/NAV/CRS/XPDR Knob.
Flight Instruments
GPS Navigation
Mode Active
System Overview
Changing The Selected Course
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
GPS is Selected
Navigation Source
Command Bars Indicate Right
Turn to Track GPS Course
Figure 7-12 Navigation Mode
The following table lists the modes that operating by using both Vertical and Lateral Modes with
their corresponding controls and annunciations.
Description
Vertical Path Tracking
Captures and tracks
descent legs of an active
vertical profile
VNV Key
VPTH
VNV Target Altitude
Capture
Captures the Vertical
Navigation (VNV) Target
Altitude
*
ALTV
Glidepath
Captures and tracks the
SBAS glidepath on
approach
Captures and tracks the
ILS glideslope on approach
Backcourse Arm/
Capture/Track
Captures and tracks a
localizer signal for
backcourse approaches
GP
APR Key
GS
NAV Key
BC
25° Capture
10° Track
Appendices
Glideslope
Additional Features
Annunciation
Automatic Flight Control
System
Control
Hazard Avoidance
Mode
Maximum
Roll
Command
Limit
Flight Management
COMBINATION MODES (VNV, APR, NAV, BC, GA)
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
439
System Overview
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Mode
Description
Control
Annunciation
Maximum
Roll
Command
Limit
GPS
25°
Flight Instruments
Approach, GPS Arm/
Capture/Track
Approach, VOR Arm/
Capture/Track
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Approach, ILS Arm/
Capture/Track
(Glideslope Mode
automatically armed)
Captures and tracks the
selected navigation source
(FMS, VOR, LOC)
APR Key
VAPP
LOC
25° Capture
10° Track
Takeoff
Commands a constant
pitch angle and wings
level on the ground in
preparation for takeoff
GA Button
Wings Level
Go Around
Commands a constant
pitch angle and wings
level in the air
GA Button
Wings Level
Level
Autopilot engages and
commands pitch angle
necessary to establish zero
vertical fpm
***
Wings Level
* ALTV is armed automatically under VPTH when VNV Target Altitude is to be captured instead of
Selected Altitude.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
VERTICAL NAVIGATION MODES (VPTH, ALTV)
NOTE: VNV is disabled when parallel track or Dead Reckoning Mode is active.
NOTE: The Selected Altitude takes precedence over any other vertical constraints.
Vertical Navigation (VNV) flight control is available for enroute/terminal cruise and descent operations
any time that VNV flight planning is available. Refer to the GPS Navigation Section for more information
on VNV flight plans. Conditions for availability include, but are not limited to:
•
The selected navigation source is GPS.
•
A VNV flight plan (with at least one altitude-constrained waypoint) or vertical direct-to is active.
•
VNV is enabled (VNV ENBL Softkey pressed on the MFD).
•
Crosstrack error is valid and within certain limits.
•
Desired/actual track are valid or track angle error is within certain limits.
440
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
The VNV Target Altitude of the active waypoint is no more than 250 ft above the current aircraft
altitude.
Audio Panel and CNS
When a vertical profile (VNV flight plan) is active and the VNV Key is pressed, Vertical Path Tracking
Mode is armed in preparation for descent path capture. ‘VPTH’ (or ‘/V’ when Glidepath or Glideslope
Mode is concurrently armed) is annunciated in white in addition to previously armed modes. If
applicable, the appropriate altitude capture mode is armed for capture of the next VNV Target Altitude
(ALTV) or the Selected Altitude (ALTS), whichever is greater.
Engine Indication System
NOTE: If another vertical mode key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is selected,
Vertical Path Tracking Mode reverts to armed.
Flight Instruments
The flight director may be armed for VNV at any time, but no target altitudes are captured during a
climb. The Command Bars provide vertical profile guidance based on specified altitudes (entered
manually or loaded from the database) at waypoints in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to. The
appropriate VNV flight control modes are sequenced by the flight director to follow the path defined by
the vertical profile. Upon reaching the last waypoint in the VNV flight plan, the flight director transitions
to Altitude Hold Mode and cancels any armed VNV modes.
Vertical Path Tracking Mode (VPTH)
System Overview
•
Flight Management
Figure 7-13 Vertical Path Tracking Armed Annunciations
Pressing the VNV Key
•
Adjusting the Selected Altitude
Additional Features
If acknowledgment is not received within one minute of descent path interception, the white ‘VPTH’
annunciation starts to flash. Flashing continues until acknowledged or the descent path is intercepted. If
the descent is not confirmed by the time of interception, Vertical Path Tracking Mode remains armed
and the descent is not captured.
In conjunction with the “TOD [top of descent] within 1 minute” annunciation in the PFD Navigation
Status Box and the “Vertical track” voice message, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, vertical
deviation, and vertical speed required) appear on the PFDs in magenta.
Automatic Flight Control
System
•
Hazard Avoidance
Prior to descent path interception, the Selected Altitude must be set below the current aircraft altitude
by at least 75 feet. For the flight director to transition from Altitude Hold to Vertical Path Tracking
Mode, acknowledgment is required within five minutes of descent path interception by:
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
441
System Overview
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Vertical Path Tracking
Armed (Flashing Indicates
Acknowledgment Required
Flight Instruments
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
VNV Target
Altitude
Engine Indication System
Selected
Altitude
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
Enroute
Phase of
Flight
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Figure 7-14 Vertical Path Capture
When a descent leg is captured (i.e., vertical deviation becomes valid), Vertical Path Tracking becomes
active and tracks the descent profile (next figure). An altitude capture mode (‘ALTS’ or ‘ALTV’) is armed
as appropriate.
Vertical Path
Tracking Active
VNV Target Altitude
Capture Armed
VNV Target
Altitude
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
Terminal
Phase of
Flight
Command Bars Indicate Descent to
Maintain Required Vertical Speed
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
Vertical Deviation
Indicator (VDI)
Index
Appendices
Figure 7-15 Vertical Path Tracking Mode
If the altimeter barometric setting is adjusted while Vertical Path Tracking is active, the flight director
increases/decreases the descent rate by up to 500 fpm to re-establish the aircraft on the descent path
(without commanding a climb). Adjusting the altimeter barometric setting creates discontinuities in
VNV vertical deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for
the aircraft to re-establish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a
VNV Target Altitude, the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical
constraint.
442
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Several situations can occur while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active which cause the flight director
to revert to Pitch Hold Mode:
•
Vertical deviation experiences a discontinuity that both exceeds 200 feet in magnitude and results in
the vertical deviation exceeding 200 feet in magnitude. Such discontinuities are usually caused by
flight plan changes that affect the vertical profile.
•
Vertical deviation becomes invalid (the Vertical Deviation Indicator is removed from the PFD).
•
A display enters Reversionary Mode (this does not apply to an active vertical direct-to).
NON-PATH DESCENTS
Hazard Avoidance
Figure 7-16 Flight Level Change VNV Non-Path Descent
To prevent immediate profile re-capture, the following must be satisfied:
At least 10 seconds have passed since the non-path transition was initiated
•
Vertical deviation from the profile has exceeded 250 feet, but is now less than 200 feet
Automatic Flight Control
System
•
Flight Management
Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change modes can also be used to fly non-path descents
while VNV flight control is selected. If the VS or FLC Key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode
is selected, Vertical Path Tracking Mode reverts to armed along with the appropriate altitude capture
mode to allow profile re-capture.
Audio Panel and CNS
Unless VNV is disabled, Vertical Path Tracking Mode and the appropriate altitude capture mode
become armed following the reversion to Pitch Hold Mode to allow for possible profile recapture.
Engine Indication System
Vertical deviation exceeds 200 feet during an overspeed condition.
Flight Instruments
•
System Overview
AUTOMATIC REVERSION TO PITCH HOLD MODE
Pressing the VNV Key twice re-arms Vertical Path Tracking for immediate profile re-capture.
VNV TARGET ALTITUDE CAPTURE MODE (ALTV)
Appendices
VNV Target Altitude Capture is analogous to Selected Altitude Capture Mode and is armed
automatically after the VNV Key is pressed and the next VNV Target Altitude is to be intercepted
before the Selected Altitude. The annunciation ‘ALTV’ indicates that the VNV Target Altitude is to be
captured. VNV Target Altitudes are shown in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to, and can be
entered manually or loaded from a database (see the FMS Navigation Section for details). At the same
time as “TOD within 1 minute” is annunciated in the Navigation Status Box, the active VNV Target
Altitude is displayed above the Vertical Speed Indicator.
Additional Features
NOTE: Armed VNV Target Altitude and Selected Altitude capture modes are mutually
exclusive. However, Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed implicitly (not annunciated)
whenever VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode is armed.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
443
As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to VNV
Target Altitude Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed. This automatic transition is indicated
by the green ‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT’
annunciation. The VNV Target Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTV’
annunciation and remains displayed above the Vertical Speed Indicator. The Required Vertical Speed
Indication (RSVI) is removed once VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode becomes active.
At 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from VNV
Target Altitude Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and tracks the level leg. As Altitude Hold Mode
becomes active, the white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes green
for 10 seconds to indicate the automatic transition. The flight director automatically arms Vertical Path
Tracking, allowing upcoming descent legs to be captured and subsequently tracked.
Audio Panel and CNS
Altitude Reference (In This Case,
Equal To VNV Altitude Target)
Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition
Flight Management
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Figure 7-17 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
Changing the VNV Target Altitude
VNV target altitudes can be changed while editing the active flight plan (see the GPS
Navigation Section for details).
APPROACH MODES (GPS, VAPP, LOC)
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS
course for the flight director to enter Approach Mode.
Approach Mode is activated when the APR Key is pressed. Approach Mode acquires and tracks the
selected navigation source (GPS, VOR, or LOC), depending on loaded approach. This mode uses the
selected navigation receiver deviation and desired course inputs to fly the approach. Pressing the APR
Key when the CDI is greater than one dot arms the selected approach mode (annunciated in white to the
left of the active lateral mode). If the CDI is less the 1 dot, the LOC is automatically captured when the
APR Key is pressed.
VOR Approach Mode (VAPP) provides greater sensitivity for signal tracking than VOR Navigation
Mode.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Changing the current VNV Target Altitude while VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode is
active causes the flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode. Vertical Path Tracking and
the appropriate altitude capture mode are armed in preparation to capture the new
VNV Target Altitude or the Selected Altitude, depending on which altitude is to be
intercepted first.
444
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
System Overview
Selecting VOR Approach Mode:
1) Ensure a valid VOR frequency is tuned
2) Ensure that VOR is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through
Flight Instruments
navigation sources if necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
When GPS Approach Mode is armed, Glidepath Mode is also armed.
1) Ensure a GPS approach is loaded into the active flight plan. The active waypoint must
be part of the flight plan (cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through
Audio Panel and CNS
navigation sources if necessary).
Engine Indication System
Selecting GPS Approach Mode without a Glidepath:
3) Press the APR Key.
GLIDEPATH MODE (GP)
Selecting Glidepath Mode
Flight Management
Glidepath Mode is used to track the SBAS-based glidepath. When Glidepath Mode is armed, ‘GP’ is
annunciated in white in the AFCS Status Box.
1) Ensure a FMS approach is loaded into the active flight plan. The active waypoint must
2) Ensure that FMS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through
navigation sources if necessary).
Hazard Avoidance
be part of the flight plan (cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
3) Press the APR Key.
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through
Additional Features
navigation sources if necessary).
Automatic Flight Control
System
Selecting LOC Approach Mode without a Glideslope:
3) Press the NAV Key.
Or
1) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through
Appendices
navigation sources if necessary).
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
4) Press the NAV Key.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
445
GLIDESLOPE MODE (GS)
Glideslope Mode is available for LOC/ILS approaches to capture and track the glideslope. When
Glideslope Mode is armed (annunciated as ‘GS’ in white), LOC Approach Mode is armed as the lateral
flight director mode.
Selecting LOC with Glideslope Mode:
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
navigation sources if necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
Or
Audio Panel and CNS
1) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through
navigation sources if necessary).
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
Flight Management
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
4) Press the APR Key.
Hazard Avoidance
Figure 7-18 Glideslope Mode Armed
Once LOC is the navigation source, the localizer and glideslope can be captured. Upon
reaching the glideslope, the flight director transitions to Glideslope Mode and begins to
capture and track the glideslope.
Approach
Mode Active
Glideslope
Mode Active
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Active ILS
Frequency Tuned
LOC1 (localizer) is Selected
Navigation Source
Glideslope
Indicator
Appendices
Figure 7-19 Glideslope Mode
Index
If the following occurs, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level):
446
•
Approach Mode is active and a Vectors-To-Final is activated
•
Approach Mode is active and Navigation source is manually switched
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
During a LOC/ILS approach, GPS Navigation Mode is active and the FAF is crossed after
the automatic navigation source switch from GPS to LOC
System Overview
•
BACKCOURSE MODE (BC)
Audio Panel and CNS
Backcourse
Mode Active
Engine Indication System
Backcourse Mode captures and tracks a localizer signal in the backcourse direction. The mode may be
selected by pressing the NAV Key. Backcourse Mode is armed if the CDI is greater than one dot when
the mode is selected. If the CDI is less than one dot, Backcourse Mode is automatically captured when
the NAV Key is pressed. The flight director creates roll steering commands from the Selected Course and
deviation when in Backcourse Mode.
Backcourse Navigation Mode is selected when the localizer front course is greater than 105° from the
aircraft heading. Backcourse Navigation Mode captures and tracks a localizer signal in the backcourse
direction. The annunciation ‘BC’ in the AFCS Status Box indicates Backcourse Navigation Mode.
Flight Instruments
NOTE: When making a backcourse approach, set the Selected Course to the localizer front
course.
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
LOC2 is Selected Navigation Source
Figure 7-20 Backcourse Mode
Intercepting and Flying a DME Arc
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
447
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Appendices
If the pilot decides to intercept the arc at a location other than the published IAF (i.e.
ATC provides vectors to intercept the arc) and subsequently selects Heading Mode or
Roll Mode, the AFCS will not automatically intercept or track the arc unless the pilot
activates the arc leg of the flight plan and arms FMS Navigation Mode. The AFCS will
not intercept and fly a DME arc before reaching an IAF that defines the beginning of
Additional Features
The AFCS will intercept and track a DME arc that is part of the active flight plan
provided that FMS Navigation Mode is engaged, FMS is the active navigation source on
the CDI, and the DME arc segment is the active flight plan leg. It is important to note
that automatic navigation of DME arcs is based on GPS. Thus, even if the APR key is
pressed and LOC or VOR Approach Mode is armed prior to reaching the Initial
Approach Fix (IAF), Approach Mode will not activate until the arc segment is completed.
System Overview
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
the arc segment. Likewise, if at any point while established on the DME arc the pilot
deselects FMS Navigation Mode, the AFCS will no longer track the arc.
Go Around and Takeoff modes are coupled pitch and roll modes and are annunciated as both the
vertical and lateral modes when active. In these modes, the flight director commands a constant set
pitch attitude and wings level. The GA Button is used to select both modes. The mode entered by the
flight director depends on whether the aircraft is on the ground.
Takeoff Mode provides an attitude reference during rotation and takeoff. This mode can be selected
only while on the ground by pushing the GA Button. The flight director Command Bars assume a
wings-level, pitch-up attitude.
Pressing the GA Button while in the air activates the flight director in wings level, pitch-up attitudes,
allowing the execution of a missed approach or a go around.
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
TAKEOFF (TO) AND GO AROUND (GA) MODES
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Go Around
Mode Active
Takeoff Mode Active
Figure 7-21 Takeoff and Go Around Modes
LEVEL MODE (LVL)
Level Mode is coupled pitch and roll modes and is annunciated as both the vertical and lateral modes
when active. Pressing the LVL Key engages the autopilot (if the autopilot is disengaged) in level vertical
and lateral modes. Level Mode does not track altitude or heading. When the LVL Key is pressed all
armed and active modes are cancelled and the autopilot and flight director revert to LVL mode for pitch
and roll. While in level mode, all other modes are available by pressing the corresponding button.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Command Bars Indicate Climb
448
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
System Overview
7.4 AUTOPILOT AND YAW DAMPER OPERATION
NOTE: Refer to the POH for specific instructions regarding emergency procedures.
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Pitch and roll commands are provided to the servos based on the active flight director modes. Yaw
damping is provided by the yaw servo. Servo motor control limits the maximum servo speed and
torque. The servo gearboxes are equipped with slip-clutches set to certain values. This allows the servos
to be overridden in case of an emergency.
Engine Indication System
FLIGHT CONTROL
Flight Instruments
The autopilot and yaw damper operate the flight control surface servos to provide automatic flight
control. The autopilot controls the aircraft pitch and roll attitudes following commands received from
the flight director. Pitch autotrim provides trim commands to the pitch trim servo to relieve any
sustained effort required by the pitch servo. Autopilot operation is independent of the yaw damper.
The yaw damper reduces Dutch roll tendencies and coordinates turns. It can operate independently of
the autopilot and may be used during normal hand-flight maneuvers. Yaw rate commands are limited to
6 deg/sec by the yaw damper.
PITCH AXIS AND TRIM
The autopilot pitch axis uses pitch rate to stabilize the aircraft pitch attitude during flight director
maneuvers. Flight director pitch commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with pitch damper
control, and sent to the pitch servo motor. The pitch servo measures the output effort (torque) and
provides this signal to the pitch trim servo. The pitch trim servo commands the motor to reduce the
average pitch servo effort.
When the autopilot is not engaged, the pitch trim servo may be used to provide manual electric pitch
trim (MEPT). This allows the aircraft to be trimmed using a control wheel switch rather than the trim
wheel. Trim speeds are scheduled with airspeed to provide more consistent response.
ROLL AXIS
The autopilot roll axis uses roll rate to stabilize aircraft roll attitude during flight director maneuvers.
The flight director roll commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with roll damper control, and
sent to the roll servo motor.
YAW AXIS
The yaw damper uses yaw rate and roll attitude to dampen the aircraft’s natural Dutch roll response. It
also uses lateral acceleration to coordinate turns. Yaw damper operation is independent of autopilot
engagement.
The system automatically engages the yaw damper independent of the autopilot. When the AP Key is
pressed, the autopilot, yaw damper, and flight director (if not already active) are activated and the
annunciator lights on the AFCS controller for the autopilot are illuminated. The flight director engages
in Pitch and Roll Hold Modes when initially activated.
PITCH AXIS AND TRIM
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
449
Index
The autopilot pitch axis uses pitch rate to stabilize the aircraft pitch attitude during flight director
maneuvers. Flight director pitch commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with pitch damper
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
control, and sent to the pitch servo motor. The pitch servo measures the output effort (torque) and
provides this signal to the pitch trim servo. The pitch trim servo commands the motor to reduce the
average pitch servo effort.
When the autopilot is not engaged, the pitch trim servo may be used to provide manual electric pitch
trim (MEPT). This allows the aircraft to be trimmed using a control wheel switch rather than the trim
wheel. Manual trim commands are generated only when both halves of the MEPT Switch are operated
simultaneously. Trim speeds are scheduled with airspeed to provide more consistent response.
The pilot side MEPT Switch has priority over the copilot side MEPT Switch.
ROLL AXIS
The autopilot roll axis uses roll rate to stabilize aircraft roll attitude during flight director maneuvers.
The flight director roll commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with roll damper control, and
sent to the roll servo motor.
YAW AXIS
The yaw damper uses yaw rate and roll attitude to dampen the aircraft’s natural Dutch roll response. It
also uses lateral acceleration to coordinate turns.
ENGAGEMENT
NOTE: Autopilot engagement/disengagement is not equivalent to servo engagement/
disengagement.
When the AP Key is pressed, the autopilot, yaw damper, and flight director (if not already active) are
activated and the annunciator lights on the AFCS controller for the autopilot and yaw damper are
illuminated. The flight director engages in Pitch and Roll Hold Modes when initially activated.
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Autopilot
Engaged
Yaw Damper
Engaged
Figure 7-22 Autopilot and Yaw Damper Engaged
The YD will engage automatically when the aircraft climbs through 200’ AGL and disengages when the
aircraft descends through 200’ AGL. The YD will always engage when AP is engaged. Disabling ESP on
the ‘Aux - System Setup 2’ page will disable the automatic YD engagement.
Autopilot and yaw damper status are displayed in the center of the AFCS Status Box. Engagement is
indicated by green ‘AP’ and ‘YD’ annunciations, respectively.
DISENGAGEMENT
Index
The autopilot is manually disengaged by pushing the AP Key on the AFCS Control Unit Manual
autopilot disengagement is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow ‘AP’ annunciation and a threesecond autopilot disconnect aural alert.
450
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
System Overview
Pushing the AP DISC Switch disengages both the yaw damper and the autopilot. When the yaw
damper and autopilot are manually disengaged, both the ‘AP’ and ‘YD’ annunciation turn yellow and
flash for 5 seconds and a three-second autopilot disconnect aural alert is generated.
Engine Indication System
NOTE: Yaw damper will reengage when aircraft is above 200 feet AGL.
•
Invalid sensor data
•
Inability to compute default flight director modes (FD also disengages automatically)
Automatic Flight Control
System
Yaw damper disengagement is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow ‘YD’ annunciation. Automatic
yaw damper disengagement occurs when autopilot disengagement is caused by failure in a parameter
also affecting the yaw damper. This means the yaw damper can remain operational in some cases where
the autopilot automatically disengages. A localized failure in the yaw damper system or invalid sensor
data also cause yaw damper disengagement.
Hazard Avoidance
System failure
Flight Management
After manual disengagement, the autopilot disconnect aural alert may be cancelled by pushing the AP
DISC Switch (AP DISC Switch also cancels the flashing ‘AP’ annunciation).
Automatic autopilot disengagement is indicated by a flashing red and white ‘AP’ annunciation and by
the autopilot disconnect aural alert, which continue until acknowledged by pushing the AP DISC
Switch. Automatic autopilot disengagement occurs due to:
Audio Panel and CNS
Figure 7-24 Yaw Damper Disengagement
•
Flight Instruments
Figure 7-23 Manual Autopilot Disengagement
Additional Features
Figure 7-25 Automatic Autopilot and Yaw Damper Disengagement
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
451
7.5 AFCS ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
UNDERSPEED PROTECTION
Underspeed Protection is designed to discourage aircraft operation below minimum established
airspeeds.
When the aircraft reaches a predetermined airspeed (specific to each flap setting), a yellow MINSPD
annunciation will appear above the airspeed indicator.
Figure 7-26 MINSPD Annunciation
If the aircraft continues to decelerate, Underspeed Protection functionality depends on which vertical
flight director mode is selected. For the purpose of this discussion, the vertical flight director modes can
be divided into two categories: Those in which it is important to maintain altitude for as long as possible
(altitude-critical modes), and those in which maintaining altitude is less crucial (non-altitude critical
modes).
TKS FIKI*
OFF
ON
Flaps
MINSPD Annunciation
Aural AIRSPEED Alert
0%
80 kt
85 kt
50%
76 kt
80 kt
100%
70 kt
80 kt
0%
85 kt
90 kt
50%
81 kt
85 kt
* The optional TKS Flight Into Known Icing (FIKI) Anti-Ice System is only available on SR22 Models
ALTITUDE-CRITICAL MODES (ALT, GS, GP, TO, GA, FLC)
If the aircraft decelerates to stall warning, the lateral and vertical flight director modes will change
from active to armed, and the autopilot will provide input causing the aircraft to pitch down and the
wings to level.
Lateral and
Vertical FD
Modes Armed
Figure 7-27 Lateral and Vertical Flight Director Modes Armed
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
452
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
System Overview
Flight Instruments
An aural “AIRSPEED” alert will sound and a red “UNDERSPEED PROTECT ACTIVE” annunciation
(next figure) will appear to the right of the vertical speed indicator. The pitch down force will continue
until the aircraft reaches a pitch attitude at which IAS equals the IAS at which stall warning turns off,
plus two knots. When airspeed increases (as a result of adding power/thrust) to an IAS above the
minimum commandable autopilot airspeed, the autopilot will cause the aircraft to pitch up, recapturing
the vertical reference and the vertical and lateral flight director modes will change from armed to active.
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Figure 7-28 Underspeed Protect Active Annunciation
When the aircraft reaches a predetermined airspeed, a yellow MINSPD annunciation will appear above
the airspeed indicator. When the airspeed trend vector reaches a predetermined airspeed, a single aural
“AIRSPEED” will sound, alerting the pilot to the impending underspeed condition.
Hazard Avoidance
NON-ALTITUDE CRITICAL MODES (VS, VNAV)
Automatic Flight Control
System
Vertical FD
Mode Armed
Figure 7-29 Vertical Flight Director Mode Armed
Additional Features
When airspeed increases (as a result of adding power/thrust) to an IAS above the minimum
commandable autopilot airspeed, the autopilot will cause the aircraft to pitch up until recapturing the
vertical reference.
OVERSPEED PROTECTION
Appendices
NOTE: Overspeed protection is not active in ALT, GS or GP modes.
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
453
Index
While Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, Flight Level Change, Vertical Path Tracking, or an altitude capture
mode is active, airspeed is monitored by the flight director. Overspeed protection is provided to limit
the flight director’s pitch command in situations where the flight director cannot acquire and maintain
the mode reference for the selected vertical mode.
When Overspeed Protection is active, the Airspeed Reference appears in a box above the Airspeed
Indicator, flashing a yellow ‘MAXSPD’ annunciation. Engine power should be reduced and/or the pitch
reference adjusted to slow the aircraft. The annunciation disappears when the overspeed condition is
resolved.
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
LEVEL MODE (LVL)
Level Mode is coupled pitch and roll modes and is annunciated as both the vertical and lateral modes
when active. Pressing the LVL Key engages the autopilot (if the autopilot is disengaged) in level vertical
and lateral modes. Level Mode does not track altitude or heading. When the LVL Key is pressed all
armed and active modes are cancelled and the autopilot and flight director revert to LVL mode for pitch
and roll. While in level mode, all other modes are available by pressing the corresponding button. Level
Mode will automatically engage when Electronic Stability Protection (ESP) has been active for 50% of
the previous 40 seconds.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Figure 7-30 Overspeed Annunciation
454
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
System Overview
7.6 ABNORMAL OPERATION
ABNORMAL OPERATION
NOTE: Consult the aircraft documentation for the location of circuit breakers as well as
specifics that may supplement or amplify this procedure.
Flight Instruments
Suspected Autopilot Malfunction
Engine Indication System
If an autopilot failure or trim failure is suspected to have occurred, perform the
following steps:
1) Firmly grasp the control stick.
from the trim motor. Power is also removed from all primary servo motors and engaged
solenoids. Note the visual and aural alerting indicating autopilot disconnect.
3) Retrim the aircraft as needed. Substantial trim adjustment may be needed.
Flight Management
4) Pull the appropriate circuit breaker(s) to electrically isolate the servo and solenoid
Audio Panel and CNS
2) Press and hold the AP DISC Switch. The autopilot will disconnect and power is removed
components.
5) Release the AP DISC Switch.
Overpowering Autopilot Servos
Additional Features
The following steps should be added to the preflight check:
Automatic Flight Control
System
Overpowering the autopilot during flight will cause the autopilot’s automatic trim to
run, resulting in an out-of-trim condition or cause the trim to hit the stop if the action is
prolonged. In this case, larger than anticipated control forces are required after the
autopilot is disengaged.
Hazard Avoidance
In the context of this discussion, “overpowering” refers to any pressure or force applied
to the pitch controls when the autopilot is engaged. A small amount of pressure or
force on the pitch controls can cause the autopilot automatic trim to run to an out-oftrim condition. Therefore, any application of pressure or force to the controls should be
avoided when the autopilot is engaged.
1) Check for proper autopilot operation and ensure the autopilot can be overpowered.
2) Note the forces required to overpower the autopilot servo clutches.
In the event of a PFD failure, the MFD goes into reversionary mode. The autopilot remains engaged
but reverts to pitch hold and roll hold modes; all other modes are available for selection. If the MFD
fails, the PFD goes into reversionary mode and the autopilot continues to function.
Appendices
REVERSIONARY MODE
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
455
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
BLANK PAGE
456
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
System Overview
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.1 OVERVIEW
Additional features of the system include the following:
IFR/VFR Charts
•
SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment
•
Flight Data Logging
•
Connext
•
Wi-Fi connections
•
SurfaceWatch™
•
Satellite telephone and SMS messaging services
•
Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP™) System
•
Hypoxia Recognition with Automatic Descent Mode
•
Electronic Checklists
•
Auxiliary Video/EVS (Optional)
•
Position Reporting
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
457
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Appendices
SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more than 700 airports
in the United States. By decreasing range on an airport that has a SafeTaxi diagram available, a close up
view of the airport layout can be seen.
The optional ChartView and FliteCharts provide on-board electronic terminal procedures charts.
Electronic charts offer the convenience of rapid access to essential information.
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment audio feature of the GDL 69A SXM Data Link
Receiver handles more than 170 channels of music, news, and sports. SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers
more entertainment choices and longer range coverage than commercial broadcast stations.
The Flight Data Logging feature automatically stores critical flight and engine data on an SD data card.
Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each 1GB of available space on the card.
Additional Features
•
Automatic Flight Control
System
FliteCharts®/ChartView electronic charts
Hazard Avoidance
•
Flight Management
SafeTaxi® diagrams
Audio Panel and CNS
•
Engine Indication System
NOTE: With the availability of SafeTaxi®, ChartView, or FliteCharts®, it may be necessary to
carry another source of charts on-board the aircraft.
Flight Instruments
OVERVIEW
Connext allows for setting up the installed optional Flight Stream device for a Bluetooth connection
between the system and a mobile device running the Garmin Pilot™ application.
Iridium Telephone Services and SMS messaging is an optional subscription service offered through
Garmin Connext® and Iridium Satellite LLC. Voice and SMS messaging communications are through
the Iridium Satellite Network. Data communications are through Iridium Data Services, or a wireless
network (Wi-Fi) when the aircraft is on the ground.
The Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP™) system discourages aircraft operation outside the
normal flight envelope.
The system provides a control and display interface to an optional EVS/auxiliary video system.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
458
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Audio Panel and CNS
- PFD Maps
Engine Indication System
- Navigation Map Page
Flight Instruments
SafeTaxi is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when viewing airports at close range.
The maximum map ranges for enhanced detail are pilot configurable. When viewing at ranges close
enough to show the airport detail, the map reveals taxiways with identifying letters/numbers, airport
Hot Spots, and airport landmarks including ramps, buildings, control towers, and other prominent
features. Resolution is greater at lower map ranges. When the MFD display is within the SafeTaxi
ranges, the airplane symbol on the airport provides enhanced position awareness.
Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting taxiways and runways,
and/or complex ramp areas. Airport Hot Spots are outlined to caution pilots of areas on an airport
surface where positional awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often. Hot Spots are
defined with a magenta circle or outline around the region of possible confusion.
Any map page that displays the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi airport layout within the
maximum configured range. The following is a list of pages where the SafeTaxi feature can be seen:
System Overview
8.2 SAFETAXI
- Weather Datalink Page
Flight Management
- Airport Information Page
- Intersection Information Page
- NDB Information Page
Hazard Avoidance
- VOR Information Page
- User Waypoint Information Page
- Trip Planning Page
- Active and Stored Flight Plan Pages
Additional Features
Appendices
During ground operations the aircraft’s position is displayed in reference to taxiways, runways, and
airport features. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta. When panning over the airport, features
such as runway holding lines and taxiways are shown at the cursor.
The Detail Softkey (declutter) label advances to Detail All, Detail 3, Detail 2 and Detail 1 each time
the softkey is selected for easy recognition of decluttering level. Pressing the Detail All Softkey
removes the taxiway markings and airport feature labels. Pressing the Detail 3 Softkey removes VOR
station ID, the VOR symbol, and intersection names if within the airport plan view. Pressing the Detail
2 Softkey removes the airport runway layout, unless the airport in view is part of an active route
structure. Pressing the Detail 1 Softkey cycles back to the original map detail. Refer to Map Declutter
Levels in the Flight Management Section.
Automatic Flight Control
System
- Nearest Pages
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
459
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Configuring SafeTaxi Range
1) While viewing the ‘Map-Navigation Map’ Page, press the MENU Key to display the
‘Page Menu.’
Flight Instruments
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Map Settings’ Menu Option and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn the smallFMS Knob to select the ‘Aviation’ Group and press the ENT Key.
Engine Indication System
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the ‘Aviation’ Group options to SafeTaxi.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the range of distances.
6) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired distance for maximum SafeTaxi display
range.
Audio Panel and CNS
7) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the ‘Map-Navigation Map’ Page.
460
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
System Overview
8.3 CHARTS
CHARTS
Selecting preferred charts source:
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup menu option and press the ENT
Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the Preferred Charts Source option.
Audio Panel and CNS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the available options (FliteCharts,
Engine Indication System
1) While viewing a chart select the MENU Softkey to display the Page Menu options.
Flight Instruments
The preferred charts source can be selected within the system. The active chart source for a particular
procedure is shown on the information pane under Source.
ChartView).
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Preferred Charts Source Option
Chart Setup Option
Automatic Flight Control
System
Figure 8-1 Preferred Charts Source
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
461
Flight Instruments
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Chart Source
Figure 8-2 Chart Source
FLITECHARTS
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of AeroNav Services terminal procedures charts. The charts
are displayed with high-resolution and in color for applicable charts.
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when
the current position is within the boundaries of the chart. Not all charts are geo-referenced. These
charts will display an Aircraft Not Shown Icon in the lower right corner of the MFD.
Figure 8-3 Aircraft Not Shown Icon
An aircraft symbol may be displayed within an off-scale area depicted on some charts. Off-scale areas
are indicated by the grey shading. Note, these areas are not shaded on the published chart. These offscale areas appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the depicted
geographical position of this information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual
geographic position. Therefore, when the aircraft symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft
position indicated is relative to the chart planview, not to the off-scale area.
The FliteCharts database subscription is available from Garmin. Available data includes:
- Arrivals (STAR)
- Departure Procedures (DP)
Index
- Approaches
- Airport Diagrams
462
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
System Overview
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.
CHARTVIEW
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Inset Box
Flight Instruments
ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts. The charts are
displayed in full color with high-resolution. The MFD depiction shows the aircraft position on the
moving map in the planview of approach charts and on airport diagrams. Airport Hot Spots are
outlined in magenta.
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when
the current position is within the boundaries of the chart. Inset boxes are not considered within the
chart boundaries. Therefore, when the aircraft symbol reaches a chart boundary line, or inset box, the
aircraft symbol is removed from the display.
The following figure shows examples of off-scale areas, indicated by the grey shading. Note, the grey
shading is for illustrative purposes only and will not appear on the published chart or MFD display.
These off-scale areas appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the depicted
geographical position of this information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual
geographic position. Therefore, when the aircraft symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft
position indicated is relative to the chart planview, not to the off-scale area.
Hazard Avoidance
Off-Scale
Area
Automatic Flight Control
System
Off-Scale
Areas
Additional Features
Figure 8-4 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.
Appendices
The ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen, Inc. Available data includes:
•
Arrivals (STAR)
•
Departure Procedures (DP)
•
Approaches
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
463
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
•
Airport Diagrams
•
NOTAMs
Flight Instruments
Terminal Procedures Charts
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
Engine Indication System
While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page,
select the Charts Softkey.
Or:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Options Menu to Show Chart.
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
2) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
Hazard Avoidance
Navigation Map Page Options Menu
Waypoint Airport Information Page Options Menu
Automatic Flight Control
System
Figure 8-5 Option Menus
On the Waypoint Airport Information Page Options Menu, select the desired chart and
press the ENT Key to display the chart.
Additional Features
When no terminal procedure chart is available, the banner CHART NOT AVAILABLE
appears on the screen. The CHART NOT AVAILABLE banner does not refer to the
FliteCharts subscription, but rather the availability of a particular airport chart selection
or procedure for a selected airport.
Appendices
Figure 8-6 Chart Not Available Banner
Index
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an
individual chart), the banner UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
464
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
System Overview
Figure 8-7 Unable To Display Chart Banner
Audio Panel and CNS
The chart shown is one associated with the ‘WPT-Airport Information’ page. Usually this
is the airport runway diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off
Minimums or Alternate Minimums are available, that page appears. If Airport
Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport is shown.
Engine Indication System
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active
flight plan, the chart appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not
flying to a direct-to destination, selecting the Charts Softkey displays the chart for the
nearest airport, if available.
Flight Instruments
When a chart is not available by selecting the Charts Softkey or selecting a Page Menu
Option, charts may be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan
Pages.
Selecting a chart
Nearest Airports’ Page, press the Chart Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart
is displayed on the ‘WPT-Airport Information’ Page.
Flight Management
1) While viewing the ‘Map-Navigation Map’ Page, ‘FPL-Active Flight Plan’ Page, or ‘NRST-
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
Box. (Press the APR Softkey if the ‘Approach’ Box is not currently shown).
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
Automatic Flight Control
System
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
Hazard Avoidance
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the ‘Approach’
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Approach’ Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
Additional Features
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
465
Flight Instruments
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Select Desired
Approach Chart
from Menu
Chart Scale
Flight Management
Figure 8-8 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
Hazard Avoidance
While the Approaches Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the softkeys are blank.
Once the desired chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart page
can be scrolled using the Joystick. Pressing the Joystick centers the chart on the
screen.
Automatic Flight Control
System
The aircraft symbol is shown on the chart only if the chart is to scale and the aircraft
position is within the boundaries of the chart. The aircraft symbol is not displayed when
the Aircraft Not Shown Icon appears. If the Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO
SCALE, the aircraft symbol is not shown. The Aircraft Not Shown Icon may appear at
certain times, even if the chart is displayed to scale.
Additional Features
Pressing the Chart Softkey switches between the ChartView diagram and the
associated map in the WPT page group. In the example shown, the Chart Softkey
switches between the Atlanta, GA(KPDK) Airport Diagram and the navigation map on
the ‘WPT–Airport Information’ page.
Pressing the Info 1 or Info 2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram when the view is
on a different chart. If the displayed chart is the airport diagram, the Info 1 or Info 2
Softkey has no effect. The aircraft position is shown in magenta on the ChartView
diagrams when the location of the aircraft is within the chart boundaries.
Index
Appendices
Another source for additional airport information is from the Info Box above the chart
for certain airports. This information source is not related to the Info 1 or Info 2
Softkey. When the Info Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the softkeys are blank. The
Atlanta, GA airport has five additional charts offering information; the Airport Diagram,
Take-off Minimums, Class B Airspace, Airline Parking Gate Coordinates, and Airline
466
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Flight Instruments
In the example shown in following figure, the Class B Chart is selected. Pressing the
ENT Key displays the Charlotte Class B Airspace Chart.
System Overview
Parking Gate Location. (The numbers in parentheses after the chart name are Jeppesen
designators.)
- Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
- Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
Engine Indication System
- Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
- Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, and
includes weather data such as METAR and TAF from the data link receiver, when
available. Weather information is available only when a data link receiver is installed
and the data link weather subscription is current when required.
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
- Recent NOTAMS applicable to the current ChartView cycle are included in the
ChartView database. Pressing the NOTAM Softkey shows the local NOTAM information
for selected airports, when available. When NOTAMS are not available, the NOTAM
Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled. The NOTAM Softkey may appear on the
Airport Information Page and all of the chart page selections. Pressing the NOTAM
Softkey again removes the NOTAMS information.
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Figure 8-9 Airport Information Page, Class B Chart Selected from INFO View
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Index
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
467
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Flight Instruments
NOTE: Only NOTAMs applicable to specific information conveyed on the displayed Jeppesen
chart are available when the NOTAM Softkey is pressed. There may be other NOTAMs
available pertaining to the flight that may not be displayed. Contact Jeppesen for more
information regarding Jeppesen database published NOTAMs.
Chart Options
Engine Indication System
Pressing the CHRTOpt Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options
level.
Pressing the All Softkey shows the complete approach chart on the screen.
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Pressing the Header Softkey shows the header view (approach chart briefing strip) on
the screen.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Approach
Chart
Briefing Strip
Figure 8-10 Approach Information Page, Header View
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Pressing the Plan Softkey shows the approach chart two dimensional plan view.
468
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
System Overview
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Approach
Chart Plan
View
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Figure 8-11 Approach Information Page, Plan View
Pressing the Profile Softkey displays the approach chart descent profile strip.
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Approach
Chart Descent
Profile Strip
Additional Features
Appendices
Figure 8-12 Approach Information Page, Profile View, Full Screen Width
Pressing the Minimums Softkey displays the minimum descent altitude/visibility strip at
the bottom of the approach chart.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
469
Flight Instruments
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Minimum
Descent
Altitude/
Visibility Strip
Flight Management
Figure 8-13 Approach Information Page, Minimums View, Full Screen Width
If the chart scale has been adjusted to view a small area of the chart, pressing the Fit
WDTH Softkey changes the chart size to fit the available screen width.
Hazard Avoidance
Pressing the Full SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data
window to the right.
Selecting Additional Information
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the Full SCN Softkey to display the
Automatic Flight Control
System
information windows (Airport, Info).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Airport, Info, Runways, or Frequencies Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Info Box choices. If multiple choices are
Additional Features
available, scroll to the desired choice with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key
to complete the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
Appendices
Pressing the Back Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection
softkeys. The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting full screen On or Off:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu’
Options.
Index
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Chart Setup’ Menu Option and press the
ENT Key.
470
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
System Overview
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the ‘Full Screen’ and ‘Color Scheme’
Options.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the ‘On’ and ‘Off’ ‘Full Screen’ Options.
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Full Screen On/Off Selection
Flight Management
Chart Setup Option
Figure 8-14 Page Menus
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu Options.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT
Key.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use
Appendices
the small FMS Knob to change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/
night crossover point based on the percentage of backlighting intensity. For example, if
the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display backlight
reaches 15% of full brightness.
Additional Features
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the Color Scheme Option.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
Hazard Avoidance
ChartView can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing.
The Day View offers a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View
gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark environment. When the Chart Setup
Box is selected the MFD softkeys are blank.
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may
be accomplished by selecting another page or changing the display range.
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Index
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
471
AIRPORT DIRECTORY
The Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association (AOPA) and optional AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory
databases offer detailed information regarding services, hours of operation, lodging options, and more.
This information is viewed on the Airport Information Page by pressing the Info Softkey until Info 2 is
displayed.
Both Airport Directories are available for downloading at flygarmin.com. However, copy only one of
the databases to the Supplemental Data Card. The system cannot recognize both databases
simultaneously.
Selecting the Airport Directory Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘WPT’ page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Airport Information Page. Initially, information
for the airport closest to the aircraft’s present position is displayed.
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
3) If necessary, press the Info softkey until Info 2 is displayed.
Appendices
IFR/VFR CHARTS
Index
Figure 8-15 AOPA Information on the Airport Information Page
The system can display GPS navigation information on a VFR chart, a low altitude IFR chart, or a
high altitude IFR chart, if installed. The information overlaid on the IFR/VFR Charts is selected and
setup on the Navigation Map, but the IFR/VFR charts will not display some of the selected items. Only
the following items will be overlaid on the chart:
472
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
•
Map Range (17 range choices from 1 nm to 150 nm)
•
Map Orientation (always North Up for IFR/VFR Charts)
•
Aircraft Icon (representing present position)
•
Wind Direction and Speed
•
Icons for enabled map features (Traffic only)
•
Flight Plan Legs
•
Track Vector
•
Runway extension
•
Missed Approach Preview
•
Intersections (only as part of active flight plan)
•
Visual Reporting Points
•
VNAV Constraints
•
Selected Altitude Intercept Arc
Flight Instruments
Map Pointer (distance and bearing to pointer, location of pointer, name, and other pertinent
information)
System Overview
•
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Map panning on the IFR/VFR Charts works the same as on the Navigation Map. Map range selected
on either the Navigation Map or the IFR/VFR Charts applies to both. However, if the range selected on
the Navigation Map it is not a valid chart range, the chart is shown with a range of 7.5 nm.
When different VFR charts exist for the same area the chart type will automatically display according
to the range chosen. For example, in an area where both a Sectional and a Terminal Area Chart (TAC)
are available, a range of 6 nm or more will show the Sectional chart. Once the range is decreased
below 6 nm, the system will automatically change the displayed chart from the Sectional to the TAC.
Due to the potential error involved with the electronic depiction of maps, charts will display a gray
‘circle of uncertainty’ centered upon the aircraft icon. The aircraft’s actual position can be anywhere
within the range of the gray circle. The range of the circle will change based on the chart displayed and
current zoom range.
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
473
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Navigation Data Bar
Page Title
Map Orientation
Flight Instruments
VFR Chart
Map Range
Engine Indication System
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
Active Flight Plan Leg
Audio Panel and CNS
Circle of Uncertainty
Figure 8-16 GPS Navigation Information on the VFR Chart
Navigation Data Bar
Page Title
Flight Management
Map Orientation
IFR Low Altitude
Chart
Map Range
Active Flight Plan Leg
Hazard Avoidance
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
Automatic Flight Control
System
Circle of Uncertainty
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Figure 8-17 GPS Navigation Information on the IFR Low Altitude Chart
474
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
System Overview
Navigation Data Bar
Page Title
Map Orientation
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
Flight Instruments
IFR High Altitude
Chart
Map Range
Active Flight Plan Leg
Engine Indication System
Circle of Uncertainty
Modifying the Chart Settings:
1) Press the MENU Key with the IFR Low / IFR High Chart displayed. The cursor flashes on
Flight Management
Map panning on the IFR/VFR Charts works the same as on the Navigation Map. Map range selected
on either the Navigation Map or the IFR/VFR Charts applies to both. However, if the range selected on
the Navigation Map it is not a valid chart range, the chart is shown with a range of 7.5 nm.
Audio Panel and CNS
Figure 8-18 GPS Navigation Information on the IFR High Altitude Chart
the ‘Settings’ option.
Hazard Avoidance
2) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘Color Scheme’ setting.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Day’, ‘Auto’, or ‘Night’. The IFR Chart display
changes to reflect the setting.
(sets value for automatic day/night switching).
Selecting the chart to display:
Automatic Flight Control
System
4) If ‘Auto’ was selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the backlight threshold field
1) Press the MENU Key with the ‘Map - IFR/VFR Charts’ Page displayed.
the ‘Display IFR High’ Field.
3) Press the ENT Key. The selected chart is displayed.
Additional Features
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Display VFR’ Field, the ‘Display IFR Low’ Field, or
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
475
8.4 DATABASE CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISIONS
Databases that may be available include FliteCharts, Obstacle, Terrain, IFR/VFR, Navigation,
ChartView, SafeTaxi, Airport Directory. Data is revised and expiration dates vary. Data is still viewable
during a period that extends from the cycle expiration date to the disables date. When turning on the
system, the Power-up Page displays the current status of the databases. As an example, see the table
below for the various FliteCharts Power-up Page displays and the definition of each. The expiration date
and disables date varies for each database.
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Example Power-up Page Display Text
Table 8-1 Database Power-up Page Annunciations
White text, such as ‘FliteCharts Data Expires’ plus a date, indicates the chart database is current.
Yellow text, such as ‘Chart data is out of date!’ or ‘FliteCharts Data: Disabled”, indicates charts are no
longer viewable and have expired.
Database time critical information can also be found on the ‘Aux - System Status’ page. The database
Region, Cycle number, Effective, Expires, and Disables dates of the subscription appear in either blue or
yellow text. Dates shown in blue are current data. Dates shown in yellow indicate the data is not within
the current subscription period.
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the Database window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the applicable database
information is shown.
Database cycle numbers are in a format such as YYTI or YYII, which are deciphered as follows:
YYTI
YY – Indicates the last two digits of the year (ex. 18 represents 2018)
T – Indicates the database type (ex. S is for SafeTaxi, D is for Airport Directory)
I – Indicates the numerical issue of the database for the year (ex. 5 is the fifth issue of the year)
YYII
YY – Indicates the last two digits of the year (ex. 18 represents 2018)
II – Indicates the numerical issue of the database for the year (ex. 05 is the fifth issue of the year)
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix for instructions on revising databases.
476
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
System Overview
Example Power-up Page Display Text Database Cycle Number Format Revision Cycle
YYTI
Not Applicable
YYBI
56 days
YYSI
56 days
YYDI
56 days
YYII
28 days
YYII
14 days
YYII
28 days
Flight Management
Not Applicable
Audio Panel and CNS
YYMI
Engine Indication System
28 days
Flight Instruments
YYII
Hazard Avoidance
Table 8-2 Database Cycle Number and Revision
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
477
8.5 WIFI CONNECTIONS
WIFI CONNECTIONS
The Flightstream 510 Data Link provides a high speed IEEE 802.11g WiFi data link between the
aircraft and a ground computer network while the aircraft is on the ground and located within range of
the network.
The system is capable of WEP64, WEP128, WPA-PSK, and WPA2-PSK encryption formats. WPAEnterprise and WPA2-Enterprise are not supported. Connections that require web proxies, captive
portals, or other elements that require user credentials, including a user name and password or a
redemption or access code; or require action such as accepting a user agreement, are not supported.
Control and monitoring of Wi-Fi functions are accomplished through the ‘Aux-Maintenance WiFi
Setup’ Page.
Viewing the WiFi Setup Page:
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux-Maintenance WiFi Setup’ Page.
Flight Management
Setting up a new WiFi connection:
1) Press the Avail Softkey on the MFD. A list of available networks will be displayed in the
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Available Networks window. Signal strength is shown for each network, as well as
security requirements and whether the network has been saved in the system’s
memory.
Appendices
Figure 8-19 Available WI-FI Networks
2) If necessary, press the Rescan Softkey to have the system scan again for available
networks.
Index
Or:
478
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
System Overview
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Rescan Available Networks’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
Flight Instruments
3) Press the FMS Knob to place the cursor in the list of networks.
4) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired network.
5) Press the Connect Softkey.
Engine Indication System
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Connect to Selected Network’.
Audio Panel and CNS
c) Press the ENT Key.
6) If the network is secured, a window will be displayed in order to enter the necessary
Flight Management
passcode. Use the GCU 479 Alphabetic Keys to enter the desired alpha numeric
characters. Press the CapsLock Softkey to enter upper case letters. If there is no
security associated with the network, proceed to step 9.
7) Press the ENT Key. ‘OK’ will be highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key again.
9) The Save Settings window is now displayed with the cursor highlighting ‘Save
10) The selected network can be saved to system memory to make re-connection easier at
a later time.
1) While viewing list of saved networks, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight the network to be edited.
3) Pressing the ENT Key at this point will check or uncheck the Auto Connect checkbox.
Additional Features
When a checkmark is present, the system will automatically connect to the network
when within range.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Editing a saved network:
Hazard Avoidance
Connection’.
4) Press the Edit Softkey. The cursor now appears in the Connection Settings window.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the network attribute to be edited.
Appendices
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to begin editing the field.
7) When the entry is complete, press the ENT Key.
8) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key until ‘Save’ is highlighted.
9) Press the ENT Key.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
479
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Disconnecting a WiFi network:
Press the DISCNCT Softkey.
Flight Instruments
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Disconnect From Network’.
Engine Indication System
c) Press the ENT Key.
Deleting a saved WiFi network:
1) While viewing the list of saved networks, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight the network to be deleted.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
3) Press the Delete Softkey. The selected network is removed from the list.
480
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
System Overview
8.6 SIRIUSXM RADIO ENTERTAINMENT
The service is activated by providing SiriusXM Satellite Radio with either one or two
coded IDs, depending on the equipment. Either the Audio Radio ID or the Data Radio
ID, or both, must be provided to SiriusXM Satellite Radio to activate the entertainment
subscription.
Hazard Avoidance
These IDs are located:
Flight Management
It is not required to activate both the entertainment and weather service subscriptions
with the GDL 69A SiriusXM. Either or both services can be activated. SiriusXM Satellite
Radio uses one or both of the coded IDs to send an activation signal that, when
received by the GDL 69A SiriusXM, allows it to play entertainment programming.
Audio Panel and CNS
Activating SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services:
Engine Indication System
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment feature of the GDL69A SiriusXM Data Link
Receiver is available for the pilot’s and passengers’ enjoyment. The GDL 69A SiriusXM can receive
SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment services at any altitude throughout the Continental U.S.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances without having to
constantly search for new stations. Based on signals from satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based
transmissions. SiriusXM Satellite Radio services are subscription-based. For more information on specific
service packages, visit www.SiriusXM.com.
Flight Instruments
NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for information about SiriusXM Weather
products.
??Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Aux page group
??Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux-Telephone’ or ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page.
Contact Cirrus Aircraft Customer Service if the Data Radio ID and the Audio Radio ID
cannot be located.
1) Contact SiriusXM Satellite Radio. Follow the instructions provided by SiriusXM Satellite
Additional Features
Radio services.
Automatic Flight Control
System
??If necessary, select the SMS Softkey to display the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page.
2) Select the Auxiliary Page Group.
3) Select the ‘Aux - XM Radio’ page.
4) Press the Info Softkey to display the ‘Aux-XM Information’ Page.
Appendices
5) Verify that the desired services are activated.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
481
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Audio
Radio ID
Flight Instruments
Data
Radio ID
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Weather
Products
Window
Figure 8-20 XM Information Page
6) If SiriusXM Weather services have not been activated, all the weather product boxes are
Flight Management
blank on the XM Information Page and a yellow Activation Required message is
displayed in the center of the Weather Data Link Page (Map Page Group). The Service
Class refers to the groupings of weather products available for subscription.
The XM Radio Page provides information and control of the audio entertainment features of the
SiriusXM Satellite Radio.
Selecting the XM Radio Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Auxiliary Page Group.
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
USING SIRIUSXM RADIO
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the displayed ‘Aux — XM Information’ Page.
3) Press the Radio Softkey to show the ‘Aux — XM Radio’ Page where audio
entertainment is controlled.
ACTIVE CHANNEL AND CHANNEL LIST
The Active Channel Box on the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected channel that the
SiriusXM Radio is using.
The Channels List Box of the XM Radio Page shows a list of the available channels for the selected
category. Channels can be stepped through one at a time or may be selected directly by channel
number.
Selecting a channel from the channel list:
1) While on the ‘Aux-XM Radio’ Page, press the Channel Softkey.
Index
2) Press the CH+ Softkey to go up through the list in the ‘Channels’ Box, or move down
the list with the CH– Softkey.
482
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
1) Press the FMS Knob to highlight the channel list and turn the large FMS Knob to scroll
System Overview
Or:
through the channels.
Flight Instruments
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
Selecting a channel directly:
1) While on the ‘Aux-XM Radio’ Page, press the Channel Softkey.
Engine Indication System
2) Press the Direct CH Softkey. The channel number in the ‘Active Channel’ Box is
highlighted.
3) Press the Alphabetic Keys on the GCU 479 to directly select the desired channel
number.
CATEGORY
Selecting a category:
Flight Management
The Category Box of the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected category of audio. Categories
of channels such as jazz, rock, or news can be selected to list the available channels for a type of music
or other contents. One of the optional categories is Presets to view channels that have been
programmed.
Audio Panel and CNS
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
1) Press the Category Softkey on the ‘Aux-XM Radio’ Page.
Hazard Avoidance
2) Press the CAT + and CAT - Softkeys to cycle through the categories.
Or:
PRESETS
Setting a preset channel number:
Additional Features
Up to 15 channels from any category can be assigned a preset number. The preset channels are
selected by pressing the Presets and More Softkeys. Then the preset channel can be selected directly
and added to the channel list for the Presets category.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Categories list. Highlight the desired category
with the small FMS Knob and press the ENT Key. Selecting All Categories places all
channels in the list.
1) On the ‘Aux-XM Radio’ Page, while listening to an ‘Active Channel’ that is wanted for a
Appendices
preset, press the Presets Softkey to access the first five preset channels (Preset 1 Preset 5).
2) Press the More Softkey to access the next five channels (Preset 6 – Preset 10), and
again to access the last five channels (Preset 11 – Preset 15). Pressing the More
Softkey repeatedly cycles through the preset channels.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
483
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
3) Press any one of the (Preset 1 - Preset 15) softkeys to assign a number to the active
channel.
Pressing the Back Softkey, or 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, returns the system to the
top level softkeys.
VOLUME
Radio volume is shown as a percentage. Volume level is controlled by selecting the Volume Softkey,
which brings up the Mute Softkey and the volume increase and decrease softkeys.
Adjusting the volume
1) With the XM Radio Page displayed, select the Volume Softkey.
2) Select the VOL – Softkey to reduce volume or select the VOL + Softkey to increase
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
4) Press the Set Softkey on the desired channel number to save the channel as a preset.
Flight Management
volume. Volume can also be adjusted with the GMA 350/350c Volume Knob when
MUSIC 1 or MUSIC 2 Buttons are pressed.
Figure 8-21 Volume Control
SiriusXM Radio volume may also be adjusted on each passenger headset.
Hazard Avoidance
Muting SiriusXM audio:
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Refer to the the GMA 350c Audio Panel Controls in Section 4 for SiriusXM muting
instructions.
484
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
System Overview
8.7 FLIGHT DATA LOGGING
FLIGHT DATA LOGGING
Active Waypoint Bearing (degrees mag.)
•
UTC Offset (HH:MM)
•
Mag. Variation (degrees)
•
Active Waypoint Identifier
•
Voltage 1 (volts)
•
Voltage 2 (volts)
•
Amps 1 (amps)
•
AFCS On ( 0 – false, 1 – true)
•
Latitude (degrees)
•
AFCS Roll Mode (e.g. HDG, LOC, GPS, VOR, ROL)
•
Longitude (degrees)
•
Right Fuel Qty (gals or lbs)
•
Left Fuel Qty (gals or lbs)
•
EGT (1–6 deg. F)
•
CHT (1–6 deg. F)
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Index
•
Appendices
Active Waypoint Distance (nm)
Additional Features
•
Automatic Flight Control
System
Local Time (HH:MM:SS)
Hazard Avoidance
•
Flight Management
Local Date (YYYY-MM-DD)
Audio Panel and CNS
•
Engine Indication System
The Flight Data Logging feature will automatically store critical flight and engine data on an SD data
card (up to 16GB) inserted into the top card slot of the MFD. Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be
recorded for each 1GB of available space on the card.
Data is written to the SD card once each second while the MFD is powered on. All flight data logged
on a specific date is stored in a file named in a format which includes the date, time, and nearest airport
identifier. The file is created automatically each time the system is powered on, provided an SD card has
been inserted.
The status of the Flight Data Logging feature can be viewed on the ‘Aux-Utility’ Page. If no SD card has
been inserted, “NO CARD” is displayed. When data is being written to the SD card, “LOGGING DATA”
is displayed.
The .csv file may be viewed with Microsoft Excel® or other spreadsheet applications.
The following is a list of data parameters the system is capable of logging.
Flight Instruments
NOTE: Some aircraft installations may not provide all aircraft/engine data capable of being
logged by the system.
485
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
•
TIT (1 &2 deg. F)
•
AFCS Pitch Mode (e.g. ALT, GS, GP, VS)
•
Barometric Altitude (feet)
•
Altimeter Setting (in. Hg.)
•
GPS Altitude (ft)
•
Pitch Commanded (degrees)
•
Roll Commanded (degrees)
•
OAT (deg. C)
•
True Airspeed (kts)
•
Selected Vertical Speed (fpm)
•
Vertical Speed (fpm)
•
HSI Selection (GPS,NAV1/2)
•
GPS Fix (e.g. 2D, 3D, 3DDiff)
•
Indicated Airspeed (kts)
•
Horizontal Alert Limit (HAL, meters)
•
Gnd Speed (kts)
•
Vertical Alert Limit (VAL, meters)
•
Vertical Speed (fpm)
•
NAV1 Frequency (MHz)
•
NAV2 Frequency (MHz)
•
Horizontal Protection Level (HPLWAS, meters)
•
Pitch (degrees)
•
Roll (degrees)
•
Horizontal Protection Level (HPLFD, meters)
•
Vertical Protection Level (VPLWAS, meters)
•
COM1 Frequency (MHz)
•
COM2 Frequency (MHz)
•
Lateral Acceleration (g)
•
CDI Deflection (0.0 to 1.0)
•
VDI Deflection (0.0 to 1.0)
•
Normal Acceleration (g)
•
Heading (degrees magnetic)
•
Course (deg)
486
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Wind Speed (kts)
•
Gnd Trk (degrees magnetic)
•
Fuel Flow (gph)
•
Oil Temperature (deg. F)
•
Oil Pressure (psi)
•
Engine Speed (rpm)
•
Power (%)
The file containing the recorded data will appear in the format shown in the following figure. This file
can be imported into most computer spreadsheet applications.
Local 24hr Time
HHMMSS
Audio Panel and CNS
Local Date
YYMMDD
Engine Indication System
•
Flight Instruments
Wind Direction (degrees mag.)
System Overview
•
Nearest Airport
(A blank will be
inserted if no
airport is found)
Flight Management
log_180210_104506_KIXD.csv
Figure 8-22 Log File Format
Data logging status can be monitored on the ‘Aux-Utility’ Page.
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
487
8.8 CONNEXT SETUP
The Connext Setup Page allows for setting up the installed optional Flight Stream device for a
Bluetooth connection between the system and a mobile device running the Garmin Pilot™ application.
The mobile device must be ‘paired’ with the system in order to use the various functions. Pairing is
accomplished by first placing the system in pairing mode by displaying the Connext Setup Page. The
system is ‘discoverable’ whenever this page is displayed. The pairing operation is completed from the
mobile device and the Garmin Pilot application. See the device Bluetooth pairing instructions and the
connection instructions in the Garmin Pilot application.
Viewing the Connext Setup Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Connext Setup page.
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Changing the Bluetooth Name:
1) While viewing the Connext Setup Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
Flight Management
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘Bluetooth Name’ field.
3) Enter the desired name by using the large FMS Knob to select the character field, and
the small FMS Knob select the desired alphanumeric character for that field.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is removed and the new name is displayed.
Hazard Avoidance
Enabling/Disabling Flight Plan Importing from Garmin Pilot:
1) While viewing the Connext Setup Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘Flight Plan Import’ field.
Automatic Flight Control
System
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Enabling/Disabling WiFi Database Importing from Garmin Pilot:
1) While viewing the Connext Setup Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
Additional Features
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘WiFi Database Import’ field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Appendices
Enabling/Disabling Automatic Reconnection of a Specific Paired Device:
1) While viewing the Connext Setup Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
Index
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired paired device.
488
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
the system to automatically connect to a previously paired device when detected.
System Overview
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’. Selecting ‘Enabled’ allows
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Flight Instruments
Remove a Specific Paired Device from the List of Paired Devices:
1) While viewing the Connext Setup Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired paired device.
Engine Indication System
3) Press the Remove Softkey. A confirmation screen is displayed.
4) If necessary, turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Yes’.
5) Press the ENT Key to remove the device from the list of paired devices.
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
489
8.9 SURFACE WATCH
SURFACEWATCH™
NOTE: The SafeTaxi database must be available to provide information regarding taxiways,
aprons and other objects in the airport environment.
NOTE: The SurfaceWatch feature can only operate on runways for which threshold positions
are defined in the navigation database. Such runways can typically be identified by viewing
them on the ‘MAP-Navigation Map’ page or the ‘WPT-Airport Information’ page. Only
runways with threshold positions defined are shown graphically on those pages.
The SurfaceWatch feature provides visual annunciations to help the flight crew maintain situational
awareness and avoid potential runway incursions and excursions during ground and air operations in
the airport environment. The SurfaceWatch feature is comprised of the following key components:
•
Alert Annunciations
Taxiway Takeoff
Runway Too Short (during takeoff or landing)
Check Runway (during takeoff or landing)
Taxiway Landing
•
Runway distance remaining
•
Provides information on the Primary Flight Display (PFD) that contains runway and taxiway
information that changes as the aircraft moves through the airport environment
The SurfaceWatch feature is not available in Reversionary Mode.
Inhibit/Uninhibit SurfaceWatch:
1) Select the ‘Aux - System Setup 1’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the SurfaceWatch field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to toggle the SurfaceWatch alerts on or off.
INFORMATION BOX
The SurfaceWatch™ Information Box is displayed on the PFD. It contains runway and taxiway
information that dynamically changes as the aircraft moves through the airport environment. The
information that is displayed in the Information Box is the aircraft’s relative position to nearby aprons,
taxiways, and runways.
There are three components to the SurfaceWatch™ Information Box. These components are
Currently Occupied, Approaching, and Crossing Runways.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
490
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
System Overview
Crossing Runways
Currently Occupied
Approaching
Flight Instruments
Figure 8-23 Information Types Displayed in the Information Box
APPROACHING COMPONENT
The SurfaceWatch alert annunciations are displayed in the central portion of the PFD. The alert
annunciations are accompanied by a corresponding voice alert.
Additional Features
ALERTS
Automatic Flight Control
System
This component lists the runways, from closest to furthest, that are ‘CROSSING’ the runway the
aircraft currently occupies. The distance to each runway is also shown in order of closest distance.
Runways behind the aircraft are not depicted.
The Crossing Runways component is shown in conjunction with the Currently Occupied
component of the Information Box.
Hazard Avoidance
CROSSING RUNWAYS
Flight Management
This component indicates the aircraft is ‘APPROACHING’ the indicated apron, taxiway, or runway.
In the following figure, the aircraft is currently ‘APPROACHING’ taxiway E (TWY E). The distance to
the taxiway is also shown.
When the aircraft is taxiing and approaching an intersection of multiple taxiways, the taxiway
identifiers will be listed in order of proximity and the distance to the nearest is displayed.
When the aircraft is taxiing and crossing an intersection of multiple taxiways, ‘CROSSING’ will be
displayed and no distance will be shown.
Audio Panel and CNS
This component indicates the aircraft is ‘ON’ the indicated apron, taxiway, or runway. The aircraft
is currently ‘ON’ runway 04 right (RWY 04R). The remaining runway distance is also shown when
the aircraft is situated on and aligned with a runway.
If the aircraft is airborne and approaching an airport, ‘AIRBORNE TO’ and the destination airport
identifier will be displayed.
Information regarding non-manuevering areas not labeled on the SafeTaxi diagram will not be
displayed.
Engine Indication System
CURRENTLY OCCUPIED
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
491
Description
“Taxiway”
Flight Instruments
SufaceWatch Annunciation
Issued when the aircraft is
taking off from a non-runway
(e.g. a taxiway)
“Runway too Short”
Issued when the aircraft is
taking off from, or landing on,
a runway with a length less
than needed as entered by the
crew.
“Check Runway”
Issued when the aircraft is
taking off from, or landing on,
a runway different than that
entered by the crew.
“Taxiway”
Issued when the aircraft is
landing on a non-runway (e.g.
a taxiway).
Table 8-3 SuraceWatch Alert Annunciations
TAKEOFF ALERTS
The Takeoff phase-of-flight, as determined by the system, must be valid in order for the system to
issue Takeoff Alerts.
TAXIWAY TAKEOFF
The Taxiway Takeoff alert is issued when the aircraft attempts to takeoff from a non-runway (e.g. a
taxiway) or the aircraft is not aligned with a runway.
In addition to the visual and voice alerts, the Information Box contains a textual description of the
currently occupied taxiway (or other maneuvering area) and potentially the next area (apron or
maneuvering area) to be occupied (based on aircraft heading and the airport geometry) and the
distance to that area.
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Associated Voice Alert
Engine Indication System
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
RUNWAY TOO SHORT
The Runway Too Short (during takeoff) alert is issued when the aircraft attempts to takeoff from a
runway and the remaining runway length is less than the required length. The insufficient runway
length condition is determined based on aircraft current position during the takeoff roll and the
required takeoff distance information entered on the Takeoff Data Screen.
Index
Appendices
Figure 8-24 Typical Taxiway Information Displayed in the Information Box
492
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
LANDING ALERTS
TAXIWAY LANDING
Hazard Avoidance
The Taxiway Landing alert is issued when the aircraft attempts to land on a non-runway (e.g. a
taxiway) or the aircraft is not aligned with a runway.
In addition to the visual and voice alert, the Information Box will display the destination airport
identifier and the text “APPROACHING TWY” to indicate a non-runway landing is being attempted.
Flight Management
The On-Final phase-of-flight, as determined by the system, must be valid in order for the system to
issue Landing Alerts.
Audio Panel and CNS
The Check Runway alert is issued when the aircraft attempts to takeoff from a runway that does
not match the departure runway entered in the Takeoff Data Screen.
In addition to the visual and voice alert, the Information Box contains a textual description of the
currently occupied runway.
Engine Indication System
CHECK RUNWAY
Flight Instruments
Figure 8-25 Typical Runway Information Displayed in the Information Box
System Overview
Note that while the Runway Too Short alert may be issued for any runway from which the aircraft
is taking off, the system will always calculate the runway length for the specific runway entered in
the Takeoff Data.
In addition to the visual and voice alert, the Information Box will contain a textual description of
the currently occupied runway and the remaining runway length as shown in the following figure.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Figure 8-26 Typical Information displayed During a Taxiway Landing Alert
Appendices
The Runway Too Short alert is issued when the aircraft attempts to land on a runway where the
remaining runway length is less than the required landing runway length entered in the Landing
Data Screen.
Note that while the Runway Too Short alert may be issued for any runway with which aircraft is
aligned, the system will always calculate the runway length for the specific runway entered in
entered in the Landing Data Screen.
In addition to the visual and voice alert, the Information Box will display the destination airport
identifier and the text “APPROACHING REMAINING” to indicate a the remaining runway length as
indicated in following figure.
Additional Features
RUNWAY TOO SHORT
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
493
Figure 8-27 Typical Information Displayed During a Runway Too Short Alert
CHECK RUNWAY
The Check Runway alert is issued when the aircraft attempts to land on a runway that does not
match the arrival runway specified in the Landing Data.
Additionally, the Information Box will display the destination airport identifier, the runway with
which the aircraft is aligned, and the distance to the runway see following figure.
Figure 8-28 Typical Information Displayed During a Check Runway Alert
SURFACEWATCH SETUP
Origin/destination airport, runway and distance data entered integrates with SurfaceWatch
technology to alert the flight crew to a runway too short for takeoff/landing, or to advise of a potential
taxiway takeoff/landing. The runway selected in SurfaceWatch Setup appears on the airport diagram in
cyan, and appears outlined in cyan on the synthetic vision representation of the runway on the PFD.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
494
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
System Overview
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Figure 8-29 SurfaceWatch Setup Page (MFD)
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
495
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-30 SurfaceWatch Info and Cyan Runway Outline (PFD)
Entering Origin/Destination Airport:
Hazard Avoidance
1) Select the ‘FPL - SurfaceWatch Setup’ Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob if necessary to highlight the Origin or Destination Airport
field.
Automatic Flight Control
System
4) Use the FMS Knobs or the Keypad to input the desired Origin or Destination Airport.
Selecting Origin/Destination Runway:
1) Select the ‘FPL - SurfaceWatch Setup’ Page.
Additional Features
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob if necessary to highlight the Runway or Landing Runway field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired available Runway or Landing Runway. As
the small FMS Knob is turned, the preview of the selected runway or landing runway is
also displayed.
Appendices
Selecting Required Takeoff/Landing Distance:
1) Select the ‘FPL - SurfaceWatch Setup’ Page.
Index
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
496
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
System Overview
3) Turn the large FMS Knob if necessary to highlight the ‘REQD Takeoff DIS’ or ‘REQD
Landing DIS’ field.
4) Use the FMS Knob or the Keypad to enter the required takeoff or landing distance.
Flight Instruments
Upon pressing the FMS Knob and committing the required takeoff or landing distance,
the Runway Length field will turn amber if an insufficient runway length exists.
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
497
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.10 SATELLITE TELEPHONE AND SMS MESSAGING
The GSR 56 Iridium Transceiver provides an airborne low speed data link, Iridium Satellite Telephone
service, and Short Message Service (SMS).
The telephone is available to the flight crew through the audio panel and headsets.
Registering With Garmin Connext
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
NOTE: An account must be established to access the Iridium satellite network for voice/SMS.
Audio Panel and CNS
A subscriber account must be established prior to using the Iridium Satellite System.
Before setting up an Iridium account, obtain the serial number of the Iridium
Transceiver (GSR1) and the System ID by selecting the ‘Aux- System Status’ Page.
Contact Garmin at www.flyGarmin.com.
Disabling/enabling telephone and low speed data services:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux-Telephone’ Page.
Flight Management
3) Press the MENU Key. The Page Menu window is now displayed.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
4) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Disable Iridium Transmission’ in the menu list.
Additional Features
Figure 8-31 Select Disable Iridium Transmission
5) Press the ENT Key. The Iridium transceiver is now disabled.
6) To enable the Iridium transceiver, repeat steps 1 through 3, then select ‘Enable Iridium
Transceiver’.
The pilot or copilot can place and answer calls on the Iridium satellite network. Control and
monitoring of telephone functions are accomplished through the ‘Aux-Telephone’ Page.
Index
Appendices
TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION
498
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
System Overview
Viewing the Telephone Page
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - Telephone’ or ‘Aux - Text Messaging’
3) If necessary, select the TEL Softkey to display the ‘Aux-Telephone’ Page.
Internal
Phone
External
Phone
Description
Phone is idle
Engine Indication System
The phone status display gives a graphical representation of the current disposition of
voice and/or data transmissions.
Flight Instruments
Page.
Audio Panel and CNS
Phone is ringing
Phone has a dial tone (off hook) or connected to another phone
Flight Management
Phone dialed is busy
Phone is dialing another phone
Hazard Avoidance
Phone has failed
Phone Status not known
Automatic Flight Control
System
Phone is disabled
Phone is reserved for data transmission
Additional Features
Calling other phone or incoming call from other phone
Other phone is on hold
Phones are connected
Telephone Symbols
Appendices
CONTACTS
The names, telephone number, and email addresses can be saved in a list of contacts for easy use
when making telephone calls.
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Index
Entering a new contact:
499
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
1) With the ‘Aux - Telephone’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
2) If necessary, turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘New Entry’.
Flight Instruments
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves the ‘Name’ field of the ‘Contact Details’ window.
4) Enter the desired name of the new contact. Entry can be accomplished through the
alphanumeric keys on the MFD Controller, or the FMS Knobs on the controller or the
MFD.
Engine Indication System
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the ‘Phone Number’ field.
6) Enter the desired telephone number. Entry can be accomplished through the
alphanumeric keys on the MFD Controller, or the FMS Knobs on the controller or the
MFD.
Audio Panel and CNS
7) Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the ‘Email’ field.
8) Enter the desired email address. Entry can be accomplished through the alphanumeric
keys on the MFD Controller, or the FMS Knobs on the controller or the MFD.
9) Press the ENT Key. The Save button is highlighted.
Flight Management
10) Press the ENT Key. The new contact entry is added to the list of saved contacts.
Deleting a contact:
1) With the ‘Aux - Telephone’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
Hazard Avoidance
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired contact name.
3) Select the Delete Softkey. A confirmation window is displayed.
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the selected contact.
Figure 8-32 Editing a Contact
Index
Editing a contact:
500
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired contact name.
System Overview
1) With the ‘Aux - Telephone’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
3) Select the Edit Softkey. The cursor is placed in the ‘Name’ field. Enter the desired
4) Press the ENT Key when each field is complete. The Save Button is now highlighted.
INCOMING CALLS
1) Answering an incoming call in the cockpit:
Flight Management
1) Press the Phone Key on the appropriate audio panel to activate audio if not already
Audio Panel and CNS
When viewing MFD pages other than the ‘Aux-Telephone’ Page, a pop-up alert will be displayed and
an aural alert “Incoming Call” will be heard. If the incoming call is an Iridium network call, Iridium
will be displayed. The pop-up alert may be inhibited at times, such as during takeoff. In addition to
the pop-up alert, a ringing phone symbol will be displayed to the right of the MFD page title. Also, the
voice alert “Incoming Call” will be heard on the selected cockpit audio.
Engine Indication System
5) Press the ENT Key to save the changes.
Flight Instruments
changes. Entry can be accomplished through the alphanumeric keys on the MFD
Controller, or the FMS Knobs on the controller or the MFD.
selected.
2) Select the Answer Softkey on the MFD.
2) OR
NOTE: The Push-to-Talk switch is not utilized for telephone communication. The microphone
is active after selecting the Answer Softkey, and stays active until the call is terminated.
Hazard Avoidance
While viewing the ‘Aux-Telephone’ Page
Automatic Flight Control
System
1) Press thePhone Key on the appropriate audio panel to activate audio if not already
selected.
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu..
Additional Features
3) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Answer Incoming Call’..
4) Press the ENT Key
Selecting the Ignore Softkey will extinguish the pop-up window and leave the call
unanswered. Selecting the Phone Softkey will display the ‘Aux-Telephone’ Page
allowing additional call information to be viewed before answering.
Appendices
OUTGOING CALLS
Voice calls can be made from the cockpit to an external phone through the Iridium Satellite
Network.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
501
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Making an external call from the cockpit using the Iridium satellite network:
1) Press the Phone Key on the appropriate audio panel.
Flight Instruments
2) Select the Dial Softkey on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Iridium’.
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor has now moved to the phone number entry field.
Hazard Avoidance
Figure 8-33 Enter Phone Number
5) Enter the desired telephone number (country code first) by selecting the number
softkeys on the MFD or by pressing the numeric keys on the MFD Control Unit.
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
6) Press the ENT Key. ‘OK’ is highlighted.
Index
Figure 8-34 Make the Call
7) Press the ENT Key. The system will begin calling the number.
502
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
System Overview
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Flight Management
When the phone is answered, the connection is established. To exit the call, select the
Hangup Softkey.
Audio Panel and CNS
Figure 8-35 System is Making the Connection
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Figure 8-36 Phone is Answered, Connection is Complete
Making an external call from the cockpit by using the Contact List:
1) Press the TEL Key on the appropriate audio panel.
Appendices
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired contact name in the list of contacts.
4) Select the Call Softkey. The external call is initiated and the number associated with the
contact name is dialed.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
503
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
PLACING THE COCKPIT PHONE ON HOLD
Placing a call on hold:
Flight Instruments
Select the Hold Softkey on the MFD.
Or
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
Engine Indication System
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Put Current Call On Hold’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
The cockpit phone is now isolated from the call. This figure illustrates a call between
the cockpit and an external phone in which the cockpit phone has been put on hold.
Select the Hold Softkey again to resume the call.
Figure 8-37 Cockpit Phone on Hold
TEXT MESSAGING (SMS)
The pilot or copilot can send and receive text messages on the Iridium satellite network. Messages
may be sent to an email address or text message capable cellular telephone. Message length is limited
to 160 characters, including the email address.
The text messaging user interface is mainly through the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page.
Viewing the Text Messaging Page:
Appendices
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux-Telephone’ or ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page.
Index
3) If necessary, select the SMS Softkey to display the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page.
504
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
System Overview
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Figure 8-38 Text Messaging Page
Description
Message Symbol
Hazard Avoidance
Received text message that has not been opened
Received text message that has been opened
Automatic Flight Control
System
Saved text message, draft not sent
System is sending text message
Text message has been sent
System failed to send text message
Additional Features
Predefined text message
Text Message Symbols
VIEWING A TEXT MESSAGE WHEN RECEIVED
Appendices
When viewing MFD pages other than the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, a pop-up alert will be
displayed when a new text message is received.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
505
Flight Instruments
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
New Text Message Pop-up
New Text Message Symbol on MFD Page
Press the View Softkey to view the message. Pressing the Ignore Softkey will extinguish the pop-up
window and leave the text message unopened. Pressing the Ignore All Softkey will extinguish the popwindow and ignore all future incoming text messages. Pressing the SMS Softkey will display the ‘AuxText Messaging’ Page.
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Figure 8-39 New Text Message Received
Figure 8-40 Text Message Displayed from Pop-Up Alert
Index
Appendices
The pop-up alerts may be enabled or disabled through the Page Menu.
506
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
System Overview
Enabling/disabling incoming text message pop-up alerts:
1) With the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page displayed, press the MENU Key on the MFD to
display the Page Menu.
New Message Popups’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The pop-up alert will not be displayed when an incoming text
Flight Instruments
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Disable New Message Popups’ or ‘Enable
message is received.
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Figure 8-41 Disabling New Text Message Pop-Ups
Hazard Avoidance
REPLY TO A TEXT MESSAGE
After reading a text message, a reply may be sent.
Replying to a text message:
Automatic Flight Control
System
While viewing the text message, press the Reply Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Reply To Message’.
Additional Features
3) Press the ENT Key.
SENDING A TEXT MESSAGE
Text messages may be sent from the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page.
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
507
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Sending a new text message:
1) While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the New Softkey.
Flight Instruments
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Draft New Message’.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
c) Press the ENT Key.
Figure 8-42 Composing a New Text Message
2) The SMS Text Message Draft Window is now displayed with the cursor in the ‘To’ field.
Appendices
Additional Features
Enter the desired telephone number or email address. Entry can be accomplished
through the alphanumeric keys on the MFD Controller, or combination of the FMS
Knob on the controller and softkeys on the MFD. The FMS Knob is used to enter letters
and numbers, or numbers can be entered from the MFD by pressing the Numbers
Softkey. Press the CapsLock Softkey to create upper and lower case alpha characters.
Special characters can be accessed by pressing the Symbols Softkey.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the ‘Message’ field.
4) Enter the desired message using any combination of entry methods as described in step
Index
2.
508
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
6) Press the Send Softkey to send the message immediately, or press the Save Softkey to
Sending a New Text Message/Email to a Saved Contact:
1) With the ‘Aux - Telephone’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
3) Select either the Text Email Softkey to send to the email address saved for the contact
or Text Phone Softkey to send to the phone number saved for the contact. The cursor
is placed in the ‘To’ field. Confirm the contact you wish to send a message to by
pressing the ENT Key.
5) Confirm you wish to send the message by pressing the ENT Key with ‘Yes’ highlighted.
Select ‘No’ to return to the message entry field and either select the Cancel Softkey to
delete the message or select the Save Softkey to save the message as a draft.
Time and effort can be saved in typing text messages that are used repeatedly by saving these
messages as a predefined message.
1) While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the MENU Key to display the Page
Menu.
Hazard Avoidance
Creating a predefined text message:
Flight Management
PREDEFINED TEXT MESSAGES
Audio Panel and CNS
4) Enter the desired message, then press the ENT Key.
Engine Indication System
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired contact name.
Flight Instruments
save the message in Outbox for sending at a later time. Press the Cancel Softkey to
delete the message.
System Overview
5) Press the ENT Key.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Figure 8-43 Creating/Editing Predefined Messages
2) Turn either FMS Knob to select ‘Edit Predefined Messages’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Predefined Messages view is now displayed.
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Index
4) Press the New Softkey.
509
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
Flight Instruments
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Draft New Predefined Message’.
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
c) Press the ENT Key. The Predefined SMS Text Message Window is now displayed.
Figure 8-44 Composing a Predefined Message
5) The cursor is displayed in the ‘Title’ field. Enter the desired message title. Entry can be
Automatic Flight Control
System
accomplished through the alphanumeric keys on the MFD Controller, or combination of
the FMS Knob on the controller and softkeys on the MFD. The FMS Knob is used to
enter letters and numbers, or numbers can be entered from the MFD by pressing the
Numbers Softkey. Press the CapsLock Softkey to create upper and lower case alpha
characters. Special characters can be accessed by pressing the Symbols Softkey.
Additional Features
6) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the ‘Message’ field.
7) Enter the desired message using any combination of entry methods as described in step
5.
8) Press the ENT Key.
Appendices
9) Press the Save Softkey. The new predefined message is now shown in the displayed list.
Pressing the Cancel Softkey will delete the message without saving.
10) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
11) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Cancel Drafting Message’.
Index
12) Press the ENT Key.
510
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
System Overview
Sending a predefined text message:
1) While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the New Softkey.
2) The Predefined SMS Text Message Window is now displayed with the cursor in the ‘To’
4) Press the Predefined Softkey. The Predefined Message Menu Window is displayed.
Audio Panel and CNS
5) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired predefined message.
Engine Indication System
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the ‘Message’ field.
Flight Instruments
field. Enter the desired telephone number or email address. Entry can be accomplished
through the alphanumeric keys on the MFD Controller, or combination of the FMS
Knob on the controller and softkeys on the MFD. The FMS Knob is used to enter letters
and numbers, or numbers can be entered from the MFD by pressing the Numbers
Softkey. Press the CapsLock Softkey to create upper and lower case alpha characters.
Special characters can be accessed by pressing the Symbols Softkey.
6) Press the ENT Key. The predefined message text is inserted into the message field. If
desired, the message can be edited by using the FMS Knobs.
7) Press the ENT Key.
Flight Management
8) Press the Send Softkey to transmit the message.
TEXT MESSAGE BOXES
Show Inbox messages:
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message box selected for viewing is indicated at the bottom left
of the list window.
Additional Features
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Show Inbox Messages’.
Automatic Flight Control
System
While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press
the Inbox Softkey.
Hazard Avoidance
Received text messages reside in the Inbox as ‘Read’ or ‘Unread’ messages. The Outbox contains
‘Sent” and ‘Unsent’ text messages. Saved messages that are meant to be sent later are stored as Drafts.
Each text message box may be viewed separately, or together in any combination.
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
511
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-45 Text Message Inbox
Hazard Avoidance
Show Outbox messages:
While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press
the Outbox Softkey.
Or:
Automatic Flight Control
System
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Show Outbox Messages’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message box selected for viewing is indicated at the bottom left
Additional Features
of the list window.
Show Draft messages:
While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press
the Drafts Softkey.
Appendices
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Show Draft Messages’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message box selected for viewing is indicated at the bottom left
Index
of the list window.
512
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The viewed messages may be listed according to the date/time the message was sent or received, the
type of message (read, unread, sent, unsent, etc.), or by message address.
While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press
the Time Softkey.
Engine Indication System
Or:
Flight Instruments
Viewing messages sorted by message date/time:
System Overview
MANAGING TEXT MESSAGES
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Sort By Date/Time’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The sorting selection is indicated at the bottom center of the list
Viewing messages sorted by message type:
While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press
the Type Softkey.
Audio Panel and CNS
window.
Flight Management
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Sort By Type’.
Hazard Avoidance
3) Press the ENT Key. The sorting selection is indicated at the bottom center of the list
window.
Viewing messages sorted by address:
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
Additional Features
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Sort By Address’.
Automatic Flight Control
System
While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the Arrange Softkey, then press
the Address Softkey.
3) Press the ENT Key. The sorting selection is indicated at the bottom center of the list
window..
Viewing the content of a text message:
Appendices
1) While viewing the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, select the desired message box.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired message.
4) Press the View Softkey.
Index
Or:
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
513
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Press the ENT Key.
Or:
Flight Instruments
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘View Selected Message’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
Engine Indication System
Message content is displayed.
5) To close the text message, press the Close Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
Audio Panel and CNS
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Close Message’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
Marking selected message as read:
Flight Management
1) While viewing the Inbox on the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the FMS Knob to
activate the cursor.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired message.
3) Press the MRK Read Softkey.
Hazard Avoidance
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Mark Selected Message As Read’.
Automatic Flight Control
System
c) Press the ENT Key.
The message symbol now indicates the message has been opened.
Marking all messages as read:
Additional Features
1) While viewing the Inbox on the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the MENU Key to
display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Mark All New Messages As Read’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed.
Appendices
4) With cursor highlighting ‘YES’, press the ENT Key. The message symbols now indicate
Index
all the message have been opened.
514
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
System Overview
Deleting a message:
1) While viewing the Inbox on the ‘Aux-Text Messaging’ Page, press the FMS Knob to
activate the cursor.
Flight Instruments
2) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired message.
3) Press the Delete Softkey.
Or:
Engine Indication System
1) Press the MENU Key to display the ‘Page Menu.’
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Delete Selected Message’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
515
8.11 ELECTRONIC STABILITY AND PROTECTION (ESP)
ELECTRONIC STABILITY & PROTECTION (ESP™)
Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP™) is an optional feature that is intended to discourage the
exceedance of attitude, established airspeed and angle of attack parameters. This feature will only
function when the aircraft is above 200 feet AGL and the autopilot is not engaged.
ESP engages when the aircraft exceeds one or more conditions (pitch, roll, airspeed) beyond the
normal flight parameters. Enhanced stability for each condition is provided by applying a force to the
appropriate control surface to return the aircraft to the normal flight envelope. This is perceived by the
pilot as resistance to control movement in the undesired direction when the aircraft approaches a steep
attitude, high airspeed, or when a stall is imminent.
As the aircraft deviates further from the normal attitude and/or airspeed range, the force increases (up
to an established maximum) to encourage control movement in the direction necessary to return to the
normal attitude and/or airspeed range. Except in the case of high airspeed, when maximum force is
reached, force remains constant up to the maximum engagement limit. Above the maximum
engagement limit, forces are no longer applied. There is no maximum engagement related to a high
airspeed condition.
The pilot can interrupt ESP™ by pressing and holding the Autopilot Disconnect (AP DISC) switch.
Upon releasing the AP DISC switch, ESP™ force will again be applied, provided aircraft roll attitude is
within engagement limits. ESP™ can also be overridden by overpowering the servo’s mechanical torque
limit.ESP can be enabled or disabled on the Aux-System Setup 2 Page on the MFD.
NOTE: Disabling ESP on the ‘Aux-System Setup 2’ Page on the MFD will also disable
automatic engagement of the Yaw Damper only when the autopilot is not engaged. The Yaw
Damper will engage with the autopilot when ESP is enabled or disabled.
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Automatic Flight Control
System
Enabling/Disabling ESP:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
3) If necessary, select the SETUP 2 Softkey to display the Aux-System Setup 2 Page. If the
Additional Features
Aux-System Setup 2 is already displayed, proceed to step 4.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the Stability & Protection field.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’.
Appendices
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Index
ESP is automatically enabled on system power up.
516
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Roll Limit Indicator
ESP Engage (45°)
Roll Limit Indicator
ESP Engage (45°)
Flight Instruments
Roll Limit Indicators are displayed on the roll scale at 45° right and left, indicating where ESP will
engage. As roll attitude exceeds 45°, ESP will engage and the on-side Roll Limit Indicator will move to
30°. The Roll Limit Indicator is now showing where ESP will disengage as roll attitude decreases.
System Overview
ROLL ENGAGEMENT
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Figure 8-46 ESP Roll Engagement Indication (ESP NOT Engaged)
ESP Engage (45°)
Aircraft Roll Attitude = 44°
ESP Disengage (30°)
Aircraft Roll Attitude = 46°
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Before ESP Engage
After ESP Engage
Figure 8-47 Roll Increasing to ESP Engagement
Additional Features
Once engaged, ESP force will be applied between 30° and 75°. The force increases as roll attitude
increases and decreases as roll attitude decreases. The applied force is intended to encourage pilot
input that returns the airplane to a more normal roll attitude. As roll attitude decreases, ESP will
disengage at 30°.
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
517
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
º
30
0º
10º
20º
60
º
Flight Instruments
º
45
30
º
90º
90º
75º
75º
º
60
Engine Indication System
10º
º
45
Figure 8-48 ESP Roll Operating Range When Engaged(Force Increases as Roll Increases &
Decreases as Roll Decreases)
ESP is automatically disengaged if the aircraft reaches the autopilot roll engagement attitude limit of
75°.
ESP Upper Disengage Limit (75°)
Aircraft Roll Attitude = 74°
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
20º
Figure 8-49 Roll Attitude Autopilot Engagement Limit (ESP Engaged)
PITCH ENGAGEMENT
ESP™ engages at 17.5° nose-up and 15.5° nose-down. Once ESP™ is engaged, it will apply
opposing force between 17.5° and 50° nose-up and between 15.5° and 50° nose-down, as indicated in
Figure 8-133. Maximum opposing force is applied between 22.5° and 50° nose-up and between 20.5°
and 50° nose-down.
With ESP™ engaged, and the aircraft in a nose-up condition, opposing force steadily decreases from
17.5° nose-up to 12.5° nose-up as aircraft pitch moves toward zero degrees. ESP™ disengages at 12.5°
nose-up. With ESP™ engaged, and the aircraft in a nose-down condition, opposing force steadily
decreases from 15.5° nose-down to 10.5° nose-down as aircraft pitch moves toward zero degrees.
ESP™ disengages at 10.5° nose-down.
The opposing force increases or decreases depending on the pitch angle and the direction of pitch
travel. This force is intended to encourage movement in the pitch axis in the direction of the normal
pitch attitude range for the aircraft.
518
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
50˚
50˚
40˚
35˚
30˚
35˚
30˚
ESP
45˚
40˚
25˚
25˚
20˚
20˚
15˚
10˚
5˚
5˚
0˚
0˚
5˚
5˚
10˚
10˚
15˚
20˚
25˚
30˚
ESP
25˚
30˚
35˚
Audio Panel and CNS
15˚
20˚
Engine Indication System
15˚
10˚
Flight Instruments
45˚
40˚
System Overview
There are no indications marking the pitch ESP™ engage and disengage limits in these nose-up/
nose-down conditions.
35˚
40˚
45˚
50˚
Figure 8-50 ESP Pitch Operating Range When Engaged (Force Increases as Pitch Increases &
Decreases as Pitch Decreases)
HIGH AIRSPEED PROTECTION
Exceeding Vmo or Mmo will result in ESP applying force to raise the nose of the aircraft. When the
high airspeed condition is remedied, ESP force is no longer applied.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Low speed protection is provided as part of the ESP feature. When the stall warning system
determines a stall condition is imminent, ESP will engage, applying force in the direction necessary to
lower the nose of the aircraft.
Hazard Avoidance
LOW SPEED PROTECTION
Flight Management
45˚
50˚
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
519
8.12 HYPOXIA RECOGNITION AND AUTOMATIC DESCENT
MODE
HYPOXIA RECOGNITION WITH AUTOMATIC DESCENT MODE
The optional Hypoxia Recognition detects pilot incapacitation due to the affects of hypoxia or other
physical conditions. This is accomplished by monitoring pilot interaction with the Perspective+
system. If the system determines the pilot is not responding, Automatic Descent Mode is activated
placing the aircraft in a descent to a lower altitude to provide the pilot and passengers an opportunity
to recover from the effects of hypoxia.
The system is operative when the aircraft altitude is above 14,900 feet (pressure altitude) and the
Garmin AFCS autopilot is engaged. Pilot interaction with the Perspective+ system is monitored by
detecting key presses and turns of the knobs (Audio Panel and push-to-talk switch excluded). If a
period of inactivity (time dependent on altitude, see Figure 8-50) is detected, Hypoxia Recognition
initiates an automatic descent.
Upon activation, there are three sequential phases employed by the system; determining pilot
alertness, descent to 14,000 feet MSL, and descent to 12,500 feet MSL.
DETERMINING PILOT ALERTNESS
When the system detects a sufficient period of inactivity the Advisory Annunciation ‘Are you alert?’
is displayed. Selecting the ALERT Softkey will acknowledge the message and reset the system.
Pressing any other softkey, or turning a knob will also reset the system.
When no pilot interaction is detected for an additional 60 seconds, the Caution Annunciation
‘HYPOXIA ALERT’ is displayed. Again, selecting the ALERT Softkey will acknowledge the message
and reset the system. Pressing any other softkey, or turning a knob will also reset the system.
When no pilot interaction is detected for an additional 60 seconds, the Warning Annunciation
‘AUTO DESCENT’ is displayed in the Annunciation Window and ‘Automatic descent to 14,000FT in
60 seconds’ is displayed in the Alerts Window. Once again, selecting the ALERT Softkey will
acknowledge the message and reset the system. Pressing any other softkey, or turning a knob will also
reset the system.
When no interaction is detected for another 60 seconds, the system will automatically proceed with
the descent.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
520
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
System Overview
30
25
Flight Instruments
20
15
10
Engine Indication System
Period
Inactivity (Minutes)
Time
eofofDetected
Useful Conciousness
(min)
35
5
0
15000
18000
21000
24000
27000
30000
Aircraft
Altitude
(Feet)
Aircraft
Altitude
(ft)
Audio Panel and CNS
Figure 8-51 Hypoxia Recognition Activation Times
AUTOMATIC DESCENT MODE
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
As the system prepares for descent, the Selected Altitude is set to 14,000 and the AFCS enters
Indicated Airspeed (IAS) mode with the airspeed reference set to the maximum allowable airspeed
setting for the specific aircraft model. Refer to the Flight Director Vertical Modes in the AFCS section.
AFCS lateral mode settings are not affected.
As the descent begins, an ‘AUTO DESCENT’ warning is displayed in the Annunciation Window.
‘AUTO DESCENT - Aircraft Descending to 14,000FT’ is displayed in the Alerts Window. ‘EDM’ is
shown as an AFCS Status Annunciation indicating the system has entered Automatic Descent Mode.
‘EDM’ (Emergency Descent Mode) is the AFCS mode that is activated when Hypoxia Recognition
initiates an automatic descent. A continuous repeating chime will be heard as long as Automatic
Descent Mode is active. After the descent begins, Automatic Descent Mode can only be canceled by
disconnecting the autopilot.
As the aircraft reaches 14,000 feet the system sets the AFCS to Altitude Hold mode. The AFCS will
also remain in Automatic Descent Mode as indicated by ‘EDM’ continuing to be displayed as an AFCS
Status Annunciation. The system again begins monitoring for pilot interaction.
If no pilot interaction is detected for four minutes, the system initiates the second descent. As the
system prepares for this descent, the Selected Altitude is set to 12,500 and the AFCS again enters IAS
mode with the airspeed reference set to the maximum allowable airspeed for the specific aircraft
model.
As the descent begins, an ‘AUTO DESCENT’ warning is displayed in the Annunciation Window.
‘AUTO DESCENT - Aircraft Descending to 12,500FT’ is displayed in the Alerts Window. ‘EDM’ is
shown as an AFCS Status Annunciation. Also, the continuous repeating chime is heard.
As the aircraft reaches 12,500 feet the system sets the AFCS to Altitude Hold mode. The AFCS will
also remain in Automatic Descent Mode as indicated by ‘EDM’ continuing to be displayed as an AFCS
Flight Management
NOTE: Automatic Descent Mode does not account for terrain elevation.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
521
Status Annunciation as well as the continuing presence of the repeating chime. At this point, the AFCS
must be disconnected to cancel Automatic Descent Mode.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
522
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
System Overview
8.13 ELECTRONIC CHECKLISTS
ELECTRONIC CHECKLISTS
1) From any page on the MFD (except the EIS Pages), press the Checklist Softkey or turn
the large FMS Knob to select the Checklist Page.
Hazard Avoidance
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Group’ field.
Flight Management
Accessing and Navigating Checklist
Audio Panel and CNS
The MFD is able to display optional electronic checklists which allow a pilot to quickly find the
proper procedure on the ground and during each phase of flight. The system accesses the checklists
from an SD card inserted into the bezel slot. If the SD card contains an invalid checklist file or no
checklist, the Power-up Page messages display ‘Checklist File: Invalid’ or ‘Checklist File: N/A’ (not
available) and the CHKLIST Softkey is not available.
Engine Indication System
NOTE: Garmin is not responsible for the content of checklists. Checklists are created by the
aircraft manufacturer. Modifications or updates to the checklists are coordinated through the
aircraft manufacturer. The user cannot edit these checklists.
Flight Instruments
NOTE: The optional checklists presented here are for example only and may differ from
checklists available for the SR20/SR22/SR22T. The information described in this section is not
intended to replace the checklist information described in the AFM or the Pilot Safety and
Warning Supplements document.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired procedure and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Checklist’ field.
checklist item is indicated with white text surrounded by a white box.
6) Press the ENT Key or Check Softkey to check the selected checklist item. The line item
turns green and a checkmark is placed in the associated box. The next line item is
automatically selected for checking.
Additional Features
Either FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the checklist and select the desired
checklist item.
Automatic Flight Control
System
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired checklist and press the ENT Key. The selected
Press the CLR Key or Uncheck Softkey to remove a check mark from an item.
7) When all checklist items have been checked, ‘*Checklist Finished*’ is displayed in green
Appendices
text at the bottom left of the checklist window. If all items in the checklist have not be
checked, ‘*Checklist Not Finished*’ will be displayed in yellow text.
8) Press the ENT Key. ‘Go To Next Checklist?’ will be highlighted by the cursor.
9) Press the ENT Key to advance to the next checklist.
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Index
10) Press the Exit Softkey to exit the Checklist Page and return to the page last viewed.
523
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Accessing Emergency Checklist
1) From any page on the MFD (except the EIS Pages), press the Checklist Softkey or turn
the large FMS Knob to select the Checklist Page.
Flight Instruments
2) Press the EMER Softkey.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired emergency checklist and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the ENT Key or Check Softkey to check the selected emergency checklist item.
Engine Indication System
The line item turns green and a checkmark is placed in the box next to it. The next line
item is automatically highlighted for checking.
Either FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the checklist and select the desired
checklist item.
Audio Panel and CNS
Press the CLR Key or Uncheck Softkey to remove a check mark from an item.
5) When all checklist items have been checked, ‘*Checklist Finished*’ is displayed in green
text at the bottom left of the checklist window. If all items in the checklist have not be
checked, ‘*Checklist Not Finished*’ will be displayed in yellow text.
Flight Management
6) Press the ENT Key. ‘Go To Next Checklist?’ will be highlighted by the cursor.
7) Press the ENT Key to advance to the next checklist.
8) Press the Return Softkey to return to the previous checklist.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
9) Press the Exit Softkey to exit the Checklist Page and return to the page last viewed.
524
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
System Overview
8.14 AUXILIARY VIDEO
ENHANCED VISION SYSTEM (EVS) & AUXILIARY VIDEO
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Upon power-up the EVS requires approximately 30 seconds to produce a usable image. The image
generated is monochrome (black and white). Normally the hotter an object is the whiter it appears on
the display.
The EVS periodically calibrates itself to optimize the image. The calibration process can be observed
on the display as a one second image interruption, which happens every five minutes or when
calibration is manually activated.
Image quality may vary according to target size, target temperature, background temperature, and
attenuation from airborne particles or moisture within view of the sensor. If the video signal is ever
completely interrupted, the display may appear as a solid field of gray, white, or blue, and the message
No Video or NO DATA AVAILABLE may appear.
Engine Indication System
EVS IMAGE QUALITY AND INTERPRETATION
Flight Instruments
The Perspective+ system provides a control and display interface to an optional Enhanced Vision
System and an additional optional video display. EVS is designed to provide an aid to situational
awareness while operating in low visibility environments. The EVS camera view is displayed on the
‘Aux - Video’ page.
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
EVS Calibration
EVS Data Unavailable
Figure 8-52 EVS Messages
The video adjustment options can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Additional Features
Selecting video adjustment options:
1) While viewing the Aux - Video Page press the Menu Key to display the Page Menu
Options.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired video adjustment option and press the
Once the ENT key is pressed on any option, the page menu closes and returns to the
‘Aux - Video’ Page.
Appendices
ENT Key.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
525
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Audio Panel and CNS
Figure 8-53 ‘Aux - Video’ Page Menu
Figure 8-54 Full Screen EVS Image
ZOOM/RANGE
Pressing the Zoom+ or Zoom- Softkeys increases or decreases video display magnification between
1x and 10x.
The Joystick can be used to increase or decrease the range setting on the map display or zoom in
and out on the video display. While in the Split-Screen mode, pressing the MAP ACTV or VID
ACTV Softkey determines which display the Joystick adjusts. Pressing the softkey to display MAP
ACTV allows the Joystick to control the range setting of the map display. Pressing the softkey to
display VID ACTV allows the Joystick to control the zoom setting of the video display.
When zooming in on the video display, a Zoom Window will appear in the upper right of the
display. A box within this window indicates the portion of the display currently being viewed. The
currently displayed portion of the full display may be adjusted by using Joystick.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
EVS
View
with
Map
Hidden
526
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Flight Instruments
Engine Indication System
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Management
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
527
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
System Overview
Zoom
Window
Current
View
Figure 8-55 Zoom Window
8.15 POSITION REPORTING
POSITION REPORTING
NOTE: An account must be established with Garmin Connext™ to make full use of the
Position Reporting feature.
The Position Reporting feature allows the system to send position reporting information to a
provider, such as FlightAware.com.
The position reports can be activated or deactivated by the pilot. While active, the position reports
are transmitted over the Iridium Short Burst Datalink periodically at a pilot specified interval or by
pressing the Send Rep Softkey. The minimum automatic transmission period between reports is two
minutes with more frequent transmissions possible via manually sending reports with the Send Rep
Softkey. During voice communications and data transfers the Iridium datalink is occupied and position
reports will not be sent. During this period the reports will buffer and be sent as a package as soon as
the link is available. The position reports are received by Garmin Connext and forwarded to select
flight tracking provider(s).
To reduce excess usage, position reports are only transmitted while the aircraft is in the air.
The following are position reports contents:
•
Tail Number
•
Time
•
Latitude/Longitude
•
Ground Speed
•
Ground Track
•
Heading
•
Barometric Altitude
•
True Airspeed
•
Outside Air Temperature
•
Destination
•
Estimated Time Enroute
•
Airborne Status
The Airborne Status field is the indication that the aircraft is on the ground or in the air at the time
the position report was generated. The avionics generate a position report when the Airborne Status
field changes state.
•
Passenger Onboard
Passenger Onboard indicates passengers are on the aircraft at the time the position report was
generated. A position report is generated when the Passenger Onboard field changes state.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
528
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
System Overview
Viewing the Connext Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Aux - Connext’ Page.
1) With the ‘Aux - Connext’ Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to display the cursor in
the Transmission Period field.
or ‘Off’ to disable transmission of position reports.
3) Press the ENT Key. The selection is entered and the cursor is placed in the Transmission
Rate field.
Audio Panel and CNS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the first digit.
Engine Indication System
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Auto’ for automatic transmission of position reports
Flight Instruments
Setting up Position Reporting:
5) Again, turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired number.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the second digit.
8) Press the ENT Key. The selection is entered and the cursor is placed in the Passengers
On Board field.
Flight Management
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired number.
9) Turn the small FMS Knob left or right to select ‘Yes’ or ‘No’.
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Figure 8-56 Set Transmission Rate
10) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Additional Features
Sending a position report manually
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Aux - Connext’ Page.
3) If necessary, set the Transmission Period to ‘Auto’.
Appendices
4) Press the Send Rep Softkey...
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
529
8.16 ABNORMAL OPERATION
ABNORMAL OPERATION
GDL 69A SXM Troubleshooting
Flight Instruments
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
For troubleshooting purposes, check the LRU Information Box on the ‘Aux - System
Status’ Page for GDL 69A SXM status, serial number, and software version number. If a
failure has been detected in the GDL 69A SXM the status is marked with a red X.
Engine Indication System
Selecting the ‘Aux — System Status’ Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Aux Page Group.
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aux - System Status’ Page.
Figure 8-57 LRU Information Window on System Status Page
Appendices
Additional Features
Some quick troubleshooting steps listed below can be performed to find the possible
cause of a failure.
•
Ensure the installed Data Link Receiver or Iridium Transceiver has an active subscription or
account
•
Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure that power is applied to the Data
Link Receiver or Iridium Transceiver
IF FAILURE STILL EXISTS
Index
If a failure still exists, the following messages may provide insight as to the possible problem:
530
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Message
Location
System Overview
Message
Description
NO SIGNAL
XM Information
Page Weather
Datalink Page
(MFD)
Loss of signal; signal
strength too low for
receiver
LOADING
XM Radio Page
(MFD)
Acquiring channel audio
or information
OFF AIR
XM Radio Page
(MFD)
Channel not in service
--------
XM Radio Page
(MFD)
Missing channel
information
WEATHER
DATA LINK
FAILED
Weather Datalink
Page (MFD)
No communication from
Data Link Receiver within
last 5 minutes
ACTIVATION
REQUIRED
XM Information
Page (MFD)
SiriusXM subscription is
not activated
DETECTING
ACTIVATION
Weather Datalink
Page (MFD)
SiriusXM subscription is
activating
WAITING
FOR DATA...
Weather Datalink
Page (MFD)
SiriusXM subscription
confirmed downloading
weather data
Automatic Flight Control
System
Data Link Receiver
updating encryption code
Hazard Avoidance
XM Information
Page (MFD)
Flight Management
UPDATING
Audio Panel and CNS
Data Link Receiver
antenna error; service
required
Engine Indication System
XM Information
Page (MFD)
Flight Instruments
CHECK
ANTENNA
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
531
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
System Overview
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
BLANK PAGE
532
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
System Overview
ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
The Alerting System conveys alerts using the following:
Softkey Annunciation: During certain alerts, the Alerts Softkey may appear as a flashing
annunciation to accompany an alert. The Alerts Softkey assumes a new label consistent with the
alert level (Warning, Caution, or Advisory). By selecting the softkey when flashing an annunciation,
the alert is acknowledged. The softkey label then returns to Alerts. If alerts are still present, the
Alerts label is displayed in white with black text. Selecting the Alerts Softkey a second time views
the alert text messages.
•
System Annunciations: Typically, a large red or amber ‘X’ appears over instruments whose
information is supplied by a failed Line Replaceable Unit (LRU). See the System Annunciations
Section for more information.
Audio Alerting System: The system issues audio alert tones when specific system conditions are met.
See the Alert Level Definitions Section for more information. The annunciation tone may be tested
from the Aux - System Status Page.
Automatic Flight Control
System
•
Hazard Avoidance
Alerts Window: The Alerts Window displays text messages for up to 64 prioritized alert messages.
Pressing the Alerts Softkey displays the Alerts Window. Pressing the Alerts Softkey a second time
removes the Alerts Window from the display. When the Alerts Window is displayed, the FMS Knob
can be used to scroll through the alert message list.
Flight Management
•
Audio Panel and CNS
CAS Window: The CAS Window displays abbreviated Crew Alerting System (CAS) annunciation
text. Text color is based on alert levels described in the following section. The Annunciation Window
is located to the right of the Altimeter and Vertical Speed Indicator. All aircraft annunciations can be
displayed simultaneously in the Annunciation Window. A white horizontal line separates
annunciations that are acknowledged from annunciations that are not yet acknowledged. Higher
priority annunciations are displayed towards the top of the window.
Engine Indication System
•
Flight Instruments
NOTE: The Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) supersedes information found in this
document.
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
533
Flight Instruments
System Overview
APPENDIX A
Engine Indication System
CAS
Window
Audio Panel and CNS
Alerts
Window
Softkey
Annunciation
Flight Management
Figure A-1 Alerting System
Testing the system annunciation tone:
1) Use the FMS knob to select the AUX — System Status Page.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Highlight ‘Enable Annunciator Test Mode’ and press the ENT Key.
CAS MESSAGE PRIORITIZATION
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for corrective pilot actions.
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
2) Select the Ann Test Softkey.
NOTE: Any CAS messages that are generated when the system is first powered on are
considered already acknowledged. They do not flash or trigger the Warning or Caution
softkeys.
The Alerting System uses four alert levels. Messages are grouped by criticality (warning, caution,
advisory, message advisory alerts) and sorted by order of appearance (most recent messages on top).
The color of the message is based on its urgency and on required action:
Index
NOTE: Aural alerts associated with abnormal conditions and advisories are managed through
the audio panels. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information.
534
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
Advisory: This level of alert provides general information. Annunciation alert text is shown in white
in the CAS Window; no aural tone is generated with the exception of the 'OXYGEN LEFT ON'
advisory alert, which produces a one second double chime. An annunciation alert is accompanied by
a flashing Advisory Softkey annunciation. Pressing the Advisory Softkey acknowledges the presence
of the annunciation alert. Some messages do not require acknowledgement. Refer to Advisory
Annunciations Table A-1 for annunciation alert conditions and behaviors.
•
Message Advisory Alerts: This level of alert also provides general information but does not issue
annunciations in the CAS Window. Instead, message advisory alerts only issue a flashing ‘Message’
Softkey annunciation. Selecting the Message Softkey acknowledges the presence of the message
advisory alert and displays the alert text message in the Alerts Window. Refer to Message Advisory
Alerts Table A-1 for annunciation alert conditions and behaviors.
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Flight Control
System
Some CAS messages can be display in more than one alert level group. For example, a message
might display as both a warning and a caution, but cannot appear more than once at any given time
(unless the CAS is being tested). If the received signals justify multiple priorities for a certain message,
the message is displayed for the higher priority condition. When graduating to a higher priority, the
message flashes and requires new acknowledgment. When degrading to a lower priority condition, the
message moves to the top of the appropriate grouping, but does not require new acknowledgment.
Flight Management
•
Audio Panel and CNS
Caution: This level of alert indicates the existence of abnormal conditions on the aircraft that may
require intervention. Caution alert text is shown in amber in the Annunciation Window and is
accompanied by a flashing ‘Caution’ Softkey annunciation. A double chime lasting for one second
occurs with select caution alerts. Pressing the Caution Softkey acknowledges the presence of the
caution alert. Refer to Caution Annunciations Table A-1 for caution conditions and alerting
behaviors.
Engine Indication System
•
Flight Instruments
Warning: This level of alert requires immediate attention. Warning alert text is shown in red in the
Annunciation Window and a flashing ‘Warning’ Softkey annunciation. A repeating double chime
accompanies select warning conditions. Pressing the Warning Softkey acknowledges the presence of
the warning alert and stops the chime (if present). Refer to Warning Annunciations Table A-1 for
warning conditions and alerting behaviors.
System Overview
•
Additional Features
Appendices
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
535
System Overview
APPENDIX A
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
CAS
Window
Figure A-2 CAS Message Prioritization
Figure A-3 Softkey Annunciation (Alert Softkey Labels)
CAS ANNUNCIATIONS
The following alerts are configured specifically for the Cirrus SR2x models. Red annunciation
window text signifies warnings and amber, cautions. See the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for
recommended pilot actions.
DISPLAY INHIBITS
Inhibits prevent certain CAS messages from being displayed during the following conditions:
If two alert levels of the same message are active simultaneously (e.g., L FUEL QTY warning and L
FUEL QTY caution) only the higher alert level is displayed.
If a GEA or GIA fails, all CAS messages depending on sensors associated with that LRU are
automatically inhibited. Inhibits cannot be activated by invalid sensor data.
WARNING ANNUNCIATIONS
Annunciation Text
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Softkey
Annunci ation
536
Description
ANTI ICE CTRL
¤
Tank valves cannot be controlled
(closed) (TKS).
ANTI ICE FLOW
¤
Flow rate is low (TKS).
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
Description
¤
Left and right fluid quantities are
unknown (TKS).
ANTI ICE QTY
¤
Fluid quantity is low (TKS).
¤
AOA probe is overheated.
AUTO DESCENT
†
Automatic descent to 14,000FT in 60
seconds.
AUTO DESCENT
†
Aircraft descending to 14,000FT.
AUTO DESCENT
†
Aircraft descending to 12,500FT.
AUTO DESCENT
†
Aircraft descended due to pilot
incapacitation.
Cylinder head temperature is high.
CO LVL HIGH
Carbon monoxide level is too high.
DUCT OVERHEAT
^
ESS BUS
Audio Panel and CNS
Brake temperature is high.
CHT
Cabin heat duct temperature is high.
Check fuel flow.
*
Fuel quantity imbalance has been
detected.
FUEL IMBALANCE
Check fuel tank levels.
M BUS 1
Check main power bus 1 voltage.
M BUS 2
Check main power bus 2 voltage.
OIL PRESSURE
Oil pressure is out of range.
OIL TEMP
OXYGEN FAULT
PITCH TRIM
Oil temperature is high.
#
#
Oxygen system fault.
Oxygen quantity is low.
Pitch Trim control has failed.
RPM
Check engine RPM.
SPIN SPIN SPIN
Spin entry detected.
STALL
Additional Features
OXYGEN QTY
Check manifold pressure.
Automatic Flight Control
System
*
Hazard Avoidance
FUEL QTY
MAN PRESSURE
Flight Management
Check essential power bus voltage.
FUEL FLOW
Stall warning.
*
Appendices
START ENGAGED
TIT
Engine Indication System
AOA OVERHEAT
Flight Instruments
ANTI ICE QTY
BRAKE TEMP
System Overview
Annunciation Text
Starter is engaged.
TIT temperature is high.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
537
System Overview
APPENDIX A
Annunciation Text
UNDERSPEED
PROTECT ACTIVE
None.
Flight Instruments
¤ — TKS FIKI (optional)
† — Garmin AFCS required
^ — SR22T only
* — Not applicable to all models
# — Optional
CAUTION ANNUNCIATIONS
Annunciation Text Description
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
†
Description
ALT 1
Check alternator 1 current.
ALT 2
Check alternator 2 current.
ALT AIR OPEN
*
Alternate air door is open.
ANTI ICE HEAT
¤
Stall warning/AoA heater has failed.
ANTI ICE LEVEL
¤ Left tank fluid quantity is unreliable
(TKS).
ANTI ICE LEVEL
¤ Right tank fluid quantity is unreliable
(TKS).
ANTI ICE PRESS
¤ Tail pressure is low (TKS).
ANTI ICE PRESS
¤ Pressure is high (TKS).
ANTI ICE QTY
¤
Fluid quantity imbalance has been
detected (TKS).
ANTI ICE QTY
¤
Fluid quantity is low (TKS).
ANTI ICE SPEED
¤ Airspeed is too low for ice protection
(TKS).
ANTI ICE SPEED
¤ Airspeed is to high for ice protection
(TKS).
Additional Features
AP MISCOMPARE
#
AP/PFD DIF ADC
Appendices
AP/PFD DIF AHRS
#
AVIONICS OFF
BATT 1
BRAKE TEMP
Index
CHT
538
Autopilot miscompare, autopilot is not
available.
# Autopilot and PFD are using different
ADCs.
Autopilot and PFD are using different
AHRSs.
Avionics master switch is off.
Check battery 1 current.
Brake temperature is high.
Cylinder head temperature is high.
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
System Overview
Annunciation Text Description
Flaps are extended beyond airspeed
limitations.
FUEL IMBALANCE
Fuel quantity imbalance has been
detected.
Check fuel tank levels.
FUEL QTY
HYPOXIA ALERT
† Hypoxia caution alert.
Check main power bus 1.
M BUS 2
Check main power bus 2.
* Check manifold pressure.
NO ADC MODES
# Autopilot air data modes are not
available.
Flight Management
MAN PRESSURE
Audio Panel and CNS
M BUS 1
Engine Indication System
The GDU’s internal model cannot
determine the exact magnetic variance
for geographic locations near the
magnetic poles. Displayed magnetic
course angles may differ from the actual
magnetic heading by more than 2°.
LRG MAG VAR
Autopilot vertical modes are not
available.
NO VERT MODES
#
Oil pressure is out of range.
Hazard Avoidance
OIL PRESSURE
Oil temperature is high.
OIL TEMP
OXYGEN QTY
#
Oxygen quantity is low.
OXYGEN RQD
#
Oxygen is required.
Parking break is set.
PITOT HEAT FAIL
Pitot heat failure.
PITOT HEAT REQD
Pitot heat is required.
SLCT NON-MAG
The system notifies the pilot to set the
Nav Angle units on the Avioncs Settings
Screen to True.
START ENGAGED
Starter is engaged.
Appendices
The system notifies the pilot to set the
Nav Angle units on the Avioncs Settings
Screen to Magnetic.
Additional Features
SLCT MAG
Automatic Flight Control
System
PARK BRAKE
Flight Instruments
FLAP OVERSPEED
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Index
¤ — TKS FIKI (optional)
† — Garmin AFCS required
^ — SR22T only
* — Not applicable to all models
# — Optional
539
ADVISORY ANNUNCIATIONS
Annunciation Text
Flight Instruments
System Overview
APPENDIX A
ALTITUDE SEL
#
Climbing away from selected altitude.
ALTITUDE SEL
#
Descending away from selected altitude.
AOA FAIL
Dynamic stall speed band is unavailable.
¤
† Are you alert?
Engine Indication System
ARE YOU ALERT
COURSE SEL
#
Audio Panel and CNS
HIGH MP FF
*
Flight Management
Avoid fuel flow 18 to 30 GPH and MP
above 26”.
Check left fuel tank level.
L FUEL QTY
OXYGEN LEFT
#
Oxygen system is left on after shutdown.
OXYGEN QTY
#
Oxygen quantity is low.
PUMP BACKUP
¤
Anti-ice backup pump mode has been
selected (TKS).
Check right fuel tank level.
R FUEL QTY
Hazard Avoidance
Current track will not intercept selected
course.
Fuel quantity imbalance has been
detected.
FUEL IMBALANCE
Surfacewatch failed.
SFC WATCH FAIL
¤ — TKS FIKI (optional)
† — Garmin AFCS required
^ — SR22T only
* — Not applicable to all models
# — Optional
MESSAGE ADVISORY ALERTS
Annunciation Text
ANTI ICE QTY
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Description
¤
The carbon monoxide detector is
inoperative.
CO DET SRVC
The carbon monoxide detector needs
service.
Appendices
†
ESP config error. Config service req'd.
ESP FAIL
†
ESP is inoperative.
ESP OFF
†
ESP selected off.
ESP DEGRADE
EXIT ICING
Index
Fluid quantity is low (TKS).
CO DET FAIL
ESP CONFIG
540
Description
†
¤#
ESP IAS mode is inoperative.
Exit icing conditions.
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
FAILED PATH
#
System Overview
Annunciation Text
Description
An autopilot servo data path has failed.
MFD cooling fan is inoperative.
PFD FAN FAIL
PFD cooling fan is inoperative.
Flight Instruments
MFD FAN FAIL
VOICE ALERTS
Message
Description
Airspeed exceeds VNE
“Altitude”
Issued when the aircraft transitions
beyond the set altitude limit
“Check runway”
Issued when the aircraft is landing on a
non-runway (e.g. a taxiway).
The ESP system is engaging the
autopilot. See the AFCS section for
more details.
Hazard Avoidance
“Engaging autopilot”
Flight Management
“Airspeed”
Automatic Flight Control
System
Aircraft has descended below the
“Minimums, minimums” preset barometric minimum descent
altitude
“Incoming Call”
A call has been received via the Iridium
system.
Issued when the aircraft is taking off
from a non-runway (e.g. a taxiway)
“Stall”
Imminent stall is sensed by stall vane
“TAS System Test
Passed”
Played when the optional GTS 800
traffic system passes a pilot-initiated
self test.
Additional Features
“Runway too short”
Appendices
Played when the optional GTS 800
“TAS System Test Failed” traffic system fails a pilot-initiated self
test.
“Taxiway”
Audio Panel and CNS
The following aural alerts are announced by the system using a human voice. If an optional terrain
system is installed, voice alerts are also generated (refer to the appropriate terrain alerts section).
Engine Indication System
¤ — TKS FIKI (optional)
† — Garmin AFCS required
^ — SR22T only
* — Not applicable to all models
# — Optional
Issued when the aircraft is taking off
from, or landing on, a runway with a
length less than needed as entered.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
541
Flight Instruments
System Overview
APPENDIX A
Message
Description
“Taxiway”
Issued when the aircraft is taking off
from, or landing on, a runway different
than that entered in the Takeoff Data
or Landing Data screen.
“Timer Expired”
Automatic Flight Control
System
TIS Traffic Advisory (TA) is issued with
the TIS system
“Traffic, (distance,
bearing, altitude)”
TAS Traffic Advisory (TA) is issued with
the optional GTS 800 TAS system. See
the Hazard Avoidance section for
additional details on GTS 800 voice
alerts.
Aircraft is one minute from Top of
Descent. Issued only when vertical
navigation is enabled.
SYSTEM MESSAGE ANNUNCIATIONS
NOTE: Upon power-up, certain windows remain invalid as system equipment begins to
initialize. All windows should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any window
continues to remain flagged, the system should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair
facility.
When a new message is issued, the Message Softkey flashes to alert the flight crew of a new
message. It continues to flash until acknowledged by pressing the softkey. Active messages are
displayed in white text. Messages that have become inactive change to gray text. The Message
Softkey flashes if the state of a displayed message changes or a new message is displayed. If a
Message Advisory message is active, the Message Softkey will not flash until the messages have been
acknowledged. The inactive messages can be removed from the Message Window by pressing the
flashing Message Softkey. The softkey label then returns to Alerts. System Messages convey messages
to the flight crew regarding problems with the system. Typically, a large red or amber ‘X’ appears in a
window when a related LRU fails or detects invalid data.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Aircraft is outside TIS coverage area
“Traffic”
“Vertical track”
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
“TIS Not Available”
Countdown timer on the PFD has
reached zero
542
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
System Overview
Flight Instruments
System
Annunci ation
Amber 'X'
System
Annunci ation
Red 'X'
Engine Indication System
Alerts
Window
Audio Panel and CNS
Message Softkey
Annunci ation (Prior to
softkey being p ressed)
Alerts Softkey
Annunci ation
Figure A-4 System Annunciations in Alerts Window
Message Advisory
Comments
Additional Features
ABORT APR – Loss of Abort approach due to loss of GPS
GPS navigation. Abort navigation.
approach.
ADC1 ALT EC – ADC1 GDC is reporting that the altitude error
correction is unavailable.
altitude error
correction is
unavailable.
Appendices
ADC1 AS EC – ADC1
airspeed error
correction is
unavailable.
Automatic Flight Control
System
This section describes various system message advisories. Certain messages are issued due to an
LRU or an LRU function failure. Such messages are normally accompanied by a corresponding red
amber ‘X’ annunciation as shown previously in the System Annunciation section.
Hazard Avoidance
NOTE: This section provides information regarding message advisories that may be displayed
by the system. Knowledge of the aircraft, systems, flight conditions, and other existing
operational priorities must be considered when responding to a message. Always use sound
pilot judgment. The Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) takes precedence over any conflicting
guidance found in this section.
Flight Management
SYSTEM MESSAGES
GDC is reporting that the airspeed error
correction is unavailable.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
543
System Overview
APPENDIX A
Message Advisory
ADC2 ALT EC – ADC1 GDC is reporting that the altitude error
correction is unavailable.
altitude error
correction is
unavailable.
ADC2 AS EC – ADC1
airsp eed error
correction is
unavailable.
GDC is reporting that the airspeed error
correction is unavailable.
ADC2 SERVICE –
ADC1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
The AHRS should be serviced.
Audio Panel and CNS
Flight Instruments
The AHRS should be serviced.
Engine Indication System
ADC1 SERVICE –
ADC1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
Comments
AHRS1 CAL – AHRS1
calibration version
error. Srvc req’d
The #1 AHRS calibration version error.
The system should be serviced.
AHRS1 CONFIG –
AHRS1 config error.
Config service req’d
AHRS configuration settings do not
match those of backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1
using backup GPS
source.
The #1 AHRS is using the backup GPS
path. Primary GPS path has failed. The
system should be serviced when
possible.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1
not receiving any GPS
information.
The #1 AHRS is not receiving any or any
useful GPS information. Check AFMS
limitations. The system should be
serviced.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1
not receiving backup
GPS information.
The #1 AHRS is not receiving backup
GPS information. The system should be
serviced.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1
operating exclusively
in no-GPS mode.
The #1 AHRS is operating exclusively in
no-GPS mode. The system should be
serviced.
AHRS1 SRVC –
AHRS1 Magnetic-field
model needs update.
The #1 AHRS earth magnetic field
model is out of date. Update magnetic
field model when practical.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
The #1 AHRS and #2 AHRS magnetic
AHRS MAG DB –
AHRS magnetic model model database versions do not match.
database version
mismatch.
544
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
System Overview
Message Advisory
Comments
The #2 AHRS is using the backup GPS
path. Primary GPS path has failed. The
system should be serviced when
possible.
AHRS2 GPS – AHRS2
not receiving any GPS
information.
The #2 AHRS is not receiving any or any
useful GPS information. Check AFMS
limitations. The system should be
serviced.
AHRS2 GPS – AHRS2
not receiving backup
GPS information.
The #2 AHRS is not receiving backup
GPS information. The system should be
serviced.
AHRS2 GPS – AHRS2
operating exclusively
in no-GPS mode.
The #2 AHRS is operating exclusively in
no-GPS mode. The system should be
serviced.
AHRS2 SRVC –
AHRS2 Magnetic-field
model needs update.
The #2 AHRS earth magnetic field
model is out of date. Update magnetic
field model when practical.
AHRS2 TAS – AHRS2
not receiving valid
airspeed.
The #2 AHRS is not receiving true
airspeed from the air data computer.
The AHRS relies on GPS information to
augment the lack of airspeed. The
system should be serviced.
Additional Features
AHRS2 GPS – AHRS2
using backup GPS
source.
Automatic Flight Control
System
#2 AHRS configuration settings do not
match those of backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
Hazard Avoidance
AHRS2 CONFIG –
AHRS2 config error.
Config service req’d
Flight Management
The #2 AHRS calibration version error.
The system should be serviced.
Audio Panel and CNS
AHRS2 CAL – AHRS2
calibration version
error. Srvc req’d
Engine Indication System
The #1 AHRS is not receiving true
airspeed from the air data computer.
The AHRS relies on GPS information to
augment the lack of airspeed. The
system should be serviced.
Flight Instruments
AHRS1 TAS – AHRS1
not receiving valid
airspeed.
The system notifies the pilot that the
APPR INACTV –
Approach is not active. loaded approach is not active. Activate
approach when required.
ARSPC AHEAD –
Airspace ahead less
than 10 minutes.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft.
The aircraft will penetrate the airspace
within 10 minutes.
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
Index
Vertical guidance generated by SBAS is
unavailable, use LNAV only minimums.
Appendices
190–02183–01 Rev. A
APR DWNGRADE –
Approach
downgraded.
545
System Overview
APPENDIX A
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
Message Advisory
Comments
ARSPC NEAR –
Airspace near and
ahead.
Special use airspace is near and ahead
of the aircraft position.
ARSPC NEAR –
Airspace near – less
than 2 nm.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of
the aircraft position.
AUDIO MANIFEST –
AUDIO MANIFEST
Incorrect audio software installed. The
system should be serviced
CHECK CRS –
Database course for
LOC1 / [LOC ID] is
[CRS]°.
Selected course for LOC1 differs from
published localizer course by more than
10 degrees.
CHECK CRS –
Database course for
LOC2 / [LOC ID] is
[CRS]°.
Selected course for LOC2 differs from
published localizer course by more than
10 degrees.
CNFG MODULE –
PFD1 configuration
module is inoperative.
The PFD configuration module backup
memory has failed. The system should
be serviced.
COM1 CONFIG –
COM1 config error.
Config service req’d.
The COM1 configuration settings do
not match backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced
COM1 MANIFEST –
COM1 software
mismatch,
communication
halted.
COM1 software mismatch. The system
should be serviced.
COM1 PTT – COM1
push-to-talk key is
stuck.
The COM1 external push-to-talk switch
is stuck in the enable (or “pressed”)
position. Press the PTT switch again to
cycle its operation. If the problem
persists, the system should be serviced.
Appendices
The COM1 transfer switch is stuck in
COM1 RMT XFR –
COM1 remote transfer the enabled (or “pressed”) position.
Press the transfer switch again to cycle
key is stuck.
its operation. If the problem persists,
the system should be serviced.
The system has detected a failure in
COM1. COM1 may still be usable. The
system should be serviced when
possible.
Index
COM1 SERVICE –
COM1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
546
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
System Overview
Message Advisory
Comments
COM2 software mismatch. The system
should be serviced.
COM2 PTT – COM2
push-to-talk key is
stuck.
The COM2 external push-to-talk switch
is stuck in the enable (or “pressed”)
position. Press the PTT switch again to
cycle its operation. If the problem
persists, the system should be serviced.
Flight Management
COM2 MANIFEST –
COM2 software
mismatch,
communication
halted.
Audio Panel and CNS
The COM2 configuration settings do
not match backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced
Engine Indication System
COM2 CONFIG –
COM2 config error.
Config service req’d.
Flight Instruments
COM1 TEMP – COM1 The system has detected an over
temperature condition in COM 1. The
over temp. Reducing
transmitter is operating at reduced
transmitter power.
power. If the problem persists, the
system should be serviced.
COM2 SERVICE –
COM2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
Hazard Avoidance
The COM2 transfer switch is stuck in
COM2 RMT XFR –
COM2 remote transfer the enabled (or “pressed”) position.
Press the transfer switch again to cycle
key is stuck.
its operation. If the problem persists,
the system should be serviced.
Automatic Flight Control
System
The system has detected a failure in
COM2. COM2 may still be usable. The
system should be serviced when
possible.
The PFD configuration module backup
memory has failed. The system should
be serviced.
DATA LOST – Pilot
stored data was lost.
Recheck settings.
The pilot profile data was lost. System
reverts to default pilot profile and
settings. The pilot may reconfigure the
MFD & PFD with preferred settings, if
desired.
Appendices
CNFG MODULE –
PFD1 configuration
module is inoperative.
Additional Features
COM2 TEMP – COM2 The system has detected an over
temperature condition in COM2. The
over temp. Reducing
transmitter is operating at reduced
transmitter power.
power. If the problem persists, the
system should be serviced.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
547
System Overview
APPENDIX A
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
Message Advisory
Comments
DB CHANGE –
Database changed.
Verify user modified
procedures.
This occurs when a stored flight plan
contains procedures that have been
manually edited. This alert is issued only
after an navigation database update.
Verify that the user-modified procedures
in stored flight plans are correct and up
to date.
DB CHANGE –
Database changed.
Verify stored airways.
This occurs when a stored flight plan
contains an airway that is no longer
consistent with the navigation
database. This alert is issued only after
an navigation database update. Verify
use of airways in stored flight plans and
reload airways as needed.
DB MISMATCH –
Obstacle database
mismatch.
The PFDs and MFD have different
obstacle database installed. Install
correct obstacle database in all displays.
DB MISMATCH –
Terrain database
mismatch.
The PFDs and MFD have different
terrain database versions or types
installed. Install correct terrain database
version or type in all displays.
FAILED PATH – A
data path has failed.
A data path connected to the GDU,
GSD 41, or the GIA has failed.
FPL TRUNC – Flight
plan has been
truncated.
This occurs when a newly installed
navigation database eliminates an
obsolete approach or arrival used by a
stored flight plan. The obsolete
procedure is removed from the flight
plan. Update flight plan with current
arrival or approach.
Index
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
The PFDs and MFD have different
DB MISMATCH –
navigation database versions or types
Navigation database
mismatch. Xtalk is off. (Americas, European, etc.) installed.
Crossfill is off. Install correct navigation
database version or type in all displays.
548
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
System Overview
Message Advisory
Comments
A fault has been detected in glideslope
receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The
receiver may still be available. The
system should be serviced when
possible.
G/S2 SERVICE – G/S2
needs service. Return
unit for repair
A fault has been detected in glideslope
receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The
receiver may still be available. The
system should be serviced when
possible.
GCU1 CONFIG –
GCU1 Config error.
Config service req’d.
GCU 479 configuration settings do not
match those of backup configuration
memory. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
GCU1 FAIL – GCU1 is
inoperative.
A failure has been detected in the GCU
479. The GCU 479 is unavailable.
Appendices
G/S1 SERVICE – G/S1
needs service. Return
unit for repair
Additional Features
A fault has been detected in glideslope
receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The system
should be serviced.
Automatic Flight Control
System
G/S2 FAIL – G/S2 is
inoperative
Hazard Avoidance
A fault has been detected in glideslope
receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The system
should be serviced.
Flight Management
G/S1 FAIL – G/S1 is
inoperative
Audio Panel and CNS
The system has detected that a
waypoint coordinate has changed due
to a new navigation database update.
Verify that stored flight plans contain
correct waypoint locations.
Engine Indication System
FPL WPT MOVE –
Flight plan waypoint
moved.
Flight Instruments
Upon power-up, the system detects
FPL WPT LOCK –
Flight plan waypoint is that a stored flight plan waypoint is
locked. This occurs when an navigation
locked.
database update eliminates an obsolete
waypoint. The flight plan cannot find
the specified waypoint and flags this
message. This can also occur with user
waypoints in a flight plan that is
deleted. Remove the waypoint from the
flight plan if it no longer exists in any
database, or update the waypoint
name/identifier to reflect the new
information.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
549
System Overview
APPENDIX A
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
Flight Instruments
Message Advisory
Comments
GCU1 KEYSTK –
GDC1 software
mismatch,
communication
halted.
A key is stuck on the GCU 479 bezel.
Attempt to free the stuck key by
pressing it several times. The G1000
system should be serviced if the
problem persists.
GCU1 MANIFEST –
GCU1 software
mismatch,
communication
halted.
The GCU 479 has incorrect software
installed. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
GDC1 MANIFEST –
GDC1 software
mismatch,
communication
halted.
The GDC has incorrect software
installed. The system should be
serviced.
GDC2 MANIFEST –
GDC2 software
mismatch,
communication
halted.
The GDC has incorrect software
installed. The system should be
serviced.
GDL69 CONFIG –
GDL 69 config error.
Config service req’d.
GDL 69A configuration settings do not
match those of backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
Appendices
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
GDL69 FAIL – GDL 69 A failure has been detected in the GDL
69A. The receiver is unavailable. The
has failed.
system should be serviced
GDL69 MANIFEST –
GDL69 software
mismatch,
communication
halted.
The GDL 69A has incorrect software
installed. The system should be
serviced.
GEA1 CONFIG –
GEA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
The GEA configuration settings do not
match those of backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
GEA1 MANIFEST –
GEA1 software
mismatch,
communication
halted.
The GEA 71 incorrect software installed.
The system should be serviced.
Index
GEO LIMITS – AHRS1 The aircraft is outside geographical
limits for approved AHRS operation.
too far North/South,
no magnetic compass. Heading is flagged as invalid.
550
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
System Overview
Message Advisory
Comments
GEO LIMITS – AHRS2 The aircraft is outside geographical
limits for approved AHRS operation.
too far North/South,
no magnetic compass. Heading is flagged as invalid.
The GIA1 temperature is too high. If
problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1
config error. Config
service req’d.
The GIA1 configuration settings do not
match backup configuration memory.
The system should be serviced.
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1
audio config error.
Config service req’d.
The GIA1 have an error in the audio
configuration. The system should be
serviced.
GIA1 MANIFEST –
GIA1 software
mismatch,
communication
halted.
The GIA1 has incorrect software
installed. The system should be
serviced.
Hazard Avoidance
GIA1 COOLING –
GIA1 over
temperature.
Flight Management
The GIA1 temperature is too low to
operate correctly. Allow units to warm
up to operating temperature.
Audio Panel and CNS
GIA1 COOLING –
GIA1 temperature too
low.
Engine Indication System
Incorrect servo software is installed, or
gain settings are incorrect.
Flight Instruments
GFC MANIFEST –
GFC software
mismatch,
communication
halted.
GIA2 COOLING –
GIA2 over
temperature.
The GIA2 temperature is too high. If
problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2
config error. Config
service req’d.
The GIA2 configuration settings do not
match backup configuration memory.
The system should be serviced.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2
audio config error.
Config service req’d.
The GIA2 have an error in the audio
configuration. The system should be
serviced.
Appendices
The GIA2 temperature is too low to
operate correctly. Allow units to warm
up to operating temperature.
Additional Features
GIA2 COOLING –
GIA2 temperature too
low.
Automatic Flight Control
System
GIA1 SERVICE – GIA1 The GIA1 self-test has detected a
needs service. Return problem in the unit. The system should
be serviced.
the unit for repair.
Index
190–02183–01 Rev. A
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
551
System Overview
APPENDIX A
Message Advisory
Flight Instruments
GIA2 MANIFEST –
GIA2 software
mismatch,
communication
halted.
Comments
The GIA2 has incorrect software
installed. The system should be
serviced.
Additional Features
Automatic Flight Control
System
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Management
Audio Panel and CNS
Engine Indication System
GIA2 SERVICE – GIA2 The GIA2 self-test has detected a
needs service. Return problem in the unit. The system should
be serviced.
the unit for repair.
GMA1 AUX
MANIFEST – GMA 1
AUX software
mismatch,
communication
halted.
The digital audio controller has incorrect
software installed. The system should
be serviced.
GMA1 CONFIG –
GMA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
The audio panel configuration settings
do not match backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
GMA1 FAIL – GMA1
is inoperative.
The audio panel self-test has detected a
failure. The audio panel is unavailable.
The system should be serviced.
GMA1 MANIFEST –
GMA1 software
mismatch,
communication
halted.
The audio panel has incorrect software
installed. The system should be
serviced.
GMA1 SERVICE –
GMA1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
The audio panel self-test has detected a
problem in the unit. Certain audio
functions may still be available, and the
audio panel may still be usable. The
system should be serviced when
possible.
GMU1 MANIFEST –
GMU1 software
mismatch,
communication
halted.
The GMU 44 has incorrect software
installed. The system should be
serviced.
Index
Appendices
GMC CONFIG – GMC Error in the configuration of the GMC
707.
Config error. Config
service req’d
552
Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR2x with Cirrus Perspective+ by Garmin
190–02183–01 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
System Overview
Message Advisory
Comments
GMC MANIFEST –
GMC software
mismatch,
communication
halted.
The GMC 707 has incorrect software
installed. The system should be
serviced.
Engine Indication System
A key is stuck on the GMC 707 bezel.
Attempt to free the stuck key by
pressing it several times. The system
should be serviced if the problem
persists.
Flight Instruments
GMC KEYSTK – GCU
[key name] Key is
stuck.
Audio Panel and CNS
GPS NAV LOST – Loss Loss of GPS navigation due to
insufficient satellites.
of GPS navigation.
Insufficient satellites.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss Loss of GPS navigation due to position
error.
of GPS navigation.
Position error.
GSR1 FAIL – GSR1
has failed.
A failure h